IR Manual 05-20-10

S T AT E O F C AL I F O R N I A AR N O L D S C H W AR Z E N E G G E R , G O V E R N O R
S T AT E AN D C O N S UM E R S E R V I C E S AG E N C Y D E P AR T M E N T O F G E N E R AL S E R V I C E S
INTERPRETATION
OF
REGULATIONS
Division of the State Architect
The DSA IR Manual
Acceptable methods of achieving compliance with
applicable building codes and regulations
for projects under the jurisdiction of DSA.
Revised 05-20-10
DSA Interpretation of Regulations (IR) Manual

DSA Interpretation of Regulations Manual
Introduction
Welcome to the Division of the State Architect (DSA) Interpretation of Regulations (IR) Manual. These interpretations
have been developed over many years and were first assembled under one cover in 1984. Additions, deletions and
changes are made as necessary to update the interpretations to the latest edition of the California Code of
Regulations, Title 24, also referred to as the California Building Standards Code.
The IR Manual was created for use by DSA as a documentation of acceptable methods for achieving compliance with
applicable building codes and regulations. Its purpose is to promote more uniform statewide criteria in plan review
and monitoring of construction of public school, community college and essential services building projects. Other
methods proposed by design professionals to solve a particular issue may be considered by DSA and reviewed for
code and regulation compliance.
These interpretations are neither regulations nor law. The text and drawings in this manual are not appropriate for
verbatim inclusion in project specifications. The design professional in responsible charge is responsible for
specifying and detailing specific requirements for each project.
Please note that the IR Manual can be accessed on the Publications page of the DSA web site at:
www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov
Should you have any questions about the IR Manual, or wish to offer comments toward improving this publication,
please address your questions or comments to: DSAUSP@dgs.ca.gov
If you have questions regarding the application of an IR to a specific project, please direct those questions directly to
your DSA Regional Office. Four Regional Offices are located to serve California based on the county in which a
project is located. To find out which office serves your location, go to: http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/contact
The DSA Regional Offices can be contacted as follows:
Los Angeles Basin Regional Office

700 North Alameda St., Suite 5-500
Los Angeles, CA 90012
Tel. (213) 897-3995
Fax (213) 897-3159 or (213) 897-0726
San Diego Regional Office

10920 Via Frontera, Suite 300
San Diego, CA 92127
Tel. (858) 674-5400
Fax (858) 674-5471
Oakland Regional Office

1515 Clay Street, Suite 1201
Oakland, CA 94612
Tel. (510) 622-3101
Fax (510) 622-3140
Sacramento Regional Office

1102 Q Street, Suite 5200
Sacramento, CA 95811-6550
Tel. (916) 445-8730
Fax (916) 323-5589
Page ii
Organization of the IR Manual

This manual is organized so IRs can be located by reference to their location in the California Code of Regulations, Title 24,
also referred to as the California Building Standards Code.
Title 24 is issued in twelve volumes, called Parts. DSA IR numbers have a letter prefix to designate the correct Part in Title
24. All IRs carry this prefix letter, except those from Part 2, the California Building Code (CBC). Since Part 2 IRs are so
numerous, Part 2 IR numbers contain their Part 2 chapter number instead of a prefix letter. No prefix letters have been
assigned at this time for Parts 7, 8, 10, 11 and 12.
The following list should serve as an aid to understanding this organization:
Title 24
Code
Part#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Prefix
Title
letter
California Buildings Standards Administrative Code (CAC) .............. A
California Building Code (CBC) ................................................... -California Electrical Code (CEC)................................................... E
California Mechanical Code (CMC)................................................ M
California Plumbing Code (CPC)................................................... P
California Energy Code .............................................................. N
Elevator Operation Code ............................................................-Historical .................................................................................-Fire......................................................................................... F
Conservation............................................................................ -(reserved) ............................................................................... -Reference ................................................................................ --
IRs that have been revised since August of 2002 may include marginal markings. Solid vertical lines in the margins within
the body of the IR indicate a change from the previously published IR, except where a change was minor or editorial. An
arrow is provided in the margin to indicate that a deletion has been made from the previously published version.
As IRs are added, deleted or revised, the changes will be reflected in the on-line version of the IR -Manual. This publication
is available for download or printing (in whole or in part) as Adobe PDF format files on the Publications page of the DSA
web site at www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov.
When referencing IRs, the user can ensure he or she is using the latest version by checking the on-line IR Manual.
Change of California Building Code

On January 1, 2008, the 2007 CBC took effect for projects under the jurisdiction of DSA. This new edition of the California
Building Code is based on a new model code: the 2006 IBC. This means the new code is significantly different from the
2001 CBC. Most California amendments have moved to new locations in the new code. All projects submitted to DSA after
January 1, 2008 will be governed by the 2007 CBC.
As a result of these changes, some IRs may become unnecessary if their provisions are part of a new model code or have
been incorporated into new California amendments. Other IRs may be modified and still others may remain unaffected.
Changes have been made to the Table of Contents page to more easily indicate which IRs are applicable to which CBC
version and to facilitate navigation. Applicability of IRs to projects submitted under the 2001 CBC or the 2007 CBC is
indicated in the last 2 columns. N/A indicates that the IR is not applicable to projects submitted to DSA under that edition of
the California Building Code.
Page iii
D S A I R Ma n u a l - T a b l e o f C o n te n ts
#
Title
(previous/
supersedes)
Part 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE
A-1
Temporary Approval for School Use of
HCD Commercial Coaches
issued/
revised
(PL 97-10) 09-06-07 (r)
Updated 04-27-10
2001
CBC
2007
CBC
A-2
Certificate of Compliance without Receipt of All Documents
09-01-99
A-3
Construction Management Procedures for Public School Projects
11-03-08 (r)
A-4
Geological Hazard Report Requirements
06-17-09 (r)
A-5
Acceptance of Products, Materials, and Evaluation Reports
06-02-08 (r)
A-6
Change Order and Field Change Approval Process
11-16-09 (r)
A-7
Project Inspector Certification and Approval
09-18-07 (r)
A-8
Project Inspector and Assistant Inspector Duties and Performance 11-03-08 (r)
A-9
School Site Improvements for School Building Projects
04-27-10 (r)
A-10 Reconstruction and Alteration Projects

Exemption from DSA Approval
07-02-09 (r)
A-11 Incremental Submittals
03-11-08 (r)
A-12 Assistant Inspector Approval
02-27-09 (r)
A-13 Stop Work and Order to Comply
04-05-07
A-14 Walk-In Freezers and Cold Storage Boxes
08-28-07
03-17-10 (r)
11-01-07
A-17 Voidance of Applications and Project Re-Submittal
02-01-08
A-18 Use of Construction Documents Prepared by Other Professionals
04-27-10 (r)
A-19 Design Professionals Signature and Seal (Stamp)

on Construction Documents
04-07-08 (r)
A-20 New Projects Associated with Existing Uncertified Projects
08-06-09 (r)
A-21 Design, Installation and Maintenance of Fire Alarm (F/A) Systems 08-21-09 (r)
A-22 Small Projects Exempt from DSA Review
08-15-08
A-23 Construction Cost Reporting and DSA Fees
11-03-08
A-24 Construction Phase Duties of School District, Contractor,

and Designer
11-03-08
A-25 Design, Installation and Maintenance of Automatic Fire

Sprinkler Systems (AFSS)
05-26-09
A-15 Testing and Inspection of Remotely Fabricated

Structural Elements
A-16 Charter School Enforcement Jurisdiction
A-26 Occupancy Classifications and Occupant Load Factors
(CR A-1)
(PL 94-19)
Removed 8-25-09 pending review and revision
A-27 Cargo Containers Used as Storage
04-19-10 (r)
A-28 Fire Alarm System Changes in Existing Buildings
04-27-10
Part 2, Chapter 3 - USE OR OCCUPANCY

3-1
Storage Room Occupancy Separation
09-18-07 (r)
N/A
10-15-07
Part 2, Chapter 9 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

9-1
Automatic Fire Suppression System Coverage
in Concealed Interstitial Spaces
Page iv
#
Title
(previous/
supersedes)
issued/
revised
Updated 04-27-10
2001
CBC
2007
CBC
Part 2, Chapter 10 MEANS OF EGRESS

10-1 Illumination Required for Means of Egress
06-22-09
Part 2, Chapter 11B - ACCESS

11B-1 Visual Alarms in Classrooms
11-01-07 (r)
N/A
11B-2 Beveled Lip at Curb Ramps
11-01-07 (r)
N/A
11B-3 Detectable Warnings at Curb Ramps
11-01-07 (r)
N/A
11B-4 Detectable Warnings
11-01-07 (r)
11B-5 Effort to Operate Exterior Doors
Formally Deleted 04-01-10
11B-6 Mechanical Only Projects Exempt From Accessibility Review
02-04-08
11B-7 Requirements for Accessible Parking Spaces
08-01-09 (r)
N/A X
11B-8 Use of Predetermined Construction Tolerance

Guidelines for Accessibility
11-19-09
Part 2, Chapter 15 - ROOFING AND ROOF STRUCTURES

15-1 Attachment of Clay or Concrete S Roof Tile
10-15-07 (r)
15-2 Clay and Concrete Roof Tile Materials and Application
04-27-10 (r)
Part 2, Chapter 16 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN

16-1 Conditional Certification for Relocatable School Buildings
04-15-08 (r)
16-2
Computer or Office Access Floors
01-02-08 (r)
N/A
16-3
Earth Retaining Systems
09-18-07 (r)
16-4
Wind Load Design for One Story Relocatable School

Buildings (Less than 2000 Square Feet in Floor Area)
01-02-08 (r)
N/A
16-5
Design and Construction of Reviewing Stands, Grandstands,

and Bleachers
06-02-08 (r)
N/A
16-6
Composite Base for HVAC Units
10-15-07 (r)
16-7
Wind Load Determination - Alternate Method
12-18-07
N/A X
16-8
Solar Photovoltaic and Thermal Systems

Acceptance Requirements
04-03-09 (r)
N/A X
16-9
Pendant Mounted Light Fixtures
06-22-09
08-06-09
N/A X
(CR 16-1)
16-10 Design and Construction of Reviewing Stands, Grandstands,

and Bleachers: 2007 CBC
Part 2, Chapter 17 STRUCTURAL TESTS AND SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

(CR 17-1) 10-15-07 (r)
17-1 Sampling and Testing of Structural Materials
17-2 Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of Welds
(CR 17-2)
10-15-07 (r)
(CR 17-3)
04-07-08 (r)
N/A
17-4 Basics of Structural Tests and Special Inspections
11-03-08
N/A X
17-5 Structural Testing Laboratory Responsibilities
11-03-08
N/A X
17-6 Structural Special Inspector Duties and Responsibilities
11-03-08
N/A X
17-7 Soil and Foundation Testing
11-03-08
N/A X
17-3
Structural Welding Inspection
Page v
#
Title
(previous/
supersedes)
Part 2, Chapter 19 - CONCRETE

19-1 Post Installed Anchors in Concrete
issued/
revised
Updated 04-27-10
2001
CBC
03-06-06 (r)
2007
CBC
19-2
Requirements for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete (GFRC) Panels
09-01-99
19-3
Fly Ash and Natural Pozzolans Used in Concrete
06-10-08
09-18-07 (r)
12-17-09 (r)
09-01-99
11-01-07 (r)
01-02-08 (r)
11-01-07 (r)
07-15-08
N/A X
03-17-10 (r)
Part 2, Chapter 21 - MASONRY

21-1 Masonry Walls Non Structural
21-2
Concrete Masonry High Lift Grouting Method
21-3 Clay Brick Masonry High Lift Grouting Method

21-4 Concrete Masonry Units Standards
(CR 21-1)
Part 2, Chapter 22 - STEEL

22-1 Design Procedure for Steel Deck Diaphragms
with Structural Concrete Fill
22-2
Anchor Bolts Connecting Steel to Concrete
22-3
Open Web Steel Joists and Joist Girders
(CR 22-1)
Part 2, Chapter 23 - WOOD

23-1 Pre-fabricated Wood Construction Connectors
23-2
Wood Diaphragms
11-01-07 (r)
N/A
23-3
Concrete Curbs in Wood Frame Buildings
10-03-07 (r)
23-4
Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses
11-01-07 (r)
N/A
23-5
Bolts Used in Wood Construction
(CR 23-1)
10-15-07 (r)
23-6
Wood Structural Panels Marking for Plywood

and Oriented Strand Board (OSB)
(CR 23-2)
08-25-09 (r)
(CR 23-3)
11-01-07 (r)
N/A
12-17-09
08-25-09 (r)
08-15-08
N/A X
23-7 Minimum Fastener Penetration in Framing

Wood Diaphragms
23-8 Manufactured Wood-Chord-Metal-Web Trusses
23-9
Prefabricated Wood I-Joist
(AC 23-1)
23-10 Structural (Certified) Glued Lumber
23-11 Wood Structural Panels Oriented Strand Board (OSB)(AC 23-2) 12-17-09 (r)
N/A
Part 2, Chapter 24 - GLASS AND GLAZING

24-1 Glass Panel Railings
03-17-10 (r)
Part 2, Chapter 25 - GYPSUM BOARD AND PLASTER

25-1 Maximum Allowable Load for 10 Gage & 12 Gage Wires
09-18-07 (r)
X
N/A
25-2
Metal Suspension Systems for Lay-In Panel Ceilings
07-21-05 (r)
25-3
Drywall Ceiling Suspension Conventional Construction: One Layer 07-21-05 (r)
25-4 Self-Furring Lath

25-5 Metal Suspension Systems for Lay-In Panel Ceilings
(CR 25-1)
01-02-08 (r)
06-22-09
N/A X
Page vi
#
Title
(previous/
supersedes)
issued/
revised
Updated 04-27-10
2001
CBC
2007
CBC
Part 2, Chapter 30 ELEVATORS AND CONVEYING SYSTEMS

30-1 Title 24 Elevators: Building Materials and Systems
08-25-09
Part 3 - ELECTRICAL
E-1
Grounding of Relocatable Buildings
10-03-07 (r)
E-2
Ground Fault Circuit-Interrupter
10-03-07 (r)
E-3
Reliable Power Supply for Electrical Fire Pumps
04-27-10
06-02-08 (r)
07-01-09 (r)
N/A X
Part 5 - PLUMBING
P-1
Nonwater-Supplied Urinal Fixtures
Part 6 - ENERGY
N-1
Pre-Check (PC) Designs Energy Compliance Review
(AC M-1)
Page vii
California Department of General Services . Division of the State Architect . Interpretation of Regulations Document
TEMPORARY APPROVAL FOR SCHOOL

USE OF HCD COMMERCIAL COACHES
References:
California Building Code, Title 24, Pt.1, Sections 4-302B, 4-321
California Education Code, Sections 17280-17317, 81130-81149
California Government Code, Sections 4450-4461
Discipline: ALL
IR A-1
Issued 09-06-2007
EFFECTIVE: 10-01-07
Supersedes DSA Policy 97-10
This Interpretation of Regulation (IR) is intended for use by the Division of the State Architect (DSA) staff, and as a resource for
design professionals, to promote more uniform statewide criteria for plan review and construction inspection of projects within the
jurisdiction of DSA, which include State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges,
and state-owned or state-leased essential services buildings. This IR indicates an acceptable method for achieving compliance with
applicable codes and regulations, although other methods proposed by design professionals may be considered by DSA.
This IR is reviewed on a regular basis and is subject to revision at any time. Please check the DSA web site for currently effective
IRs. Only IRs listed in the document at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Pubs/default.htm (click on DSA Interpretations of Regulations
Manual) at the time of plan submittal to DSA are considered applicable.
Purpose:
This Interpretation of Regulation (IR) was originally issued in 1997 as DSA

Policy #97-10. The purpose of this IR is to provide a means for obtaining a temporary
approval for the installation of Department of Housing & Community Development (HCD)
commercial coaches as buildings on public school campuses. Temporary approval is valid
for a maximum period of two years from the date of installation. If an unanticipated school
use need for the building(s) exceeds two years, DSA shall be notified and may extend the
temporary approval for one additional year.
This IR provides for temporary approval to use HCD commercial coaches without DSA
review and approval of the structural system of the HCD building itself.
This revision eliminates the self certification features of the previous procedure.
Background: HCD commercial coaches may be used as a building construction alternative
when fully conforming relocatable buildings are not practical or available. In accordance
with Section 4-302(b), Part 1, Title 24, California Code of Regulations, this DSA IR provides
an expedited process for school districts to use for Division of the State Architect (DSA)
approval of small relocatable buildings.
The school district is highly encouraged to contact DSA immediately if there is intent to
install temporary buildings using this expedited process.
Emergency Use: In case of emergencies, including but not limited to damage to school
buildings as from earthquakes, fires and floods, or for health and safety issues such as mold
or other contamination, or from unanticipated increase in students wherein educational
facilities are immediately needed for displaced or unhoused pupils, the procedure detailed in
this IR permits placement of the HCD temporary use building in advance of securing DSA
temporary approval. This emergency use procedure may also be used for emergency
installation of DSA Pre-Checked relocatable buildings.
DSA must be notified immediately after the emergency of the districts intent to use this
emergency use IR.
Within 14 days following the installation of these emergency temporary use buildings, the
school district will notify DSA of the extent of the damage to their permanent school
DSA IR A-1 (iss 09-06-07)
EFFECTIVE 10-01-07
Temporary Approval for School

Use of HCD Commercial Coaches
Page 1 of 5
DSA IR A-1 (iss 09-06-07)

EFFECTIVE 10-01-07

Page 2 of 5
buildings and the number of temporary buildings installed to house displaced students.
Within 60 days following installation of these emergency temporary use buildings, the
design professional representing the school district shall provide DSA with a complete
submittal package as described in this procedure.
Use During Modernization Projects: School use of HCD temporary approved
buildings during modernization projects would require DSA review and approval and receipt
of a temporary approval per this procedure prior to placement. The emergency use
procedures of this IR may be used when, during the modernization project, there is an
unanticipated immediate need for a building for displaced or unhoused students.
Submittal: The school district shall provide the following to the Division of the State
Architect (DSA) Regional Office serving its area:
1.
DSA-1 Application for Temporary Approval of Plans and
Specifications: Fill in completely form DSA-1. To describe the project - on line 5 of form
DSA-1 write temporary approval for school use of __ HCD commercial coaches. For
example line 5 would read Construction of: temporary approval for school use of 2 HCD
commercial coaches if two buildings are being installed.
2.
Fee: The school district will submit fees with the initial application per Fee Schedule
II, Section 4-321, Part 1, Title 24 and per Section 5-104, Part 1, Title 24 for access
compliance review. For purposes of calculating the fee, the construction cost should be
based on the cost of any site work, improvements to the building and/or repairs and the
costs for moving the building.
3.
Letter: A letter from the school district (Superintendent) acknowledging that these
buildings are only for temporary use and are limited to use for 24 months from the date of
installation.
4.
Plans, Specifications and Calculations: shall be provided, including the
following:
Note: Plans, specifications and calculations for the HCD building are not required if
the HCD building is certified per Section 5 and a letter is provided, from the
architect/engineer in responsible charge, stating that the building has not had
alterations, or suffered deterioration, that affect access compliance, structural
safety or fire/life safety code regulated elements. For example; addition of
wall supported casework is an alteration to the building. If altered, complete
plans, specifications and calculations, as needed for the altered portion of the
building, shall be submitted for review and approval. Maintenance work does
not need to be included in the submittal. See the definition of maintenance
in Section 4-314, Part 1 of Title 24, California Code of Regulations.
4.1
Cover Sheet of Plans: Add a note stating that these buildings are only for
temporary use and are limited to use for 24 months from the date of installation.
4.2
Structural Safety (SS): Submitted plans, specifications and calculations shall
indicate the following:
4.2.1
Floor Area: The building is one story and has a floor area of no more than 2,160
square feet. The floor area shall be shown on the drawings. A drawing showing
the footprint of the building, except as noted in this IR, is generally adequate for
the HCD building.
DSA IR A-1 (iss 09-06-07)

EFFECTIVE 10-01-07

Page 3 of 5
4.2.2
Foundation System: Complete plans specifications and calculations for the

anchorage and bracing of the building in accordance with the current California
Building Code (CBC) through December 31, 2007; after this date foundation
designs shall be in accordance with the 2007 CBC. Foundation system plans
could receive DSA pre-check (PC) approval (see DSA Policy 07-01), and be
submitted over-the-counter (OTC), with DSA Regional Office coordination. Some
foundation systems may require soils reports and/or soil testing and anchorage
system testing.
For first time foundation system submittals, presubmittal
coordination with the local regional office is highly encouraged.
4.2.3
Non Structural Elements: Plans and specifications shall detail the anchorage of
all overhead non-structural elements, labeled as existing or new, as appropriate.
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
Access Compliance (AC): The construction must comply with all Access
Compliance regulations. No alternatives are available. A complete submittal shall
include but is not limited to the following;
For exterior construction: Complete plans and specifications of the disabled
access features of the site placement for the HCD building, including:
An accessible pedestrian route from the main entrance of the site to each
commercial coach and linking accessibility elements.
A code compliant ramp to the front door of the building;
At least one hi-lo drinking fountain centrally located.
At least one set of accessible separate sex toilet facilities centrally located and
available for use.
Van-accessible parking.
For interior construction: Code required accessibility features for the HCD
building itself shall be provided. For example:
Accessible lever door hardware and threshold provided at the entrance door
of each commercial coach with allowable closer pressure.
Toilets, or any other code regulated accessibility features inside the HCD
building, must be fully detailed on the plans.
Fire and Life Safety (FLS): Complete and accurate plans, specifications and
calculations shall be submitted as follows:
4.4.1
A site plan must be submitted with the stamp and signature of the local fire
authority indicating approval of the placement of the buildings, the fire apparatus
access road and access gates and water flow and hydrants.
4.4.2
Separation distances, and designated safe dispersal area or areas conform to Fire
and Life Safety code requirements. The path or paths of egress to the public way
or to the safe dispersal area(s) has/have been identified and shown on the site
plans, and all gates in the path(s) of egress have been identified and equipped
with panic hardware. Safe dispersal area(s) has/have been located, size and
occupant loads identified, and the dimensions from buildings clearly indicated
(minimum 50) on the site plan.
DSA IR A-1 (iss 09-06-07)

EFFECTIVE 10-01-07

Page 4 of 5
4.4.3
Provide an evacuation fire alarm system consisting, as a minimum, of an

approved manual pull-station and audible device(s) (with a minimum decibel
rating of 95 at 10 feet) powered by the buildings electrical system (backup
battery power) and building units more than twenty (20) feet apart are provided
with additional audible devices to ensure fire alarm can be heard within adjacent
buildings.
4.4.4
Units more than 20 feet from other buildings, including other temporary
buildings, with a stand alone fire alarm system must be provided with two-way
communication with the main administration offices via an intercom system,
permanently mounted telephone or walkie-talkie devises or other similar
systems. Buildings that are less than twenty (20) feet from existing permanent
buildings on the site shall be interconnected with the fire alarm system of the
campus.
4.4.5
Each HCD building must be equipped with at least one minimum rated 2A:10B: C
fire extinguisher, mounted at 48 inches to the handle above the finished floor,
near the main exist(s) and within 75 foot travel distance from any point within
the building. (Note: Travel distance shall not include paths through normally
locked doors.)
5.
DSA Approval of Plan and specifications: DSA will review the submitted
documents. The documents will be returned to the design professional noted on the
application to respond to comments. The design professional shall contact DSA to schedule
a backcheck appointment. Once all the comments have been addressed, DSA will initial and
date the DSA stamp on the drawings and provide a letter by e-mail approving the design of
the project for temporary two year use. In some circumstances the over-the-counter (OTC)
process may be used (See Section 4.3.2 of this policy).
6.
HCD Building Certification: Certification must be provided by a design
professional licensed to practice in California and countersigned by the school district that
each commercial coach to be utilized was built after Dec. 19, 1979. In lieu of the
proceeding sentence, the owner of the HCD building may provide the school district with a
letter that provides the HCD insignia numbers, serial numbers and dates of manufacture for
each building. A copy of the letter will be submitted to DSA. The certification or letter must
also indicate the design live load, snow load, and the wind load for the building.
7.
Inspection Requirements: A DSA certified inspector must perform the required
inspection and complete and sign a verified report (Form DSA-6) which indicates the serial
numbers, insignia numbers, roof load, floor load, and wind load as shown on the building
tag.
The inspector must make specific statements on the final verified report indicating that:
Proper installation of the approved foundation system has been done per
approved drawings.
Anchorage of the nonstructural elements has been done per the approved
drawings;
Installation and testing of the approved fire alarm system, for each building has
been done, Sound levels of fire alarm audible appliances have been measured at
15 dBA above ambient noise level.
DSA IR A-1 (iss 09-06-07)

EFFECTIVE 10-01-07
8.

Page 5 of 5
All Access Compliance provisions for the project on the final approved drawings
and specifications have been completed.
Any changes to the approved plans need DSA approval.
If any deterioration of or damage to the HCD building is discovered that affect

access compliance, structural safety, or fire/life safety code regulated elements,
DSA and the design professional shall be notified immediately and the design
professional will provide DSA with plans and calculations as needed for those
portions of the building for DSA review and approval. Maintenance and/or
repairs that are replacement to match original construction does not require a
submittal to DSA. For a definition of maintenance see Section 4-314, Part 1 of
Title 24, California Code of Regulations.
DSA Certification of Construction: Upon receipt and acceptance by DSA of

the inspectors final verified report and any other required documents, DSA will issue a
temporary certification of compliance in accordance with Section 4-339, Part 1, Title 24,
California Code of Regulations. Temporary buildings or structures shall be completely
removed upon the expiration of the time limit stated in the temporary certification letter.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
WITHOUT RECEIPT OF ALL DOCUMENTS
Reference: California Administrative Code, Section 4-339
Education Code, Section 17315/81147
IR A-2
Issued 9-1-99
Supercedes IR 5-1 (3/90)
This interpretation is intended for use by the plan review and field engineers of DSA to indicate an acceptable method for achieving
compliance with applicable codes and regulations. Its purpose is to promote more uniform statewide criteria for use in plan review
and supervision of construction of public schools, community colleges and essential services buildings. Other methods proposed by
design professionals to solve a particular problem may be considered by DSA and reviewed for code and regulation compliance.
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provide a procedure whereby a certificate of compliance

may be issued when it is deemed impossible to collect all the required documents. This
procedure may not be initiated until all efforts to obtain the required documents have failed.
1. Procedure. When all efforts to collect the required documents have failed, the school district
may request in writing to the Division of the State Architect (DSA) that the provisions of Sections
17315 and 81147 of the Education Code be implemented. The request should include an
explanation of how the district attempted to obtain the documents, and why the efforts were not
successful. DSA reserves the right to insist upon further efforts by the district before initiating
this procedure if, in the opinion of DSA, such efforts would be productive.
2. DSA Review. The architect or structural engineer will review the project with DSA. The
architect or structural engineer will propose a method for satisfying the requirements for
certification. The proposed method may consider, but is not limited to, the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exposure of portions of the construction for inspection of concealed spaces.

Re-inspection of portions of exposed work.
Performance testing of materials and/or major components or assemblies.
Reassignment of delegated responsibilities for field observation or inspection to other
individuals who have personal knowledge of the construction within their area of
responsibility.
3. Costs. The school district, at its own expense, will proceed with the examinations, tests,
and/or inspections deemed necessary. The additional reports and documents will be submitted
to DSA. All costs incurred by DSA in implementing this procedure will be billed to the district and
will include time spent by DSA personnel. Payment must be received from the school district
before DSA will issue a certificate of compliance for the project.
4. Correction of Deficiencies. Any deficiencies discovered or exposed during re-inspection or
re-testing will be corrected at the direction of the school districts architect and/or structural
engineer. The school district will be responsible for having this work done and completed in a
timely manner. The correction work will be subject to the requirements of Title 24.
5. Certification of Compliance. The DSA Field Engineer will review the results of the
examinations, tests and/or inspections. The Field Engineer will assemble all submitted
documents and determine their acceptability for conformance with statutes and regulations
governing public school construction. The Field Engineer will make a recommendation and the
entire package will then be reviewed by the Regional Manager. A letter of certification written by
the Regional Manager will indicate the basis for which it is issued.
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

FOR PUBLIC SCHOOL PROJECTS
IR A-3
Reference: Education Code Sections 17280-17311 and 81130-81147
Revised 11-03-08
Issued 9-1-99
This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is intended for use by the Division of the State Architect (DSA) staff, and as a resource for
IRs. Only IRs listed in the document at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Publications/default.htm (click on DSA Interpretation of
Regulations Manual) at the time of plan submittal to DSA are considered applicable.
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to ensure that the construction management

procedures comply with the requirements of the Education Code and the Division of the
State Architect (DSA) regulations. Reference IR A-24 for further interpretations on the
construction phase responsibilities of the school district, designers, and construction
contractors. Also, Reference IR A-8 for further interpretations of the project inspectors
responsibilities. Finally, reference IR A-23 for interpretations of construction cost reporting
and final DSA fee computations.
1.
GENERAL: The statutes and regulations contemplate the construction of a building
by a general contractor who would either perform the construction work in its entirety, or
employ one or more subcontractors under his/her responsible supervision to perform
specified portions of the work. The general contractor attests to the compliance of the work
of construction with the approved plans and specifications for the project as required by the
statute.
The construction manager should not interfere with the professional or statutory
responsibilities of the design professional for the project, nor restrict the activities of the
project inspector, special inspector, testing laboratory representatives and the Field
Engineers of DSA in the performance of their duties. The project inspector is an agent of the
owner working under the direction of the architect or structural engineer in general
responsible charge of the project for the purpose of achieving compliance with the approved
plans and specifications, and shall not work under the construction manager. The project
inspector works under the supervision of DSA to achieve compliance with the applicable
building codes and regulations.
2.
PROCEDURES: A project using a construction manager in lieu of a general

contractor to coordinate the work of the subcontractors requires special procedures.
2.1
A construction manager is employed by the owner to assist the owner in the

management of the construction of the project. The construction manager may
perform services in the areas of coordination of the work of the various contractors,
scheduling the work of the project, monitoring the progress of the work, providing
the owner with evaluations and recommendations concerning the quality of the work,
recommending the approval of progress payments for the contractors, or other
services.
2.2
Without the presence of a general contractor, each subcontractor will enter into an
individual contract directly with the owner to establish conditions for the performance
and payment for his/her work.
DSA (SS) IR A-3

(rev 11-03-08)
Construction Management Procedures

For Public School Projects
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR A-3

(rev 11-03-08)
Construction Management Procedures

For Public School Projects
Page 2 of 2
2.3
The construction manager will usually be employed to oversee the construction of a

complete building, or group of buildings or the completion of one phase of a longrange construction program. Each contractor may be employed to start and complete
his/her portion of the project at any time during the progress of the construction.
Therefore, the completion of that portion of the construction is not synonymous with
the completion of the entire project as is contemplated by the regulations. Each
independent contractor who has a contract with the owner is required to submit a
final verified report at the completion of his/her portion of the work.
2.4
The submittal of verified progress reports by the individual contractors is a departure

from normal procedures wherein the services of a general contractor are involved.
The construction manager, who is not a builder by training or licensing, by law,
cannot be held responsible for the compliance of the work of construction with the
duly approved plans and specifications for the project. The Attorney General's
Opinion No. CV 74-160, August 1974, is cited as follows:
"A construction manager does not bind himself to construct a building. See
Ops. Cal. Atty. Gen. 9322 (1934). The agreement to do these things is made
by the owner with other parties and in case of the failure of any of those
parties to perform as agreed, an action would lie against them and not
against the construction manager. The agreement of the construction
manager is to perform services only for the owner; that is, to supervise the
work of the contractors who are doing the actual construction."
Therefore, in accordance with DSA regulations, each independent contractor having
contracts with the owner, is required to submit verified reports.
3. CONTRACT INFORMATION: When a project involves more than one construction

contract the architect must submit a Contract Information Form (From DSA-102) for each
contract. Alternatively, all contracts may be listed on an attachment to a single Form DSA102. For each contract the attachment must specify:
4.
The contract (or bid package) number,
The name and address of the contractor,
The contract amount, and
The scope of the work included in the contract.
CONSTRUCTION COSTS. See IR A-23 for clarification of costs that are to be

reported as construction costs on Form DSA-102.
IR A-4
GEOLOGIC HAZARD
REPORT REQUIREMENTS
Reference: California Building Standards Administrative Code, Section 4-317(e)
2001 California Building Code (CBC) Sections 1629A.4 and 1804A.1
2007 CBC, Sections 1613A and 1802A
Education Code Section 17212.5
Revised 06-17-09
Revised 11-01-07
Revised 07-21-05
Revised 02-03-04
Issued 09-01-99
Discipline: Structural
jurisdiction of DSA which includes State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grade K-12, Community Colleges
IRs. Only IRs listed in the document at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Pubs/default.htm (click on DSA Interpretation of Regulations
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to describe the
requirements for the submission of a geologic hazard report to the Division of the State
Architect (DSA) for projects within the jurisdiction of DSA.
1.
GENERAL: A geologic hazard is any geologic condition that is a potential danger to
life or property. Geologic hazards include, but are not limited to, earthquake shaking,
surface rupture, liquefaction, and landslides.
The California Building Standards Administrative Code (CAC), Section 4-317(e) includes
requirements for the performance of soils investigation studies and geologic hazard studies
for all construction, including additions and alterations. Note that Geotechnical Reports
(or soils investigation reports) often include soils studies only and may not include complete
geologic hazard studies.
In addition, the California Building Code (CBC), Section 1802A, describes requirements for
engineering geologic reports, supplemental ground-response reports, and geotechnical
reports. Any of these reports may contain elements of the geologic hazard studies, and
these reports should all be submitted as geologic hazards reports.
2.
PROJECTS REQUIRING GEOLOGIC HAZARD REPORTS: Except as noted in
Section 3, a geologic hazard report shall be submitted to the California Geological Survey
(CGS) for projects located in any of the areas described in paragraph 2.1, through 2.7
below.
2.1
On any new site.
2.2
Within any state mandated geologic hazard zone which includes:
2.3
Earthquake Fault Zones (Public Resources Code (PRC) Div. 2, Ch. 7.5, Sec. 2621
et seq.)
Seismic Hazard Zones for Landslides and Liquefaction (PRC Div 2, Ch. 7.8, Sec.
2690 et. seq.)
Within an area identified as a geologic hazard in the Safety Element of the Local
General Plan.
DSA IR A-4
(rev 06-17-09)
Geologic Hazard
Report Requirements
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR A-4
(rev 06-17-09)
Geologic Hazard
Report Requirements
Page 2 of 3
2.4
Any project where the design ground motion loads are developed using earthquake
time history records, site response analysis, or site-specific ground motion hazard
analysis. This includes projects using any portion of ASCE 7, Chapter 16 or Chapter
21, or projects using ASCE 41, to develop seismic parameters.
2.5
Any project where deep foundations are proposed.
2.6
Any project on existing sites if not exempted by Sections 3.1, 3.2 or 3.3 below.
2.7
On any other existing site when required by DSA, where a potential geologic hazard
has been previously identified.
3.
PROJECTS NOT REQUIRING GEOLOGIC HAZARD REPORTS: Except as
noted in paragraph 2.7, a geologic hazard report will not be necessary for projects on
existing sites in any of the situations described below:
3.1
Regardless of location, if the project includes only:
non-structural alterations which do not cost more than 50% of the replacement
cost of the structure, and/or
alterations complying with Section 3403.2.3.2, where the alterations are not
initiated for the purpose of increasing the strength or stiffness of the seismicforce-resisting system.
3.2
If the project is one or more onestory, wood-frame and light-steel frame buildings
of Type II or V construction, 4,000 square feet or less in floor area, and not located
within Earthquake Fault or Seismic Hazard Zones as shown on the most recently
published maps from the CGS (see 2007 CBC, Section 1802A.6.1.1, Exception 1).
3.3
A new geologic hazard report is not required if the project is located on a site for
which adequate studies (refer to CGS Note 48 for guidance) have been already
made, and a reevaluation is made and the report is found to be currently
appropriate. This existing report for the site and the reevaluation must be submitted
to the CGS for approval for each project at the site.
4.
SCOPE OF GEOLOGIC HAZARD STUDIES: For guidance in conducting a study

and reporting evaluations and recommendations, refer to:
Special Publication 117, Guidelines for Evaluating and Mitigating Seismic

Hazards in California (2008)
Special Publication 42 Fault-Rupture Hazard Zones in California (1997 revised

edition, including supplements 1 and 2 added in 1999)
both published by the Department of Conservation and available to order from

http://www.consrv.ca.gov/CGS/information/publications/index.htm
CGS Note 48 will be used as a guide for review.
http://www.consrv.ca.gov/CGS/information/publications/cgs_notes/note_48/note_48.pdf
5.
REPORTING PROCEDURES: DSA prefers that a copy of a geologic hazard report
approved by the California Geological Survey (CGS) be submitted to DSA along with the
initial project application. If a project is submitted to DSA without a CGS approved geologic
hazard report DSA will start the plan review process pending receipt of the approved report.
DSA IR A-4
(rev 06-17-09)
Geologic Hazard
Report Requirements
Page 3 of 3
5.1
All geologic hazard reports must be approved by CGS before DSA will stamp-out the
plans and specifications for any project that requires a geologic hazards report.
5.2
School districts are responsible for submittal of reports to CGS and for the cost of
review by CGS.
5.3
CGS will begin to accept submittals directly from school districts by July 1, 2009.
DSA projects reviews and CGS reviews of geologic hazard reports for projects
submitted to DSA during July and August will proceed concurrently.
5.4
Requirements regarding contents of geologic hazard reports are addressed by CGS:
http://www.conservation.ca.gov/cgs/rghm/reviews/Pages/Default.aspx
ACCEPTANCE OF PRODUCTS, MATERIALS,

AND EVALUATION REPORTS
References: 2007 California Building Code (CBC), Section 1605A.4
California Building Administrative Code, Section 4-304
IR A-5
Revised 06-02-08
Revised 02-01-08
Revised in its entirety 07-21-05
Issued 9-1-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to describe the DSA
Structural Safetys (DSA-SS) policy on the acceptance of structural products and to clarify
DSA policy on the acceptability and use of product evaluation reports issued by other
agencies and organizations, for projects submitted to DSA under the 2007 California
Building Code (CBC).
Background: Structural products were accepted to use on DSA projects either through
compliance with DSA Product Acceptance (PA) Reports or ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES)
Reports. Many products that had obtained DSA Acceptance Reports under the alternate
materials and methods provision in the 2001 CBC are now prescribed or referenced in the
2007 CBC.
The 2007 CBC took effect on January 1, 2008. There are major changes from the previous
2001 CBC. This IR describes the DSA-SS acceptance of structural products and third-party
evaluation reports, effective under the 2007 CBC.
Scope: This IR is applicable to DSA acceptance of alternate structural products and

materials per Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-304 and structural products or materials that are
regulated by those provisions in Title 24, Part 2, CBC Chapters 14 through 25 adopted by
DSA-SS.
Product acceptance by the DSA Access Compliance (e.g. detectable warning products) and
DSA Fire Life Safety (e.g. fire rating of assemblies), and energy efficiency is beyond the
scope of this IR.
1.
Acceptance of Structural Products: Structural products and materials, as
described in the Scope section of this IR, may be accepted for use on DSA projects if they
meet the following requirements:
1.1
Products, including alternate materials, must have a valid evaluation listing/report

issued by a recognized evaluation agency. (See Section 3 below)
1.2
In addition to valid listings, products that are prescribed in the CBC and its adopted
standards, including DSA Interpretation of Regulations (IR), Circulars or Bulletins,
shall comply with those prescribed requirements.
1.3
DSA has the final determination on the acceptability of a product, and the valid
listing (see Section 5 below).
DSA (SS) IR A-5

(rev 06-02-08)
Acceptance of Product
Evaluation Reports
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR A-5

(rev 06-02-08)
Evaluation Reports
Page 2 of 3
2.
DSA PA Reports: Effective January 1, 2008, DSA PA reports will not be issued or
renewed to show conformance with the 2007 CBC.
2.1.
Existing PA Reports: Structural products used for projects submitted under the
2001 CBC may continue to use the applicable existing DSA PA reports for products
designed to conform to the 2001 CBC.
3.
VALID LISTINGS: DSA will accept evaluation reports that meet the eligibility
criteria listed below and are used in accordance with Section 4 of this IR. The intent is to
accept evaluation reports for products or materials that comply with the California Building
Code (CBC) and DSA requirements, demonstrate satisfactory performance, and are
manufactured under a quality assurance program.
For DSA to consider acceptance, evaluation reports issued by other agencies or
organizations must meet the following criteria:
3.1
The product or material must comply with the California Building Code (CBC).
Evaluation reports may not be acceptable if the product does not comply with
applicable DSA amendments (to the model code) contained in the CBC and/or
applicable DSA IR, Circulars or Bulletins.
3.2
The evaluation report must be current and valid. Reports that are more than three
years old are considered expired except as noted in Section 3.3 below.
3.3
The evaluation report must be issued by one of the following DSA recognized
agencies or organizations:
3.4
3.5
4.
International Code Council Evaluation Service. All reports that are currently
posted on the ICC ES website are considered current and valid, including reports
with prefix ESR and Legacy Reports.
Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD), OPA reports.
City of Los Angeles (COLA), Research Report (RR).
Miami-Dade County, Florida, Product Control Division, Notice of Acceptance

(NOA), for reports relating to wind resistance.
Other product certification bodies that are certified to be in compliance with ISO
Guide 65, "General Requirements for Bodies Operating Product Certification
Programs".
The evaluation report must be issued on the following basis:
Compliance with CBC adopted model code (e.g. 2006 IBC), DSA IR, Circulars,
Bulletins, referenced standards, published consensus acceptance criteria, and/or
industrial standards, e.g. ASTM specification.
Successful completion of all required tests.
The product manufacturer must maintain a required Quality Assurance and

Control program including periodic independent third party audits.
Products or materials listed in evaluation reports must have continued acceptable

performance.
USE OF REPORTS: Eligible evaluation reports, per Section 3 of this IR, may be
accepted for use on projects under DSA jurisdiction, if used in accordance with the
following:
DSA (SS) IR A-5

(rev 06-02-08)
4.1
Evaluation Reports
Page 3 of 3
The design, application and installation of the product shall comply with the requirements of the CBC, IR, Circulars, Bulletins, and the applicable evaluation reports. The
minimum required Seismic Design Category is D per the 2007 CBC, Section 1613A.5.6.
4.2
For products or materials used to resist lateral forces, use 80% of the listed values in
the evaluation reports unless the listed values were established on the basis of cyclic
test results.
4.3
The applicable evaluation report and all the documents required by the evaluation
report shall be submitted to DSA with the project application package.
4.4
For certain types of products, the evaluation report may not be the sole basis for
acceptance. DSA regional offices will review, on a project specific basis, those
products or materials that require the following:
Substantial project or site-specific design or engineering
Custom assembly or construction on site
The following are examples of these types of products:
Earth retaining systems such as segmental walls
Foundation systems such as rammed aggregate piers
Proprietary steel Special Moment Resisting Frame (SMRF) connections
5.
CHANGES IN DSA ACCEPTANCE: DSA may reject, discontinue or impose
conditions on the acceptance of a product or report in the following situations:
Documented structural safety problems such as failure, collapse, etc.,
When products are modified and become non-conforming with CBC, its adopted
standards, and / or evaluation reports,
Recalls by the manufacturer, evaluation agencies or other government agencies
Documented inconsistencies with evaluation reports, or
Method of justification of a products behavior not consistent with products

condition of use (e.g. seismic force resisting product not dynamically or cyclically
tested)
CHANGE ORDER AND FIELD CHANGE

APPROVAL PROCESSES
References:
California Administrative Code, Sections 4-305 and 4-338
Discipline: All
IR A-6
Revised 11-16-09
Revised 09-18-07
Issued 9-1-99
jurisdiction of DSA which includes State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grade K-12, community colleges
Purpose: The Code requires that all changes to the approved plans or specifications after
a contract for the construction has been awarded shall be made only by means of change
orders approved by the Division of the State Architect (DSA). This interpretation describes
a process for obtaining approval of changes by DSA.
Discussion: Section 4-338 (c) and (d), Part 1, Title 24, California Code of Regulations
(CCR), describes DSAs process for approval of change orders and preliminary change
orders. DSA has determined that to provide timely, efficient and consistent approval of
changes during construction, enforcing the strict letter of regulations may require flexibility.
An alternate field change document approval process is described in this IR. This process
focuses the designers and DSAs efforts on code compliance with the goal of timely review
and approval.
Definitions. The following definitions apply to terms used in this document:

Approved Documents Plans, specifications, addenda, deferred approvals, field change
documents, and change orders bearing a valid DSA approval stamp. A valid DSA approval
stamp includes the DSA application number for the project, the initials of the plan
reviewer(s) and the date of approval. Stamps without the initials of the plan reviewer(s)
and the date are NOT indicative of approval.
Change - Changes to the approved plans or specifications include revisions, deletions,
additions, and substitutions to the work prescribed on the approved plans or specifications.
Change Order A document defining changes to the DSA approved plans and/or
specifications issued after a construction contract has been awarded. Change orders may
also define changes to contractual requirements, including costs and time requirements that
are not regulated by the California Building Code.
Clarification - a statement from the architect or engineer in general responsible charge of
the project that clarifies (but does not change) the requirements of the DSA approved plans
and/or specifications.
Contract A document that defines the cost or value of some or all of the construction
work. When labor and/or materials are donated, or provided by the school district/owner,
the value of the materials and/or work must be estimated and reported to DSA on Form
DSA-102 as if there was an actual "contract" for that work. Also, contracts for construction
management must be reported on Form DSA-102.
Design Professional An individual listed on application Form DSA-1 Lines 22, 23, 24 or
25.
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)
Change Order and Field Change

Approval Process
Page 1 of 8
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

Approval Process
Page 2 of 8
Field Change Document (FCD) A document defining changes to the Code regulated
construction requirements of the DSA approved plans and/or specifications issued after a
construction contract has been awarded. FCDs may include Architects Supplemental
Instructions (ASI), Instruction Bulletins (IB), Field Orders (FO), Construction Change
Directives (CCD), etc.
Drawing an illustration on paper larger than 8 1/2 x 14.
Interpretation a statement from the architect or engineer in general responsible charge
of the project that interprets (but does not change) the requirements of the DSA approved
plans and/or specifications.
Sketch an illustration on 8 1/2 x 11 or 8 1/2 x 14 paper.
1.
Scope. After a contract for construction has been awarded, DSA approval of
changes to approved documents shall be obtained in accordance with the following:
1.1
Changes That Require DSA Approval Prior to Construction. DSA approval shall
be obtained for changes to all Code-regulated construction and inspection/testing
functions prior to commencement of the affected work. Changes can be approved
through the field change document (FCD) approval process described in Section 3.1
below or the change order process described in Section 3.2. DSA-approved FCD, or
change order, documents shall be in the possession of the contractor and the
inspector prior to construction of the work shown thereon.
Code-regulated refers to work that is regulated by the provisions of Title 24 of the
California Code of Regulations applicable to the construction, including those
amendments to the Code adopted by DSA-SS (Structural Safety), DSA-AC (Access
Compliance), and the SFM (State Fire Marshal). For projects submitted under the
2001 CBC, refer to 2001 CBC, Part 2, Sections 101.17.11 (DSA/AC), 101.17.12
(DSA/SS), and 101.17.14 (SFM). [For projects submitted under the 2007 CBC, refer
to 2007 CBC, Part 2 Section 101.3.2 items 4, 10 (DSA/AC), 11 (DSA/SS) and 14
(SFM)].
Note that although DSA does not currently conduct a specific review of certain
aspects of construction (including mechanical, electrical, etc) these aspects are
considered to be Code regulated and must be submitted as part of an FCD or
change order.
DSA approval is also required for all change orders.
Changes That Do Not Require DSA Approval. DSA approval is not required for
FCDs if the scope of the change does not pertain to Code-regulated construction
(refer to Section 1.1 above). For example:
1.2
Color of finishes, and
Administrative changes to the contract (e.g. contract time extension).
1.3
Interpretations and Clarifications.
Responses to request for information,
interpretations, clarifications, and other communications that do not change the
requirements of the DSA stamped approved documents may be issued by the architect or
engineer in general responsible charge. These documents do not require DSA approval.
2.
General Requirements. All change orders and field change documents must
conform to the following general requirements (see sample change order, which includes a
sample FCD, in the appendix):
2.1
The project name and the name of the facility must be indicated.
2.2
The DSA file and application numbers must be shown in the upper right hand corner.
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

Approval Process
Page 3 of 8
2.3
All FCDs and change orders shall be numbered in sequence in a logical and
consistent manner. The number must be shown in the upper left corner.
2.4
All changes must be described clearly and completely by the architect in general
responsible charge of the project and/or architects or engineers with delegated
responsibility for portions of the project as defined on Form DSA-1 Application for
Approval of Plans and Specifications.
2.5
Reference to the specific portions of the drawings and/or specifications that are being
changed must be included. All details and specification sections affected by the
change shall be coordinated. If a change to a detail is only applicable in some of the
locations for which the detail applies, those locations must be clearly described.
2.6
Changes to any testing or inspection requirements associated with the proposed

change must be clearly described.
2.7
The number of pages in the FCD or change order, including the number of pages in
each attachment, shall be clearly indicated. All sketches and drawings attached to
describe the changes shall be clearly labeled and referenced.
2.8
When approved drawings are revised and reissued as part of an FCD or change order
all of the following requirements must be met:
2.8.1
Images of all DSA approval stamps must be removed from the drawing (or
crossed out) prior to making any changes.
2.8.2
Each change shall be highlighted on the drawing and identified (see example
change order attached in appendix).
2.8.3
Each change shall be dated.
2.8.4
All drawings shall be stamped and signed by the design professional in general
responsible charge. When preparation of a drawing has been delegated to
another design professional that individual shall also stamp and sign the drawing.
2.9
FCDs and change orders should include only clear instructions on specific changes to
details on the DSA approved drawings or sections of the DSA approved
specifications. When circumstances make it necessary to submit additional back up
information the following requirements shall be met:
2.9.1
Calculations, product cut-sheets and other back-up information necessary to

demonstrate that the changes are Code compliant shall be submitted along with
(but not as part of) the FCD or change order. Calculations or other information
that is not necessary to define the work required shall not be placed on sketches
or drawings included in an FCD or change order.
2.9.2
Cost estimates, cost justifications, or other back-up documents that are not
necessary to define the changes to the DSA approved drawings or specifications
need not be submitted to DSA. If back-up information is submitted for any
reason, it must be separate from the FCD or change order.
2.9.3
For work involving alterations to existing buildings it is sometimes expedient to

submit drawings of the existing building as back-up information to clarify or
justify the acceptability of proposed changes. DSA will return existing building
drawings when the architect or engineer clearly requests the return of such
drawings in advance.
2.10
A reason shall be provided for each change.
2.11
The appropriate design professional (listed on application Form DSA-1) must sign the
FCD or change order (change orders must also be stamped).
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

Approval Process
Page 4 of 8
2.12
All engineers or architects for whom responsibility for portions of the work has been
delegated must sign the FCD or change order when their portion of the work may be
affected by the changes (change orders must also be stamped).
2.13
Space (2 in. x 3 in.) for a DSA approval stamp must be provided.
3.
Approval Process.
The design professional shall obtain DSA approval for
changes to the approved plans or specifications in accordance with Section 3.1 or 3.2. DSA
shall direct all communications (review comments and/or approved documents) to the
responsible design professional.
3.1
Field Change Document Approval (FCD) Process. This process can provide
responsive processing of documentation for changes that require DSA approval prior
to construction of the work shown thereon (refer to 1.1). FCDs do not require
documentation of school board approval.
Change documents can be transmitted via fax or other expedient means for review
by DSA (recommend faxable format of 8-1/2 x 11, with design professional's
phone/fax number noted). DSA can communicate review comments and approved
FCDs to the responsible design professional via fax or mail.
Information required to be provided with an FCD submittal is listed in Section 2
above.
3.2
Change Order (CO) Approval Process. DSA approved FCDs are not required to
be included in a formal change order. DSA stamped approved FCDs may be included
in formal change orders and are not subject to further technical review. If an
approved FCD is incorporated into a change order, the complete FCD bearing the
approval stamp of DSA shall be attached and referenced in the change order. All
documents included which do not bear a DSA approval stamp will be reviewed for
Code compliance.
The design professional shall submit two copies of each change order to DSA for
review and approval; one copy of the approved change order shall be retained by
DSA and one returned to the design professional. Back-up information and extra
copies of change orders will NOT be returned (exception: see 2.9.3 above).
General information required to be provided with the change order submittal is listed
in Section 2 above; additional information required for change orders includes:
Stamp (in addition to signature) of the architect or engineer in general responsible

charge and of each consultant delegated responsibility for work affected by the
change order.
Contract number when more than one contract is awarded for the project,
Cost information, and
Signature of the School District (owner).
4.
Design Professionals' Duties. The design professionals have specific Codeprescribed duties with regard to changes to the approved plans and/or specifications. (See
Sections 3-341, Part 1, Title 24, CCR.)
4.1
Documentation/Processing. The design professional shall prepare FCDs and

change orders as required by conditions on the project and shall make corrections as
required to comply with the regulations.
4.2
Signing/Stamping. The design professional shall stamp and sign all documents
(note that all drawings must be stamped and signed; all sketches must be
signed).
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

Approval Process
Page 5 of 8
4.3
Communications. The design professional shall provide the contractor, testing

laboratory, and the inspector with DSA stamped approved documents prior to
commencement of Code-regulated work shown thereon.
4.4
Final Verified Report.

The design professionals final verified report (Form
DSA-6A/E) shall indicate the total number of change orders issued.
4.5
Cost Summary. The design professional shall report the total final construction cost
of the project on Form DSA-6A/E. The construction cost shall include the final
amount of all construction contracts, construction management agreements, and
estimated value of all construction work performed by volunteers or school district
employees.
5.
Inspector's Duties. The project inspector has specific Code-prescribed duties

with regard to changes to the approved plans and/or specifications issued in the field. (See
Section 4-342. Part 1, Title 24, CCR.)
5.1
Record-keeping. The inspector shall maintain a file of approved FCDs and change
orders on the job at all times. The inspector is required to maintain complete
records of these documents. These documents shall be maintained in an organized
manner so that they are readily available.
5.2
Communications. If the inspector determines that unapproved documents appear

to require DSA approval (the document directs a change to Code-regulated
construction), the inspector shall notify the design professional and DSA
immediately. Any work performed that is not in accordance with DSA approved
documents must be reported as a deviation.
5.3
Final Verified Report. The inspector's Final Verified Report (form DSA-6) shall
indicate the total number of change orders received and implemented.
APPENDIX
Sample Change Order
Sample Field Change Document (FCD)
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

APPENDIX SAMPLE CHANGE ORDER
Change Order #: 2
Contract #: 1
Page 6 of 8
DSA File #: 99-123

Application #: 02-123456
Project:
Perfectly Designed Elementary School
123 School Drive
Smallville, CA 91020
Really Smart Architects

432 Professional Drive
Emerald City, CA 90210
Phone #: 916-445-8100
Fax #: 916-445-8100
To:
Excellent Contractors
654 Concrete Road
City of Industry, CA 92010
The contract is changed as follows:
1.
Revise specification section 12512 to eliminate all reference to horizontal

louver blinds.
Requested by: Owner
Reason: Window coverings will be provided in another contract
Credit $ <960.00>
2.
Refer to detail 17 on sheet A57. Add treated wood buck, 7/8" thick x width of
CMU wall, at each jamb of door 710. Secure to masonry with 1/4" diameter
expansion anchors with 1-1/4"embedment at 24" on center.
Requested by: Architect
Reason: To allow for proper installation of door.
Add
3.
$ 760.00
Refer to attached FCD #1 (1 page). Change maximum non-shrink grout

thickness from " to 1".
Requested by: Contractor
Reason: Elevator was installed on 1" of grout; owner will accept this deviation
for a credit.
Credit $ <100.00>
4.
Increase contract time by seven working days.

Requested by: Contractor
Reason: Rain delays
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

Total Cost of This Change Order:
Page 7 of 8
Credit $ <300.00>
The original Contract Sum was ..

Net change by previously authorized change orders .
The contract sum prior to this change order was
The contract sum will be (decreased) by this change order by
The new contract sum including this change order will be
$900,000.00
$
0.00
$900,000.00
$ <300.00>
$899,700.00
The contract time will be (increased) by .. (7) working days

The date of substantial completion as of the date of this change order is May 1, 2006
Architect:
Date:
Frank L. Wright, Architect
Really Smart Architects
(affix stamp here)
Date:
Structural Engineer:
Joe Excellent, President
Excellent Engineering, Inc.
(affix stamp here)
Date:
Owner:
Hal T. Computer, Director of Facilities
Smallville Unified School District
(space for DSA approval stamp)
DSA IR A-6
(rev 11-16-09)

FIELD CHANGE DOCUMENT #: 1
Page 8 of 8
DSA File #: 99-23

Application #: 02-123456
Revise Detail E on sheet S2 as shown below. Change maximum non-shrink grout thickness from to 1.
Division of the State Architect Approval Stamp
PROJECT INSPECTOR
CERTIFICATION AND APPROVAL
IR A-7
Reference: California Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1)

Sections 4-211, 4-333, & 4-341
California Education Code, Sections 17309, 17311 & 81141
Revised 09-18-07
Revised 06-01-06
Revised 09-10-02
Issued 9-1-99
Purpose: This IR describes the requirements for the certification and approval of school
construction project inspectors. All project inspectors must complete this two-step process
of certification and approval by DSA before they are permitted to work on school
construction projects.
Section 1 of this IR explains the requirements for DSA Certification of project inspectors.
Section 2 specifies the requirements for DSA Approval of the project inspector. Duties of
Inspectors are described in DSA IR A-8. The acceptance and approval of assistant inspectors
is described in DSA IR A-12.
Certification & Approval a Two-Step Process

Certification is the first step in becoming a school construction project inspector. This step
occurs only once. An inspector may become DSA-Certified by successfully completing the
DSA Project Inspector Examination. There are four classes of certification. These classes
correspond to a project class assigned to each project by DSA. See Section 1 below.
Certification is only one of several factors involved in the approval process.
Approval is the second step. This step occurs on every project. Approval of the project
inspector by the DSA Regional Office must be obtained before the inspector is permitted to
work on a project. DSA Approval is based on several factors, one of which is DSA
Certification in the proper class. See Section 2 below.
Section 1 CERTIFICATION of the INSPECTOR

As required by law, all project inspectors must be certified through the DSA Project
Inspector Examination Program.
Examinations are given in each of four project classes. The examinations measure the
applicants ability to read and comprehend construction plans and the California Building
Standards Code.
The DSA Project Inspector Examination Program does not qualify an applicant as a special
inspector.
The Class 1 Project and the Class 1 Examination

Projects that are designated as Class 1 must contain one or more Class 1 structures (as
defined below) but may also contain Class 2, Class 3, or Class 4 structures. The Class 1
DSA IR A-7 (rev 09-18-07)
Project Inspector
Certification and Approval
Page 1 of 6
DSA IR A-7 (rev 09-18-07)
Project Inspector
Page 2 of 6
examination is comprehensive; it tests the applicants knowledge of Class 1, Class 2, Class

3, and Class 4 structures and related code requirements.
Class 1 structures include:
y
Buildings or additions of 2,000 square feet or greater that utilize materials other than
wood-frame shear walls (masonry/concrete shear walls, steel brace frames, concrete, or
steel moment-resisting frames) as the primary lateral-load resistive system.
Substantial structural alterations to the gravity and/or lateral load-resisting system of

the building types described above.

Projects that are designated as Class 2 must contain one or more Class 2 structures (as
defined below) but may also contain Class 3 or Class 4 structures. The Class 2 examination
tests the applicants knowledge of Class 2, Class 3, and Class 4 structures and related code
requirements.
y
Buildings or additions over 2,000 square feet in floor area that utilize wood-frame shear
walls as the primary lateral load-resistive system. Projects may be single or multi-level,
with no upper limit in floor area. The project may contain incidental masonry, concrete
and/or structural steel construction (e.g. gravity load carrying columns and beams).
Buildings may have isolated exceptions to the lateral load resistive system, such as a
steel brace frame at one location in the structure.
Buildings or additions of less than 2,000 square feet in floor area that have primary
lateral load-resistive systems utilizing concrete, masonry or steel construction. A singlestory masonry building with a regular configuration a floor area of less than 7,000
square feet, and a wood-frame roof structure may be considered to be a Class 2
structure. For a definition of regular configuration see 2001 CBC, Section 1629A.5.2 for
projects regulated by the 2001 CBC (or see ASCE 7, Section 12.3.2 for projects
regulated by the 2007 CBC).
On-site construction of two-story modular buildings.
Alteration, modernization, and reconstruction projects that exceed the limitations of the
Class 3 scope of work, and do not include substantial alterations to structural systems of
concrete, steel or masonry.
Non-building structures that exceed the limitations of the Class 3 scope of work.

Projects that are designated as Class 3 must contain one or more Class 3 structures (small
buildings of wood-frame construction and/or modernization/alteration projects) but may
also contain Class 4 structures. The Class 3 examination tests the applicants knowledge of
both Class 3 and Class 4 structures and related code requirements.

y
Buildings or additions of wood frame, single-story construction, with conventional

(spread footing) concrete foundations and a total floor area less than 2,000 square feet.
Structures must utilize wood-frame shear walls as the primary lateral load-resistive
system. The project may include isolated steel or concrete elements (e.g. steel or
concrete columns).
DSA IR A-7 (rev 09-18-07)
Project Inspector
Page 3 of 6
Structural alteration projects limited to wood-frame, single story construction. When

deemed appropriate by DSA, alterations to (or addition of) isolated steel, masonry or
concrete elements may be included in Class 3 projects. Alteration projects involving
significant changes to the lateral load-resisting system may be classified as Class 2
projects.
Alteration and modernization projects that are primarily non-structural, such as

electrical, mechanical, plumbing, disabled access features, and site improvement work.
Non-building structures, such as signs and poles less than 35' in height, bleachers with a
maximum of 5 rows of seats, walls less than 10' in height above grade, and single-story
canopies less than 200 square feet in horizontal projected area.

Projects that are designated as Class 4 only include Class 4 structures (building placement
and related site work for premanufactured single-story relocatable buildings). The Class 4
examination tests the applicants knowledge of Class 4 structures and related code
requirements. Class 4 structures include only site installation of premanufactured, singlestory relocatable buildings.
Relocatable Building Inspector - In Plant (RBIP Inspectors)

Inspectors of factory-built relocatable buildings must be certified through either the DSA
RBIP examination or the Class 1 project inspector examination. The RBIP examination is
scheduled through the DSA Headquarters Office (contact DSA Headquarters at 916/5547019).
Expiration and Recertification

An inspectors certification expires four years from the date of issue. To renew the
certification, each inspector must complete the requirements of the DSA Inspector ReCertification Program every four years. The re-certification program consists of the DSA
Academy Project Inspector Overview Class and a re-certification class conducted by DSA.
Further information regarding the requirements of re-certification may be obtained on-line
at www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov (click on Inspector Program). For information on the Project
Inspector Overview Class, refer to http://www.dsaacademy.dgs.ca.gov/.
For Specific Examination Information
The DSA Project Inspector Examination Program is administered by the DSA Headquarters
office. For information regarding the examination schedule, locations, examination fees, or
to obtain an application, contact DSA Headquarters, by phone at 916/554-7019, or on-line
at www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov (click on Inspector Program).
Section 2 - APPROVAL of the PROJECT INSPECTOR

As required by law, all project inspectors must be DSA approved for work on each individual
project.
To apply for approval, the design professional in general responsible charge must submit an
Inspectors Qualification Record form (Form DSA-5) to the appropriate DSA Regional Office
at least ten days prior to the start of construction. The inspector must complete the form.
The form must be signed by the inspector, the school district representative, the design
professional in general responsible charge, and the structural engineer delegated
responsibility for observation of construction.
For Approval on Class 1 and Class 2 projects: Before submitting a Form DSA-5 for Class 1 or
Class 2 projects, the design professional in general responsible charge must consult the DSA
DSA IR A-7 (rev 09-18-07)
Project Inspector
Page 4 of 6
field engineer assigned to the project by the DSA Regional Office. The design professional
and the DSA field engineer must review the inspectors qualifications for the project with
regard to DSA approval criteria (see DSA Approval of the Project Inspector on page 6 of this
IR). The use of assistant inspectors must also be considered at this time (see DSA IR A-12).
Review of the Inspectors Qualifications by the School District and

Responsible Design Professionals
The following five items must be reviewed by the design professional in general responsible
charge, the structural engineer delegated responsibility for observation of construction, and
the school district prior to submitting the Form DSA-5 to the DSA Regional Office for
Inspector Approval:
1. The Class of the Inspectors Certification and the Project Class

The project inspector's DSA certificate number and class designation must be provided
on the Form DSA-5. The project classification must also be provided on the Form DSA-5.
The projects classification is determined by DSA during plan review, and is indicated on
the Approval of Plans notification (issued after approval of plans and specifications). The
project classification can also be checked on line at the DSA Tracker web site at
http://www.applications.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/eTrackerWeb/Input_App.asp
Project inspectors with Class 1 certification may apply for DSA Approval to inspect any
project. Project inspectors with Class 2 certification may apply for approval to inspect
projects that are designated as Class 2, 3, or 4. Project inspectors with Class 3
certification may apply for approval to inspect projects that are designated as Class 3 or
4. Project inspectors with Class 4 certification may only apply for approval on Class 4
projects.
2. Inspectors Work Experience

DSA approval is contingent upon the inspectors experience in inspection or construction
work on building project(s) of a type similar to that of the individual project for which
the inspector is applying. The inspector must describe qualifying experience from three
building construction projects on the Form DSA-5. Qualifying experience is defined by
the types of duties performed and the types of projects on which those duties were
performed.
Types of Duties: Prior job positions and responsibilities are the primary
considerations of qualifying experience. The inspectors prior responsibilities for either
inspection or construction should include experience with the trades that will be utilized
on the project for which the inspector is applying. Job positions that may provide
qualifying experience include:
y
Project Inspector (providing continuous inspection of an entire project). Prior

experience as a project inspector is required for Class 1 and large Class 2 projects.
DSA-approved Assistant Inspector.
General Contractors Field Superintendent.
Special Inspector or Construction Trade Foreman. These positions provide qualifying

experience only in the specific trade(s) in which the individual worked.
Other job positions are unlikely to provide sufficient experience for approval by DSA as a
project inspector.
Types of Projects: The types of projects that provide qualifying experience must be
relevant to the type of project for which the inspector is applying. Project aspects (both
DSA IR A-7 (rev 09-18-07)
Project Inspector
Page 5 of 6
for prior projects and the project for which the inspector is applying) that must be
considered include:
y
Materials of the Structural System (wood-frame, concrete, masonry, steel).
Complexity of the Structural System (configuration of buildings, number of floors,

unusual design features).
Size (square footage of new construction, total construction cost).
3. On-Site Presence of the Project Inspector

Two important aspects must be considered:
a. The inspector must be present on the job-site when there is construction activity.
The inspectors schedule must allocate sufficient time to perform all required duties
on the project for which the inspector is applying. The inspector must indicate on the
Form DSA-5 whether presence on the job-site will be full-time (40 hours per week or
more) or part-time (less than 40 hours per week). Large projects usually require a
full-time commitment from the inspector.
b. If the inspector has other work commitments concurrent with the project for which
the inspector is applying, each school project, each non-school project, and/or other
employment commitments must be described on the Form DSA-5. For each
concurrent project the following information must be provided:
y
Project name and location
DSA Application Number (if school project)
Scope of the project (new construction, building size, number of buildings,

construction cost)
Current status of project (% complete)
The responsible design professionals, the school district, and DSA must conclude that
the inspectors schedule will allow for an adequate presence on the job-site. In the event
that the school district, the responsible design professional(s), or DSA conclude that the
inspectors schedule as described on the Form DSA-5 will not allow for sufficient
presence on the job-site, the inspector will be afforded an opportunity to provide
additional information for re-evaluation.
The inspector must obtain prior written approval from the school district, the responsible
design professional(s), and DSA for any changes to the time commitment or workload
from that indicated on the approved Form DSA-5.
4. School District and Design Professionals Interview of the Inspector

DSA recommends that the school district and the responsible design professional(s)
conduct a personal interview with the inspector before signing the Form DSA-5. The
following points should be considered:
y
The inspectors knowledge of his/her role and responsibilities, job duties, and limits
of authority.
Characteristics of the inspector necessary to develop and maintain satisfactory

working relationships. Such characteristics include effective communication skills,
patience, determination, consistency and the ability to exercise sound judgment.
Inspectors physical ability and stamina to inspect all construction and to maintain a
responsive presence on the job.
DSA IR A-7 (rev 09-18-07)
5.
Project Inspector
Page 6 of 6
Inspectors knowledge of construction methods, building materials, material

testing/special inspection procedures and building codes applicable to the project.
The inspector must be able to read and readily comprehend the requirements of the
project plans and specifications.
DSA Approval of the Project Inspector
The project inspector must be DSA approved for each individual project. The DSA field
engineers approval of the proposed inspector is based on the following criteria:
y
The proper relationship between the class of the inspectors certification and the
projects classification, as described in item number 1 on page 4.
The inspectors work experience, as described in item number 2 on page 4.
The inspectors workload and time commitment to the project, as described in item
number 3 on page 5.
The utilization of assistant inspector(s) as described in DSA IR A-12.
Satisfactory DSA performance ratings on previous school construction projects (refer to

DSA IR A-8).
Verification that the inspector is employed by the school district.
If the inspector meets the requirements for approval, the DSA field engineer will sign the
Form DSA-5, which indicates DSA approval. A copy of the signed Form DSA-5 will be
promptly returned to the inspector and the design professional in general responsible
charge. If DSA is unable to grant approval, the Form DSA-5 will be promptly returned to the
design professional in general responsible charge, with documentation of the reason(s) why
approval was not granted. The proposed inspector may be reconsidered for approval if these
documented reasons are satisfactorily addressed on the resubmitted Form DSA-5.
6.
Withdrawal of Approval and/or Certification
The DSA field

duties during
responsibilities
the withdrawal
engineer observes the project inspectors performance of code-prescribed

the course of construction. IR A-8 describes the required duties and
of the project inspector. Failure to perform duties as required may result in
of approval and/or certification of the project inspector.
The DSA field engineer completes an Inspectors Performance Rating for the project
inspector (Form DSA-180-5.1) and for the assistant inspector (Form DSA-180-5.1a) at the
final site visit (refer to IR A-8, Section 2). The performance rating is used by DSA as a basis
for approval of the project inspector and the assistant inspector on future projects.
PROJECT INSPECTOR & ASSISTANT INSPECTOR

DUTIES AND PERFORMANCE
Reference: California Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1)
Sections 4-211, 4-333, 4-334, 4-336, 4-337, 4-342, & 4-343
California Education Code, Sections 17309 & 81141
IR A-8
Revised 11-03-08
Revised 10-03-07
Revised 05-16-07
Revised 06-01-06
Revised 01-25-02
Issued 09-01-99
purview of DSA. This IR indicates an acceptable method for achieving compliance with applicable codes and regulations, although
other methods proposed by design professionals may be considered by DSA.
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) provides clarification of the duties of

school construction project inspectors and assistant inspectors as required by the California
Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1). The IR also describes the
performance rating process utilized by DSA to evaluate inspectors for approval on future
school construction projects.
Section 1 - REQUIRED DUTIES of the PROJECT INSPECTOR

The project inspector must perform specific duties in accordance with Title 24, Part 1
(Sections 4-333, and 4-342). The project inspector acts under the direction of the design
professional in general responsible charge and is subject to supervision by DSA. The project
inspector does not have the authority under Title 24 to direct the contractor in the execution
of the work, nor to stop the work of construction.
The project inspectors responsibilities include:
A thorough understanding of all requirements of the construction documents.
Inspection of all portions of the construction for compliance with the requirements of
the DSA approved construction documents.
Identification, documentation, and reporting of deviations in the construction from

the requirements of the DSA approved construction documents.
Submittal of verified reports (Form DSA-6). At the conclusion of the project any
outstanding deviations must be noted on the Form DSA-6.
For projects approved under the 2007 CBC the project inspector is responsible for
providing special inspection of aspects of the construction allocated to the project
inspector on the Tests and Inspections List (Form DSA-103). The project inspector
is also responsible for providing special inspection of aspects of construction
requiring special inspection by Title 24, Part 2, Sections 1707A.3 through 1707A.9.
Any changes to the special/project inspector responsibilities shown on the DSA
approved plans and specifications (including Form DSA-103) must be approved by
change order, or field change document (see IR A-6), prior to proceeding with the
related construction work.
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)
Project Inspector & Assistant Inspector

Duties and Performance
Page 1 of 7
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)

Page 2 of 7
The project inspector is prohibited from performing functions associated with actual
construction work such as:
Performing construction work,

Ordering or purchasing materials,
Directing the work of the contractor, subcontractor(s), volunteer labor or any entity
performing construction work,
Coordinating or scheduling the construction work,

Performing quality control of construction; quality control is the responsibility of
the contractor, quality assurance is the responsibility of the inspector.
The project inspector may perform duties for the school district that are not code-prescribed
as long as such duties do not interfere with inspection duties. It is the inspectors
responsibility to report all ancillary duties to DSA, the project architect and the structural
engineer. The inspector shall also report unforeseen time demands that are impacting, or
will impact, his or her ability to perform his code-prescribed duties.
DSA may approve a project inspector when in the opinion of DSA these ancillary duties
should not create a conflict of interest. DSA may withhold approval of a project inspector or
withdraw approval at any time if the appearance of a conflict arises.
Seven Categories of Code-Prescribed Duties of the Project Inspector

The code-prescribed duties of the project inspector have been organized into the following
seven categories. The inspectors performance in each of these categories serves as the
basis for the DSA field engineers rating of the inspector (see Section 2 on page 5 of this
IR).
1. Inspectors Job File

The inspector must maintain approved (DSA-stamped and initialed) construction documents
at the job-site in an organized, readily accessible manner. The inspector must also maintain
any other construction documents or directives received from the responsible design
professional(s).
The following list of documents and codes must be maintained at the job-site, and available
for review by DSA representatives, during construction:
Building Codes: Title 24, Part 1 (Administrative Code); Title 24, Part 2, Volumes 1
and 2 (Building Code); Title 24, Part 3 (Electrical Code); Title 24, Part 4 (Mechanical
Code); Title 24, Part 5 (Plumbing Code) and Title 24, Part 6 (Energy Code). The code
edition must be as referenced on the DSA approved plans and specifications. For
projects approved under the 2001 CBC, Volume 3 of Title 24, Part 2 is also required.
Applicable referenced standards: ASCE 7-05, ACI 318-05, ACI 530-05 & 530.1-05,
AISC 360 & 341, ANSI/NF&PA NDS-2005, various ASTM standards, etc.
DSA approved plans and specifications.
DSA approved addenda.
DSA approved deferred approval documents.
DSA approved Field Change Documents.
DSA approved change orders.
A copy of shop drawings, samples, and approved submittals.
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)

Page 3 of 7
Contractors Statement of Responsibility from each contractor per Section 1706A of

Title 24, Part 2 (not required for projects under the 2001 CBC).
Labels, materials certificates, mill certificates, concrete batch tickets, etc. for
construction materials or assemblies as required by the DSA approved documents.
Test and Inspection List (Form DSA-103). Form DSA-103 may be incorporated into
drawings or specifications.
Test and special inspection reports.
Deviation reports and deviation logs.
Daily inspection reports.
Semi-monthly reports.
Any other documents or directives received from the responsible design

professional(s).
2. Inspectors Comprehension of the Construction Documents

The inspector must study and fully comprehend the requirements of the construction
documents in order to provide competent inspection of the work. It is necessary for the
inspector to possess a thorough understanding of the requirements of the plans and
specifications before that portion of the work is performed.
The inspector must:
Consult the responsible design professional(s) to resolve any uncertainties in the

inspectors comprehension of the plans and specifications prior to construction of that
portion of the work.
Review requirements for each phase of the construction with the contractor prior to
commencing that phase of the work. Good communications will prevent construction
errors from occurring.
Readily identify non-compliant work as the construction progresses, to facilitate

prompt corrective action.
Verify code-compliant implementation of the materials testing and special inspection

program.
Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-343, specifies that the contractor must direct inquiries regarding
document interpretation (including Requests for Information or RFIs) to the design
professional in general responsible charge, through the inspector. This code provision
requires the contractor to involve the inspector in the interpretation and clarification of the
construction documents.
3. Continuous Inspection of the Work

Continuous inspection means complete and timely inspection of every part of the work. Title
24, Part 1 requires prompt inspection of the work as it progresses. Title 24, Part 1 also
requires that prompt verbal notification be made to the contractor of any deviation, so that
the deviation can be immediately corrected.
Work such as concrete work or masonry work which can be inspected only as it is placed
requires the constant presence of the inspector. Certain types of work which can be
completely inspected after the work is installed may be carried out while the inspector is not
present, provided that the inspector promptly identifies and reports all deviations.
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)

Page 4 of 7
The project inspector must have personal knowledge of the construction, obtained through
the project inspectors own physical inspection of the work in all stages of its progress.
When special inspectors or approved assistant inspectors are used on a project, the project
inspectors personal knowledge may include that knowledge obtained from these individuals.
The project inspector must keep a log of time spent on site.
4. Records of Inspections
The inspector must maintain detailed records of all inspections. The inspectors records
must provide a comprehensive and timely documentation of the inspected work, promptly
identifying all compliant and non-compliant construction. These records must be readily
accessible and maintained in an organized manner. The following is a list of the inspection
records that must be maintained at the job-site:
A systematic record of all materials and assemblies delivered to the project site.
A systematic record of the inspection of all work required by the construction

documents. Marking properly completed work on a set of construction documents is
a recommended method to verify that the requirements of the plans and
specifications have been met. The inspector must also record the resolution of
reported deviations.
Construction Procedure Records per Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-342(6), including but
not limited to concrete placement operations, welding operations, pile penetration
blow counts, and other records specified on the approved construction documents.
Log of project inspectors and assistant inspectors time spent on-site. DSA may
require verification from the inspector of time spent at the job-site during all phases
of the work.
5. Communications Required of the Inspector

The inspector must, during the course of construction, provide specific code-prescribed
notices and reports to the responsible design professional(s), DSA, the school district, and
the contractor. The inspector must maintain records of all communications. These records
must be readily accessible and maintained in an organized manner. The date and recipients
of all communications must be clearly indicated.
The inspector is required to provide the following communications during the course of a
construction project:
Notifications to DSA as required by Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-342 (b) 5; including
start of work, minimum 48 hours prior to completion of foundation trenches,
minimum 48 hours prior to first concrete placement, and when work is suspended for
more than two weeks. Notifications shall be made by telephone or e-mail.
Inspectors Semi-Monthly Reports (see Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-337). The
project inspector must make semi-monthly reports (on the 1st and 15th of every
month) on the progress of construction. The semi-monthly report must be submitted
to the design professional in general responsible charge and the structural engineer;
a copy must be sent to DSA and the school district.
A semi-monthly report must be prepared in accordance with DSAs Guidelines for
Format of Project Inspector's Semi-Monthly Report for School Construction Projects .
The guideline is available on-line at www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov (click on Publications and
scroll down to Inspector Program Publications), or at DSA regional offices.
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)

Page 5 of 7
Note for single-story relocatable building projects: At the discretion of the

responsible design professional(s), the inspector may submit the DSA standard
form DSA-121:Checklist for Site Inspection of Relocatable Buildings in lieu of
semi-monthly reports. The checklist is to be submitted at the completion of the
work. The checklist is available on-line at www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov (click on Forms), or
at DSA regional offices.
Deviation Notices (see Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-342 (b) 7). When the inspector
identifies deviations from the DSA-approved plans and specifications, the inspector
must verbally notify the contractor. If the deviation is not immediately corrected, the
inspector is required to promptly issue a written notice of deviation to the contractor,
with a copy sent to the responsible design professional(s), and DSA. The status and
resolution of all deviations must be documented on semi-monthly reports.
Record of Communications to the Responsible Design Professional(s) All

uncertainties in the inspectors or contractors comprehension of the documents must
be reported in writing to the responsible design professional(s).
Verified Reports (Form DSA-6) (refer to Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-336). The
project inspector shall submit verified reports directly to DSA (with copies to the
responsible design professional(s) and the school district) within seven days of any
of the following:
1)
Work on the project is suspended for a period of more than one month.
2)
The services of the inspector are terminated for any reason.
3)
DSA requests a verified report.
4)
At the time of occupancy of any building involved in a project (including

alterations work).
The entire project is complete.
5)
The verified reports shall clearly describe all non-compliant work including work done
in accordance with change orders that are pending DSA approval.
6. Inspectors Monitoring of the Materials Testing & Special Inspection

Program
The inspector is responsible, under the direction of the design professional in general
responsible charge, for monitoring the work of any special inspectors and materials testing
laboratories to ensure that all materials testing and special inspections required for the
project are satisfactorily completed in accordance with the DSA approved documents.
The project inspector must monitor the following aspects of the Materials Testing & Special
Inspection Program:
When DSA approval for special inspectors is required, the project inspector must
identify and report any special inspectors on the job-site that are not DSA-approved.
Verify that the materials testing laboratory is included on the List of DSA Accepted
Testing Laboratories on the DSA website and that all sampling and testing is
performed by the testing laboratory.
The project inspector must verify that the materials testing lab and special inspectors
have received sufficient advance notification to perform the required material
sampling or special inspection.
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)

Page 6 of 7
The project inspector is responsible for verifying that all required material sampling
and special inspections have been performed. The project inspector is also
responsible to observe any special inspectors on-site presence and performance of
duties, the special inspectors documentation of complying and non-complying work,
and issuance of deviation notices.
The project inspector is responsible for reviewing all materials test and special
inspection reports. The project inspector must report the status and resolution of
deviations reported by any materials testing lab or special inspector on semi-monthly
reports.
7. Monitoring of Assistant Inspector(s)

The project inspector must provide technical guidance to assistant inspector(s) and must
verify the assistant inspectors comprehension of the construction documents. The project
inspector must also monitor the assistant inspectors performance, verifying that the
assistant inspector is properly checking the construction, recording inspections, and
performing other assigned duties.
The project inspector must ensure that any assistant inspector is performing the duties
indicated on the assistant inspectors approved Form DSA-5A. See IR A-12.
The project inspector must provide continuous on site supervision of all assistant inspectors.
Section 2 - DSAs RATING of the INSPECTORS PERFORMANCE

The DSA field engineer makes site visits at various stages of the project construction,
observing the project inspectors and assistant inspector(s) execution of code-prescribed
duties. At the final site visit, the DSA field engineer may complete a Project Inspectors
Performance Rating for the project inspector and an Assistant Inspectors Performance
Rating for any assistant inspector(s). Alternatively, the DSA field engineer may complete
the rating form during the closeout process at DSA. These forms identify seven categories
(six for assistant inspectors) of code-prescribed duties as outlined in Section 1 of this IR.
The performance rating is used by DSA as a basis for approval of the project inspector or
assistant inspector on future projects. The scope of the performance rating is limited to the
inspectors execution of code-prescribed duties on a specific project. An overall rating of
unsatisfactory will adversely affect the inspectors qualification for approval by DSA on
future projects.
The DSA Field Engineers Role During Construction - The Field Trip Note
The responsibilities of the DSA field engineer include observing the project inspectors
execution of code-required duties. During each visit to the job-site, the DSA field engineer
will document on the DSA Field Trip Note improper or incomplete execution of the
inspectors code-prescribed duties. The field engineer will also provide an acceptable process
to correct inadequate execution of the inspectors code-prescribed duties. Copies of the Field
Trip Note will be distributed to the inspector, the design professional in general responsible
charge, and the school district.
DSAs Rating of the Inspector -The Project Inspectors Performance Rating

Form - The DSA field engineer will complete the Project Inspectors Performance Rating
(Form DSA-180-5.1) for project inspectors, or the Assistant Inspectors Performance Rating
(Form DSA-180-5.1a) for assistant inspectors. These forms are available on-line at
www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov (click on Forms) or at DSA regional offices.
DSA IR A-8
(rev 11-03-08)

Page 7 of 7
RATING THE INSPECTOR.S PERFORMANCE OF CODE-PRESCRIBED DUTIES
The DSA field engineer must make a determination of satisfactory, needs improvement, or
unsatisfactory performance in each of the seven categories (six for assistant inspectors)
indicated on the rating form.
The rating in each category is based on the observations documented by the DSA field engineer
on the Field Trip Note(s) and/or on a review of the inspectors reports. Documented problems
with the inspectors performance that were satisfactorily addressed during the course of
construction can result in a rating of satisfactory.
Any documented improper or incomplete execution of code-prescribed duties that have not
been satisfactorily addressed will result in an unsatisfactory or needs improvement rating.
OVERALL RATING OF THE INSPECTOR
The DSA field engineer will also give the inspector an overall rating of satisfactory, needs improvement, or unsatisfactory performance on the rating form. The overall rating is based on
the ratings the inspector received in the seven categories (six for assistant inspectors). An
overall rating of satisfactory results from satisfactory ratings in each of the categories. An
unsatisfactory rating in one or more of the categories may be justification for an overall rating of
unsatisfactory.
The inspector can, upon request and by scheduled appointment, review the ratings with the
DSA supervisor or regional manager at the DSA regional office. Unsatisfactory overall ratings
require the review and signature of the DSA supervising engineer and DSA regional manager
prior to placement in the inspectors personal file.
DSAs Inspector File
The Inspectors Performance Rating is confidential and will be maintained in the inspectors personal and confidential file at the DSA regional office that provided construction oversight for the
project. Access to these files will only be permitted to DSA personnel and the individual
inspector.
An inspector may review this personal file by scheduling an appointment with the appropriate
DSA supervising engineer or regional manager. The inspector must present a photo ID. The
inspector may not make copies of the file contents, nor at any time will the file be allowed out of
the DSA regional office, unless subpoenaed by a court.
SCHOOL SITE IMPROVEMENTS

FOR SCHOOL BUILDING PROJECTS
References:
Education Code, Section 17283
IR A-9
Revised 04-27-10
Revised 04-21-05
Issued 9-1-99
Supersedes IR M-6 (9/99)
Purpose: This IR outlines the Division of the State Architect (DSA) policy regarding site
improvements for school building projects.
1.
Site Work Not Involving Structures or Their Utilities: For school site
improvement projects that involve only grading, landscaping, fill placement, paving, storm
drains or other work that does not support structures or involve their utilities, the school
district is not required to file an application for DSA Structural Safety approval, although it
has the option to do so if it chooses. DSA Access Compliance approval is required, however,
for all school projects, whether they are site improvements, new construction, or alterations
to existing construction.
In any case, in addition to the Education Code, the district is subject to compliance with
local, city or county ordinances as required by law, (e.g. local ordinances governing
drainage, waste, fire protection, the Health and Safety Code, the Government Code, etc.). It
is the school district's responsibility to identify and comply with all such applicable statutes
and regulations.
2.
Existing Site Work with Engineered Fill Involving New School
Buildings and Their Utilities:
For projects involving school buildings and their utilities erected on an existing site with
previously placed engineered fill, the architect shall show "existing fill" on his plans.
Adequate data concerning the existing fill is required. The site soil investigation, compacted
fill requirements, inspection and testing records of the original fill placement which has been
verified by a geotechnical engineer's affidavit shall be provided. If this documentation is not
available or adequate, an investigation of the existing fill shall be made by a geotechnical
engineer who shall prepare a report making recommendations regarding fill adequacy and
allowable soil bearing pressures for the footings of the proposed buildings. This report shall
be submitted to DSA with the plans and specifications for the project.
3.
Site Work Involving New School Buildings or Site Utilities: All site
improvement plans and specifications involving engineered fill designed to support
structures or involving retaining walls, underground structures, utility systems or other
items as required shall be submitted to DSA for approval prior to start of construction.
Options for submitting school building project plans and specifications for site improvement
are as follows:
DSA IR A-9
(rev 04-27-10)
School Site Improvements

For School Building Projects
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR A-9
(rev 04-27-10)
School Site Improvements

For School Building Projects
Page 2 of 2
Option A - Single Application. The entire project may be submitted for approval at
one time under a single application, or site improvements may be listed as phase I of
a multi-phase project submitted under a single application. The plan review fee for
either of the above shall be based on the estimated cost of construction of the entire
project. If the Site improvements are submitted as phase I of the project the
remainder of the project may be submitted under one or more subsequent phases
under the same application.
Option B - Multiple Applications. Plans and specifications for site improvement work
may be submitted under one application, and the school buildings for this site may
be submitted under another application. The estimated cost and plan check fees for
each application shall be based on the scope of work designated to each application.
This option is intended for special circumstances and requires pre-approval by DSA.
4.
Engineered Fill: In all cases the geotechnical engineer making the investigation of
the engineered fill and certifying to its adequacy for supporting school buildings is to be
employed by the school district. The geotechnical engineer is prohibited from having an
employment relationship with the contractor or developer for the existing site work during
the placement of the fill material.
RECONSTRUCTION AND ALTERATION

PROJECTS EXEMPTION FROM DSA APPROVAL
References:
California Building Standards Administrative Code, Sections 4-306, 4-308,
4-309, 4-315, 4-336 & 5-102
California Education Code, Sections 17295 and 81133
Discipline: Structural, Fire and Life Safety, and Access Compliance
IR A-10
Revised 07-02-09
Revised 12-08-08
Revised 03-17-08
Revised 05-29-07
Issued 11-16-09
Purpose: The purpose of this interpretation is to clarify when plans and specifications for
reconstruction or alteration projects governed by the California Education Code, Sections

17280-17317, 17365-17374, and 81130-81149, collectively known as the Field Act, are
required to be submitted to the Division of the State Architect (DSA) for review and
approval. Construction projects governed by the Field Act are those projects which occur at
public elementary schools, public secondary schools, and public community colleges.
Resolution: Per California Education Code, Sections 17295 and 81133, all reconstruction
and alteration projects governed by the Field Act shall be submitted to the DSA.
1.
EXCEPTIONS:
1.1
DSA review and approval is not required for alteration projects to school buildings
governed by the Field Act with an estimated construction cost of $35,623.28 for
2009, or less.
1.2
DSA review and approval is not required for reconstruction or alteration projects to
school buildings governed by the Field Act with an estimated construction cost of
greater than $35,623.28 but not in excess of $142,493.12 for 2009, when all of the
following conditions are met:
1.2.1
A structural engineer, licensed to practice in California, shall examine the project

and prepare a written statement certifying that the project does not contain any
work of a structural nature (a non-structural alteration). This statement shall
bear the signature and stamp or seal of the structural engineer and shall be filed
with the appropriate DSA regional office.
1.2.2
The design professional in responsible charge of the project shall prepare a

statement certifying that the plans and specifications (1) contain no work that is
regulated by the accessibility standards of Title 24, (2) contain no work that
triggers accessibility upgrades to existing buildings or facilities, and (3) meet any
applicable fire and life safety standards. This statement shall bear the signature
and stamp or seal of the design professional and shall be filed with the
appropriate DSA regional office.
DSA IR A-10
(rev 07-02-09)
Reconstruction and Alteration

Projects Exemption from DSA Approval
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR A-10
(rev 07-02-09)
1.2.3
Reconstruction and Alteration

Projects Exemption from DSA Approval
Page 2 of 2
Within 10 days of the project completion, a DSA-certified project inspector shall

sign and submit a verified report to DSA, indicating the completed project is in
conformance with the plans and specifications. Form DSA-999 "Inspection
Verified Report for Projects Exempt from DSA Approval" is available from the DSA
web site at http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/forms/DSA-999_11-16-05.pdf
2.
This interpretation does not preclude a design professional from choosing to submit
plans and specifications, with the appropriate fee to DSA for review, even when the project
is exempted from DSA plan review requirements as outlined herein.
3.
Projects not requiring DSA approval shall comply with all currently effective design,
construction, and inspection provisions of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
When authorizing construction of projects described in this interpretation, the
school district assumes responsibility to assure compliance with all code
provisions.
4.
For this interpretation only, design professional in responsible charge or design

professional shall be the architect, structural engineer, or professional engineer (e.g.
mechanical engineer for mechanical-only projects, electrical engineer for electrical-only
projects), licensed to practice in California, who is responsible for the completion of the
project design work.
5.
Construction cost thresholds cited in this interpretation are based on January, 1999
figures of $25,000 and $100,000 and are adjusted annually per the California Education
Code. Annual adjustments are calculated using the first January issue of Engineering NewsRecords U.S. 20 City Construction Cost Index.
6.
Construction projects shall not be subdivided for the purposes of obtaining

exemption from DSA review and approval.
California Department of General Services Division of the State Architect Interpretation of Regulations Document
INCREMENTAL
SUBMITTALS
IR A-11
Reference: Title 24, Part 1, CCR - Sections 4-316, 4-318, 4-324

Discipline: All
Revised 03-11-08
Issued 12-08-05
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) provides clarification on dividing projects

into increments, procedures for submitting increments for plan review, and guidance in
handling incremental projects throughout the plan review process.
General: With the concurrence of the Division of the State Architect (DSA), projects may
be submitted in increments so that portions of the total project may be reviewed in advance
of other portions to expedite start of construction.
1. DSA POLICY ON INCREMENTAL SUBMITTALS:
This process is acceptable under the following conditions:
1.1
An increment is a clearly defined building or similar distinct unit (examples: site

work, relocatable buildings, grandstands, marquees, scoreboards, etc). Increments
should be defined so that the scope of work included in the increment will be
complete and code compliant even if other increments are not constructed. In
general, portions of buildings such as "foundations" or "walls" may not be defined as
separate increments.
1.2
The total number of increments and scope of each increment shall be defined using
the form DSA-1.INC - Definition of Scope of Increments - at the time of the initial
project submittal. This form is available from the DSA web site, forms page at
http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Forms/default.htm under DSAs Frequently Used
Forms, or from your DSA Regional Office.
1.3
Prior to submittal, a preliminary meeting shall be scheduled between the applicant

and both the DSA Intake Architect and Supervisor regarding the number and scope
of increments. This preliminary meeting is required for all projects, including Overthe-Counter submittals, in order to obtain concurrence with DSA. The number of
increments shall be reasonable for DSA to review and process.
1.4
The plan review fee for all increments shall accompany the initial submittal.
1.5
No more than six months may elapse between the approval of one increment and the
submittal of a subsequent increment. Any remaining unapproved portion of the
application will be void in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-318 (c).
1.6
Additional increments can not be added to an application once review is under way.
1.7
Increments cannot be combined once review is under way.
1.8
The Architect or Engineer in General Responsible Charge must be the same person
for all increments. Separate assignments of Architect or Engineer in General Respon-
DSA IR A-11
(rev 03-11-08)
Incremental
Submittals
Page 1 of 4
DSA IR A-11
(rev 03-11-08)
Incremental
Submittals
Page 2 of 4
sible Charge may not be made for parts of a project when the project is an
incremental submittal.
2.
Submittal Procedures for Incremental Plan Review
2.1
Application and Subsequent Submittals:

The initial increment shall be submitted with the original forms DSA-1, DSA1.INC, and DSA-3, the Project Submittal Checklist. Provide the entire proposed
scope on Form DSA-1 and the breakdown of increment scope and cost on Form
DSA-1.INC.
For each subsequent increment submit a new Project Submittal Checklist and
copies of the original DSA-1 and DSA-1.INC.
Indicate which increment is being submitted with each submittal.
2.2
Completeness:
All materials for a complete submittal shall be included with each increment.
Contact the DSA Intake Architect or Supervisor with any questions prior to
submittal.
2.3
Title Sheet:
Identify which increment is being submitted.
The Title Sheet of each increment shall include a clear description of the scope of
work in each increment.
The final increment shall use a Title Sheet listing all sheets in the project; clearly
identify sheets used in each increment.
2.4
Sheet Numbering: Drawing sheet numbers in all increments must be unique.

Drawing numbers among the increments shall not be duplicated or repeated.
2.5
For Reference Only: Sheets or details previously reviewed and approved in one
increment and included in subsequent increments for reference, shall be identified
For Reference Only to avoid duplication of review. Identify increment number
where review and approval occurred.
2.6
Site Plan: Each incremental submittal shall include a Site Plan.

Submittal Checklist for minimum content required for review.
2.7
Continuity of Review: Identify plan reviewers of previous increments.

possible and appropriate, DSA will maintain continuity of plan reviewers.
3.
Revisions, Addenda, and Deferred Approvals
3.1
Policies and Conditions
See the Project

When
3.1.1
Previously submitted increments can not be modified by subsequent increments.

Minor modifications may be made by revision or addendum to the affected
increment only.
3.1.2
Extensive revisions require a new application and new fee.
3.2
Procedures
3.2.1
Revisions will be processed the same as a non-increment projects. Additional

fees may be required for review. The revision submittal will return to the bin and
be placed in line for review based on the date of receipt.
3.2.2
Revisions, addenda, and deferred approvals shall clearly indicate the associated
increment.
DSA IR A-11
(rev 03-11-08)
Incremental
Submittals
Page 3 of 4
3.2.3
Each item in revisions and addenda shall clearly indicate the detail, sheet
number, and increment being modified. To simplify review, it is recommended
that modifications associated with one increment be grouped together when
possible.
3.2.4
Deferred approvals shall be identified on the Title Sheet of each increment.
4.
Implementation of New Editions of the California Building Code:
4.1
When no more than six months have elapsed between the approval of one increment
and the submittal of a subsequent increment, the subsequent increment shall be
designed to meet all the requirements of the edition of CBC that was in effect when
the project application was first filed with DSA.
4.2
When six months or more have elapsed, a new application and fees will be required
for the remaining unapproved increment(s), which shall be designed to meet the
requirements of the current edition of CBC.
5.
Examples of Increments See Appendix A.
Mixed use of different editions of CBC on an incremental project is not permitted. If a

subsequent increment is submitted after a new edition of CBC becomes effective, the
applicable edition of CBC will be determined as follow:
For additional information on appropriate increments, design professionals should

consult with the Intake Architect at a DSA Regional Office.
DSA IR A-11
(rev 03-11-08)
Incremental
Submittals
Page 4 of 4
Appendix A - Examples of Incremental Projects

The following examples are provided to assist in defining the scope of increments and in
completing form DSA-1.INC. Two projects are defined below along with suggestions for
alternative ways to divide the scope of work for each project into increments.
Project 1:
The scope of work for Project 1 consists of the Construction of two classroom buildings
(simple wood-frame buildings), Addition to and Alteration to a multi-purpose building
(complex masonry buildings), and Relocation of four relocatable buildings.
Project 1 may be divided into increments as follow:
Scenario A
Increment 1 - Construction of: site development,
Increment 2 - Relocation of: four relocatable buildings,
Increment 3 - Construction of: two classroom buildings,
Increment 4 - Addition to: multi-purpose building, and
Alteration to: multi-purpose building.
- OR
Scenario B
Increment 1 - Construction of: site development and
Relocation of: four relocatable buildings,
Increment 2 - Construction of: two classroom buildings,
Increment 3 - Addition to: multi-purpose building, and
Alteration to: multi-purpose building
- OR
Scenario C
Increment 1 - Construction of: site development and
Relocation of: four relocatable buildings,
Increment 2 - Construction of: two classroom buildings and
Addition to: multi-purpose building, and
Alteration to: multi-purpose building
Project 2:
The scope of work for Project 2 consists of Construction of field buildings (a restroom
building, a press box and a concession building), Construction of outdoor bleachers and a
score board, and site work.
Project 2 may be divided into increments as follow:
Scenario A
Increment 1 - Construction of: restroom building, concession building, scoreboard
and site work,
Increment 2 - Construction of: bleachers, and
Increment 3 - Construction of: press box.
- OR
Scenario B
Increment 1 - Construction of: restroom building, scoreboard and site work,
Increment 2 - Construction of: concession building, and
Increment 3 - Construction of: bleachers, and press box.
IR A-12
ASSISTANT INSPECTOR
APPROVAL
References: California Building Standards Administrative Code, (Title 24, Part 1)
Sections 4-211, 4-333, and 4-341
California Education Code, Sections 17309, 17311 and 81141
Revised 02-27-09
Revised 10-03-07
Issued 06-01-06
See IR A-7
jurisdiction of DSA which includes State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grade K-12), Community Colleges
Purpose:
This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) describes the requirements for the

approval of assistant inspectors. All assistant inspectors must complete a two-step process
of (1) certification and (2) approval by DSA before they are permitted to work on a school
construction project.
IR A-7 explains the requirements for DSA certification for both assistant and project
inspectors. IR A-7 also explains the requirements for project approval of project inspectors.
IR A-12 specifies requirements for project approval of assistant inspectors.
Background: There are three types of inspectors who may perform code-required
inspections on school construction projects:
Project Inspector - is responsible for ensuring that all code-prescribed inspection and
administrative duties are completed, including supervision of assistant inspectors and
monitoring of special inspectors. The Class 1 project inspector may utilize one or more
assistant inspector(s) to assist in performing inspection and administrative duties on a
project.
Assistant Inspector - may be utilized, or may be required, to assist a Class 1 project

inspector. Assistant inspectors provide inspection and administrative assistance to the
project inspector on a project. An assistant inspector must be qualified by obtaining DSA
Certification as a project inspector. Qualified assistants must be approved by DSA for
each project as explained in Section 3.3 and 3.4 below.
Special Inspector - a specially qualified person utilized, where required by code, to

inspect specific aspects of the work, such as structural steel welding or masonry
construction.
1.
Utilization of Assistant Inspectors: On larger, more complex, or fast-paced

projects the necessity to utilize assistant inspector(s) must be assessed. For example, the
need for an assistant inspector should be discussed with the DSA field engineer when
construction cost exceeds $15,000,000. DSAs approval of the project inspector may be
contingent upon adequate provision for assistant inspector(s).
The scope of all construction work that the assistant will inspect and any other codeprescribed duties that the assistant will perform must be described on Form DSA-5A.
DSA IR A-12
(rev 02-27-09)
Assistant Inspector
Approval
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR A-12
(rev 02-27-09)
Assistant Inspector
Approval
Page 2 of 3
2.
Requirements for the Use of an Assistant Inspector: DSA has established

the following requirements for the certification, approval, and use of any assistant inspector
on a public school construction project.
2.1
Only DSA-Certified Class 1 project inspectors may utilize assistant inspectors.
2.2
A project inspector may not utilize more than three

simultaneously without the express written approval of DSA.
2.3
The project inspector must provide continuous on-site supervision of all assistant
inspectors. The project inspector shall not assign the assistant inspector to inspect
work at a project site when the project inspector will not be present unless special
written DSA approval is obtained in advance.
2.4
Upon request, the project inspector must submit a written plan indicating the project
inspectors proposed presence at all concurrent projects. The plan must provide for
continuous on-site supervision of all assistant inspectors.
2.5
Both the project and assistant inspector must keep a log of time spent on-site, and
must indicate this information on each semi-monthly report.
2.6
All assistant inspectors must be qualified by DSA Certification as a project inspector,

Class 1, 2, 3, or 4. See IR A-7 and the DSA website for more information regarding
DSA inspector certification
2.7
Once certified, assistant inspectors must be approved by the appropriate DSA

Regional Office for each project on which the assistant inspector works.
3.
Certification and Approval of an Assistant Inspector

A Two-Step Process
assistant
inspectors
DSA Certification as a project inspector, Class 1, 2, 3 or 4, is the first step in

becoming an assistant inspector. See IR A-7 for certification requirements.
Approval is the second step. This step occurs for each construction project. DSA
Approval of an assistant inspector must be obtained from the appropriate DSA
Regional Office before the assistant inspector can work on a project.
3.1
Approval of the Assistant Inspector for a Project

An assistant inspector must be approved by DSA for each specific project. An
Assistant Inspector Qualification Record (Form DSA-5A) must be submitted to the
appropriate DSA Regional Office for approval at least 10 working days prior to use of
the assistant inspector on the project.
The design professional in general responsible charge is advised to consult the DSA
field engineer prior to submittal of the Form DSA-5A to DSA, in order to verify that
the assistant inspector meets the criteria for approval by DSA.
3.2
Criteria for DSA Approval of an Assistant Inspector

An assistant inspector must:
3.2.1
Be DSA Certified as a project inspector, Class 1, 2, 3 or 4,
3.2.2
Have work experience in inspection or construction (refer to IR A-7, Section 2,

item 2) with the trades that the assistant inspector will be inspecting,
3.2.3
Demonstrate that his or her current workload and time commitment to the
project are acceptable (refer to IR A-7, Section 2, item 3),
DSA IR A-12
(rev 02-27-09)
Assistant Inspector
Approval
Page 3 of 3
3.2.4 Have satisfactory DSA performance ratings on previous school construction projects
(refer to DSA IR A-8), and
3.2.5 Be employed directly by the school district.
4.
Project and Assistant Inspectors Responsibilities
A project inspector is responsible for ensuring that all code-prescribed inspection and
administrative duties are completed per IR A-7 and IR A-8. The assistant inspector is
responsible for performing assigned inspections in a similar manner.
When an assistant inspector is utilized on a project the project inspector and assistant
inspector must both sign each semi-monthly report.
5.
Inspector Performance Rating
The DSA field engineer observes the project inspectors and assistant inspectors
performance of code-prescribed duties during the course of construction, including the
project inspectors monitoring of the assistant inspectors performance (IR A-8, Section 1,
item 7).
The DSA field engineer completes an Inspectors Performance Rating for the project
inspector and for the assistant inspector (refer to IR A-8, Section 2). The performance
rating is used by DSA as a basis for approval of the project inspector and the assistant
inspector on future projects.
IR A-13
STOP WORK AND

ORDER TO COMPLY
References: California Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1)
Section 4-334.1
California Education Code, Section 17307.5 and 81133.5
California Health and Safety Code, Section 16017.5
Issued 04-05-07
This Interpretation of Regulation (IR) is intended for use by the Division of the State Architect (DSA) staff to promote more uniform
statewide criteria for implementation of the Stop Work authority.
This IR is subject to revision at any time. Please check the DSA web site at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Pubs/default.htm for
currently effective IR's (click on DSA Interpretations of Regulations Manual).
Background: The Department of General Services by delegation to the Division of the
State Architect (DSA) may issue an Order to Comply or a Stop Work Order when
construction work is not being performed in conformance with existing law and/or project
plans and specifications and which failure could compromise the structural integrity of the
building creating a danger to public safety.
Examples of situations when the public safety may be endangered include but are not
limited to the following:
construction starts without first obtaining DSA approval of plans and specifications,
unapproved or defective construction work is proceeding,
unapproved or non-complying materials of construction are used,
applicable building codes or standards are not being met,
required tests or inspections are not being performed, or
any other circumstances where DSA determines that the public safety could be
endangered.
1.
Implementation: DSA may issue an Order to Comply or a Stop Work Order when
work is proceeding that, in the sole opinion of DSA which is not subject to challenge, may
result in construction that could endanger the public safety. Generally, an Order to Comply
will be issued prior to a Stop Work Order
2.
Order to Comply: DSA may issue an Order to Comply (Order). The Order shall
describe the deviation(s) that need to be resolved and a deadline for response. A sample
Order is attached. The DSA Regional Manager and the Field Supervisor will review the Order
prior to issuance. The Order shall be signed by the State Architect or a designated
representative. The Order shall be sent to the owner of the project by regular and
registered mail. The order shall be effective at the time it is first deposited in the mail. The
owner of the project shall be responsible for enforcing the Order.
2.1
Resolution of Orders to Comply: When in the sole opinion of DSA the deviations
described in the Order to Comply have been satisfactorily corrected, the DSA Field
Engineer will acknowledge in his or her Field Trip Notes that the Order has been
satisfactorily addressed and a letter will be sent to the owner of the project
acknowledging that the issue has been resolved.
2.2
Stop Work Order: A Stop Work Order may be issued when construction work is not
being performed in conformance with existing law and or DSA approved plans and
specifications and could compromise the structural integrity of the building creating a
danger to public safety. A Stop Work Order may be issued without first issuing an
DSA IR A-13 (iss 04-05-07)
Stop Work and

Order to Comply
Page 1 of 5
DSA IR A-13 (iss 04-05-07)
Stop Work and

Order to Comply
Page 2 of 5
Order to Comply based on the circumstances and at DSAs sole discretion. The DSA
Regional Manager and the Field Supervisor will review the information provided and
determine whether or not a Stop Work Order should be issued. The Stop Work Order
will be signed by the State Architect or a designated representative and delivered to
the owner of the project by certified mail with return receipt requested. A sample
Stop Work Order is attached. Copies will be sent to the project contractor, inspector,
architect, and structural engineer. No further work will be permitted in the affected
areas until authorized by DSA in writing. The project owner shall be responsible for
stopping the construction work.
Once a Stop Work Order has been issued, no construction work, except that work
necessary to correct deviation(s) addressed in the Stop Work Order may be
performed on the project. When corrective work requires approval of change orders
or construction change directives by DSA such approvals shall be obtained prior to
performing corrective work.
Exception: The Stop Work Order may describe a specific area of the project
or a specific aspect of the work which shall be stopped; in this case work may
proceed in areas, or aspects, of the project that are not affected by the Stop
Work Order.
The Owner of the project shall be responsible for enforcing the stop work order or
order to comply and making sure that the work is corrected in accordance with
applicable laws, codes, plans and specifications, and any other applicable project
documents.
2.3
Resolution of Stop Work Order: The project inspector shall notify DSA when the
contractor has completed the corrective work. A DSA Field Engineer shall verify that
the required work has been completely and properly performed in accordance with
DSA approved documents. When the DSA Field Engineer has accepted the corrective
work in a Field Trip Note, the State Architect or a designated representative will
rescind the Stop Work Order by regular and registered mail and work may resume.
2.4
Enforcement: If work does not stop immediately upon issuance of a Stop Work
Order the matter will be referred to the Office of the Attorney General for
enforcement.
3.
Limitations: It is in the sole discretion of DSA to issue a stop work order or order
to comply however, DSA will not issue any such order invoking its stop work/order to
comply authority for incidental, or minor nonstructural additions, or nonstructural
alterations.
4. Delay Claims: As a result of any contractors or any subcontractors failure (and

which failures are not due to the failure of the project owner) to comply with the laws, plans
and specifications or other project documents which results in the issuance of a stop work
order or order to comply, any delay which occurs in the affected project work until
correction of the work has been completed, and a recission of the stop work order (or order
to comply) has been issued to allow resumption of work, any such delay should not
constitute a basis for any delay claim by the contractor or any subcontractor.
APPENDICES
Sample Order to Comply letter
Sample Stop Work Order letter
Sample Stop Work notice
State of California Arnold Schwarzenegger, Governor

State and Consumer Services Agency
DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES

Headquarters 1102 Q Street, Suite 5100 Sacramento, CA 95811
(916) 445-8100 Fax (916) 445-3521 www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov
(Month Day, Year)

(Superintendent of Schools
c/o School Board
Facility Name and Address)
SAMPLE
DSA File #: (??-??)

Application #: (??-??????)
Sent by regular mail and certified mail
RE: ORDER TO COMPLY

(Project Description)
Dear (Mr./Ms. name):
This letter is to inform you that construction work on the referenced project is not being performed in
accordance with existing law and may compromise the integrity of the building and endanger the public
safety.
You are strongly encouraged to take action to resolve the problems described below. It is suggested that
the School District order further construction to be stopped until the problems described below are
resolved to the satisfaction of the Division of the State Architect (DSA). Failure to comply with this order
could result in the issuance of a Stop Work Order by DSA pursuant to California Education Code Section
(choose one: 17307.5 for k-12 schools, 81133.5 for community colleges, or Health and Safety Code
Section 16017.5 for essential services buildings) and California Building Standards Administrative Code
(Title 24, Part 1) Section (choose 4-334.1 for schools or 4-237.1 for essential services buildings).
Description of Problems:
(Describe construction deviations. Refer to DSA approved details and/or Code sections as applicable.
Suggestions for corrections or other appropriate actions may be included when appropriate. Explain why
the problem may endanger the public safety).
Please notify DSA no later than (date, ten working days from the date of this letter is suggested) of the
measures that will be taken to correct the problems. A schedule for implementation of the proposed
corrective measures is also requested. This Order to Comply will be rescinded when corrections are
satisfactorily completed in accordance with DSA approved documents under the inspection of a DSA
approved project inspector.
If you have any questions regarding this matter, please contact me at (telephone number).
Sincerely,
(name), Regional Manager

cc:
(name) Project Contractor

(name) Project Inspector
(name) Project Architect
(name) State Architect
(name) Policy Deputy - DSA

(name) Operations Deputy - DSA
(name) DSA Legal Counsel
(name) Attorney General
State of California Arnold Schwarzenegger, Governor

State and Consumer Services Agency
DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES

Headquarters 1102 Q Street, Suite 5100 Sacramento, CA 95811
(916) 445-8100 Fax (916) 445-3521 www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov
(Month Day, Year)

(Superintendent of Schools
c/o School Board
Facility Name and Address)
SAMPLE
DSA File #: (??-??)

Application #: (??-??????)
Sent by regular mail and certified mail
RE: STOP WORK ORDER

(Project Description)
Dear (Mr./Ms. name):
You are hereby ordered to stop all construction work on the referenced project because (state reasons
such as: work is proceeding without benefit of Division of the State Architect (DSA) approved plans and
specifications, a project inspector approved by DSA, and/or construction is proceeding that will
compromise the structural integrity of the structure and could endanger the pubic safety). (When work is
non-compliant provide a description of the portions of the work and how they are non-compliant. include
reference to appropriate, details on drawings, sections in the specifications and/or sections in Codes or
Standards when applicable to clarify how the construction is non-compliant and unsafe.) Enclosed are
STOP WORK NOTICES that you are required to post in prominent locations on the construction project
site.
Pursuant to California Education Code Section (choose one: 17307.5 for k-12 schools, 81133.5 for
community colleges, or Health and Safety Code Section 16017.5 for essential services buildings) and
California Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1) Section (choose 4-334.1 for schools
or 4-237.1 for essential services buildings), all construction work, except for work necessary to repair or
mitigate deficient construction described herein, (preceding exception must be deleted when work is
proceeding without DSA approval or without an approved project inspector) on the above described
project shall immediately cease until a written authorization to rescind this order is issued by this Office.
If work does not stop immediately the matter will be referred to the Office of the Attorney General for
enforcement action.
This Stop Work Order will be rescinded when corrections are satisfactorily completed in accordance with
DSA approved documents and under the inspection of a DSA approved project inspector.
If you have any questions regarding this matter, please contact me at (telephone number).
Sincerely,
(name), State Architect

cc:
(name) Project Contractor

(name) Project Inspector
(name) Project Architect
(name) Regional Manager
Enclosure
(name) Policy Deputy DSA

(name) Operations Deputy - DSA
(name) DSA Legal Counsel
(name) Attorney General
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES
DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
STOP WORK ORDER
Pursuant to Section 4-334.1 of the 2001 California Building

Standards Administrative Code, CCR Title 24, Part 1
Appl. # ____________
STOP WORK ORDER
File # ___________
TAKE NOTICE THAT THIS BUILDING/STRUCTURE IS IN CONTRAVENTION OF THE

CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE.
School District:
Date of Inspection:
Project: ________________________________________________
Stop Work Order issued by:
Project Location: _________________________________________

_______________________________________________________
State Architect
ALL WORK (AS NOTED BELOW) WILL CEASE IMMEDIATELY.

Any person who continues to work on this building/structure or area after having been served
this stop work order, shall be subject to penalties prescribed by law, unless that person is
directed to remove a violation or unsafe condition.
Contact DSA Sacramento Regional Office at (916) 445-8730 if any questions
DESCRIPTION OF AFFECTED WORK: ___________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
No person shall remove, or obstruct the visibility of any DSA order posted unless authorized by DSA
DSA-351 (04-05-07)
STOP WORK ORDER NOTICE
California Department of General Services
WALK-IN FREEZERS AND

COLD STORAGE BOXES
Interpretation of Regulations Document
IR A-14
Reference: 2001 and 2007 Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317
Issued: 08-28-07
Discipline: All
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations clarifies the Division of the State Architect
(DSA) review and acceptance of walk-in freezers and cold storage boxes (WIF/CSB).
Background:
DSA does not review the design and fabrication of pre-manufactured

equipment, but does check anchorage of equipment to resist gravity and lateral loads.
Walk-in freezers and cold storage boxes are typically constructed from prefabricated wall
and roof panels interconnected with cam-locks.
The strength of the cam-locks is
determined by static tests. Some WIF/CSB may be designed with different interconnection
systems for the panels.
Policy:
DSA will accept WIF/CSB as pre-manufactured equipment for public school

construction projects if the construction meets the indoor or outdoor installation
requirements of this policy.
Otherwise, WIF/CSB shall be designed to meet the
requirements of California Building Code (CBC) for new buildings.
1.
Requirements for Indoor Installation: The WIF/CSB units must be confined
on three sides by walls capable of resisting seismic forces from the WIF/CSB units as
prescribed by CBC Section 1632A (2007 CBC Section 1613A). Mechanical anchorage is not
required, and restraint may be provided by bearing on walls or floor curbs. On the fourth
side, with door, supplemental lateral bracing must be provided per Section 2.3.2 below.
Supplementary bracing shall not block or interfere with doorways or means of egress.
2.
Requirements for Outdoor Installation: Outdoor installation may be

accepted as pre-manufactured equipment if the WIF/CSB unit meets the limitations and
requirements of Sections 2.1 to 2.6 below.
2.1
Dimensional Limitation: WIF/CSB units are limited to 250 square foot of enclosed
areas and ten feet in height.
2.2
Snow Load Limitation: Snow load shall be limited to the lesser of 20 psf or the
manufacturers recommendation.
2.3
Installation Options: Provide either fencing or supplemental lateral bracing around

the perimeters as follow:
DSA IR A-14 (iss 08-28-07)
Walk-in Freezers and

Cold Storage Boxes
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR A-14 (iss 08-28-07)
Walk-in Freezers and

Cold Storage Boxes
Page 2 of 2
2.3.1
Fencing Option: Enclose the WIF/CSB unit by a fence with a clear space
between the fence and the unit equal to the height of the unit, or
2.3.2
Supplementary Bracing Option: Provide supplemental lateral bracing around

the perimeters of the WIF/CSB units, i.e. steel lateral frames, steel columns or
bollards, etc. Supplementary bracing shall be designed to resist the required
seismic and/or wind forces for new buildings per the California Building Code
(CBC), Chapter 16A, Divisions III and IV respectively (2007 CBC Sections 1609A
and 1613A respectively).
2.4
Anchorage: WIF/CSB units installed outside of building shall be anchored to

resist the required wind and seismic forces required for new buildings per the
California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 16A, Divisions III and IV respectively.
2.5
DSA Review: DSA will check the foundation and anchorage capacities per
Section 2.4 above, and the supplemental lateral bracing per Section 2.3.2 above.
Provide plans, details, specifications, calculations, and any other information that
are necessary to complete the DSA reviews.
2.6
Abutting a Building: When a WIF/CSB unit is located adjacent to another

building, the WIF/CSB, if recommended by the manufacturer, may be attached to,
and laterally supported by the building. A California registered architect or
structural engineer shall provide calculations to verify the adequacy of the existing
building to support the design forces imposed by the adjacent WIF/CSB unit.
Alternatively, the WIF/CSB may be separated from the adjacent building by a
structural joint at least two inches clear and provided with supplementary lateral
bracing on four sides in accordance with Section 2.3.2 above.
4.
Fire Life Safety Requirements: An automatic fire sprinkler system is required
for WIF/CSB units that are housed in or adjacent to a building protected or required to be
protected by an automatic fire sprinkler system. DSA will check WIF/CSB units installed
indoors.
4.1
When WIF/CSB are installed outdoors or adjacent to buildings, site plans showing all
approved fire lanes shall be submitted. DSA will check the site plan to ensure no fire
access lanes are obstructed by the WIF/CSB units.
5.
Access Compliance Requirements: Commercial kitchens used only by

employees are generally considered to be work stations requiring compliance with CBC
Section 1123B.2 (32 clear entry opening, aisles, and floors and levels). Pre-manufactured
walk-in coolers and freezers used only by employees within a commercial kitchen (work
station) are considered to be kitchen equipment not requiring compliance with accessibility
provisions.
However, if pre-manufactured walk-in freezers or cold storage boxes are used by students
as a part of their education curriculum, or they are used by the general public, they are not
considered to be a part of an employee only work station and therefore must meet all
accessibility requirements of the California Building Code.
TESTING AND INSPECTION OF REMOTELY

FABRICATED STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
References:
California Administrative Code (CAC), Title 24, Part 1,
Sections 4-330 through 4-339
IR A-15
Revised 12-17-09
Revised 10-15-07
Issued 08-13-03 as CR A-1
Purpose:
The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify the

requirements for testing of materials and inspection of the construction that takes place offsite. Examples of construction that may take place off-site include, but are not limited to:
modular buildings, bleachers, light poles, elevators, and structural elements of buildings.
This IR is pertinent to project inspectors, testing laboratories, laboratory technicians, and

special inspectors working on projects under DSA jurisdiction.
1.
General: In general all aspects of construction shown on DSA approved documents

require personal inspection by an inspector approved by DSA.
However, packaged
equipment such as HVAC units, motors, transformers, etc need not be inspected during
fabrication. Structural components such as poles for lights, platforms for HVAC units,
prefabricated ramps, elevator guide rails, wood and/or steel open-web joists, wood trusses,
etc. require inspection.
Many building components are not constructed at the site where
they will be used. The requirements for testing of materials and inspection are the same
independent of the location where the construction takes place. Supervision is provided by
DSA for proper enforcement of the Field Act during the construction of a building,
structures, or elements of a structure.
See IR 17-4 for further information on the basics of testing and special inspection as well as
a clarification of specific procedures considered to be tests vs. special inspections.
2.
Exceptions: Inspection and testing of factory built relocatable buildings and
bleachers (grandstands) are exceptions to this interpretation:
2.1
DSA has a program for the inspection of factory-built buildings constructed at a

location remote from the project site.
DSA offers a (factory built) Relocatable
Building In-Plant (RBIP) inspector examination to qualify individuals to perform this
type of multi-disciplinary inspection.
Details and an application for the RBIP
examination are available from the DSA Headquarters Office.
2.2
The fabrication of bleachers is addressed in DSAs Interpretations of Regulations

Manual; see IR 16-5 for the 2001 CBC or IR 16-10 for the 2007 CBC. The
Interpretation of Regulations Manual may be downloaded at:
http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov, click on Publications.
DSA IR A-15 (rev 12-17-09)

(corrected 03-17-10)
Testing and Inspection of Remotely

Fabricated Structural Elements
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR A-15 (rev 12-17-09)

3.

Page 2 of 3
Definitions:
Assistant inspector - An individual approved by DSA to assist the project inspector on the
project site. See IR A-8 and IR A-12 for further information.
Project Inspector An individual approved by DSA to inspect all aspects of construction
for a project. The project inspector may utilize assistant or special inspectors for some
aspects of the construction.
Relocatable Building In-plant (RBIP) inspector An individual approved to inspect the
fabrication of modular buildings in the factory. For an application to become certified by
DSA as a Relocatable Building In-Plant Inspector by DSA see the DSA website at:
http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/other/RBIP_Examination_Application_2-24-04.pdf.
Special inspector An individual acceptable to DSA to provide inspection of a specific
aspect of construction (such as welding or masonry) either on or off the project site.
See IR 17-6 for further information on special inspection.
Testing The testing of structural materials or completed elements of a structure.
See IR 17-5 for further information on testing.
4.
Testing:
4.1
Material testing requirements will be listed on the Test and Inspection List (Form
DSA-103) and in the plans and/or specifications for each project. Materials must be
sampled, handled, transported, and tested by a testing facility accepted in DSAs
Laboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) program. When approved by the DSA
field engineer, an LEA accepted laboratory may subcontract testing of materials to a
facility that is not LEA accepted when all of the conditions of Section 4.1.1 through
4.1.4 are met.
4.1.1 An LEA accepted facility does not exist within 300 miles of both the material supplier
location and the material fabrication location.
4.1.2 The material tests to be performed are routine and the materials to be tested are
used in an ordinary manner. Unusual materials and/or applications may require
testing by an LEA accepted facility at the discretion of the DSA field engineer for the
project.
4.1.3 The facility to which services are subcontracted operates under the supervision of the
engineer in charge of the LEA accepted facility for the project. The LEA laboratory
engineer must evaluate the subcontract facilitys management, personnel,
equipment, operations, practices, etc. to verify that:
All personnel involved in the sampling, handling, and testing of material are fully
aware of all applicable codes, and standards (including special Title 24 code
requirements) for the sampling, testing, and reporting of materials tests required
for the project.
The subcontract facility has been evaluated by recognized agencies as required

by the applicable ASTM standards (including ASTM E329, ASTM C1077, etc.) for
the specific tests that are required for the project.
The subcontract facility participates in proficiency sampling programs as required

by the applicable ASTM standards (including ASTM E329, ASTM C1077, etc.) for
the specific tests that are required for the project.
4.1.4 The LEA laboratory engineer shall include all tests performed by the subcontract
laboratory on his laboratory final verified report.
DSA IR A-15 (rev 12-17-09)


Page 3 of 3
5.
Inspection. Certain aspects of construction require inspection by an inspector

approved by DSA. In general, only Special Inspectors and Relocatable Building In-Plant
inspectors are approved by DSA to inspect construction that occurs off-site. A special
inspector must be provided for welding, precast concrete, or other aspects of construction
requiring special inspection (see Appendix A of IR 17-4 and the Structural Testing and
Inspection List, Form DSA-103 for aspects of construction that require special inspectors).
Aspects of construction that usually require inspection by the project inspector when
performed on site shall be inspected by a Relocatable Building In-Plant Inspector when
performed off-site. Such aspects of construction include but are not limited to plywood
shear wall nailing, gypsum wall board installation, roofing, electrical or mechanical work,
etc.
5.1
Relocatable Building In-Plant Inspection. In-plant inspectors are responsible

for all aspects of inspection of construction that occurs in the fabrication plant.
Inspection, reporting, employment, and all other aspects of inspection are identical
to those defined for project inspectors except that the scope of work for which the
in-plant inspector is responsible will not be the entire scope of the project. The
portions of the construction that will occur in the fabrication plant and the portions
that will occur at the project site must be clearly defined as part of the DSA
approved documents or on the Forms DSA-5 for the in-plant inspector as well as
the project inspector (Note: for relocatable building projects the project inspector is
often referred to as the site inspector). In-plant inspectors are required to be
certified as Class 1 inspectors or as RBIP inspectors (see Section 3.1) by DSA.
5.2
Special Inspection. Special inspection requirements for certain aspects of the

construction will be identified on the Tests and Inspections List as well as the DSA
approved plans and/or specifications.
Construction processes requiring special
inspection (including welding, precast concrete, fabrication of glued-laminated
lumber, wood trusses, etc.) must be inspected by an appropriately qualified special
inspector. Special inspectors must either be employed by an LEA approved testing
facility or directly by the school district.
Exception: When approved by DSA the special inspector may be employed by a
non-LEA approved testing facility when the conditions of Section 4.1.1 through
4.1.3 above are satisfied.
CHARTER SCHOOLS
ENFORCEMENT JURISDICTION
IR A-16
References: California Building Code: Section 1134B

California Education Code: Sections 17078.52-17078.66, 47610.
Issued 11-01-07
Supersedes DSA Policy # 94-19
Discipline: Structural Safety, Fire Life Safety, Access Compliance

This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is intended for use by the Division of the State Architect (DSA) staff, and as a resource for design
professionals, to promote more uniform statewide criteria for plan review and construction inspection of projects within the jurisdiction of
DSA, which include State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges, and state-owned or
state-leased essential services buildings. This IR indicates an acceptable method for achieving compliance with applicable codes and
regulations, although other methods proposed by design professionals may be considered by DSA.
This IR is reviewed on a regular basis and is subject to revision at any time. Please check the DSA web site for currently effective IRs.
Only IRs listed in the document at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Pubs/default.htm (click on DSA Interpretations of Regulations Manual) at
the time of plan submittal to DSA are considered applicable.
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies the enforcement agency jurisdictional
authority for Charter School construction projects, such as new building and facility construction,
reconstruction, rehabilitation, alterations, and additions.
1.
State Funded Charter School facilities construction projects: Such projects
must be submitted to DSA for plan review and construction oversight.
2.
Non-State Funded Charter School facilities construction projects: If the
Charter School facility construction project does not use State funds, independent of land
ownership, the project must be submitted to either:
2.1
DSA for plan review and construction oversight.
2.2
The local building enforcement agency with jurisdiction over the area in which the charter
school is located.
3.
Additional Accessibility Requirements: Additional accessibility related alterations

may be required to existing buildings or facilities (regardless of funding source)
depending on existing conditions. As part of the project submittal to the enforcing agency
(per Sections 1 or 2 above), documentation of the accessibility features of the existing
facilities must be included for review and approval demonstrating that the completed
project will be in full compliance with the accessibility provisions of Title 24.
DSA IR A-F
(iss 11-01-07)
Charter Schools
Enforcement Jurisdiction
Page 1 of 1
VOIDANCE OF APPLICATIONS AND

PROJECT RE-SUBMITTAL
References:
California Building Code (CBC), Part 1 Section 4-318. (c)
IR A-17
Issued 02-01-08
School District Officials and Design Professionals, to promote more uniform statewide criteria for Voiding Applications during the
plan review phase of projects within the jurisdiction of DSA, which include State of California public elementary and secondary
schools (grades K-12), community colleges, and state-owned or state-leased essential services buildings.
Purpose:
The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide clear

consistent criteria under which an application becomes void during the plan check phase of
a project.
Background: The California Building Standards Administrative Code, Title 24 Part 1,

Section 4-318, Item (c), defines criteria under which an application may be voided. The
voidance is at the discretion of DSA. This IR clarifies two of the voidance criteria under
which DSA will void the application. The reason DSA has determined to exercise the
discretion to void the applications is because inappropriate elapsed time from a submittal to
subsequent submittals causes ineffective and improper use of DSA staffing resources.
Some examples are:
Projects are placed in our filing system for an undefined time, causing a backlog of
projects with unknown status.
Staff hours spent on obtaining full intimate project knowledge and understanding is
lost as time elapses.
The contract for DSA contract plan checkers, when used, expires in the elapsed time
causing contractual issues. This sometimes results is DSA staff assuming the
remaining work and always requires DSA staff time to resolve.
Original plan comments become potentially archaic as new codes, standards and
regulations become effective.
1.
Implementation: DSA will implement discretionary authority to void projects.
The following criteria under which a project will be voided during the plan check phase are
herein clarified:
1.1
Prints from the corrected plans or corrected original plans must be filed for
backcheck within 6 months after the date of return of checked plans to the architect
or engineer.
1.1.1
DSA may, upon request, grant one 6 month extension.
1.1.2
The backcheck must be completed within 2 months after being initiated.
1.2
For incremental projects, subsequent incremental plans and specifications must be

submitted to DSA for checking within 6 months after the approval of the previous
increment has been issued.
2.
Re-submittal of Voided Projects: Any project application or approval that has
been voided by DSA can be re-submitted as a new project by filing a new application and
fee in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-315 (b). Plans, specifications and design
shall comply with the requirements of the current California Building Standard Code.
DSA (SS) IR A-17(iss 02-01-08)
(errata 5-20-10)
Voidance of Applications
and Project Re-Submittal
Page 1 of 1
USE OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

PREPARED BY OTHER PROFESSIONALS
References:
California Administrative Code, Title 24, Part 1, Sections 4-316, 4-317
Professional and Vocational Regulations, Title 16, Division 5, Section 415
California Business and Professions Code, Sections 5536.1, 6735
IR A-18
Revised 04-27-10
Revised 07-01-09
Issued 02-01-08
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies situations where the use of a
statement of general conformance is acceptable in lieu of over-stamping on projects under
the jurisdiction of the Division of the State Architect (DSA).
Background: Business and Professions Code Sections 5536.1 and 6735 and Title 24, Part
1, Section 4-317(h), requires signature and seal (or stamp) of the architect or engineer in
general responsible charge to be shown on the basic construction documents that include
plans, specifications, calculations, reports, etc.
In certain situations, such as listed in Section 1.2 below, when the architect or engineer in
general responsible charge utilizes construction documents prepared, signed, and stamped
by other California Licensed professionals, DSA would accept the Statement of General
Conformance, shown in Appendix A, in lieu of the signature and seal (or stamp) from the
architect or engineer in general responsible charge (Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317(g)).
When the following requirements are met, DSA will accept a Statement of
General Conformance (Appendix A) from the architect or engineer in general responsible
charge when he or she utilizes construction documents prepared, signed, and stamped by
other professionals, in lieu of his or her own signature and stamp on those construction
documents.
Policy:
1.
Statement of General Conformance: The use of the Statement of General

Conformance is subject to the limitations and conditions set forth in Sections 1.1 and
1.2 below:
1.1
Limitations and Conditions:
1.1.1
DSA will have the final determination if the Statement of General Conformance is
applicable or not.
1.1.2
The architect or engineer in general responsible charge and the architect or

engineer who has been delegated responsibility for a portion of a project shall
prepare a Statement of General Conformance and a signature block, and provide
his/her signature. The Statement shall indicate that he/she personally reviewed
and coordinated the document(s) prepared by others and found it to be in
general conformance. Languages such as reviewed by X/Y/Z Company, and
found to be will not be acceptable. Acceptable examples of the Statement of
General Conformance and signature block are shown in Appendix A and B
respectively.
DSA IR A-18
(rev 04-27-10)
Use of Construction Documents

Prepared by Other Professionals
Page 1 of 4
DSA IR A-18
(rev 04-27-10)

Page 2 of 4
1.1.3
The Statement of General Conformance shall not be construed as relieving the

architect or the structural engineer in general responsible charge of his or her
rights, duties, and responsibilities under Sections 17302 and 81138 of the
Education Code and Sections 4-336, 4-341 and 4-344 of Title 24, Part 1.
(Quoted from Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-316 (b))
1.1.4
California registered professional engineers or licensed specialists who perform

the engineering designs and prepare the construction documents, which are
considered to be in general conformance by the architect or engineer in general
responsible charge, must be competent in the subject area in accordance with
Title 16, Division 5, Section 415.
1.2
Applicability: The Statement of General Conformance may be used for the

following:
1.2.1
Deferred approvals,
1.2.2
When previously approved pre-Check (PC) documents are utilized as part of a

project and there are no changes from the DSA approved PC documents,
1.2.3
The Statement of General Conformance may be used for the basic construction
documents in lieu of stamps and signatures required per Title 24, Part 1, Section
4-317(h).
2.
Changes to Documents Prepared by Other Professionals: This section

also applies to DSA approved PC documents. If the architect or engineer in general
responsible charge makes any change to the construction documents prepared by
other professionals, DSA would accept the changes under either of the following
conditions:
3.
The signature and stamp of the original professional appears on the change and
the architect or engineer in general responsible charge provides a Statement of
General Conformance, or
The architect or engineer in general responsible charge assumes responsibility for

the changed portion in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-316(c) and
subject to the approval of DSA. If the changes significantly affect the safety of
the entire structure, the architect or engineer in general responsible changes shall
assume responsibility for the entire design.
Documents Signed and Stamped by Out-of-State Professionals: Only

documents signed and stamped by California licensed design professionals are
acceptable to DSA.
4.
Use of the Statement of General Conformance: The Statement and the

signature block shall be prepared and signed per Section 1.1.2 above, and shown on
the documents prepared by others and/or the project construction documents as
follows:
4.1
Statement of General Conformance shall be shown on the cover sheet, the index
sheet, or as directed by DSA.
4.2
Signature Block shall be shown together with the Statement

Conformance and as directed by DSA.
APPENDICES:
Appendix A Example of Statement of General Conformance
Appendix B Example of Signature Block
of General
DSA IR A-18
(rev 04-27-10)

Page 3 of 4
APPENDIX A:
Example of Statement of General Conformance
Statement of General Conformance

FOR ARCHITECTS/ENGINEERS WHO UTILIZE PLANS,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SHOP DRAWINGS, PREPARED BY OTHER
LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONALS AND/OR CONSULTANTS
(Application No. ______________________ File No. ______________)
Th e drawings or sheet s listed on th e cover or index sh eet
This d rawing, page of specifications/calculations
have been prepared by oth er d esign professionals or consultants who are
licensed and/or auth orized t o p repare su ch drawings in this state. It has
been examined by me for:
1) design intent and appears t o meet th e ap prop riate requirements of Title
24, California Code of Regulations and the proj ect specifications
prepared by me, and
2) coordination with my plans and specifications and is acceptable for incorporation
into the construction of this project.
The Statement of General Conformance shall not be construed as relieving me of my
rights, duties, and responsibilities under Sections 17302 and 81138 of the Education Code
and Sections 4-336, 4-341 and 4-344 of Title 24, Part 1. (Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317
(b))
DSA IR A-18
(rev 04-27-10)

Page 4 of 4
APPENDIX B:
Example of Signature Block
I find that:
All drawings or sheets listed on the cover or index sheet
This drawing or page
is/are in general conformance with the

project design, and
has/have been coordinated with the project
plans and specifications.
Signature
Date
is/are in general conformance with the

project design intent, and
has/have been coordinated with the project
Signature
Date
Architect or Engineer designated to be in

general responsible charge
Architect or Engineer delegated responsibility

for this portion of the work
Print Name
Print Name
License Number
Expiration Date
License Number
Expiration Date
California Department of General Services
. Interpretation of Regulations Document
DESIGN PROFESSIONALS SIGNATURE AND

SEAL (STAMP) ON CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
Reference: Title 24, Part 1, Sections 4-316, 4-317, and 4-318
Business and Professions Code Sections 5536.1 and 6735
IR A-19
Revised: 04-07-08
Issued: 02-01-08
Discipline: ALL
Purpose:
The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify when

signatures and seals/stamps are required and where they shall be shown on construction
documents for projects under DSA jurisdiction.
Background: Title 24, Part 1, requires the architect or engineer in responsible charge of
a project to assume responsibility for the safety of design of the project. The stamp and
signature of the architect or engineer on a plan, specification, or other document shall be
deemed evidence that full responsibility is assumed by the signatory for work shown
(Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-316 (e)).
Policy: The architect or the engineer in general responsible charge, and other
professionals delegated for preparation of portions of the project must be licensed or

registered by the state of California, and shall provide his/her signature, stamp and
registration number on plans, specification, calculations and other documents in accordance
with Business and Professions Code and Title 24, Part 1.
For plans and specifications, seals (stamps) and signatures may be applied manually or
electronically and may be in original or reproduced form.
For documents submitted electronically for approval through DSAs electronic plan review
program, Architects and Engineers must apply digital signatures with Public Key
Cryptography to the final construction documents (record set, see Section 2). Refer to DSA
Procedure PR 08-01 for more information.
1.
Plan Check Documents: The licensed architect or the registered engineer in

general responsible charge shall provide his/her stamp, and a notation as to the intent of
the document, such as For Plan Check Only. (Business and Professions Code, Sections
5536.1 and 6735)
1.1
Structural Calculations and Reports: Signature, seal or stamp, date of signing

and sealing, license number and expiration date shall be shown on the cover sheet of
the calculations and reports at the time of submittal.
2.
Construction Documents: In accordance with Business and Professions Code,
Sections 5536.1 and 6735, the architect or the engineer in general responsible charge, and
other professionals delegated for preparation of portions of the project (Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-317 (g)), shall provide, on their respective plans and specifications that are
permitted or to be released for construction (i.e., record set), the following:
DSA IR A-19
(rev 04-07-08)
Design Professional Signature and

Seal (Stamp) on Construction Documents
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR A-19
(rev 04-07-08)

Page 2 of 3
2.1
Plans: Signature, seal or stamp, date of signing and sealing, license number and
expiration date shall be shown on each drawing sheet. Signature must be provided
before plans are approved by DSA.
2.2
Specifications:
Signature, seal or stamp, date of signing and sealing, license
number and expiration date shall be shown on the cover sheet or signature sheet as
the minimum. Signature must be provided before the specifications are approved by
DSA.
2.3
Documents by Others: When using construction documents prepared by other

professionals, the architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge, in
lieu of overstamping, may provide a statement of general conformance in accordance
with IR A-18. Also see Section 3 below.
3.
Deferred Approvals:
A California licensed architect or registered engineer
stamps and signs the plans and specifications for the deferred approval item. The architect
or the engineer in general responsible charge of the design of the project shall submit the
plans and specifications for the deferred approval item, with the notation indicating that the
deferred approval documents have been found to be in general conformance with the design
of the building (Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317 (g)). See DSA IR A-18 for more details on
the Statement of General Conformance.
The Statement of General Conformance shall not be construed as relieving the architect (in
general responsible control) or structural engineer in general responsible charge of his or
her rights, duties, and responsibilities under Sections 17302 and 81138 of the Education
Code and Sections 4-336, 4-341 and 4-344 of Title 24, Part 1. (Title 24, Part 1, Section
4-317 (b))
3.1 Overstamping: If the architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge
had exercised responsible charge (per Business and Professions Code, Section 6703) in the
preparation of the deferred approval documents, he or she may overstamp and sign those
documents.
4.
Pre-Check (PC) Documents: The requirements of Section 2 above shall apply.
See also Section 6.1 of DSA Procedure PR 07-01, Pre-Check (PC) Approval Procedure, for
additional requirements. For changes to an approved PC document, see Section 2 of IR A18, and Sections 7 and 8 of this IR.
5.
Site or Landscape Work: The architect or structural engineer in general

responsible charge of a project may delegate the portions of the site work or landscape
work containing access compliance and fire life safety features. Documents for these
portions of a project may be prepared, stamped and signed by a competent (see Title 16,
Division 5, Section 6731) civil engineer or landscape architect, as permitted by the Business
and Professions Code Sections 6731 and 5615, respectively.
5.1
Civil Engineers: If the entire project consists of only site work and/or non-school
buildings (Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-314), a California registered civil engineer may
assume general responsible charge for the project.
5.2
Landscape Architect: If the entire project consists of only landscape work and/or
non-school buildings, a California registered landscape architect may assume general
responsible charge for the project.
6.
Assumption of Responsibility for Incomplete Documents: If construction
documents, deferred approval documents, PC documents, etc. bear the signature and stamp
of an architect or engineer who has left the project, deceased, or whose license or
registration has been revoked, cancelled, or retired before his/her design or construction
DSA IR A-19
(rev 04-07-08)

Page 3 of 3
was completed, another licensed architect or registered engineer shall assume responsibility
for the project or the portion of the project for which the original architect or engineer was
delegated responsibility, in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Sections 4-316(c) and (d).
7.
Re-Stamping/Re-Signing of Completed Documents:
7.1 When Re-Stamping/Re-signing not required: Once a set of documents is properly

stamped and signed by an architect or engineer whose license or registration was current at
the time of signing, it is considered valid. Re-stamping and re-signing of valid documents
are not required except as listed in Section 7.2 below. DSA shall have the final decision on
whether re-stamping/re-signing is required or not.
Death of the Architect or Engineer: If an architect or engineer dies, any valid
documents that were signed while he/she was alive and his/her license was current at
the time of signing should be considered valid after death unless there is cause.
Expired, Suspended, or Revoked Licenses: similar to Section 7.1 above.
7.2 When Re-Stamping/Re-signing Is Required: Re-stamping and re-signing of valid
documents are generally not required unless there are probable causes. Some of the
probable causes for re-stamping and re-signing are, but not limited to, the following:
The architect or engineer of record exercises his/her right to assume responsibility in
accordance with Section 7 of this IR.
The stamps and signatures were improperly or fraudulently placed on the documents.
The documents have become expired or void.
7.3
Changes to Valid Documents: See IR A-18, Section 2.
NEW PROJECTS ASSOCIATED WITH

EXISTING UNCERTIFIED PROJECTS
References:
Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-339
California Education Code, Sections 17280-17316 and 81130-81147
Discipline: All
IR A-20
Revised 08-06-09
Issued 04-15-08
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies the Division of the State Architect
(DSA) review and approval of projects associated with uncertified school buildings.
Background: A certification of compliance is issued by DSA for a public school building

project when the work of construction has been completed in accordance with the
requirements of the Field Act, Education Code Sections 17280-17316 and Sections 8113081147.
Any building project that has not received a certification of compliance in
accordance with Section 4-339, Part 1, Title 24, California Code of Regulations is considered
uncertified.
Policy:
New work involving uncertified projects cannot be approved by DSA until the
issue of certification is resolved. DSA will not approve (stampout) plans and specifications
for alteration and/or addition projects on, or utilizing portions of, uncertified projects except
when the new project is solely for the purpose of upgrading fire-life safety (FLS) aspects of
the building/campus as indicated below.
1.
EXCEPTIONS:
1.1
Scopes: The scopes of the projects accepted for DSA approval under this policy
shall be limited to FLS alterations of the following types:
1.2
1.3
Campus or system-wide fire alarm upgrade, or
Upgrade or replacement of the uncertified buildings fire alarm system.
Implementation: DSA will review and approve the FLS only alteration projects on
uncertified buildings as described in Section 1.1 above. DSA written approval of the
alteration plans and specifications issued to the school district will specify:
The approval is only for the FLS alterations, and
The building itself remains uncertified.
Disclosure: The scopes of the projects and the uncertified buildings on the
alteration project must be clearly identified in the following manner:
DSA IR A-20
(rev 08-06-09)
The scope of the alteration project shall be clearly shown on the cover sheet or
index sheet of the plans,
New Projects Associated with

Existing Uncertified Projects
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR A-20
(rev 08-06-09)

Page 2 of 3
The following disclosure statement shall also be shown on the cover sheet or
index sheet:
DSA approval of these plans shall not be construed as the
Certification of Compliance for the following building(s) as required
by the Field Act, Education Code Section 17280-17316 and Sections
81130-81147: and
Immediately after the disclosure statement, list all the uncertified buildings on
the alteration project.
2.0 Other Projects: DSA may begin review of other projects not identified in Section
1 above, associated with uncertified projects. However, DSA approval (stamp out) of the
plans and specifications shall be withheld until the issue of certification is resolved.
Appendix Clarifying Situations:
Many situations occur that may or may not involve uncertified buildings/projects to
the extent that a proposed new project may be affected. This appendix lists some of
those situations in an attempt to provide clarity, uniformity and consistency in the
application of this IR.
#1:
Q. The district submits a project for a fire alarm upgrade and/or fire alarm addition.
The project requires connecting the new fire alarm system/components into a fire
alarm panel that resides in an uncertified building.
A. See 1.2 Implementation above except:
The new project submittal must include the following two documents from NFPA
72 to be completed and submitted with the project.
1. Fire alarm system record of completion.
2. Fire alarm inspection and testing form.
#2:
Q. A school building is not certified and the district submits an application to DSA for
an alteration or addition to that building.
A. DSA will accept the new application and provide plan review but will not issue
project approval (stampout) until and unless the issue of certification is resolved.
#3:
Q. The district submits an application to DSA for a new building but the new building
depends on portions of an uncertified project to be minimum code compliant (e.g.
accessible restrooms located in uncertified buildings, path-of-travel part of an
uncertified project, parking part of an uncertified project, etc.).
A. DSA will accept the new application and provide plan review but will not issue final
approval (stamp out) until and unless the associated project certification is
resolved. (See also Project Certification Guide on DSA website for potential
alternatives.)
DSA IR A-20
(rev 08-06-09)

Page 3 of 3
#4:
Q. The district submits an application to DSA for a new project on a campus but the
entire campus (or portions of the campus) is not certified.
A. As long as the new project does not depend on uncertified construction to satisfy
minimum code requirement (accessible restrooms, path-of-travel, parking, etc.)
DSA will accept the new project as a viable, approvable project.
#5:
Q. The district submits an application to DSA for a new classroom building but
another ancillary building (gymnasium, administration building, shade structure,
library etc.) is not certified.
A. As long as the new project does not depend on uncertified construction to satisfy
minimum code requirement (accessible restrooms, path-of-travel, parking, etc.)
DSA will accept the new project as a viable, approvable project.
DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

OF FIRE ALARM (F/A) SYSTEMS
References:
California Building Standards Code (CBSC) Title 24 Part 1,
Sections 4-225(c) and 4-316 (e)
California Business and Professions Code, Sections 7026.12 & 7058
C.C.R., Title 16, Professional and Vocational Regulations,
Division 8, Article 3, Classifications and Section 832.16
Health & Safety Code 13195 & 13196.5
2002 or Current National Fire Alarm Code - NFPA 72
IR A-21
Revised 08-25-09
Issued 04-15-09
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies who is qualified in California to
design, install, and maintain fire alarm systems (F/A) for projects under the jurisdiction of
the Division of the State Architect (DSA), according to the requirements of the California
State Licensing Board (CSLB) and applicable referenced standards for all F/A installations in
public schools, community colleges, and state essential services buildings.
1.
Who Can Design F/A Systems:
1.1
All system design and installation must comply with 2002 NFPA 72 Section 4.3.2. An
Electrical Engineer or a C-10 licensed electrical contractor is authorized to design the
system within the parameters of their license.
1.2
When the architect or engineer in general responsible charge utilizes construction

documents prepared, signed, and/or stamped by other professionals, such as a Fire
Protection Engineer or a National Institute of Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) III and/or IV certified person, the architect or engineer in
general responsible charge must stamp and sign those documents. DSA will accept
the Statement of General Conformance, shown in Appendix A, of DSA IR A-18 (see
http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Pubs/default.htm) in lieu of the signature and seal (or
stamp) from the architect or engineer in general responsible charge (Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-225(c) or 4-316(e)).
2.
Who Can Install F/A Systems?:
2.1
The installation of F/A systems designed by an Electrical Engineer or other

individuals as noted in Section 1.2 above, may be contracted out to other firms
qualified to install F/A systems.
2.2
Any system designed by a C-10 licensed electrical contractor must be installed by

that contractor with his/her own employees and under the supervision of the licenseholder. Such systems may not be installed by another company or individual not
professionally associated with the licensed installation contractor.
DSA IR A-21
(rev 08-25-09)
Design, Installation and Maintenance

of Fire Alarm (F/A) Systems
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR A-21
(iss 08-25-09)

Page 2 of 3
2.2.1
Sub-contracting of either the design or installation by the contracted C-10

licensed electrical contractor is allowed within the parameters of contract law.
However the original C-10 licensed electrical contractor will remain the supervisor
and must retain liability and insurance responsibility for both design and
construction.
2.2.2
AB 931 (Electricians Certification Program) is a law passed in 1999, along with

other bills AB 1078, and AB 1719, which amends Section 3099 of the California
Labor Code. This section of the Labor Code now requires ALL Electrician
Employees of C-10 licensed electrical contractors working on circuits that exceed
100 VA in the State of California to be tested, and "certified" by the State to
perform work under an Electrical Contractors (C10) license. Effective January 1,
2006, General Journeyman and Fire/Life Safety Technicians must carry cards,
issued by the Division of Apprenticeship Standards (DAS), that prove they are
certified, and which must be presented to the authority having jurisdiction, upon
request of the code enforcement official.
2.2.3
As per 2002 NFPA 72: Section 4.3.3, F/A system installation personnel shall be
supervised by persons who are qualified and experienced in the installation,
inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
2.3
Electrical Engineer;
Factory trained and certified personnel, working under the supervision of a C10 licensed electrical contractor;
National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire

alarm level II certified personnel working under the supervision of a C-10
licensed electrical contractor; and
Personnel licensed or certified by state or local authority.
Systems designed and submitted utilizing one manufacturers equipment may be

substituted for a different manufacturers equipment provided the substitution is
accomplished via the DSA Change Order process, and must include the following:
2.3.1
New Manufacturers applicable product data sheets; and
2.3.2
Battery and Voltage Drop calculations to match the new product data sheets; and
2.3.3
Any location changes, additions or deletions of devices or appliances must be

shown on updated floor plans.
2.4
NICET certification is a recommended, but not a minimum requirement in California

for California State Agencies.
2.5
Local Ordinances requiring less or additional measures, devices, or appliances shall

not apply to public school facilities and may not be required by the Local Fire
Authority or any other local entity (Hall vs City of Taft).
3.
Who Can Maintain F/A Systems?:
3.1
Fire Alarm Systems shall be maintained by qualified persons, such as a person

trained by the manufacturer to maintain the system. See NFPA 72, Chapter 10,
10.2.2.5; examples of qualified persons.
DSA IR A-21
(iss 08-25-09)

Page 3 of 3
3.2
Programming of Fire Alarm Control Panels shall be done by factory authorized and
trained personnel.
3.3
Warranties may be compromised if systems are not maintained according to

recognized standards and manufacturers guidelines.
4.
Testing of Fire Alarm Systems:
4.1
Acceptance Testing: Acceptance testing of projects under DSA construction

oversight shall be performed by the C-10 licensed electrical contractors qualified
supervisory personnel or their installing technicians and witnessed by the Project
Inspector.
4.1.1
The Local Fire Authority may be invited, as a courtesy, to witness the final
acceptance test of the DSA approved system so the Local Fire Authority can
become familiar with the workings of the system and the systems configurations.
The Local Fire Authority is not obligated to witness the test nor authorized to
delay the testing until witnessing can be scheduled.
4.1.2
The Local Fire Authority may not require but may ask for or recommend changes
to the DSA approved system. A Change Order shall be generated and processed
through DSA. Initiation of any change shall not be performed without prior
approval of DSA.
4.2
Annual Testing: The fire alarm systems shall be tested in compliance with 2002
NFPA 72: Chapter 10, Table 10.4.3. In addition, the Local Authority is charged with
inspecting all schools within their jurisdiction at least annually. During the inspection
of the facility, a functional test of the fire alarm system and evacuation drill shall be
performed to ensure that the system performs as originally approved by DSA. The
testing can be done by qualified individuals trained by the installer, or by individuals
employed and qualified by the installing C-10 licensed electrical contractor or by
individuals employed by a qualified C-10 licensed electrical testing company.
Witnessing of the Test and Evacuation Drill shall be performed by the Local Fire
Authority.
4.3
Testing after maintenance or repair: Testing performed after maintenance or

repairs have been performed shall be made by repair/maintenance technicians
trained and/or qualified by the manufacturer or as noted in NFPA 72, Chapter 10,
10.2.2.
4.3.1
Systems that require extensive replacement, modernization, or upgrade shall be

submitted to DSA for review and approval (see IR A-10). Witnessing of tests
after routine maintenance or minor repair shall be done by the Local Fire
Authority. The responsibility of the Local Fire Authority is to ensure that the
system operates as originally installed and approved by DSA.
SMALL PROJECTS EXEMPT

FROM DSA REVIEW
IR A-22
References:
California Building Code, Part 1, Section 4-314, Part 2, Section 1134B
Discipline: Structural, Fire-Life Safety, Access Compliance
Issued 08-15-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify when plans
and specifications for small construction projects on existing public school sites are required
to be submitted to the Division of the State Architect (DSA) for review, approval and
construction oversight.
1.
Access Compliance Requirements: Some projects that are exempt from the
2.
California Building Standards Code Compliance: Projects subject to the
Field Act (Education Code Sections 17280-17317, 17365-17374, and 81130-81149) are
required to be submitted to DSA for review and approval by the Access Compliance Section
of DSA. See Government Code Sections 4450-4461. Also see Appendix A of this IR for
projects that fall into this category.
Field Act but not requiring DSA approval shall comply with all currently effective design,
construction and inspection provisions of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24. When
authorizing construction of projects described in this interpretation, the school district
assumes responsibility to assure compliance with all code provisions. Architects and
engineers providing project design must be licensed as required by the rules governing the
licensing of architects and engineers. See Business and Profession Code Sections 6735 and
5535 through 5538.
All projects, whether governed by the Field Act or not, shall comply with all applicable
accessibility provisions of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
3.
Exempt Small Projects: See Appendix A for a list of small projects and the
review requirements for Structural Safety (SS), Fire-Life Safety (FLS) and/or Access
Compliance (AC). Items listed in the Appendix are exempt only when they constitute the
entire scope of a project.
4.
Exempt Reconstruction and Alterations: In addition to projects listed in

Appendix A, projects involving alterations, repairs or additions to existing school buildings
may be exempt from DSA review and approval based on the estimated construction costs.
Refer to IR A-10, Reconstruction and Alteration Projects Exemption from DSA Approval.
5.
Voluntary Submittal: This interpretation does not preclude a school district from
choosing to submit plans and specifications for exempt projects, with the appropriate fee to
DSA for review. Voluntary submittal of an exempt project will trigger full DSA plan review
for code conformance and construction oversight including inspections and materials
testing.
DSA (SS) IR A-22 (iss 08-15-08)

corrected 12-17-09
Small Projects Exempt

From DSA Review
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR A-22 (iss 08-15-08)

corrected 12-17-09

From DSA Review
Page 2 of 3
Appendix A Review of Small Projects

Those items eligible for exemption listed below are exempt from DSA review and approval only when
they constitute the entire scope of a project.
Project Description
1. Poles less than 35 feet tall (lighting poles,
flag poles, poles supporting open mesh
fences, etc.)
2. Poles less than 25 feet above the roof line
when attached to an existing school building
(antennas, flag poles, etc.)
3. Cell or antenna towers
4. Soil retaining walls less than 4 feet tall
without surcharge or a sloping backfill
5. Baseball dugouts less than 250 sq. ft. of
floor area with lightweight roof construction
and walls less than 4 feet tall resisting
(active, passive or at rest) soil pressure
with no sloping backfills or surcharge.
6. Ball walls or yard walls less than 6 feet
above grade
7. Free standing signs, scrolling message signs,
scoreboards, or solid clad fences less than 8
feet above grade
8. Bleachers and grandstands five rows of seats
or less
9. Ancillary accessory facilities to athletic fields
with light metal or wood frame construction
(one-story, not over 250 square feet, used
for equipment storage, toilets, snack bars,
ticket booths, etc.)
10. Playground equipment
11. Large playground equipment resembling
buildings and over 250 square feet
12. Open-mesh baseball backstops
13. Open-mesh fences
14. New or replacement of sidewalks
15. Landscaping
16. Replacement in kind of mechanical,
electrical, or plumbing units when the cost
does not exceed the thresholds in IR A-10
17. Cosmetic maintenance work such as
painting, re-carpeting, wallpapering,
reroofing, etc., as defined in Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-314.
SS/FLS Review
Required?
Yes
No
Access Compliance
Review Required?
Yes
No
1
2
1,4
3
4
DSA (SS) IR A-22 (iss 08-15-08)

corrected 12-17-09

From DSA Review
18. Installation of synthetic (artificial turf) play

fields or running tracks
19. Installation of new parking areas
20. Installation of new surfacing over existing
parking areas (such as asphalt overlays)
21. Removal and replacement of existing
parking area surfacing
22. Installation of seal-coating at existing
parking areas (including new striping), or
normal maintenance such as restriping or
the filling of potholes and cracks
Page 3 of 3
Notes: 1. No height limit for Access Compliance exemption

2. Required for all, no exception.
3. Access Compliance will review the accessible path of travel to the playground/facility
4. Required if accessible path of travel is impacted
5. If accessible parking spaces are impacted
CONSTRUCTION COST REPORTING

AND DSA FEES
Reference: Title 24, Part 1 Sections 4-322, 4-331, 4-343
IR A-23
Issued 11-03-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify tasks that are
considered to be construction tasks subject to DSA fee calculation.
Background: Alternative project delivery systems have been developed in recent years
that assign certain construction related responsibilities to construction managers or other
entities. Some of these duties were traditionally performed by the construction contractor.
Such duties must be included in calculating construction costs which are used to determine
final fees due to DSA.
Note: Although certain portions of the Construction Management fees will be considered
construction related costs and utilized in determining DSA fees, please be aware that the
Office of Public School Construction (OPSC) does not consider these costs to be construction
related for purposes of having funds released in the School Facility Program with certain
exceptions. Please consult with the OPSC for further clarification of these Construction
Management exception areas.
1.
DSA Fees: Final DSA fees are based on the total final construction cost for the
project. The initial contract amount is reported to DSA on a Contract Information Form
(Form DSA-102). All changes to construction cost are tracked via change orders during the
course of construction to arrive at a final construction cost. Construction management costs
for the project are subject to DSA fees when such management fees constitute a portion of
the construction cost. See Section 3 below for clarification of services that are considered
to be part of the construction cost. Construction management fees paid for services that
are not related to construction are not subject to DSA fees except per Section 1.2 below.
1.1
If school district employees, or volunteers, perform substantial construction work,

the estimated value of the work shall be reported on Form DSA-102. The name of
the person responsible for the construction shall also be specified on Form DSA-102.
At the conclusion of construction, the person responsible shall file a final verified
report as the designated contractor on Form DSA-6, certifying that all construction
was performed in accordance with DSA approved documents.
1.2
When an entity is contracted to perform any of the services described in Section 2.

below then the entire contract amount shall be reported to DSA on Form DSA-102
and shall be subject to DSA fees, even if part of the services included in the contract
would not otherwise be subject to fees.
DSA IR A-23
(iss 11-03-08)
Construction Cost Reporting

and DSA Fees
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR A-23

(iss 11-03-08)

and DSA Fees
Page 2 of 3
Exceptions:
1. If non-construction costs are segregated by separate contract payment
items, by separately priced items of change orders, or by a certified copy of a
subcontractors bid, or by an entitys proposal in accordance with Title 24,
Part 1, Section 4-322 then the non-construction costs shall not be subject to
DSA fees.
2. DSA fees for entities (e.g.: Construction Managers, Program Managers, etc.)
may be prorated based on percentage of time spent on construction tasks.
1.3
The value of donated materials and/or materials provided by the school district must
be reported on Form DSA-102.
1.4
Each submittal of contract information is to be made on Form DSA-102. Each

contract must be identified by a contract number in consecutive order to assist in
record keeping and future reference. Such identification must be noted on change
orders which affect that contract.
Change orders for each contract shall be
numbered in sequence starting with number one (see IR A-6 for further information
on change orders).
1.5
When a single contract covers work described in more than one DSA application the
cost relevant to each application shall be clearly broken out and a separate Form
DSA-102 shall be submitted for each application. Also, change order costs shall be
broken out for each application and clearly described on each change order.
2.
Definition of Construction: Any entity, including construction managers, that
performs construction tasks as defined in Section 3 below shall be subject to all the rules
and requirements applicable to construction contractors including but not limited to:
Entities contracted to perform construction are not permitted to be involved in

hiring, supervising or performing testing or inspection services.
Shall be identified on a Contract Information Form (Form DSA-102) which shall

be submitted to DSA prior to start of construction.
Shall be subject to all inspection and testing requirements applicable to

construction contractors including deviation notices per Section 4-342(b)7 of Title
24, Part 1.
Shall be subject to requirements of Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-343.
3.
Construction Tasks: Contracts to perform construction tasks shall be deemed

by DSA to be construction contracts, and shall therefore be reported (on a Contract
Information Form DSA-102). Costs of such contracts shall be included in final DSA fee
calculations. Construction tasks include, but are not limited to, the following:
Performing, hiring, contracting, or subcontracting for construction work. (Note:

assisting the school district with the preparation, advertising and bidding of prime
contracts between the school district and a construction contractor shall not be
considered a construction cost by DSA);
Purchasing construction materials;
Coordinating, scheduling, supervising or controlling multiple-prime contractors;
Directing or coordinating day-to-day

contractors or subcontractors;
activities
of
construction
workers,
DSA (SS) IR A-23

(iss 11-03-08)

and DSA Fees
Page 3 of 3
Providing temporary facilities including but not limited to site trailers, furnishings,
equipment, utilities, etc. for contractors, inspectors or other personnel;
Obtaining and/or paying for local permits and/or arranging for the delivery of
power, telephone, water and other temporary utilities required for construction;
Providing construction site security;
Developing detailed construction schedule(s);
Providing quality control and/or safety audits of contractors;
Arranging for permanent utility hook-ups for the new construction;
Requesting, directing or arranging for inspections of fire alarm systems, food

service systems, elevators, or other similar construction;
Arranging for a fire watch during construction for the construction site and/or
for existing buildings while fire safety systems are non-functional for any reason
as a result of the construction;
Providing clean-up work including the removal of trash and/or construction

debris.
CONSTRUCTION PHASE DUTIES OF THE SCHOOL

DISTRICT, CONTRACTOR, AND DESIGNER
IR A-24
Reference: Education Code Sections 17280-17311 and 81130-81147

Title 24, Part 1 Sections 4-315, 4-316, 4-333, 4-335, 4-336, 4-338, 4-341, 4-342, and 4-343
Issued 11-03-08
IRs. Only IRs listed in the document at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Publications/default.htm (click on DSA Interpretation of
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide background

for school districts so that contracts for construction management, project administration or
other alternate delivery methods are properly written. Specifically, this interpretation will:
clarify the duties of the school district, designer and the construction contractor with
regard to the construction phase of the project, and
clarify potential conflicts of interest with regard to construction, inspection and

construction oversight.
General: The school district may contract with construction managers or other entities for
assistance with monitoring the design and/or construction process. Construction phase
duties that must be performed by specific entities per Title 24, Part 1 are listed in this IR.
These duties may not be re-assigned to other entities. (Exception: Some of the duties of
the construction contractor may be performed by a construction manager however; DSA
might then consider the construction manager contract as a construction contract. See
Section 5.3 below.)
See IR A-23 for definitions of activities that are considered construction tasks.
1.
DUTIES OF THE SCHOOL DISTRICT:
1.1
Design: The school board shall employ (or contract to) a qualified architect or
structural engineer to be in general responsible charge of the design of the project.
The designer shall not perform construction nor share any interest with any entity
performing construction.
Exceptions:
1. When the project involves no structural or architectural construction a
qualified engineer registered in that branch of engineering applicable to the work
may be in general responsible charge of the project; see Title 24, Part 1, Section
4-316.
2. The designer need not be independent of the builder when the design/build
requirements of Education Code Sections 17250.10 through 17250.50 are met.
1.2
Inspection: The school board shall provide for the cost of inspections by the project
inspector and, when required, all assistant and/or special inspectors. In general, the
project inspector and any assistant inspectors must be contracted directly to (or
DSA (SS) IR A-24

(iss 11-03-08)
Construction Phase Duties of the School

District, Contractor, and Designer
Page 1 of 4
DSA (SS) IR A-24

(iss 11-03-08)

Page 2 of 4
directly employed by) the school board. The school board may contract to a third
party for the project or assistant inspectors employment only under the condition
that the inspectors employer shall not perform, nor offer to perform, any design or
construction related tasks (see IR A-23, Section 2). Special inspectors may only be
contracted directly to (or employed by) the school board or the testing laboratory.
1.3
Testing: The school board shall contract directly to a testing laboratory for the
performance of structural tests as defined by the DSA approved plans and
specifications and summarized on Form DSA-103. The testing laboratory must be
accepted in the DSA Laboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) program, see IR
17-5. Note that the school board may collect the cost of certain tests from the
contractor in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-335(c).
1.4
Soils Investigations and Testing: The school board shall contract directly with a
California registered geotechnical engineer for the performance of soils and geologic
investigations (for design) when required. During construction the school board shall
contract directly with an LEA accepted testing laboratory which employs or contracts
with a registered geotechnical engineer for soils testing, see IR 17-7.
1.5
Notice of Completion: The school board shall submit a notice of completion to DSA
for each contract upon satisfactory completion of construction shown on the DSA
approved documents.
2.
DUTIES OF THE DESIGNER(S):
The architect or engineer in general

responsible charge of the project is responsible to see that completed construction conforms
to plans and specifications approved by DSA and shall perform the following duties:
2.1
Prior to Start of Construction:

Prepare drawings and specifications for construction.
Prepare a Statement of Tests and Special Inspection (Form DSA-103).
Obtain DSA approval of drawings, specifications, and Form DSA-103 prior to the
issuance of any contracts for construction.
Review and evaluate the qualifications and experience of the testing laboratory and
all project, assistant and special inspectors prior to employment.
Advise the school district on the selection of the inspectors and testing laboratory for
the project.
Submit an Inspectors Qualification Record (Form DSA-5 and/or DSA-5A) for all
project, assistant, and (when required) special inspectors to DSA at least 10 days
prior to start of work.
Submit a Contract Information Form (Form DSA-102) for all construction contracts.
See IR A-23 for definitions of construction costs.
Provide a complete set of all DSA approved documents including the T&I List (Form
DSA-103), addenda, deferred approvals, change orders and field change
documents (see IR A-6) to the inspector and the testing laboratory.
2.2
During Construction:
2.2.1 Observe Construction:
Make observations of construction as required by Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(a).

Also, see Section 4-316(b) regarding delegation of responsibility.
DSA (SS) IR A-24

(iss 11-03-08)

Page 3 of 4
Verify that the DSA approved documents are being properly interpreted and
implemented by all parties and that construction is proceeding in accordance with
DSA approved documents.
2.2.2 Construction Administration:
Review shop drawings and submittals and respond in a timely manner; verify that
shop drawings and submittals conform to the requirements of the DSA approved
drawings.
Review and respond in a timely manner to all requests for information (RFIs) from
the contractors, inspectors, and testing laboratories. Verify that all RFIs from
contractors are passed through the project inspector in accordance with Title 24, Part
1, Section 4-343(b).
Evaluate non-conforming construction and/or materials and make decisions regarding acceptability and/or corrections required; notify DSA as to the disposition of
all non-conforming construction and/or materials.
Provide general direction to the project inspector and notify the school board and
DSA by letter if the project inspector is found unable or unwilling to perform his or
her duties.
2.2.3 Interpretations, Clarifications and Changes:
2.3
Issue clarifications and/or interpretations of DSA approved documents as required.
Create and submit all addenda, deferred approvals, change orders, and FCDs to DSA
for approval.
Issue change orders or Field Change Documents (FCDs), in accordance with IR A-6,
as required to correct any errors or omissions in the DSA approved documents.
3.
At the conclusion of Construction:

Submit a final verified report on Form DSA-6A/E.
Administer the closing process by verifying that all required documents are
submitted to DSA, responding to DSA 90-day letters, and taking such actions that
may be necessary to make sure that all required documents are submitted to DSA in
a timely manner.
DUTIES OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR:
3.1
Preparation for Construction:
Submit a Statement of Responsibility to the project inspector in accordance with

Title 24, Part 2, Section 1706A.
Carefully review the DSA approved construction documents well in advance of

construction and request clarification, interpretation or correction for any items that
appear unclear, inconsistent, missing, or in error. All such requests shall be made to
the architect or engineer in general responsible charge through the project inspector.
Provide a written construction schedule to the project inspector well in advance of

performing the work and keep the inspector up-to-date with all changes to the
schedule.
3.2
Performance of Construction:
Perform all construction in accordance with DSA approved documents.
Provide quality control of all work including the work of all subcontractors.
DSA (SS) IR A-24

(iss 11-03-08)

Page 4 of 4
Immediately correct any construction that is not in accordance with DSA approved
documents. Note: the contractor may elect to request changes to the requirements
of the DSA approved documents from the architect rather than replace noncompliant work when it is in the best interest of the school district and the public
safety to do so. See Section 2.2.3 above for changes to DSA approved documents.
Notify the project inspector, special inspectors, and the testing laboratory of the start
of each and every aspect of the construction.
Provide access to the construction for all inspectors, testing laboratory personnel and
DSA representatives.
Submit a final verified report on Form DSA-6.
4.
DUTIES OF THE PROJECT INSPECTOR:
See IR A-8 and Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-342 for the duties of the project inspector.
5.
CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS: The term construction manager as used in this

interpretation is intended to apply to any consultant to the school district contracted to
assist with project planning, monitoring of design and/or monitoring of construction.
Construction managers do not have Code required duties; all duties assigned to construction
managers are contractual.
5.1
Construction management contracts vary in scope from project to project. Tasks
that may be included in a construction management contract include but are not limited to:
Monitoring the progress of construction;
Monitoring pay requests;
Monitoring the Request for Information (RFI) process;
Facilitating communications;
Advising the school district on various aspects of the construction process.
5.2
Construction managers are not permitted to perform duties that are assigned by
Code to the school district, designers, testing laboratory or the inspectors (see paragraph 1,
2, and 4 above).
5.3
When construction managers contract to perform construction tasks (as defined in IR
A-23) the construction manager will be considered to be a construction contractor and will
be subject to all the duties and responsibilities of a construction contractor (see paragraph 3
above). Also, the cost of the construction management contract shall be considered to be
part of the total construction cost used to calculate the final DSA fee (see IR A-23).
DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE OF

AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS (AFSS)
IR A-25
References:
2007 CBSC Title 24 Part 1, Sections 4-209, 4-225 (c) and 4-316(e)
2002 NFPA 13 and 24
California Business and Professions Code, Sections 6737.1, 7026.12, 7057 & 7058
C.C.R., Title 16, Professional and Vocational Regulations, Section 832.16
Health & Safety Code 13195 & 13196.5
Discipline: Fire and Life Safety
Issued 05-26-09
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies who is qualified in California to
design, install, and maintain automatic fire sprinkler systems (AFSS) for projects under the
jurisdiction of the Division of the State Architect (DSA), according to the requirements of
the Contractors State Licensing Board (CSLB) and applicable referenced standards.
1.
General Requirements: Any AFSS, both underground and overhead portions,
submitted to DSA for approval shall meet the following requirements.
1.1
Design Professional (DP): For the purpose of this IR, the architect or engineer in
general responsible charge [sometimes called the Architect Of Record (AOR) or the
Engineer Of Record (EOR)] shall be referred to as the design professional (DP).
The DP is at all times responsible for the design and construction oversight and must
coordinate the pipe sizes and designs with hydrant requirements and the anticipated
demand of the fire sprinkler system(s) that will be fed by the underground piping.
1.1.1
Fire Protection Engineer (FPE): An FPE is an individual licensed in the state of

California and able to design underground or overhead portions of an AFSS.
1.1.2
Contractors: A Class A (General Engineering Contractor), Class C-16 (Fire

Protection Contractor), Class C-34 (Underground Piping Contractor) Class C-36
(Plumbing Contractor) contractors may design and install systems, within the
parameters of their license, as long as the systems designed are installed by that
contractor or employees under the supervision of the license-holder. Such
systems may not be installed by another company or individual not professionally
associated with the licensed design/build contractor.
1.1.3
Subcontracting of Design or Installation: Sub-contracting of either the

design or installation portion of the AFSS by the contracted General A, C-16, C34, or C-36 licensed contractor must follow the parameters of Contract Law.
However the original licensed General A, C-16, C-34 or C-36 contractor shall
remain the supervisor and must retain liability and insurance responsibility for
both design and construction.
1.1.4
Design/Build Contractor:
For the purposes of this IR, a design/build
contractor is a contractor with a General A, C-16, C-34 or a C-36 contractors
DSA IR A-25
(iss 05-26-09)
Design, Installation and Maintenance of

Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems (AFSS)
Page 1 of 4
DSA IR A-25
(iss 05-26-09)

Page 2 of 4
license who submits a bid for a contract, is subsequently awarded a contract to

design, and then builds to that design a portion or portions of an AFSS. A C-16
contractor may design/build underground, Backflow Preventers, Double Detector
Check Valves, Gate Valves, Hydrants, Fire Pumps and/or other pressure reducing
or increasing devices, and overhead portions of the AFSS. A General A and a C34 contractor may design/build the underground portion, including exterior
(outside of the building) Backflow Preventers, Double Detector Check Valves,
Gate Valves, Hydrants, Fire Pumps, and/or other pressure reducing or increasing
devices of the AFSS,. A C-36 may design/build the underground portion, from
the property owners side of the utility meter to the structure or fixed work,
(outside of the building) including Backflow Preventers, Double Detector Check
Valves, Gate Valves, Hydrants, Fire Pumps, and/or other pressure reducing or
increasing devices of the AFSS
1.2
Construction Documents: When the DP utilizes construction documents prepared

by other professionals, such as a Fire Protection Engineer, a Class A (general
Engineering Contractor), C-16 (Fire Protection Contractor), Class C-34 (Underground
Piping Contractor), or a C- 36 (Plumbing Contractor) the DP must stamp and sign
those documents. In lieu of the signature and seal (or stamp) of the DP, DSA will
accept the Statement of General Conformance from the DP. See Appendix A and B of
DSA IR A-18.
1.3
Water Supply Data: Water supply data must be included with the initial plans and
specification submittal per current edition of the NFPA 13. Systems that require fire
pumps, water tanks, or other measures to provide required water flow and or
pressures must be pre-approved by DSA and submitted with the AFSS plans.
Water flow testing data must indicate the volume and pressure available for the
AFSS design. Testing data must be dated and may not be older than 6 months from
the date of submittal of documents to DSA. Submittal of test data to DSA shall be
wet signed by the Water Purveyor, or by the Local Fire Authority that conducted or
witnessed the test. If the AFSS is to be a deferred submittal, water supply data
must be included with the deferred submittal.
The original water supply
documentation may be duplicated and included with the deferred AFSS package if
the date of the water flow test is equal to or less than 6 months old at the time of
the deferred submittal. Submittals that exceed the 6 month time frame will require
additional tests and documentation. The time frame will be based upon the actual
date the deferred submittal was received by DSA.
1.4
Plans: The following information shall appear on all plans. (For a more detailed
guideline, and additional required information see Fire and Life-Safety Plan Review
Submittal Guidelines AFSS on the DSA Web Site.)
Note The term elevation in the following is used to mean the depth or height of
equipment or features noted on plans as a point above or below grade where
the underground piping supplies the AFSS riser or risers.
1.4.1
Test Hydrants: Test hydrants, static and residual, must be located and
identified, including the hydrant elevations.
1.4.2
Water Supply: Location and elevation of main feeds at point of connection with
public water supplies, water tanks, or other water supplies approved by DSA.
Hydraulic calculations must include all points of connection, devices, valves or
other equipment that affects the water flow and pressure.
1.4.3
Devices and Valves: The locations and identification (by type, model and
manufacturer) of all Backflow Preventers, Double Detector Check Valves, Gate
DSA IR A-25
(iss 05-26-09)

Page 3 of 4
Valves, Hydrants, Fire Pumps and/or other pressure reducing or increasing

devices shall be noted on the plans. Manufacturers product data sheets shall be
provided with the submittal.
Pressure reducing or increasing component
manufacturers product data sheets shall include the GPM/PSI flow charts,
curves, and any other documentation to confirm the reduction or increase of
pressures. Provide dimensioned details of all components, including elevations,
methods of support, supervision (monitoring), securing, freeze protection and
working clearances for firefighters.
1.4.4
Piping: Indicate all elevation changes, turns, and pipe size or type changes for
underground piping, and indicate the type of fittings (long elbow, Tee, etc.) used
in the underground piping plans.
Changes to the proposed piping plans, due to unknown site conditions or other
reasons, must be submitted to DSA via the DSA Change Order process (see IR A6). Additional or supporting documentation may be required before approval is
granted.
1.4.5
Anchoring of Piping: Methods of securing piping (thrust blocks, restraining

rods, etc.) must be per NFPA 13 and/or NFPA 24. Details of all types utilized
shall be provided on the plans.
Thrust block calculations shall be based upon a soil bearing capacity of 1500
pounds per square foot (PSF). Submitted soils reports that certify undisturbed
soil bearing capacity with a higher value may be used to calculate the thrust
blocks. The report must graphically identify the areas where the test data was
taken and must include the location(s) of the proposed piping.
1.4.6
Risers: Riser locations shall be identified for all AFSS systems.
1.4.7
Building Identification: All buildings shall be identified and given numerical or

alphabetical designations. These building designations shall be carried forward
on all documents for the life of the construction project for continuity and ease of
identification.
2.
Underground Portion:
2.1
Who May Design?: A California registered civil engineer, a registered

mechanical engineer, or a Class General A, Class C-34 or C-16 Licensed
Contractor may design underground piping plans for submittal to DSA, including
exterior (outside of the building) Backflow Preventers, Double Detector Check
Valves, Gate Valves, Hydrants, Fire Pumps, and/or other pressure reducing or
increasing device, with in the parameters of their license. A C-36 licensed
contractor may design/build the underground portion, from the property owners
side of the utility meter to the structure or fixed work, (outside of the building)
including Backflow Preventers, Double Detector Check Valves, Gate Valves,
Hydrants, Fire Pumps, and/or other pressure reducing or increasing devices of
the AFSS.
Designs prepared by registered civil or registered mechanical
engineers must be stamped and signed. All systems must comply with 2002
NFPA 13 and/or NFPA 24 (See Section 1.2 above).
2.2
Who May Install?: A Civil Engineer, Mechanical Engineer, Class General A or

Class C-34 or C-16 licensed contractor, is authorized to install the underground
portion of the system, including exterior (outside of the building) Backflow
DSA IR A-25
(iss 05-26-09)

Page 4 of 4
Preventers, Double Detector Check Valves, Gate Valves, Hydrants, Fire Pumps,
and/or other pressure reducing or increasing device within parameters of their
license. A C-36 may install the underground portion, from the property owners
side of the utility meter to the structure or fixed work, (outside of the building)
including Backflow Preventers, Double Detector Check Valves, Gate Valves,
Hydrants, Fire Pumps, and/or other pressure reducing or increasing devices of
the AFSS, with in the parameters of their license.
California registered civil engineers or registered mechanical engineers may cause
underground piping to be installed under their direction and supervision.
3.
Overhead Portion:
3.1
Who May Design?: The above ground portion of the system may be designed by a
Mechanical Engineer or Fire Protection Engineer, or a design/build C-16 licensed Fire
Protection Contractor, per Title 16, C.C.R., Section 832.16, and California Business
and Professions Code, Sections 7057 & 7058.
3.2
Who May Install?: All systems must comply with 2002 NFPA 13 Section 3.2.1.
and/or NFPA 24. Installation overhead portions of Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems
shall be as follows:
If an above ground system is designed by a Mechanical Engineer or Fire Protection
Engineer, any C-16 licensed Fire Protection Contractor can install the system, per
Title 16, C.C.R., Section 832.16 and California Business and Professions Code,
Sections 7057 & 7058.
Note: Piping installers need not be certified if employed by and working under the
supervision of the contracted C-16 licensed Fire Protection Contractor.
4.
Maintenance of the System: Pursuant to the Business and Professions Code

Section 7048, and 2006 California edition of NFPA 25, the State Fire Marshal requires a
class A Licensed company (Automatic Extinguishing Systems Concern) to repair or replace
those system components up to $500 limit (for labor, materials, and all other items) as
specified by the CSLB. Individuals performing maintenance must have a C-16 license to
perform the required five (5) year maintenance.
4.1
Acceptance or performance testing of an electric fire pump requires the individual

performing the testing to have a C-16 or a C-10 License.
4.2
Owners may perform the monthly inspections.
4.3
Warranties may be compromised if systems are not maintained according to

recognized standards and manufacturers guidelines.
IR A-27
CARGO CONTAINERS
USED AS STORAGE
References:
2001, 2007 California Administrative Code (CAC), Title 24, Part 1,
Sections 4-314
Discipline: Structural, Fire-Life Safety, and Access
Issued 04-19-10
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify the Division of
the State Architect (DSA) definition of school building as it applies to cargo containers used
as storage facilities.
Background: Many California school districts use cargo containers (also known as cargo
boxes, sea vans, or shipping containers) on school campuses to store materials and
emergency supplies.
A cargo container is an industrial, standardized, reusable portable vessel that was originally,
specifically or formally designed for use in the packing, shipping or transportation of goods
or commodities, and designed to be mounted on rail car, truck or ship.
Policy:
The Cargo containers used as storage units are not considered by DSA to be
school buildings. The definition of school building is found in Title 24, Part 1, Section 4314.
1.
Limitations: School districts may install cargo containers as storage units on

school campuses under their own authority and are not required to submit the design to
DSA for review and approval. Cargo containers can only be installed subject to the following
limitations:
1.1
The maximum size is no greater than 10 by 60.
1.2
The height is no greater than 10.
1.3
It is not used to store hazardous material that would trigger Group H occupancy.
1.4
They are not stacked upon each other or elevated by a substructure.
1.5
They are placed directly on even grade (not sloping more than 1:12) and at a
distance of five feet or more away from the top of any descending inclination having
slope greater than 1:12.
1.6
The container is not placed in fire access lanes.
1.7
The container is maintained so that its structural integrity is not compromised.
1.8
The container is not modified by the addition of doors or windows that would
compromise its structural integrity.
1.9
The local fire authority has approved the location.
DSA IR A-27
(iss 04-19-10)
Cargo Containers
Used as Storage
Page 1 of 1
IR A-28
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CHANGES

IN EXISTING BUILDINGS
References:
2007 California Administrative Code (CBC), 4-215
2007 National Fire Protection Pamphlet 72
Issued 04-27-10
SFM Information Bulletin, Fire Alarm Control Unit Replacement in Existing Buildings
Discipline: Fire-Life Safety
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) describes the Division of the State
Architect (DSA) requirements for the complete or partial change of a fire alarm (F/A)
system in an existing building due to obsolescence, catastrophic failure, voluntary
upgrading, or as part of the change order process.
Background: Typical fire alarm submittals consist of both the drawings and specifications
of the various devices intended for installation. At times the fire alarm submittal will include
a totally new system and at other times it will include only a portion of an existing system.
1.
PROCESS: All changes to a fire alarm system (excluding maintenance and some
repairs, as explained in Section 4) require DSA review. Upon completion of the changed,
(added, deleted, etc.) appliances, devices or system, that portion of the Fire Alarm system
in the scope of work shall be inspected and tested as required by NFPA 72. Upon successful
completion of the acceptance or reacceptance inspection and testing, an NFPA 72 Inspection
and Testing form shall be completed by the repairer/installer. A copy of the form, with
signatures, shall be given to the Architect or Engineer of Record, the DSA Project Inspector,
the Owner (School District) and the Local Fire Authority.
1.1
Total F/A System Exchange: Totally exchanging one system for another in
existing buildings requires meeting current code requirements and extending the
system to all areas within the existing structure(s). A full DSA project submittal
would be required.
1.2
Partial System Exchange: It is not required to upgrade the entire building or

campus system (add in other devices or extend current system) when not totally
replacing a system, but the basic submittal package must provide assurance, in the
form of a letter from the fire alarm design professional, certifying that all portions of
the system are compatible. Any new or added components and devices would still
need to meet ADA requirements. The system would not require expansion to all
areas in the building(s) or campus. A DSA submittal package would be needed for
the portion of the system(s) being changed.
2.
Design Requirements: All areas undergoing modernization shall be required to

meet current code requirements with additional appliances added to those areas as needed.
For example:
IR A-28
Iss (04-27-10)
Fire Alarm System Changes

In Existing Buildings
Page 1 of 3
IR A-28
Iss (04-27-10)

Page 2 of 3
2.1
An ADA upgrade to a restroom will require the extension of the fire alarm system
into that restroom. Other portions of the building or campus F/A system would not
need to be included in the project.
2.2
Conversion of an academic classroom to a science laboratory or other

hazardous use area, will require the room or area to meet current code, but would
not trigger a complete upgrade of the fire alarm system for the entire building or
campus.
2.3
Five of the six classrooms in a building are being modernized. A new power
extender panel is also being added. Only the areas affected by the scope of work
will be required to have an upgrade to the fire alarm system.
3.
Changes to Submitted and DSA Approved documents: Where construction plans and documents have been submitted and approved by DSA but the
accepted fire alarm bid package includes a different manufacturer and/or model for
the FACP, Power Extenders, appliances and devices, etc. then the following shall
apply:
3.1
Where the design has not changed (locations of appliances, routing of wire runs,
etc.) and the voltage draws of the substituted appliances and devices is the same or
less than those approved a change order shall be issued.
3.1.1
The Architect or Engineer of Record shall provide a letter from the fire alarm
design professional certifying that the design has not significantly changed and
the appliances and devices have equal or less voltage draws than those originally
submitted, and
3.1.2
Provide the new manufacturers product data sheets (cut sheets) and associated
State Fire Marshal listings for each appliance, device, etc.
3.2
Where substantial changes are made to the design or the voltage draws of the new
manufacturers equipment are higher than those originally approved, then a
revision or an addendum must be submitted to DSA for review and approval.
4.
Repair and Maintenance:
4.1
Repair: Repair of an existing fire alarm system does not require submittal of plans,
specifications or other documents to DSA, except as noted below:
4.1.1
Replacement of all appliances: If all appliances are to be replaced, Section 1.1

above would apply.
4.1.2
Replacement of the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) compatible with

existing appliances: A replacement FACP from a different manufacturer may
be installed if compatible with existing appliances and devices. If not compatible
then Section 1.1 above would apply since all associated appliances would also
need replacement.
4.2.
Maintenance: Maintenance of an existing F/A System (removal and replacement of

one appliance or the repair of a shorted wire) does not require submittal of plans to
DSA.
5.
Resources: Several helpful documents have been provided on the DSA web site.
DSA Plan Submittal Requirements Fire Alarm and Detection Systems is available on
the DSA web site, FLS page.
IR A-28
Iss (04-27-10)

Page 3 of 3
DSA IR A-6: Change Order & Field Change Approval Process and IR A-18: Use of
Construction Documents Prepared by Other Professionals are available on the DSA
FLS page and in IR Manual.
Also see State Fire Marshal (SMF) Information Bulletin, Fire Alarm Control Unit
Replacement in Existing Buildings at
http://osfm.fire.ca.gov/informationbulletin/pdf/2008/IB_WUI-FAC_FINAL_20080910.pdf
IR 3-1
STORAGE ROOM
OCCUPANCY SEPARATION
Reference: 2001 California Building Code (Title 24, Part2), Sections 302, 504.3, and Table 3-B.
Revised 09-18-07
Issued 02-20-07

Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to clarify the 2001 CBC requirements, and provide guidance for
storage room occupancy separations. (In the 2007 CBC this issue is addressed in Table 508.2.)
Background: The 2001 California Building Code is not specifically clear in excluding small areas
that do not pose a significant hazard from the need of an occupancy separation in a number of cases.
2001 CBC Section 302.4 requires occupancy separations Be provided between the various Groups
and Divisions as set forth in Table 3-B. Certain exceptions apply. The occupancy separations are
based on the real and potential hazards associated with each.
2001 CBC Section 504.3 addresses the Allowable Floor Area of Mixed Occupancies and does not
address the separation of occupancies, therefore the exceptions listed do not apply to occupancy
separations. This is a common misconception by design professionals and plan reviewers alike.
DSA recognizes that hazardous materials in quantities less than those listed in 2001 CBC, Table 3-D
are able to be stored in smaller spaces and not present a high risk to the building. The hazards
presented by materials in small storage rooms are significantly curtailed due to the reduced quantities
of materials physically able to be stored.
Interpretation: If a Storage Area (S-1 & S-2) is found within or adjoining the following
occupancies: E, A-1, A-2, or A2.1, and the Storage Area is 100 square feet or more in size,
then the storage area is required to have the occupancy separation required in 2001 CBC
Table 3-B. If the area is 99 square feet or less, then it will be considered an accessory
closet and the occupancy separation will not be required.
Storage Areas or closets designated for storage of materials in quantities in excess of those
listed in 2001 CBC, Table 3-D will be classified as the appropriate H Occupancy, and will
be required to have the appropriate Occupancy Separations regardless of size, per 2001
CBC, Table 3-B.
Mechanical and Electrical rooms are not required to have a one-hour occupancy separation
except as noted in 2001 CBC, Section 302.5.
Storage Room
DSA IR 3-1 (rev 09-18-07)
Occupancy Separation
Page 1 of 1
AUTOMATIC FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

COVERAGE IN CONCEALED INTERSTITIAL SPACES
References: 2001 California Building Code (CBC), Section 904, CCR.
2007 CBC, Section 903
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13, Section 5 .13.1.1 (1999 edition)
NFPA 13, Section 8.14.1.1 (2002 edition)
SFM Code Interpretation 03-030
IR 9-1
Issued 10-15-07

Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to state the minimum
requirements of and provide guidance for applying NFPA 13 (Section 5-13.1.1 - 1999 Edition, and
Section 8.14.1.1 2002 Edition) as it relates to fire sprinklers coverage in concealed interstitial spaces
and as specified by State Fire Marshal (SFM) Code Interpretation 03-030.
1.
GENERAL:
1.1
NFPA 13 5.13.1.1(1999 Edition) All concealed spaces enclosed wholly or partly by exposed
combustible construction shall be protected by sprinklers (see Exceptions 1 through 12).
1.2
NFPA 13 8.14.1.1 (2002 Edition) All concealed spaces enclosed wholly or partly by
exposed combustible construction shall be protected by sprinklers except in non-combustible
concealed spaces where sprinklers are not required to be installed by NFPA 13, Sections
8.14.1.2.1 through 8.14.1.2.15.
2.
FIRE SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERSTITIAL SPACES: Noncombustible materials for these spaces must meet the 25 flame spread, 50 smoke development
ratings. Data cables must meet CEC Section 800-49 and 800-50 as resistant to the spread of fire.
2.1
Fire Sprinklers Required: Unless specifically noted in the exceptions shown in the NFPA 13
1999 Edition or listed in the NFPA 13 2002 Edition, all areas not meeting the NFPA 13 criteria, shall
have fire sprinklers installed. Any amount of combustible materials or exposed combustible
construction will require the installation of fire sprinklers.
2.2
Sprinklers Used in Lieu of One-Hour Fire Resistive Construction: When automatic fire
sprinklers are used in lieu of one-hour fire resistive construction, the entire building, including
non-combustible interstitial spaces, must have sprinklers installed, to provide equivalent
protection. Sprinkler omissions allowed by NFPA 13 are not permitted (see SFM Code
Interpretation 03-030).
Building plans submitted prior to October 1, 2005 will not be required to have the interstitial
spaces sprinklered when fire sprinklers are used in lieu of one-hour fire-resistive construction.
2.3
Sprinklers not required: Interstitial spaces need not have the fire sprinklers (as noted in
NFPA 13) if all the following conditions are met:
All items within an interstitial space meet the definition of non-combustible, and
the space itself is of non-combustible construction, and
the fire sprinkler system is not used in lieu of one-hour fire resistive construction.
DSA (SS) IR 9-1

(iss 10-15-07)
Automatic Fire Suppression System

Coverage in Combustible Interstitial Spaces
Page 1 of 1
IR 10-1
ILLUMINATION REQUIRED
FOR MEANS OF EGRESS
References: 2007 California Building Code Sections 1002,1006.1,
1006.3, and1024.6 and Exceptions
Discipline: Fire & Life Safety
Issued 06-22-09
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies code requirements, based on the
2007 California Building Code (CBC), for illumination of means of egress as it relates to exit
discharge to a public way or safe dispersal area.
General: The 2007 CBC, Section 1006.1 states, Illumination required. The means of
egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated al all times the building space
served by the means of egress is occupied.
The 2007 CBC, Section 1002 defines EXIT DISCHARGE as That portion of a means of
egress system between the termination of an exit and a public way.
The 2007 CBC, Section 1024.6 states, Access to a public way. The exit discharge shall
provide a direct and unobstructed access to a public way.
Exception: Where access to a public way cannot be provided, a safe dispersal area
shall be provided
Interpretation:
1.
PUBLIC WAY: Public streets, alleys, parks, parking lots, and other similar public
areas are public ways.
The exit discharge capacity shall not be less than the required
discharge capacity of the exits being served. It must have a clear width and height of not
less than 10 feet.
2.
EGRESS ILLUMINATION: The entire exit discharge to the public way is required
to be illuminated at any time the building space being served is occupied.
3.
SAFE DISPERSAL AREAS: Where safe dispersal area or areas are provided, the
entire path to a safe dispersal area need not be illuminated. Illumination of a minimum of
20 feet shall be provided from the building or building complex or 20 feet beyond reaching
grade level when exiting from bleachers, grandstands or other stadium seating.
Emergency and egress illumination of the exit discharge to a safe dispersal area can be
accomplished by providing:
Lighting at exterior landings.
DSA (FLS) IR 10-1

(iss 06-22-09)
Illumination Required for

Means of Egress
Page 1 of 2
DSA (FLS) IR 10-1

(iss 06-22-09)
Illumination Required for

Means of Egress
Page 2 of 2
Exterior lighting to provide minimum illumination for 20 feet from a building.
Lighting of grandstands or bleachers aisles to grade and 20 feet beyond where

practical.
The illumination shall provide a minimum of not less than 1 foot-candle at the walking
surface.
4.
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS: See 2007 CBC, Section
1006.3.
Emergency Power shall supply lighting of the exit discharge for a minimum of 90 minutes.
VISUAL ALARMS IN CLASSROOMS

References: 2001 California Building Code: Sections 1114B.2.4 and 3505.1 Sec. 4-4.5
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for
Accessible Design 4.1.1(1) and 4.1.3(14)
California Government Code Section 4451(d)
Discipline: Access Compliance
IR 11B-1
Revised 11-01-07
Issued 01-26-05
jurisdiction of DSA. This IR indicates an acceptable method for achieving compliance with applicable codes and regulations,
although other methods proposed by design professionals may be considered by DSA.
Purpose: This interpretation clarifies acceptable design and installation requirements for
fire alarm systems installed in new buildings containing classrooms for projects under
Division of the State Architect (DSA) jurisdiction, which includes state-funded buildings and
facilities, State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12),
community colleges, and universities. (In the 2007 CBC this issue is addressed in Section
907.9.1.1.)
General: Unlike audible alarms, visual alarms are typically located within the space they
serve so the signal is visible to the occupants of the space. the Americans with Disabilities
Act Standards for Accessible Design, Section 4.1.3(14) indicates that when emergency
warning systems are provided, they shall include both audible and visual alarms. Since
classrooms in newly constructed buildings are required to be accessible by Section 4.1.1(1),
where audible alarm coverage is provided, the emergency warning system shall also provide
visual alarm coverage.
Design Requirements: Per California Government Code 4451(d), until such building
standards are published in the California Building Standards Code that meet or exceed the
requirements of the Federal Americans with Disabilities Act, specifically in this case the
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, Section 4.1.3(14), effective
March 1, 2005, DSA will accept construction documents for new construction (new
buildings) that indicate visual fire alarm coverage for all classrooms1 that are provided with
audible fire alarm coverage.
1
United States Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board: ADAAG Manual, A
guide to the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines, July 1998, p. 98, Visual Alarms
(4.28.3); Technical Bulletin: Visual Alarms, August, 2003,
http://www.access-board.gov/adaag/about/bulletins/alarms.htm
or
http://www.access-board.gov/adaag/about/bulletins/pdf/alarms.pdf
DSA (AC) IR 11B-1

(rev 11-01-07)
Visual Alarms in Classrooms

Page 1 of 1
BEVELED LIP AT CURB RAMPS
IR 11B-2
References: 2001 California Building Code: Sections 1117A.4.5 (prior to the 10/12/06
Supplement, effective 5/2/07), and 1127B.5 Items 3 & 5
California Government Code: Sections 4451(d) & (f)
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, Section 4.7.2
Revised 11-01-07
Issued 01-26-05
See IR 11B-3
Purpose: This interpretation clarifies acceptable design and installation requirements for
curb ramps under Division of the State Architect (DSA) jurisdiction, which includes statefunded buildings and facilities, State of California public elementary and secondary schools
(grades K-12), community colleges, and universities. (In the 2007 CBC this issue has been
addressed by removing the requirement for a beveled lip at curb ramps.)
General: California Building Code (CBC) Section 1127B.5 Item 3 states: "Transitions from
ramps to walks, gutters, or streets shall be flush and free of abrupt changes, except that
curb ramps shall comply with Item 5." CBC Section 1127B.5 Item 5 states: "The lower end
of each curb ramp shall have a 1/2 inch (13 mm) lip beveled at 45 degrees as a detectable
way-finding edge for persons with visual impairment."
However, the Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design Section 4.7.2
does not allow a beveled lip at the lower end of a curb ramp and states: "Transitions from
ramps to walks, gutters, or streets shall be flush and free of abrupt changes."
requirements of the federal Americans with Disabilities Act, and specifically in this case the
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design Section 4.7.2, the DSA will
accept curb ramp designs which indicate that the lower end of each curb ramp is flush and
free of abrupt changes, without a beveled lip. All such curb ramp designs shall incorporate a
detectable warning surface (truncated domes) as indicated in other sections of the CBC, and
Access Compliance IR 11B-3.
Note: The October 12, 2006 Supplement to the 2001 CBC removed from Chapter 11A the
requirement for a beveled lip at curb ramps.
DSA (AC) IR 11B-2

(rev 11-01-07)
Beveled Lip at Curb Ramps

Page 1 of 1
DETECTABLE WARNINGS AT CURB RAMPS

References: 2001 California Building Code: Sections 1117A.4.7 (prior to the 10/112/06
Supplement, effective 5/2/07), and 1127B.5 Items 8
California Government Code: Section 4451(d)
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design,
Section 4.7.7
IR 11B-3
Revised 11-01-07
Issued 01-26-05
See IR 11B-2 and 11B-4

Purpose: This interpretation clarifies acceptable design and installation requirements of

detectable warnings at curb ramps under Division of the State Architect (DSA) jurisdiction,
which includes state funded buildings and facilities, State of California public elementary and
secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges, and universities. (In the 2007 CBC
this issue has been addressed in Section 1127B.5 Item 7).
General: California Building Code Sections 1127B.5 Item 8 and 1117A.4.7 state a curb
ramp shall have a detectable warning.when the ramp slope is less than 1 unit vertical to
15 units horizontal (6.7% slope).
However, the Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design Section 4.7.7
indicates that curb ramps shall have a detectable warning surface without regard to the
slope of the ramp.
requirements of the federal Americans with Disabilities Act, and specifically in this case the
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design Section 4.7.7, the DSA will
accept curb ramp designs which indicate detectable warnings at curb ramps regardless of
slope.
DSA (AC) IR 11B-3

(rev 11-01-07)
Detectable Warnings at Curb Ramps

Page 1 of 1
DETECTABLE WARNINGS
IR 11B-4
References:
2001 California Building Code: Sections 1117A.4.5, 1127B.5 Item 8, 1133B.8.3, and 1133B.8.5
2007 California Building Code: Sections 1112A.9, 1121B.3.1 Item 8(a), 1127B.5 Item 7,
and 1133B.8.5
California Government Code: Section 4451(d) & (f)
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, Section 4.7.2
Revised 11-01-07
Issued 01-26-05
See IR 11B-3

Purpose: This interpretation clarifies acceptable alternative design and installation
requirements for detectable warnings under Division of the State Architect (DSA)
jurisdiction, which includes state funded buildings and facilities, State of California public
elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges, and universities.
General: The California Building Code indicates technical criteria for detectable warning
surfaces (truncated domes). The technical criteria include dome pattern, dome spacing and
dimensional placement.
The U.S. Access Board develops the minimum design standards for complying with the ADA,
and has also developed and considered detailed research studies regarding pedestrians and
the use of detectable warning surfaces. Under the Access Board, the Public Rights-of-Way
Access Advisory Committee was established in 1999 to develop additional ADAAG
provisions. The advisory committee reached agreement on recommended accessibility
standards for new and altered public rights-of-way covered by the ADA. The standards
proposed by the committee were presented in a report titled Building a True Community.
The draft guidelines issued by the Access Board, consistent with the advisory committees
recommendations, include revised technical criteria for detectable warnings.
The U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT) is a designated agency responsible for
enforcing the standards and implementing regulations of the ADA Title II (State and Local
Government Services). The Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), under the USDOT, is
the enforcement authority for overseeing pedestrian discrimination issues under the Title II
implementing regulations. Both FHWA and the Access Board are encouraging the use of the
new technical criteria for detectable warnings over the original ADA design standard.
Acceptable Alternative Designs: The Division of the State Architect (DSA) recognizes
the federal research effort and that the new technical criteria provide substantially
equivalent or greater access and usability as modified and specifically indicated below.
Regarding the dome pattern and dome spacing for detectable warnings, the DSA will accept,
as an acceptable alternative design, detectable warning surfaces that comply with all of the
following:
DSA (AC) IR 11B-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Detectable Warnings
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR 11B-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Detectable Warnings
Page 2 of 2
1.
Pattern: Detectable warnings consisting of a surface with truncated domes that are
aligned in a square grid (in-line) pattern.
2.
Dome Spacing: Truncated domes aligned in a square grid (in-line) pattern shall have a
center-to-center spacing of 1.67 inches (42.4 mm) to 2.35 inches (59.7 mm).
In addition to the above criteria regarding detectable warning design, the DSA will
accept, as an acceptable alternative design, dimensional placement of detectable
warning surfaces at curb ramps that comply with the following criteria:
3.
Dimensional Placement at Curb Ramps: The detectable warning surface shall extend 36
inches (914.4 mm) minimum in the direction of travel for the full width of the curb
ramp. For curb ramps, also see IR 11B-2 and 11B-3.
MECHANICAL ONLY PROJECTS

EXEMPT FROM ACCESSIBILITY REVIEW
IR 11B-6
References:
California Building Code, Section 1134B.2.1, Exception 4
Issued 02-04-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify that

mechanical only projects do not require DSA Access Compliance review.
Discussion: Mechanical only means projects where all work is undertaken solely for the
purpose of heating, ventilation or air conditioning (HVAC). California Building Code (CBC)
Section 1134B.2 indicates that all existing buildings and facilities, when alterations,
structural repairs or additions are made to such buildings or facilities, shall comply with all
provisions of Division I, New Buildings.
However, the building code also states that for existing buildings, projects which consist
only of HVAC are not considered alteration projects for the purposes of accessibility for
persons with disabilities and are not subject to the accessibility provisions of the code.
DSA Access Compliance considers structural work that is required solely for the purpose of
performing the mechanical work to be incidental to the mechanical project which is exempt
work per CBC 1134B.2.1, Exception 4.
Exemption from DSA Access Compliance Review: Mechanical only projects are
exempt by accessibility code provisions and do not require DSA Access Compliance review
or approval. This includes mechanical only projects that contain incidental structural
upgrades required solely for the purpose of performing mechanical only work. It should be
noted that compliance with the building code is still required (i.e. the height of thermostats
shall be installed 48 above the finish floor to the operating handle).
DSA (SS) IR 11B-6

(iss 02-04-08)
Mechanical Only Projects

Exempt From Accessibility Review
Page 1 of 1
REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCESSIBLE

PARKING SPACES
IR 11B-7
References:
2007 California Building Code, Sections 1129B.3 and 1129B.4,
Figure 11-B-18A, 11B-18B and 11B-18C
Revised 08-01-09
Issued 07-15-08
and state-owned or state-leased essential services buildings.. This IR indicates an acceptable method for achieving compliance with
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify requirements for accessible
parking.
Background: On October 10, 2007 the Governor of California approved Assembly Bill (A.B.) 1531
(2007). A.B. 1531 does the following:
Amends the requirements for signage and striping at accessible parking spaces,
Directs that the initial regulations to implement these provisions shall be adopted as emergency
regulations,
Provides that the adoption of these regulations shall be considered by the Department of General
Services (DGS) to be an emergency necessary for the immediate preservation of the public
peace, health and safety, or general welfare.
On May 21, 2008 the California Building Standards Commission approved amended regulations
proposed by DGS implementing A.B. 1531. The amended regulations became effective July 1, 2008 and
are contained in California Building Code Sections 1129B.3, 1129B.4, Figures 11B-18A, 11B-18B and
11B-18C.
The amended regulations can be found on the DSA Internet web site at:
http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/pubs/regulations_rev_08-01-09.pdf
Scope: The amended regulations apply to all new construction projects and alterations to existing
buildings and facilities covered by California Building Code, Chapter 11B. Construction documents
submitted to DSA for review and approval on or after July 1, 2008 must indicate compliance with the
amended regulations.
1.
Signage Requirements: The amended regulations indicate that the signage at accessible
parking spaces shall include Minimum Fine $250 below the International Symbol of Accessibility as
either an additional sign or additional language. This fine posting requirement is in addition to other
signage regulations contained in the California Building Code for accessible parking spaces.
2.
Striping Requirements: The revised regulations indicate that the accessible parking space
striping shall be as follows:
The border (perimeter) of the loading and unloading access aisle shall be painted blue.
DSA (AC) IR 11B-7

(rev 08-01-09)
Requirements for Accessible Parking Spaces

Page 1 of 2
DSA (AC) IR 11-7

(rev 08-01-09)
Requirements for Accessible Parking Spaces

Page 2 of 2
The hatching within the loading and unloading access aisle shall be painted a suitable contrasting
color to the parking space at 3-0 maximum on center. Blue or white paint is preferred.
The amended regulations for the border and hatching at the loading and unloading access aisle are in
addition to other requirements indicated in the California Building Code for accessible parking spaces.
The requirement that the hatching at the loading and unloading access aisle be a suitable contrasting
color to the parking space is intended to ensure that the hatching is visually distinct from the background
to which it is applied, and thus can be more easily seen. As hatching is generally recognized as a noparking area, this difference in contrast assists drivers in providing a conspicuous visual deterrent to
parking in the loading and unloading access aisle.
3.
Acceptable Designs: Asphalt is often the parking surface material used at accessible parking
spaces. Asphalt is generally considered to be fairly dark in appearance. In order to provide a suitable
contrasting color at the hatched area of the loading and unloading access aisle, a light color hatching
must be used at locations where asphalt is the parking surface material. Although white paint is preferred
(and traditionally the color most often used), its use is not mandatory under the CBC.
In order to provide a suitable contrast at the hatching of the loading and unloading access aisle in
locations where light concrete is used as the parking surface material (such as at concrete parking
garages), a dark color hatching must be used. Although blue paint is preferred, its use is not mandatory
under the CBC.
USE OF PREDETERMINED CONSTRUCTION

TOLERANCE GUIDELINES FOR ACCESSIBILITY
References:
2007 California Building Code, Section 1101B.5
IR 11B-8
Issued 11-19-09

Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulation clarifies DSAs position regarding the use of
construction tolerance guidelines related to accessibility provisions contained in the
California Building Code.
Background: Often, the subject of construction tolerance arises with regard to provisions
for accessibility as indicated in California Building Code Section 1101B.5. Requests have
been received for DSA to predetermine guidelines for what is considered an acceptable
construction tolerance for various architectural components.
1.
LEGAL ISSUES: According to the California Attorney Generals office, developing
guidelines for construction tolerances .unnecessarily encourages contractors and others
to deviate from the access regulations found in the California Building Code. 1
The California Attorney Generals office also indicated we are concerned that local building
officials and members of the general public, when they consult Construction Tolerance
Guidelines,.may assume that they have been adopted by a state agency and therefore,
have the force of state law, which they do not. Such reliance, in our view, may result in
violations of the California Building Code and, possibly, litigation against local building
officials and/or property owners. 1
Separately, a United States District Court case discussed the term conventional building
industry tolerances as follows:
What is an acceptable dimensional tolerance obviously will vary, depending in part upon
the purpose for the standard and the technological capacity to closely adhere to the target
dimensions. 2
2.
REGULATORY BUILT-IN TOLERANCES: California Building Code Section
1101B.5 indicates all dimensions are subject to conventional industry tolerances except
where the requirement is stated as a range with specific minimum and maximum end
points. Where a California Building Code requirement states a specified range, such as in
Section 1133B.4.2.1 where handrails must be installed between 34 inches and 38 inches
above the nosing, the regulation itself already provides an adequate tolerance and therefore
no further tolerance outside of the range at either limit is permitted. In such cases, the
technological capacity to achieve literal compliance with the dimensional requirements is
quite easy to accomplish.
DSA IR 11B-8
(iss 11-19-09)
Use of Predetermined Construction

Tolerance Guidelines For Accessibility
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR 11B-8
(iss 11-19-09)

Page 2 of 3
3.
MINIMUMS, MAXIMUMS AND SPECIFYING AT THE LIMIT: Where an

element is to be installed at the minimum or maximum permitted dimension, such as "48
inches maximum", it is not good practice to specify 48 inches, although it is allowed.
Rather, it would be good practice to specify a dimension less than the required maximum
(or more than the required minimum) by the amount of the expected field or manufacturing
tolerance and not to state any tolerance in conjunction with the specified dimension.
In other words, dimensions noted in accessibility provisions as maximum or minimum
should not be considered dimensions for design, because they represent the absolute limits
of a requirement. To be sure that field tolerances result in usable construction, notes and
dimensions in construction documents should identify and incorporate expected tolerances
so that a required dimensional range is not exceeded by the addition of a finish material or
a variation in construction practice, to the maximum extent feasible.
Specifying dimensions for design in the manner described above will better ensure that
facilities and elements accomplish the level of accessibility intended by the requirements. It
will also more often produce an end result of strict and literal compliance with the stated
requirements and eliminate enforcement difficulties and issues that might otherwise arise.
On the other hand, by voluntarily choosing to specify the exact maximum limit or the exact
minimum limit of a requirement for design, field construction based on such specification
may unnecessarily fail to achieve the compliance that is required. In such cases the failure
is not necessarily a consequence of field tolerance, but rather it is a result of the decision to
design at the very edge of the prescribed limit.
4.
ABSOLUTE DIMENSIONS: In the few cases where absolute dimensions are

indicated, the application of construction tolerances is most likely to be influenced. In
construction, the technological capacity to achieve an exact and precise placement of an
architectural element in some cases can be quite difficult. In addition, the technological
capacity to place one particular architectural element at a specific distance may not be the
same for a different architectural element. For instance, consider the requirement that
water closets (toilets) be an absolute 18 from the adjacent wall to the centerline.
Variations in wall finish thicknesses or structural members could easily influence the final
constructed condition, especially in concrete slab construction.
In such water closet installations, it would not be unusual to see minor deviations (17
to 18) based on these field conditions. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that at least
some minor deviation from absolute dimensions could be expected for water closets.
In recent projects however, water closet centerline dimensions in newly constructed toilet
rooms for adults measured as much as 21 and as little as 15 from the adjacent wall. In
both cases the amount of variation equaled or even exceeded the entire thickness of the
combined wall finishes. Under analysis, it was clear that the lack of care and coordination
exercised in the planned placement of the wall, the rough plumbing, and the wall finish was
the cause of the deviation, rather than any field condition or manufacturing variant.
While acceptance of a water closet centerline variance may be allowed as a DSA
jurisdictional building code approval, it should be noted that such acceptance may not
necessarily have effect or provide immunity under a judicial review.
5.
ESTABLISHING TOLERANCE GUIDELINES:
In conclusion, establishing
predetermined construction tolerances guidelines related to the requirements for
accessibility contained in the California Building Code is inappropriate.
DSA IR 11B-8
(iss 11-19-09)

Page 3 of 3
As previously stated, the California Attorney Generals office has indicated that construction
tolerance guidelines may wrongfully be viewed by some to have the effect of law 1 and
unnecessarily encourages contractors and others to deviate from the access regulations
contained in the California Building Code. 1
The use of predetermined construction tolerance guidelines allows a blanket acceptance of
departures from the building code requirements with no analysis as to the reason the use of
a tolerance is either justified or warranted. As a result, the guidelines are then arbitrarily
substituted for building code requirements, without taking into account the specific facts of
each circumstance.
It is preferred that construction tolerance acceptance be on a case-by-case basis, with the
degree of departure from the literal requirements coupled with the specific reason that the
requirement was unable to be achieved as the basis to be utilized for analysis. Many times
when questions arise regarding tolerances, it is often found after analysis that neither field
conditions nor manufacturing variables contributed to the deviation, but rather there was
simply a lack of proper planning or coordination. Inadequate planning and coordination are
not justifications for the use of construction tolerances.
6.
MORE INFORMATION:
For questions regarding this interpretation contact:

Aaron P. Noble
Senior Architect
Division of the State Architect, Headquarters
1102 Q Street, Suite 5100
Sacramento, CA 95811
Phone: (916) 445-4310
Email: aaron.noble@dgs.ca.gov
Copies of this IR are available in the following formats: standard print, large print, audio
cassette tape, and computer disk. Copies can be obtained by calling the Division of the
State Architect, Headquarters at (916) 445-8100.
Endnotes
1
Letter from the State of California Department of Justice to the Orange Empire Chapter of the International
Conference of Building Officials dated August 22, 2002.
Independent Living Resources v. Oregon Arena Corporation
ATTACHMENT OF CLAY OR
CONCRETE "S" ROOF TILE
Reference: California Building Code, Section 1507.7, Tables 15-D-1.1 & 15-D-2.1
IR 15-1
Issued 9-1-99
Revised 04-21-05
Supercedes IR M-7 (9/99)
and supervision of construction of public schools and essential services projects. Other methods proposed by design professionals
to solve a particular problem will be considered by DSA and reviewed for code and regulation compliance.
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provide guidelines for the installation of "S" roof tiles.
Note that this IR is not applicable to roof tile with an interlocking channel.
General. Clay or concrete "S" roof tile attachments are acceptable as shown on the following
details. Refer to Section 1507.7A and Tables 15-D-1.1 and 15-D-2.1, of the CBC for additional
requirements.
The inspector of record is to provide continuous inspection of the attachment of the roof tile.
Application of the roof tile is not to be started until the attachment details have been reviewed
and approved by the Division of the State Architect (DSA) field engineer, if the details do not
conform to the approved drawings.
Attachment
Figure 1
IR 15-1 - Page 2 of 2
Figure 1
Fig. 1A
1 fastener to wood strip
1 fastener to
sheathing
S roof tile
Height as required
to fully support cover
portion of tile
11/4" net
Fig. 1B
Tile tie wire to

continuous tie
or wire fastener
roof sheathing
All tile installations on roof slope

7:12 and greater require tile lock
device at bottom of each tile to
prevent uplift
Fig. 1C
Continuous sound soft grain

wood strip attached to roof
sheathing with fastener (8d min.)
at 12" o.c. (Staggered toe-nails
each side when height of strip
is greater than 11/2")
1 fastener to roof
sheathing
S roof tile
Twist continuous tie wire loop

as required at tile tie wires to
prevent rotation of tile
Equal angle at each

tile tie wire
Continuous tie
S roof tile
CLAY AND CONCRETE ROOF TILE

MATERIALS AND APPLICATION
IR 15-2
References:
2001 Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code (CBC) Sections 702A, 704A.1.2,
1507.1, and 1507.
2007 CBC, Sections 702A, 704A.1.2, 1507.3, and 1511.1
ASTM C1167-03 and C1492-03
Revised 04-27-10
Issued 10-15-07
1.
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify the
acceptance and test requirements for all tile roof covering materials and anchorage
systems, including mechanical and foam adhesive attachment systems. This IR also
specifies installation, testing and inspection requirements for these systems.
2.
Background:
Applicable requirements for roof tile materials and installation in the California Building Code
(CBC) include:
2001 CBC: Section 1507 and UBC Standard 15-5.
2007 CBC: Section 1507.3, ASTM C1167-03 and ASTM C1492-03.
For newer materials and installation methods not included in the above CBC requirements,
the provisions of this IR apply.
3.
Material Qualifications - Tile:
3.1
Qualification by Listing: Roof tile may be qualified and accepted if the roof tile has
a DSA recognized listing or evaluation report that indicates compliance with ICC AC180, Acceptance Criteria for Clay and Concrete Roof Tiles. See Section 8 of this IR
for DSA recognized listings or evaluation reports.
3.2
Qualification by Project Specific Testing: Provide test documentation for each

project to show compliance with:
UBC Standard 15-5 for projects governed by the 2001 CBC, or
ASTM C1167-03 for clay tiles, or C1492-03 for concrete tiles for projects governed
by the 2007 CBC.
4.
Mechanically Attached Systems: Roof tile system utilizing mechanical devices

or fasteners for attachment shall comply with one of the following requirements:
2001 CBC: Section 1507.7.1,
2007 CBC: Section 1507.3, or
DSA IR 15-1 for clay or concrete S-tiles
DSA IR 15-2
(rev 04-27-10)
Clay and Concrete Roof Tile

Materials and Application
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR 15-2
(rev 04-27-10)

Page 2 of 3
Alternate Systems: Mechanical attachment systems that are not prescribed by the
CBC may be accepted if they have a DSA recognized listing or evaluation report for
the entire system or for each component of the system. See Section 8 of this IR for
DSA recognized listings or evaluation reports.
4.1
The listing or evaluation report shall indicate compliance with the following criteria:
Tiles: See Section 3.1 of this IR.
Underlayments: ICC ES AC-188, Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayment or (in

areas described in Section 6.1 of this IR) ICC ES AC-48, Acceptance Criteria for
Roof Underlayments for Use in Severe Climate Conditions.
Installation: See Section 6 of this IR.
Inspection: See Section 7 of this IR.

Fasteners: Shall be copper, brass or stainless steel per 2001 CBC Section
1507.1.1.1, or 2007 CBC Section 1511.1.
4.2
5.
Roof System with Adhesive Attachment: Roof systems that utilize foam
adhesive for attachment may be accepted under the alternate materials and methods
provisions of Title 24, Part 1 (California Building Standards Administrative Code), Section 4304. Such systems shall have a DSA recognized listing or evaluation report that indicates
compliance with ICC ES AC-152, Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Attachment of Concrete or
Clay Tiles. See Section 8 of this IR for DSA recognized listings or evaluation reports.
The listing or evaluation report shall indicate compliance with the following criteria:
Underlayments: ICC ES AC-48, Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments for Use
in Severe Climate Conditions
Installation: See Section 6 of this IR.
Inspection: See Section 7 of this IR.
6.
Installation for Listed Roof Systems:
The roof structure must be able to
support the anticipated vertical and lateral loads of the tiles as required by the CBC. Only
qualified or certified installers and applicators may install roof tiles. Installation of roof tiles
shall meet all of the following requirements:
Tile Roofing Institutes Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions, which is
also approved by ICC-ES, and known as ESR-2015P,
Installation provisions of the tile evaluation report, and
Tile and tile anchorage systems manufacturers recommendations.

Cold Weather Regions: Cold weather regions are areas where ice damming may
occur or where roof snow load is 150 psf or greater. In such areas installation must
conform with the following:
6.1
The Standard Installation Guides for Concrete and Clay Roof Tile in Cold Weather
Applications, published by the National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
(NTRMA)/ Western States Roofing Contractors Association (WSRCA);
ESR-2015P;
Follow the instructions in the applicable evaluation reports;
Manufacturers recommendations.
DSA IR 15-2
(rev 04-27-10)

Page 3 of 3
If clay tiles are used in the cold weather regions, the designer shall specify Grade 1
clay tiles per ASTM C1167-03.
Wildland Urban Interface Area: Where tile roofing is installed in areas designated
as a Wildland Urban Interface area as defined in the 2001 or 2007 CBC Section
702A, or where the site conditions warrant, roof covering shall be constructed to
prevent the intrusion of flames and embers in accordance with the 2001 or 2007
CBC Chapter 7A, Section 704A.1.
6.2
7.
Inspection and Testing: The project inspector shall verify that the tile roof
covering materials meet the requirements of Sections 3, 4 and 5 of this IR, and inspect the
installation of the tile roof covering systems. The project inspector shall also verify that all
installers and applicators are certified either by the manufacturer or the Roof Tile Institute,
as required in the applicable evaluation report.
Pull Test for Adhesive Systems: In addition to the above requirements, for
adhesive tile attachment systems a vertical upward pull force of 35 pounds shall be
applied to the nose edge of randomly chosen tiles for a duration of five seconds.
Test one tile per square of roofing area. If any tiles fail the pull test, test the four
adjacent tiles.
7.1
A simple method to perform the pull test is to slip an L-shaped hook under nose
edge of the tile and attach the hook to a fish scale.
The pull test must be performed or witnessed by the project inspector.
8.
9.
Recognized Listings: DSA recognized listings include the following:
ICC ES Evaluation Report (ESR) or
Miami-Dade County Notice of Acceptance (NOA) or
Other evaluation reports meeting the requirements and conditions of DSA IR-A5
Reroofing: Reroofing of an existing roof-covering system with a clay or concrete

tile system shall comply with CBC Section 1510, and ESR 2015P (see Section 6 above).
Structural roof components shall be capable of supporting the roof-covering system and
the material and equipment loads that will be encountered (CBC Section 1510.2).
Substantial increase in roof load can be expected if the original roof-covering system was
not a clay or concrete tile system.
CONDITIONAL CERTIFICATION FOR

RELOCATABLE SCHOOL BUILDINGS
References: California Administrative Code, Section 4-314
IR 16-1
Revised 04-15-08
Revised 09-10-02
Issued 01-07-02
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to allow exceptions to

the durability requirements for single classroom-size relocatable buildings intended for
temporary use. A conditional certification will then be issued stating the modified durability
conditions. The procedures for processing conditional certification are outlined below and
are intended to follow the intent of Sections 17292 and 17405 of the Education Code.
1.
Basic Requirements. All portions of relocatable school buildings are to conform
to all requirements of the building standards adopted for public schools in Title 24 except as
specifically described in this IR and shall be submitted to the Division of the State Architect
(DSA) for approval at each site. The State Fire Marshal regulations contained in Parts 2
through 9, Title 24 and Title 19, and the regulations for accessibility are to be followed
without modification. DSA Access Compliance Program approval is required for all new and
existing construction.
2.
Request for Waiver. The applicant shall initiate a request for waiver of the
durability requirements for permanent foundations at the time the application for plan
approval is filed. The applicant thereby acknowledges that a conditional certification is
acceptable. The request for waiver may be made on the application form or by letter from
the applicant or an agent of the applicant. A request for waiver from the building
manufacturer or leasing company will not be accepted. This written request shall be
submitted to DSA before the construction documents are stamped for identification. The
DSA letter will indicate conditional approval.
3.
Modified Requirements. The modified requirements may be applied only to
individual one-story relocatable buildings with 2,160 square feet or less of floor area.
Individual buildings may be placed adjacent to each other provided that any building will be
capable of being relocated without affecting the stability of adjacent buildings. The clear
separation shall not be less than four inches (drift/separation calculations are required for
two-story relocatables) and the joint may be covered with flashings or other materials that
do not prevent differential movement of the buildings. The detail of the covered joints shall
be shown on the drawings.
4.
Substandard Foundations. The following modifications will be permitted for

conditionally approved foundations provided that the distance below the underside of the
lowest floor framing member to the supporting grade does not exceed 18 inches.
4.1
A wood sill plate of foundation grade redwood or preservative pressure-treated sawn

lumber may bear directly on soil or paved surface. Grass or turf shall be cleared to
bare soil under the entire area of the building. The wood sill plate may support wood
cripple studs, posts, or continuous blocking and sheathing which need not be
treated.
DSA (SS) IR 16-1

(rev 04-15-08)
Conditional Certification for

Relocatable School Buildings
Page 1 of 5
DSA (SS) IR 16-1

(rev 04-15-08)

Page 2 of 5
4.2
Isolated piers may be constructed of stacked wood members nailed together with
hot-dipped zinc coated galvanized or equivalent corrosion resistant nails. Nailing
shall be sufficient to transfer the required lateral forces to grade level. The bottom
layer of wood shall be foundation grade redwood or preservative pressure-treated
sawn lumber.
4.3
Where the surface of the adjacent exterior grade is higher than the bottom of the
floor joists on any side of the building, all wood in the substructure and floor framing
(excluding the floor sheathing) shall be foundation grade redwood or preservative
pressure-treated sawn lumber with flashing, mow strip or paving, and drain in
accordance with Figure 1. Nails used in the foundation or floor framing, except for
floor sheathing attachment nails, shall be hot-dipped zinc coated galvanized or
equivalent corrosion resistant nails. The area of openings to provide under-floor
ventilation shall be that specified in Title 24, Volume 2, Section 2306A.7.
4.4
Foundation walls or pedestals may be constructed of reinforced concrete or

reinforced fully grouted concrete block masonry. Provisions shall be made to transfer
the required lateral shear force. Concrete shall be a minimum of 2500 psi and mortar
1800 psi.
4.5
Metal frame jacks, specifically designed or justified by testing for the project, may be
used as isolated piers. Metal jacks shall be attached to the structure by mechanical
means. Overturning and bending forces due to vertical and lateral loads are to be
resisted in accordance with the applicable provisions of Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
4.6
The maximum bearing pressure for wood foundations bearing on soil or paving shall
not exceed 1000 psf, unless substantiating soil data for some greater value is
approved by DSA. The maximum allowable soil bearing pressure for concrete
foundations designed in accordance with 2007 CBC, Section 1805A shall not exceed
1500 psf, unless substantiating soil data for some greater value is approved by DSA.
4.7
The footings and foundation structure shall be capable of resisting all loads specified
in Part 2, Title 24, CCR. Unless the individual modules of the building are positively
fastened together at intervals not exceeding 10'-0" o.c. at the roof and floor level,
each module and its diaphragm shall be designed as a separate unit.
4.8
The foundation shall be designed to prevent sliding on the supporting surface by

attaching the wood foundation plates for the building, ramps and stairs to the ground
with restraining devices. An acceptable design would incorporate one-inch diameter
Standard Weight (1.315" actual O.D.) hot dipped galvanized pipes or one-inch
diameter solid steel rods spaced at not more than 10'-0" o.c. One pipe/rod shall be
located a maximum of two feet from each corner in both directions and a minimum
of two pipes/rods per discontinuous foundation strip. Pipes should penetrate into soil
and/or paving a minimum of 12" measured vertically. Alternate or equivalent
designs, when provided with structural calculations and details, will be considered.
5.
Permanent Foundations. Permanent foundations are required for all buildings,

when the height between the underside of the lowest floor framing members and the
supporting grade exceeds 18 inches, or when the building area exceeds 2,160 square feet.
Permanent foundation design shall conform to all requirements of Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
6.
Protection Against Deterioration. To reduce the problems of deterioration,
dry rot, or rust, drainage shall be provided to prevent water from ponding beneath the
structure. Under-floor ventilation and clearance, and the treatment of wood members in
close proximity to exposed ground, shall be in accordance with Section 2306A, Part 2, Title
24. A minimum clearance of two inches is required under floor members at all points.
DSA (SS) IR 16-1

(rev 04-15-08)
6.1

Page 3 of 5
The minimum thickness of steel deck diaphragms and steel structural members
permitted is 20 gage. The minimum thickness of non-structural steel roof decking
and wall siding is 26 gage, protected with a durability coating. Steel members shall
be given a rust inhibitive coating.
7.
Electrical, Mechanical and Plumbing. All utility installations shall conform to

the requirements of Title 24, Parts 3, 4 and 5. Provisions shall be made for grounding the
electrical system and equipment of each individual building and this shall be shown on the
drawings.
7.1
A bonded common grounding electrode shall be provided for each metal building,
exposed metal frame, ramp or stair and the electrical system installed at a readily
verifiable location.
7.2
A means of access shall be provided to all under-floor utilities such as electrical,

mechanical and plumbing.
8.
Site Plan. A plot plan is required which shows the following:

1. Fully dimensioned location of the proposed relocatable building(s) in relation to other
buildings on the site. Show all buildings on the site and their DSA application
numbers.
2. Elevation of finished and original grade at each corner of the building and the
elevation of the finished floor. Show elevation of adjacent exterior finished grade at
each corner of the building if different from foundation grade, and the elevation of
the top and bottom of stairs and ramps.
3. Location of means
requirements.
of
access
to
the
building
including
access
compliance
4. Location of all utilities serving the relocatable from the source to the point of
connection. Include a signed statement, on the drawings, from the appropriate
responsible engineer indicating verification of the location of the utilities shown as
existing and that their capacity is adequate for the additional load. If the source of
utilities is in or on an existing building, show the DSA application number under
which the building was approved.
5. Location of existing fire alarm pull stations and signal devices. Location of fire
apparatus access in accordance with Sections 3.05 and 3.16, Title 19, Public Safety,
CCR.
9.
Identification. The manufacturer or builder shall place two permanent metal
identification labels on each building module, one mechanically fastened and visible from
the exterior and the other mechanically fastened to the interior frame above the ceiling, at
the end of the module. The labels shall show the DSA application number under which the
building construction was authorized, the manufacturer or builder's name, the serial
number, the design live loads for the roof and floor framing, wind speed and exposure
category.
9.1
The location of the identification label shall be shown on the building plans. For
buildings that are manufactured in-plant, the plant inspector is to provide a verified
report with each building, which shall indicate the manufacturer's name and the
serial number for each building module and the DSA application number.
10. Relocation of Existing Relocatable School Buildings. Details shall include

new foundation construction, superstructure to foundation connections, and module bolting
DSA (SS) IR 16-1

(rev 04-15-08)

Page 4 of 5
details if necessary. Do not reuse A-325 bolts. Plans submitted shall include site plan,
complete floor plans, and details of all proposed work. Checking may be expedited if
complete plans of the existing building to be relocated are submitted with the application
package.
10.1
The certification by DSA of a relocatable building applies only to the location shown
on the approved site plans and certification is therefore void if the building is
relocated to another location. It is recommended that, when a building is moved, the
district shall apply for DSA certification to avoid the possibility of individual liability of
school board members. Relocation of an existing certified building within the same
district shall be considered to be an alteration for the purpose of completing the
application (Form DSA-1). A filing fee based only upon the value of the work shown
on the plans and specifications, including moving costs, will be charged if an
approved building is relocated.
10.2
When existing DSA-certified buildings are moved within the same school district or
from one district to another, the plans and specifications are to indicate the
application number of the previous certification for each building. If the building is
moved as one unit, without disconnecting the individual modules, complete
foundation and floor plans are required, but the plans of the superstructure need not
be submitted. The design professional in responsible charge shall verify by
appropriate means, subject to DSA approval, and submit a letter certifying that the
building conforms to the originally approved plans and specifications and has not
suffered structural deterioration or been structurally altered. A site plan and floor
plan for the relocatable building shall be provided to facilitate review of electrical,
mechanical, utility, fire and panic work as well as access compliance.
10.3
When relocation is proposed for existing buildings for which drawings were approved
but the construction was not certified, the plans and specifications must include the
DSA application number of the previous plan approval for each building and the
design professional in responsible charge shall examine, by appropriate means, and
certify that the building conforms to the originally approved plans and has not
structurally deteriorated. Any deviations from the originally approved plans and
specifications shall be indicated on the plans and specifications submitted under the
current application for approval. If the building is moved as one unit and
modifications or corrective work are not required, the plans of the superstructure
need not be submitted.
10.4
Existing buildings not previously certified by DSA are considered to be new buildings.
Complete plans, specifications, structural calculations for existing conditions and
necessary reconstruction work, and site data are required to be submitted. In
addition to the criteria of this IR, the design professional in responsible charge shall
examine and certify, subject to DSA approval, that the building conforms with the
plans being submitted for approval and so state in an accompanying letter. Any
special tests or inspections required to verify the work are to be performed under the
direction of the design professional in responsible charge.
11. Notice of Contract. In the event the contractor has been selected and a bid price
has been established prior to approval of the plans, the design professional in responsible
charge is to file the Contract Information (Form DSA-102) at the time the plans are
submitted for approval.
Attachment
Figure 1
DSA (SS) IR 16-1

(rev 04-15-08)

Note: Cross-ventilation at underfloor

spaces is required per
2001 CBC Section 2306A.7
(2007 Section 1203.3)
Provide underfloor access
as required per
2001 CBC Section 2306A.3
(2007 CBC Section 1209.1)
Page 5 of 5
COMPUTER OR OFFICE
ACCESS FLOORS
IR 16-2
References:
2001 California Building Code, Sections 1632A and 1634A
Revised 01-02-08
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide guidance in

the design of Computer Access Flooring (CAF) for proper support and anchorage to resist
seismic forces as prescribed in the California Building Code. This IR is only applicable to
projects submitted to DSA under the 2001 California Building Code (CBC). For projects
submitted under the 2007 CBC, refer to the regulations.
1.
Seismic Load. The lateral force applied to the CAF platform in any horizontal
direction should be determined using the equations in the 2001 CBC, Section 1632A.2,
where;
Wp = dead load of platform + actual super-imposed equipment load, the minimum load
for the entire platform area is 50 psf.
See Footnote 9 of Table 16A-O in the CBC
See 2001 CBC, Section 1607A.3, for floor live load
Fp may be 2/3 of the values shown when CAF's are mounted on concrete slabs on grade.
2.
Lateral Resistance.
2.1
If the lateral bracing of the raised floor is provided by surrounding structural

elements:
1. Structural elements of the building are to be designed to resist the platform lateral
loads.
2. Floor panels and struts are to be tightly fitted together and against the structure to
prevent "hammering" of the platform against the resisting structure.
3. Floor panels and struts acting in tension are to be mechanically connected together
and anchored to the structure.
2.2
If the raised floor is not surrounded by structural elements:

1. Pedestals are to be restrained at base against sliding and overturning.
2. If pedestals are positively tied together by a system of struts and floor panels then
the total lateral load may be divided equally to each pedestal
3. If pedestals are not tied together then design each for the pedestal based on the
tributary lateral load.
4. Pedestal stems and bases are to be designed for vertical and lateral load
combinations.
DSA (SS) IR 16-2

(rev 01-02-08)
Computer or Office
Access Floors
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR 16-2

(rev 01-02-08)
2.3
Computer or Office
Access Floors
Page 2 of 2
Testing. All tests are to be performed by a testing laboratory. Tests are to be

observed and the results recorded in a report signed by a California registered civil
engineer.
2.3.1 When shot-in anchors or drilled-in anchors are used to attach the pedestal bases to
the supporting floor, testing of anchors is required. Test one of every ten shot-in
anchors and one of every two drilled-in concrete anchors at 160% of the ICBO
recommended allowable load. In case of test failures, see the 2001 CBC, Section
1923A.3.5, for procedure.
2.3.2 Use of adhesives to attach pedestal bases to concrete or wood floor systems will not
be accepted unless test reports on long term durability, high temperature and
strength are submitted to the Division of the State Architect (DSA) for review.
2.3.3 Mechanical connections in the floor system that are not subjected to analysis are to
be tested for twice the lateral load. Submit test procedure to DSA for approval before
testing.
EARTH RETAINING SYSTEMS

References:
IR 16-3
2001 CBC, Section 1611A.6

Revised 09-18-2007
Issued 09-01-1999
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provide guidelines for use of segmental retaining wall
systems. Requirements for segmental retaining walls are not completely addressed in the
California Building Code.
1. General. Gravity type retaining walls assembled of precast concrete or concrete masonry
units, referred to as Segmental Retaining Walls (SRW), may be approved for use on school
building projects as an alternative to conventional retaining systems. Approval of SRW systems
requires compliance with the conditions of this IR and approval of the Division of the State
Architect (DSA).
SRW systems consist of facing units anchored to a reinforced soil mass that provides gravity
load for resistance to overturning and lateral sliding. Geosynthetic grid materials (geogrid) are
used to anchor the facing units and to reinforce the soil mass. Only soil-reinforced SRW
systems will be acceptable for use on public school, state-owned or state-leased essential
services buildings or California Community College projects. The reinforced soil mass may
consist of cohesive or cohesionless soil subject to the recommendations of a geotechnical
report.
Retaining walls less than four feet above the top of the foundation and not supporting a
surcharge do not require review and approval by DSA as defined in Title 24, Part 1, Section 4314 under the definition of "school buildings." However, such walls should meet the
manufacturer's specifications and the applicable design and wall system requirements
described below.
2. Geotechnical Requirements. A California licensed geotechnical engineer, in accordance
with the 2001 CBC, Section 1804A (2007 CBC, Section 1802A), shall prepare a soil
investigation report for each project site. Recommendations for preparation of the reinforced soil
mass and slope stability above and below the retaining wall (if necessary) shall be addressed in
the report.
3. Design Requirements. Design of the SRW systems shall comply with the National Concrete
Masonry Association (NCMA) Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls, latest edition
(based on the Coulomb earth-pressure theory), or the AASHTO Highway Specifications, latest
edition, (based on the Rankine earth-pressure theory). Seismic analysis will be required for
walls greater than 10'-0" above the top of the foundation that support loads from roads, parking
areas, etc. or which retain soil adjacent to structures where failure can create a life safety
hazard. Structures shall not be supported by SRW systems. Seismic analysis shall be based on
DSA (SS) IR 16-3 (rev. 09-18-07)
Page 1 of 3

DSA (SS) IR 16-3 (rev. 09-18-07)
Page 2 of 3
the Mononabe-Okabe theory and shall comply with the NCMA Segmental Retaining Wall
Seismic Design Procedure (latest edition), or AASHTO Highway Specifications. The design
shall include the effect of all surcharge loads, potential settlement and sloping soil conditions for
both gravity and seismic analyses.
The wall design shall be prepared by a California licensed civil engineer.

Complete design calculations and details of the retaining system shall be submitted to DSA for
review and approval with the contract drawings and specifications. Deferred approvals will not
be permitted. Design drawings shall include the following information:
1. Locations and elevations of the top and bottom of all wall sections including the
foundations.
2. Geogrid type, location and embedment lengths behind the interior face of the block units.
3. Soil gradation requirements, assumed soil design properties and placement/compaction
specifications for the reinforced backfill and block unit fill material.
4. Location and size of all holes or openings cut into the geogrid.
4. Wall Height Limitations.
4.1 SRW systems shall be limited to a maximum height of 10'-0" above the top of the foundation
and shall have a minimum horizontal clear distance from the back of the block units to the
building foundation of 12'-0".
5. Wall System Requirements.
5.1 All SRW block units shall have a mechanical interlocking mechanism between adjacent
units, such as formed lips, pins or keys, that will resist horizontal movement out of the plane of
the wall. The geogrid shall be mechanically anchored to the block units through the use of
aggregate interlock, pins, pipes, etc. Formed lips in block units will not provide adequate
anchorage unless configured to mechanically engage the geogrid.
Adequacy of the mechanical interlock must be maintained if separation in block courses due to
settlement of the lower course, uplift of the upper course or bulging of the surface between
geogrid layers occurs. The design performance objective of SRW's is to limit course separations
to 1/4" maximum for the life of the wall.
5.2 Installation of SRW systems shall be in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions
and the NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls or AASHTO Highway
Specifications provisions.
5.3 Acceptable geogrid suppliers and grid types shall be identified and their allowable long-term
design strength and pullout of grid-to-block values provided.
5.4 Design factors of safety for systems based on NCMA Design Manual for Segmental
Retaining Walls shall be considered as a "critical application" per Table 5-1. Design factors of
safety for systems based on AASHTO Highway Specifications shall be equivalent to the NCMA
Design Manual for critical application.
5.5 The maximum vertical spacing of the geogrid shall be 2'-8" o.c. An additional layer of
geogrid shall be provided in the top 12" of all soil-reinforced walls.
5.6 Drainage pipes and aggregate backfill shall be provided between the facing units and the
reinforced soil mass. The backfill shall extend full height and length of the wall at a minimum
thickness of 1'-0" and shall meet the compaction requirements specified in the manufacturer's

DSA (SS) IR 16-3 (rev. 09-18-07)
Page 3 of 3
specifications. Surface drainage at the top and bottom of the wall shall be directed away from
the wall.
5.7 In retaining wall systems with corners, the geogrid layers shall be staggered at adjacent
walls to avoid overlap of grids and permit planer installation at each level.
6. Testing and Inspection.
6.1 An approved special inspector shall continuously inspect the construction of the wall.
6.2 The reinforced soil mass and granular backfill shall be placed and compacted under the
direction of a Geotechnical Engineer (or his representative) as required by the 2001 CBC,
Section 1804A.1 (2007 CBC, Section 1802A.1).
6.3 The concrete or concrete masonry mix design and strength evaluation for the precast units
shall be in compliance with the CBC, Chapter 19A and 21A. A letter of certification shall be
provided with the units indicating the manufacturer's name and address, name of product and
unit type. The certification shall include applicable laboratory compressive strength and
absorption test results.
6.4 Letters of certification shall be provided for the supplied geogrid indicating the supplier's
name and address, name of product and the product designation meeting the requirements of
the project's design. The letter of certification shall include the roll numbers and identification
procedures, sampling procedures and the results of the quality control tests which include
flexural rigidity, tensile strength and modulus and junction strength for each batch of resin and
each shift's production used.
WIND LOAD DESIGN FOR ONE STORY RELOCATABLE

SCHOOL BUILDINGS (Less than 2160 Sq. Ft. in Floor Area)
IR 16-4
Reference: 2001 California Building Code (CBC), Sections 1615A 1622A

Revised 01-02-08
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to supplement the wind
forces set forth in the 2001 California Building Code (CBC), for the purposes of the design of
one story relocatable school buildings having a gross floor area of less than 2,160 square
feet in projects submitted to DSA under the 2001 CBC. For projects submitted under the
2007 CBC, see DSA IR 16-7.
1.
Environmental Site Factors:
Exposure:
C [Assumed. See Section 1619A]
Basic Wind Speed:
Per Figure 16A-1, 80 MPH recommended
Ht., Exp. & Gust Coefficient:
Ce = 1.06 (for less than 15'-0" in height)
Importance Factor:
I = 1.0
2.
For the design of primary frames and systems per Section 1621A, Method 2 may be
used for all structural systems. The vertical pressures are assumed to act simultaneously
with the horizontal pressures. The following factors apply:
Cq [H] = 1.3 horizontally (on vertical projected area of structure)
Cq [V] = 0.7 upward (on the horizontal projected area of the structure)
Simultaneous vertical and horizontal application need not apply to:
1. Overall building stability.
2. At or below the foundation level of individual primary frames and systems for
structures with substandard foundations as described in IR 16-1.
3.
For the design of elements and components per Section 1622A, the design and wind
pressures used to design the elements and components of the structure may use the Cq
values set forth below in lieu of the values set forth in Table 16A-H, Section 2.
Roof Elements:
Cq = 1.2
Wall Elements:
Cq = 1.2
The requirements for local areas at discontinuities as set forth in Section 1622A, Item 2 are
not applicable except for discontinuities at roof overhangs, architectural projections, eaves,
canopies, cornices and similar structures. The coefficient for this discontinuity condition is:
Cq = 1.7 (overhang, et al.)
4.
The windows and doors must be designed as required per Section 1616A to ensure
that the building will perform as an enclosed structure.
DSA (SS) IR 16-4

(rev 01-02-08)
Wind Load Design for One Story Relocatable School

Buildings Less than 2160 Sq. Ft. in Floor Area
Page 1 of 1
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF REVIEWING STANDS,

GRANDSTANDS AND BLEACHERS
Reference: 2001 California Building Code, Sections 1021, 1611A.12
IR 16-5
Revised 06-02-08
Revised 04-21-05
Issued 9-1-99
Supersedes IR M-8 (9/99)
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide provisions

solely for the design of bleachers with an overall height of 20 feet or less, and in no instance
should be considered as a precedent for, or be used in the design of other types of
structures. This IR is applicable for projects submitted to DSA under the 2001 CBC.
1.
Definitions:
1.1
Reviewing stands, grandstands and bleachers more than five rows of seats above
grade are considered "school buildings" (2001 CBC, Section 4-314) and are subject
to DSA approval.
1.2
Bleachers which remain at a location for less than 90 days are excluded from DSA
approval.
1.3
Portable bleachers refer to seating facilities located outside of a building and not
attached to permanent foundations. The maximum height of any portable bleachers
may not exceed eleven rows, or nine feet above grade to the top seating board.
1.4
Folding and telescoping seating facilities are structures used for tiered seating whose
overall size and shape may be reduced without being dismantled for purposes of
moving or storing.
2.
Footings: Footings for outdoor seating facilities are required to comply with 2001
CBC, Section 1806A.10.
3.
Relocation: DSA approval is only for the specific location originally shown. Any
subsequent move to another location voids the approval and will require submittal of an
application for approval at the new site.
4.
Steel Design: (l = unsupported length of member).
4.1
Slender Columns: Columns having a slenderness ratio (l/r) from 200 to 300 may
be used with the following restrictions.
4.1.1
Maximum Allowable Axial Load: The maximum permitted axial load is 2,000
lbs.
4.1.2
Allowable Stresses: The column will be checked for combined axial plus
bending stress using the formula:
fa
Fa
DSA (SS) IR 16-5

(rev 06-02-08)
fb
< 1.0
0.6Fy
Design and Construction of Reviewing Stands,

Grand stands and Bleachers
Page 1 of 5
DSA (SS) IR 16-5

(rev 06-02-08)

Page 2 of 5
For a vertical column the additional bending will be computed by assuming a 20

lbs. concentrated horizontal load applied half-way between lateral supports (so as
to produce maximum moment). For inclined or horizontal struts the additional
bending will be computed for a 20 lbs. concentrated horizontal load or 150 lbs.
concentrated vertical load applied at mid-span, whichever gives the larger
bending stress. The allowable column stress will be determined from the formula:
Fa =
2E
(l/r)
35
l/r-125
This formula is indicated graphically in Figure 1 on page 5 of this IR.

4.1.3
4.2
Lateral Stays for Columns: Columns should be stayed laterally by direct

connected compression struts in two directions at the points of lateral support.
Effective Lengths of Compression Members in X-Braces: Where a compression
member is stayed by a tension member in the same plane, the length of the
compression member will be limited to a maximum l/r of 200 based on the distance
between the tension support and the end connection.
5.
Tests on Steel: DSA will require steel tests in accordance with 2001 CBC, Section
2231A, subject to the following modifications:
5.1
Small Shapes and Bars: Shapes less than l square inch in cross section and bars
other than flats less than 1/2 " thickness or diameter will not require the tension
test, but will require a bend test.
5.2
Steel Tubing: Steel tubing used in bleachers is required to be made from new
billets. Each size of tubing used on any project will be tested and required to conform
to the following properties:
Minimum yield point: 35,000 psi

Minimum ultimate tensile strength: 60,000 psi
Elongation 15% minimum in two inch gage length
6.
Qualification of Welders and Inspection of Welding: Either of the
following methods, items 6.1 or 6.2, may be used to satisfy the requirements of 2001 CBC,
Section 2231A.
EXCEPTION: This provision need not apply to tack welds that were not later
incorporated into finished welds carrying calculated stress.
6.1
Verified Reports: With each bleacher, the manufacturer will send DSA a verified
report made by a qualified professional engineer, stating the following:
"Welds on this bleacher have been made by operators who have been
previously qualified by tests, as prescribed in the Qualification Section of the
Structural Welding Code of the American Welding Society, to perform the type
of work required. I have selected a person qualified to act as welding
inspector. I certify him to be experienced in inspection of arc welds on work
requiring unquestioned reliability, and that he has the ability to distinguish
between sound and unsound welding."
With each bleacher, the welding inspector will send DSA a verified report stating: "I
have checked the equipment and find it adequate and have checked the ability of the
welders and found them satisfactory. I have inspected all the welding and find it
proper and in conformity with the plans and specifications and 2001 CBC, Chapter
22A. I have used all necessary tests to assure myself of the adequacy of the
welding."
DSA (SS) IR 16-5

(rev 06-02-08)
6.2

Page 3 of 5
Local Welding Inspection: A local qualified welding inspector, approved by DSA,

will inspect the welding after delivery in California, and will submit a verified report
stating:
"I have inspected all the welding and find it proper and in conformity with the
plans and specifications and 2001 CBC, Chapter 22A. I have used all
necessary tests to assure myself of the adequacy of the welding."
The manufacturer will pay the cost of inspection and necessary removal and
retouching of paint.
7.
Lumber: Any one of the following three methods may be used to satisfy the
7.1
Method I: The bleacher manufacturer may send DSA a lumber inspection

certification by an approved grading agency, and a notarized certificate, signed by an
official of the bleacher manufacturing company, stating that the lumber used in the
bleachers is the same as that covered by the lumber inspection certificate.
7.2
Method II: The bleacher manufacturer may send DSA a notarized certificate, signed
by the official of the bleacher manufacturing company, stating that the official has
personally inspected the lumber prior to processing or painting, and that it was grade
marked by an approved grading agency and is in accordance with the approved plans
and specifications. He shall list the grades indicated by the grade marks and note the
maximum slope of grain if it is specified to be more restrictive than the grading rules
requirement.
7.3
Method III: A qualified professional engineer may certify that the lumber used in
the bleachers conforms to the grades and other requirements called for in the
approved plans and specifications.
requirements.
When lumber is fabricated by gluing, certification of quality control and inspection of

glue joints by an approved inspection agency will be submitted with the above
certifications. Note that all methods of glue fabrication of lumber must be previously
approved by DSA and the certification must state that all conditions of the approval
have been complied with.
8.
Concrete: The requirements governing the quality of concrete may be satisfied by
one of the following: (Also see 2001 CBC, Section 1905A.)
8.1
A report of strength tests of two identical cylinders taken for each days pour; one
tested at the age of seven days and the other at 28 days. The report should indicate
strengths equal to or exceeding the specified strength required for the project.
8.2
The above test report and affidavit are not required when the following provisions of
bleacher pier footings are complied with and not listed on the structural test and
inspection list.
8.2.1
Bleacher Pier Footings: Concrete may be placed in bleacher pier footings

without continuous inspection by the inspector of record providing the thickness
of such footings is not less than one half (1/2) the width or length of the footings,
whichever results in the greater thickness. Test cylinders will not be required for
such concrete.
9.
Other Materials: Certification and testing of materials other than the proceeding
should be in accordance with the appropriate sections of the CBC, and/or as determined by
DSA.
DSA (SS) IR 16-5

(rev 06-02-08)
9.1

Page 4 of 5
General Affidavit Requirements: All verified reports and certificates will be filed in
duplicate. They must be notarized or the original signature of the person making the
report or certificate must be preceded by the statement:
"I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury that I have read the above
report and know of the contents thereof, and that all of the above statements
are true."
10.
Load Tests: When load tests are made as a basis for approval of bleachers by
DSA, test loads will be applied in not less than four, approximately equal increments,
without shock to the structure and in a manner to avoid arching of the loading materials or
stiffening of the structure.
The load test procedure must by approved by DSA prior to testing. The strength of the
material in the test bleacher should not exceed the minimum specified strength by more
than 5 percent.
10.1
Test Load Factors: When load tests are made to check design or as a basis for
approval of bleachers, the test load should be not less than twice the design vertical
load combined with twice the design lateral load.
Attachment:
Figure 1
DSA (SS) IR 16-5

(rev 06-02-08)

Page 5 of 5
Figure 1
Allowable stresses in minor bleacher struts and columns (200 l/r 200 300)
6000
Euler Curve
5000
UBC Main Col

_200)
Formula (l/r <
F.S. = 1.92
l.92
Axial Stress [Fa (PSI)]
4000
Euler Curve Factor

of Safety = 2.
2.0
3350
(F.S. = 2.15)
2000
Column Curve
2
E
35
Fa=
l/r-125
(l/r)2
1000
0
180
635
(F.S. = 5.0)
200
220
240
260
Column Slenderness Ratio [l/r]
280
300
IR 16-6
COMPOSITE BASE
FOR HVAC UNITS
References: 2001 Title 24, Part 2, CBC Section 1632A
2001 Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317(b)
Revised 10-15-07
Issued 05-07-07 as CR 16-1
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify seismic

anchorage requirements for HVAC units which use a composite base, in construction
projects under DSA jurisdiction.
Background: HVAC units may be packaged with a base constructed of composite material
(e.g. glass-mat reinforced thermal plastic). The composite base may serve three purposes:
1) as a base for the HVAC unit and mounting internal components such as compressors, 2)
as a drain pan and 3) as a shipping pallet.
1.
Requirements for All HVAC Units: These requirements are applicable for all
HVAC units with composite bases:
1.1
The composite base must be assembled by the manufacturer and shipped as an

integral part of the equipment.
1.2
The HVAC unit must be listed or certified by a qualified independent testing and
certification agency such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., or Intertek ELT
Semko. The listing shall indicate that the composite base is suitable for exposure to
ultra violet light, for immersion in water, and for use in exterior climatic conditions
and operating temperatures.
Composite bases shall be rated for indoor air smoke and flame spread per UL94, Test
94-5V.
1.3
The curb or sleeper supporting the HVAC unit must be constructed to match or fit the
composite base as recommended or supplied by the manufacturer.
2.
HVAC Units Weighing Less than 400 Pounds:
In addition to the
requirements of Section 1 above, the HVAC unit must be anchored to resist wind or seismic
forces per the 2001 California Building Code (CBC) Chapter 16A, Divisions III and IV (for
projects submitted under the 2007 CBC, refer to ASCE 7-05, Chapters 6 and 13). However,
such anchorage need not be detailed in the construction documents per the 2001 Title 24,
Part 1, Section 4-317(b) (for projects submitted under the 2007 CBC, refer to ASCE 7-05,
Section 13.1.4). HVAC anchorage details shall be provided by the manufacturer or its
authorized representative to the project design professional and project inspector. An
acceptable anchorage detail is shown on Appendix A and Appendix B.
3.
HVAC Units Weighing 400 Pounds or More: In additions to the requirements
of Section 2 above, the following shall also be applicable:

3.1
The project design professional specifies and approves its use.
DSA (SS) IR 16-6

(rev 10-15-07)
Composite Base
for HVAC Units
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 16-6

(rev 10-15-07)
Composite Base
for HVAC Units
Page 2 of 3
3.2
A licensed design professional shall provide calculations to verify that wind or seismic
forces do not cause overturning of the HVAC unit.
3.3
Details and calculations shall be provided by the design professional in general

responsible charge for the project for transfer of wind and seismic loads between the
HVAC unit and supporting structure. Screws or bolts embedded into the composite
material shall not be considered effective to transfer wind or seismic loads. Lateral
loads may be transferred through composite base by means of bearing clips or other
connections that bear on the composite material.
3.4
If the HVAC unit with a composite base is mounted on a metal curb, the metal curb
must be rated for gravity and lateral loads and detailed on the construction
documents. If the metal curb has a valid OSHPD anchorage pre-approval, the OPA
number and anchorage detailing must be shown on the construction documents.
APPENDICES
Appendix A Photograph of unit showing Seismic Restraint Clips
Appendix B Drawing showing attachment method for composite base to metal roof curb
Appendix A
Example of Seismic Anchorage

(Only for HVAC Units Weighing Less Than 400 LBS. See Section 3
above for Units Weighing 400 LBS or More)
DSA (SS) IR 16-6

(rev 10-15-07)
Composite Base
for HVAC Units
Page 3 of 3
Appendix B
Example of Seismic Anchorage

(Only for HVAC Units Weighing Less Than 400 LBS. See Section 3
above for Units Weighing 400 LBS or More)
WIND LOAD DETERMINATION ALTERNATE METHOD
IR 16-7
References:
2007 California Building Code (CBC), Section 1609A.1.1
ASCE 7-05, Chapter 6
Issued 12-18-07
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) provides a simplified method to

determine wind loads from that given in CBC Section 1609A.1 and Section 6.5 Method 2
of ASCE 7.
Background: A Tri-State Wind Code Committee consisting of delegates from the
Structural Engineering Associations of California, Oregon and Washington developed the
following alternate wind design procedure. This alternate procedure is formatted similar to
the 1997 UBC, but includes the basic approach, nomenclature and latest wind design
knowledge of the ASCE 7 Standard. This procedure combines the internal and external
pressures on each external surface of a building into a single Net Pressure Coefficient, Cnet.
The Cnet coefficients are used in the equation for obtaining the design wind pressure, Pnet, for
each external surface of the building.
For additional background and commentary, see the Appendix.
Policy: The following Alternate Wind Design Procedure is not mandatory, but will be
accepted by DSA as an alternate to Section 1609A.1 of the 2007 CBC for projects under the
jurisdiction of DSA.
1.
Alternate Wind Design Procedure: The following wind load provisions are
permitted by DSA as an alternative to Section 6.5 Method 2 Analytical Procedure of ASCE
7, as mandated in Section 1609A.1 of the 2007 (CBC).
2.
Limitations: Buildings or other structures whose design wind forces are allowed to
be determined in accordance with this IR shall meet the following requirements:
2.1
The building or other structure shall have no unusual geometric irregularity or spatial
form.
2.2
The building or other structure does not have response characteristics making it
subject to across wind loading, vortex shedding, instability due to galloping or
flutter; and does not have a site location for which channeling effects or buffeting in
the wake of upwind obstructions warrant special consideration.
2.3
A building or other structure greater than 100 feet (30480 mm) in height shall be
limited to a height-to-least-width ratio of 4 or less, and with a fundamental natural
period less than or equal to one second.
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

(iss 12-18-07)
Wind Load Determination Alternate Method
Page 1 of 8
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)
Wind Load Determination

Alternate Method
Page 2 of 8
Commentary: The starting assumption of the procedure is that the structures are "rigid,"
which is defined as having a fundamental natural period of at least one Hz (period of
less than one second). Item 2.3 is intended to define that item. Structures less
than 100 ft can generally be considered rigid, at least for the approximate period in
ASCE Section 12.8.2.1 (these are similar period calculations as 2001 CBC Section
1630A.2.2). Thus the flexible structure requirements in ASCE 7 Chapter 6 can be
ignored.
3.
Modifications to ASCE 7: The text of ASCE 7 shall be modified as follows:
3.1
Symbols and notations: Symbols and notations are specific to this section in
conjunction with Symbols and notations in ASCE 7, Section 6.3.
B
= Horizontal dimension of building measured normal to wind direction
BMWFRS = Maximum horizontal distance between vertical elements of MWFRS

resisting wind forces in any given direction.
3.2
Cnet
= Net-pressure coefficient based on Kd [GCp (GCpi)], see Table 2
= Gust effect factor equal to 0.85 for rigid buildings as defined in ASCE 7,
Section 6.5.8.1
= Importance factor in ASCE 7 Table 6-1
Kd
= Wind directionality factor as defined in ASCE 7, Section 6.5.4.4.
Pnet
= Design wind pressure used to determine wind loads on buildings or other

structures, or their components and cladding, in lb/ft2 (N/m2)
qs
= Wind velocity pressure in lb/ft2 (N/m2), Table 1
Design wind pressures: When using the Alternate Wind Design Procedure, the
Main-Wind-Force-Resisting System, (MWFRS) and Components and Cladding of
every building or structure shall be designed to resist the effects of wind pressures
on the building envelope. The net pressure on exterior building surfaces shall be
determined as follows:
Pnet = qs Kz Cnet [I Kzt]
(Equation 1)
Design wind forces for the MWFRS shall not be less than 10 lb/ft2 (0.48 kN/m2)
multiplied by the area of the building or structure projected on a plane normal to the
wind direction under consideration. See ASCE 7 Section 6.1.4 for criteria. Design
wind pressure for components and cladding shall not be less than 10 lb/ft2 (0.48
kN/m2) acting in either direction normal to the surface.
3.3
3.3.1
Design procedure: The MWFRS of every building or other structure shall be

designed for the combination of the windward and leeward net pressure, Pnet, using
Equation 1. Components and claddings of every building or structure shall be
designed for the critical net pressure, Pnet, using Equation 1.
Main wind force resisting systems: The MWFRS shall be designed for the wind
load cases as defined in ASCE 7 Figure 6-9.
Exceptions:
1. One-story buildings with h less than or equal to 30 ft, buildings two stories or
less framed with light-frame construction, and buildings two stories or less
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)

Alternate Method
Page 3 of 8
designed with flexible diaphragms need only be designed for Load Case 1 and
Load Case 3 in Fig. 6-9.
2. Where the ratio BMWFRS/B exceeds 0.7, only Load Case 1 and Load Case 3 in
Fig. 6-9 need be considered, provided the design wind load is increased 20%
for the vertical elements of the MWFRS closest to the perimeter, for those
lateral lines which resist less than 50% of the total wind force at that story.
Commentary: Section 3.3.1 of the IR is different than the code change proposal by SEA.
The original ASCE 7 requirement to use the load cases in Figure 6-9 was put back
into the procedure. Exception 1 is directly from ASCE 7. The proposal by SEA to
simplify the torsion was included as Exception 2. However, since there is an increase
to some of the vertical elements in the MWFRS due to the torsion load case, the 20%
increase was included for the perimeter lines of resistance. When using Exception 2,
wall lines that resist more than 50% of the lateral load at that story will not see an
increase due to the torsional load cases.
3.3.2
Determination of Kz and Kzt: Velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz, shall

be determined in accordance with ASCE 7 Section 6.5.6.6; and Topography
Factor, Kzt, shall be determined in accordance with ASCE 7 Section 6.5.7.
1. For windward side of a structure, Kz and Kzt shall be based on height z.
2. For leeward side and side walls, and for windward and leeward roofs, Kz
and Kzt shall be based on mean roof height h.
Kz for exposure C = 2.01(z/900)0.21 where z is the height in ft and z 15 ft. For
other exposures, see ASCE 7 Table 6-3.
3.3.3
Determination of net pressure coefficient Cnet: For the design of the main
wind force resisting system and for components and cladding, the net pressure
shall be as follows:
1. The net pressure coefficient, Cnet for walls and roofs shall be determined
from Table 2.
2. Where Cnet may have more than one value, the more severe wind load
combination shall be used for design.
3.4
3.4.1
Application of wind pressures: When using Alternate Wind Design Procedure,

wind pressure shall be applied simultaneously on, and in a direction normal to, all
building envelope wall and roof surfaces.
Components and cladding: Wind pressure for each component or cladding
element is applied using Cnet values based on the effective wind area, A,
contained within the zones in areas of discontinuity of width and/ or length a,
2a or 4a at: corners of roofs and walls; edge strips for ridges, rakes and
eaves; or field areas on walls or roofs as indicated in Table 2, and shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Calculated pressure at local discontinuities acting over specific edge strips
or corner boundary areas.
2. Include field (Zones 1, 2 or 4 as applicable) pressures applied to areas
beyond the boundaries of the areas of discontinuity.
3. Where applicable, calculated pressures at discontinuities (Zones 2 or 3)
shall be combined with design pressures on rake or eave overhangs.
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)

Alternate Method
Page 4 of 8
TABLE 1
WIND VELOCITY PRESSURE (qs) AT STANDARD HEIGHT OF 33 FEETa
Basic Wind Speed, V (mph)b
85
90
95
Pressure, qs (lb/ft2) c
18.5
20.7
23.1
100
110
120
130
140
150
25.6
31.0
36.9
43.3
50.2
57.6
a.
For wind speeds not shown, use qs = 0.00256 V
b.
Multiply by 1.61 to convert to km/h
c.
Multiply by 0.0478 to convert to kN/m2
TABLE 2
NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENT, Cnet
STRUCTURE OR
PART THEREOF
1. Main Wind Force
Resisting System
2. Components and
cladding Walls b
CNET FACTOR a, f
DESCRIPTION
Enclosed
Partially enclosed
0.43
-0.51
-0.66
1.28
-0.85
0.11
-0.83
-0.97
1.28
-0.85
Roofs:
Wind perpendicular to ridge
Leeward roof or flat roof
-0.66
-0.97
Windward roof slopes:

Slope 2:12 (or 10) Case 1
Case 2
Slope 4:12 (or 18 ) Case 1
Case 2
Case 2
Case 2
Case 2
Case 2
Slope 12:12 (or 45) Case 1
Case 2
Slope 21:12 (or 60 )
Slope > 21:12 (or 60 )
-1.09
-0.28
-0.73
-0.05
-0.59
0.03
-0.47
0.06
-0.37
0.06
-0.27
0.14
-0.15
0.14
0.28
c
-1.41
-0.60
-1.05
-0.37
-0.90
-0.29
-0.79
-0.25
-0.68
-0.25
-0.58
-0.18
-0.47
-0.18
-0.03
c
Wind parallel to ridge or flat roofs
-1.09
-1.41
Walls:
Windward wall
Leeward wall
Side wall
Parapet wall
Windward
Leeward
Affected zone d
Wall elements h 60 ft.
Wall elements h > 60 ft.
Parapet walls h 60 ft
Parapet walls h > 60 ft
10 sf
500 sf
20 sf
500 sf
1.00
0.75
0.92
0.66
2.53
2.87
-1.09
-0.83
-0.92
-0.75
-1.94
-1.68
1.00
0.75
0.92
0.66
3.38
3.64
-1.34
-0.83
-1.68
-1.00
-2.19
-2.45
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)
3. Components and
cladding Roofs b

Alternate Method
Affected zone d
Roof for h > 60 ft
Slope 2: 12 (or 10) 10 sf
500 sf
4. Chimneys, tanks
and solid towers b
Height / depth or diameter (h/D)
5. Open sign and

lattice frameworks
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
-1.34
-1.00
-2.11
-1.51
-2.87
-2.11
0.58
0.41
0.92
0.83
-
-1.00
-0.92
-1.45
-1.36
-1.00
-0.83
-
0.58
0.41
0.92
0.83
-
-1.68
-1.17
-1.87
-1.87
-1.17
-1.00
-1.70
-1.53
0.58
0.41
0.92
0.83
-
-2.53
-1.85
-3.15
-2.13
-1.17
-1.00
-1.70
-1.53
0.49
0.41
-1.26
-1.09
0.49
0.41
-1.51
-1.43
0.49
0.41
-2.62
-1.85
25
Square (wind normal to face)

Square (wind along diagonal)
Hexagonal or Octagonal
Round
0.99
0.77
0.81
0.65
1.07
0.84
0.97
0.81
1.53
1.15
1.13
0.97
Ratio of solid to gross area
< 0.1
0.1 to 0.29
0.3 to 0.7
Flat
Round
1.45
0.87
1.30
0.94
1.16
1.08
0 to s
s to 2s
3s
1.45
2.24
3.10
1.45
1.45
1.88
1.45
1.45
1.45
Horizontal to vertical dimension

(B/s)
Case A and Case B (all B/s)
Case C (2 B/s 5)
Case C ( B/s > 5)
a.
Gable and Hipped Roof h 60 ft

Slope 6:12 (or 27 ) 10 sf
100 sf
Overhang
10 sf
100 sf
Slope 6:12 to 12:12
10 sf
(or 27 to 45 ) 100 sf
Overhang
10 sf
100 sf
Monoslope Roof h 60 ft
Slope 7:12 (or 30 ) 10 sf
100 sf
6. Solid Freestanding
Wall
Page 5 of 8
Linear interpolation between tabulated Cnet values and between tabulated slope or
effective wind areas is acceptable.
Overhang values are for both enclosed and partially enclosed buildings. For other than
overhangs, component and cladding values are for enclosed buildings. For partially
enclosed buildings, algebraically add or subtract 0.32 to increase values on table.
Use wall element values for slopes greater than 21:12 (60).
Refer to ASCE 7 Figure 6-11-A through Figure 6-17 for affected zone designations.
For roof slope > 2:12 (or 10), use coefficients tabulated for gable and hipped roof h
60 ft.
Open structures can conservatively use the values for enclosed structures except for a
MWFRS mono-slope windward roof, which must add +0.15 to the Case 2 Cnet factor.
Commentary: Many of the Figures in ASCE include multiple Cp pressure values that are not
included in Table 2. For example, in Figure 6-6, the wall pressure coefficient Cp
varies depending on the L/B ratio. The L/B ratio with a Cp value that results in the
largest Cnet value was used in Table 2. The same logic was used for other ratios not
included in Table 2, such as the h/L values for the MWFRS roof values. Also, the
reduction factor for the MWFRS roof values based on area were ignored.
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)

Alternate Method
Page 6 of 8
Appendix 1 Additional Background and Commentary

Reason for Developing the Alternate Method: The following is an excerpt from the
SEAOC presentation to the IBC requesting the addition of the Alternate Method into the IBC
model code.
In response to concerns from design engineers on the complexity of wind design
procedures, this proposal provides for an alternate design procedure to Method 2 of
ASCE 7.
In using 2006 IBC and ASCE 7, engineers have found that, except for low rise
light framed buildings, lateral force design of most structures tends to be controlled by
seismic forces in the western states. While ASCE 7 includes a simplified procedure
under Method 1 for buildings not greater than sixty feet in height, the procedure
includes various limitations such as simple diaphragm, low rise building with no unusual
geometrical irregularity, and requires an engineer to refer to numerous relatively
complicated charts. The complexity of the detailed Analytical Procedure has daunted
even the most experience engineers. The need for wind design procedure in the IBC
similar to that which was in the 1997 UBC has been echoed throughout most of the
United States.
The Structural Engineers Association of California established a Wind Ad Hoc
Committee in late 2006. The group was charged to develop alternate wind design
procedures for all height buildings in conjunction with the Tri-state (California, Oregon
and Washington) Wind Committee. The Tri-state Wind Committee, with representatives
appointed by each of the three states structural engineers associations, all of whom
are experienced structural engineers, was active in code development for the 1991 UBC
using ASCE 7-88 standard as the source document, and also took a primary roll in
developing the basic format of the wind design provisions in the 1997 Uniform Building
Code, which is still being used in several states.
This proposed alternate design procedure is developed for the most common
type of buildings that are not subjected to dynamic response with further limitations for
building or other structure over 100 feet. The alternate method follows closely with
design requirements Chapter 6 of ASCE 7. Simplification is accomplished by generating
a table of net pressure coefficients (Cnet), combining a number of parameters in a
simple and yet conservative manner. Application of the net pressure coefficients meets
the intent to reduce the number of steps required for performing a wind loading
analysis on buildings that satisfy the criteria prescribed under the limitations statement,
resulting in net forces which meet or exceed those calculated based on Method 2. The
reduction of design effort should be helpful in the determination of wind forces for the
main wind force resisting system; and should be substantial for components and
cladding. The procedure has been designed to give results equal to or more
conservative than the present provisions in ASCE 7.
While the proposed code change by SEAOC Wind Ad Hoc Committee has been
developed in concert with the Tri-state Wind Committee proposed document, this
proposal has some uniqueness in addressing buildings of all heights and the table
developed for Cnet coefficient has been arranged in a format similar to the 1997 Uniform
Building Code, which most engineers preferred in the past. Given the substantial time
savings using this proposed alternate design procedure, and given that the next edition
of ASCE wind standard will not be published until after 2010, we respectfully request
that this proposed change be adopted into the IBC as an alternative procedure until
such time as the next edition of ASCE wind standard can incorporate this alternate
design method.
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)

Alternate Method
Page 7 of 8
Appendix 2 - Additional Commentary on Design Wind Pressure

The simplification of this procedure is to combine some of the factors in the wind equations
to reduce the number of computations required.
For example, the ASCE 7 formulas for the MWFRS are:
Equation 6-15
qz = 0.00256 Kz Kzt Kd V2 I
Equation 6-17
p = q G Cp qi (GCpi)
Combining the two above equations,
p = 0.00256 Kz Kzt Kd V2 I G Cp 0.00256 Kz Kzt Kd V2 I (GCpi)
or
p = (0.00256 V2) Kz Kd (G Cp (GCpi))[I Kzt]
With the following new terms:
qs = 0.00256 V2
Cnet = Kd [GCp (GCpi)],
Then the pressure p = (0.00256 V2) Kz Kd (G Cp (GCpi))[I Kzt] can be rewritten as:
Pnet = qs Kz Cnet [I Kzt]
Therefore, the simplification is in the Cnet value combining the Kd, GCp and GCpi terms into a
single value in Table 2.
Gust Effect Factor G: ASCE Section 6.5.8.1 allows the designer to use G = 0.85 or
calculate G according to Formula 6-4. As the building projected wind area becomes very
large, the G factor in Formula 6-4 is reduced. For example, a 50 foot high building that is
200 feet wide has a G just below 0.85, but a 50 foot high building that is 500 feet wide has
a G of 0.81. The values in Table 2 are based on the maximum G = 0.85.
ASCE 7 Section 6.5.12.2.1: For the MWFRS, Equation 6-17 is permitted to be used for
buildings of all heights per ASCE Section 6.5.12.2.1. Section 6.5.12.2.1 is the basis for
Table 2 in this IR. ASCE Section 6.5.12.2.2 provides an alternate method for low rise
buildings in Equation 6-18 and Figure 6-10, but this alternate was not used and therefore
the load cases in Figure 6-10 are not required.
MWFRS Walls: ASCE Figure 6-5 for the GCpi values requires that two load cases must be
considered. Case 1 is positive internal pressure applied to all internal surfaces and Case 2 is
negative internal pressure applied to all internal surfaces.
For the MWFRS, the authors used the positive internal pressures. This results in reducing
the windward values and increasing the leeward values. It is more conservative to use the
positive internal pressures because the leeward pressure is based on the full height of the
building, where the windward pressure is based on the height going up the structure. At
the top of the structure, you have maximum positive and maximum negative pressures. As
you go down the structure, you continue to use the maximum negative pressure (leeward),
but use a reduced positive pressure (reduced windward with respect to the maximum).
Since positive internal pressure results in increased negative values, the resulting sum of
the forces will be higher with positive internal pressures.
MWFRS Roof: For the MWFRS roof, there are two load cases in Figure 6-6.
Case 1 for the maximum wind uplift force occurs when the maximum negative windward
pressure is combined with the maximum negative leeward pressure. The maximum
DSA (SS) IR 16-7

iss 12-18-07)

Alternate Method
Page 8 of 8
external negative pressures are increased with a positive internal pressure. Positive internal
pressures were used for Table 2.
Case 2 for the maximum horizontal wind shear force occurs when the maximum positive
windward pressure is combined with the maximum negative leeward pressure. However,
when combining windward and leeward loads, the same internal pressure is used. The
positive internal pressure is used in Table 2 to reduce the MWFRS windward pressure since
the leeward roof and leeward walls are both based on positive internal pressure.
Components and Cladding: For components and cladding, the authors used the internal
pressure (positive or negative) that would result in the greatest total pressure on the
element.
Determination of qi: In Section 6.5.12.2.1, q = qz for windward walls, q = qh for leeward
and side walls. The simplified formula uses qi based on the height used for the external
pressure, which results in qi= qz for windward walls and qi = qh for leeward and side walls.
The qi = qz for windward walls is conservative since it results in a higher windward pressure
by subtracting a smaller inward pressure. With qi = qh for leeward and side walls, this
matches the ASCE 7 language since windward and side walls are required to use qh.
Open Structures were not included in Table 2. Open structures have no internal pressure
so there is no simplification of combining external and internal pressures. Open structures
can conservatively use the enclosed structure values, except for the MWFRS windward
pressures on mono-slope roofs. The internal pressure cancels out when combining
windward and leeward pressures on walls and roofs for the MWFRS. An open structure with
only a mono-slope roof will not cancel out the internal pressure where there is no leeward
wall.
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC AND THERMAL

SYSTEMS ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
References:
2007 California Building Code (CBC), Sections 1609A and 1613A
2007 California Electrical Code (CEC), Articles 250, 310, and 609
California State Fire Marshal Photovoltaic Installation Guideline dated April 22, 2008
IR 16-8
Revised 04-03-09
Issued 08-15-08
Discipline: Structural, Access Compliance, Fire-Life Safety, Electrical

Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) describes the Division of the State
Architect (DSA) requirements for acceptance of solar photovoltaic and solar thermal
systems used in construction projects under the jurisdiction of DSA
Scope: This IR clarifies the requirements for structural support, and anchorage of panels
and balance-of-system (BOS) equipment. It also addresses the basic Fire-Life Safety and
some Electrical requirements of the California Building Code (CBC).
Photovoltaic roofing systems (such as tiles) that incorporate photovoltaic technology
physically integrated into the roof covering materials are outside the scope of this IR.
Background: Typical photovoltaic (PV) or solar thermal systems consist of solar panels
and BOS equipment. The BOS equipment includes foundations, support structures, DC-toAC inverters, electrical wiring, electrical protection, monitoring, and safety equipment.
Photovoltaic panels are anchored to building structures. The anchoring relies on various
attachment systems such as support frames (Section 3, below), ballast (Section 4, below),
or adhered systems (Section 5, below).
Solar thermal panels are typically anchored by support structures.
1.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEMS: DSA will not
review the design and construction of the panels and the BOS equipment. However, the
panels and BOS equipment must be designed and constructed to meet the requirements of
Title 24.
See Sections 7 and 8 below for the requirements of Access Compliance and Fire-Life Safety,
respectively.
2.
REVIEW OF SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC AND THERMAL SYSTEMS: The

Division of the State Architect Structural Safety reviews the anchorage of solar panels and
their BOS equipment to the building structure or foundation. The anchorage design for solar
panels and their BOS equipment must meet the wind force requirements of the CBC,
Section 1609A and the seismic requirements of ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13.
DSA (SS) IR 16-8

(rev 04-03-09)
Solar Photovoltaic and Thermal

Systems Acceptance Requirements
Page 1 of 6
DSA (SS) IR 16-8

(rev 04-03-09)

Page 2 of 6
Manufacturers support frames will also be review by DSA. The buildings vertical and
lateral load resisting systems will also be evaluated for the additional loads from the solar
panels and BOS equipment.
2.1
Projects Exempt from DSA Review:

Additions of solar energy systems to existing buildings may be exempt from DSA
review when the total cost of the project (including any other construction, site work,
etc.) is less than the cost limit indicated in IR A-10 for alteration projects. The cost
limit is adjusted annually, from a baseline cost of $25,000 in 1999 dollars as required
by Title 24, Part 1, Sections 4-308 and 4-309. The adjusted cost limit is published in
IR A-10 annually.
All solar energy systems and their installation, including projects exempt from DSA
review, shall meet the requirements of Title 24 and applicable provisions of this IR.
2.1.1 Exception: Regardless of costs, solar energy systems installed on or supported by

free standing structures (whether standing alone or attached to existing buildings)
are not exempted from DSA review. Examples of free standing structures are shade
structures, lunch shelters, canopies, large arrays of panels supported on a single
pole, etc.
3.
PANELS SUPPORTED ON FRAMING SYSTEMS AND FOUNDATIONS:
3.1
Requirements for Wind Design: The wind design requirements are given in CBC
Section 1609A. The design shall consider the effects of partially enclosed structure
configuration (if presented), and discontinuities at panel free edges and corners.
3.2
Requirements for Seismic Design: The seismic anchorage design requirements

are given in CBC Section 1613A, and ASCE Standard 7-05, Chapter 13.
DSA will review support frames either supplied by manufacturers or designed by the
architects or structural engineers in general responsible charge (see Section 6 below),
foundations, primary structure, the connection details of panels to support frames and
connection details of support frames to primary structures or foundations. The design of
the support frames, foundations and connections must meet the following wind and seismic
requirements:
4.
BALLAST PANEL SYSTEMS: Ballast panels may only be installed on a flat roof
with minimal slope for drainage purposes. Panels in a ballast system are not attached to
the roof. They rely on their weights and aerodynamics to counter the wind uplift forces.
4.1
Requirements for Wind Design: The panels shall be designed and installed to
resist wind loads prescribed in CBC, Section 1609A. The minimum design wind force
shall be a net pressure of 10 lb/ft2 acting in either direction normal to the panels per
ASCE 7, Section 6.1.4.2.
Wind tunnel test reports for wind (uplift) are required to verify the design.
4.2
Requirements for Seismic Design: The panels must be seismically restrained from
falling off the roof or excessive movements on the roof. Individual panels need not
be restrained independently if the panels are connected with an interlocking
mechanism that is capable of holding the panels together in the horizontal and
vertical directions.
The overall panel array must be restrained. The restraint and panel interlocking
mechanism must be designed to resist sliding and pop-up resulting from lateral and
vertical seismic forces and displacements per CBC Section 1613A, and ASCE
Standard 7-05, Chapter 13. The restraint and panel interlocking mechanism may be
DSA (SS) IR 16-8

(rev 04-03-09)

Page 3 of 6
verified either through time-history non-linear dynamic analysis or shake table

testing in accordance with International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Service (ES)
Acceptance Criteria AC-156.
4.2.1
Flexible utility connections, such as electrical cables, may be required to

accommodate movement of the panels.
4.2.2
BOS equipment shall be anchored per CBC Section 1613A, and ASCE Standard 705, Chapter 13.
4.3
Other Considerations: Ballast panel systems shall not cause excessive sagging of
the roof resulting in ponding. They shall also not block or impede drainage flows to
any overflow drains and scuppers.
5.
ADHERED PHOTOVOLTAIC PANELS: Adhered photovoltaic panels are attached

to supports by adhesive. Currently, there are no building code criteria, ASTM standards,
ICC evaluation criteria, or other recognized industrial standard for adhesives used to anchor
solar panels. Adhered photovoltaic panels may be accepted if test and analysis data, and
quality control and assurance program are submitted that demonstrate an equivalent level
of safety as positive mechanical anchorage systems.
The local DSA Regional Office should be contacted early in the design phase if an adhered
system is anticipated.
6.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: All projects involving installation of photovoltaic
or solar thermal systems shall have a California licensed or registered architect or structural
engineer in general responsible charge per Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-316. Applications for
project review shall be submitted to the DSA Regional Offices, following the normal process
for project submittal. An overview of the project submittal process and requirements may
be found on the DSA web site. (See Appendix B for web links.)
In addition to the above requirements, the following items are also required for review:
6.1 General
6.1.1
Construction plans and specifications shall be signed and stamped by architect or

structural engineer in general responsible charge per IR A-19. The architect or
structural engineer in general responsible may use construction plans and
specifications prepared by the manufacturers California registered engineer
provided the requirements of IR A-18 are met.
6.1.2
The plans and specifications shall including anchorage or restraint details of the
panels, BOS equipment, support structures, and foundations. Also submit any
applicable anchorage calculations.
6.1.3
Shop drawings or fabrication and installation drawings of the system.
6.1.4
Calculations to verify that the primary structure will support the additional
vertical and lateral loads from the panels and BOS equipment. Also provide
calculations verifying that roof deflection will not cause ponding.
6.1.5
Roof Live Loads on Panels. It is not necessary to include roof live load (20
psf) in the area(s) covered by the panels when these area(s) are inaccessible, or
fenced off with posted signs prohibiting storage under the panels.
When applicable, include snow loads and loads from snow drift.
6.2 Ballast Panel Systems

6.2.1
Wind tunnel test reports that address wind uplift per Section 4.1.2 above. Listings
or evaluation reports issued by ICC Evaluation Services, Dade County, or other
DSA (SS) IR 16-8

(rev 04-03-09)

Page 4 of 6
recognized testing and evaluation organizations per IR A-5 may be substituted

for wind tunnel test reports if the listings or evaluation reports were issued on the
basis of wind tunnel testing.
6.2.2
Provide Panel Interlocking system verification using either a time-history nonlinear dynamic analysis or shake table testing in accordance with ICC ES
Acceptance Criteria AC-15-6, per Section 4.2 above.
7. ACCESS COMPLIANCE:
Projects which consist only of solar energy system work

installed on existing buildings do not trigger accessibility code requirements or DSA
accessibility review. See Section 1134B.2.1, Exception 4, Part 2, Title 24, CCR, for detailed
requirements. Also see DSA IR 11B-6, Mechanical Only Projects Exempt from Accessibility
Review.
New shade structures, lunch shelters, canopies, and carports incorporating solar panels will
require access compliance review. For example, a new shade structure over an existing
parking lot will trigger access compliance review to determine if upgrades are required to
the parking area and the path of travel to conform with current access compliance code
requirements.
8. FIRE-LIFE SAFETY: The installation of solar or thermal systems will be reviewed for
code compliance by adherence to the State Fire Marshal Solar Photovoltaic Installation
Guideline in all respects including any additional amendments, supplements, or official
interpretations. Other proposed means of achieving compliance will be considered and
evaluated.
8.1 Fire-Life Safety Review: Photovoltaic and thermal stand alone systems that have
support structures of combustible materials shall be located per CBC requirements and
may not be located in Frontage areas used for adjacent building area increases.
Noncombustible support structures and BOS equipment may be located next to
adjacent buildings provided exiting is maintained and are not required to have
automatic fire sprinkler system coverage where the configuration of the system will
not allow heat, smoke or gasses to be trapped. Noncombustible stand alone systems
need not be included in the basic area calculations.
8.2 Requirements for Fire-Life Safety Design: When panels are supported on framing
systems and foundations, they shall be of non-combustible materials and shall be
designed so that heat, smoke and other gasses can not be trapped under the panels.
Framing systems may not be placed in designated fire access lanes. Combustible
framing systems may not be placed within the 2007 CBC Frontage Increase areas of
buildings constructed under the 2007 CBC, nor within the required side yard areas for
existing buildings constructed under previous codes, without prior approval of DSA
Fire-Life Safety.
9.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: Solar energy systems shall meet the require-
ments of the 2007 California Electrical Code (CEC). All systems shall be grounded in
accordance with the 2007 CEC, Article 250. Electrical cables and materials shall meet
the criteria for weather proof locations per the 2007 CEC, Article 310.
Solar
photovoltaic systems shall comply with the requirements of 2007 CEC, Article 690.
Appendix A shows an example of a PV system grounding.
Appendices:
Appendix A Example of PV System Grounding
DSA (SS) IR 16-8

(rev 04-03-09)

Page 5 of 6
Appendix B Hyperlinks to Web Pages
Appendix A: Example of PV System Grounding
Scale: none
Appendix B: Hyperlinks to Web Pages

Some of the documents referenced in this IR are available from the following web pages:
IR A-5: http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/pubs/IR_A-5_rev06-02-08.pdf
IR A-10: http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/pubs/IR_A-10_03-17-08.pdf
IR A-18: http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/pubs/IR_A-18_issued02-01-08.pdf
IR A-19: http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/pubs/IR_A-19_rev04-07-08.pdf
IR 11B-6: http://www.documents.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/pubs/IR_11B-6_02-04-08.pdf
Overview of DSA Submittal Process: http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/PlanRev/overview.htm
DSA (SS) IR 16-8

(rev 04-03-09)

Page 6 of 6
Fire Marshalls Guidelines: http://www.osfm.fire.ca.gov/pdf/reports/solarphotovoltaicguideline.pdf
IR 16-9
PENDANT MOUNTED
LIGHT FIXTURES
References:
California Building Code, Part 2, Section 1614A1.12.
ASCE 7 Sections 13.6.1 and 13.2.3
Issued 06-22-09
Purpose:
The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to set forth an

acceptable method for support of pendant mounted light fixtures.
General: Pendant mounted light fixtures that are free to swing in the lateral direction
shall be detailed and installed so that they can swing at least 45 degrees from the vertical in
any direction without contacting an obstruction. Adjacent fixtures shall be separated by a
distance equal to at least one and one half times the length of the pendant.
Exception: When it can be demonstrated by rational analysis that fixtures will
swing less than 45 degrees in the maximum credible earthquake, fixture location and
spacing may be based on such analysis.
1. SAFETY CABLES: Fixtures that are supported by cables shall have cables (including
cable connections and supports) designed to support a load of at least 1.4 times the weight
of the fixture acting simultaneously in the vertical and horizontal direction and applied at
the point of lateral support.
Fixtures supported by hollow rods, or other support
mechanisms shall be provided with a safety cable attached directly to the fixture and
directly to competent supporting structure above. The safety cable, its connections, and
supports shall be designed to support a load of at least 1.4 times the weight of the fixture
acting simultaneously in the vertical and horizontal direction and applied at the point of
lateral support.
2. RIGID PENDANTS: When a pendant mounted light fixture is supported by a rigid

(rod-type) pendant the pendant shall be attached to the structure above with a device that
allows movement in any direction (i.e. ball and socket joint). When a single fixture is
supported by more than one rigid pendant, the pendants shall be attached to the structure
above, and to the fixture, with devices that allow movement in any direction; devices that
allow rotation around only one axis (i.e. hinge-type devices) are not acceptable.
3. RESTRAINED PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURES: When fixtures are restrained
from lateral movement all restraints, connections, and supports shall be designed to resist
all applicable code prescribed forces.
4.
PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURES WITH PENDANTS PENETRATING
SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC TILE CEILINGS: Where pendants penetrate Acoustic
ceilings they shall be braced in accordance with Section 1.22 of IR 25-5.
Exception:
Fixtures that have passed shaking table tests approved by the
enforcement agency shall be supported by devices identical to those used in the tests.
DSA IR 16-9
(iss 06-22-09)
Pendant Mounted
Light Fixtures
Page 1 of 1
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF REVIEWING STANDS,

GRANDSTANDS, AND BLEACHERS: 2007 CBC
References:
2007 California Building Code, Sections 1025.1.1, and 3401.1
ICC/ANSI 300-02
IR 16-10
Issued 08-06-09
Purpose: This IR clarifies the structural design requirements for bleachers with an overall
height of 20 feet or less from the top of foundation at the front to the uppermost seatboard.
Bleachers exceeding the height 20 shall be designed, constructed and inspected in
compliance with the requirements of the current California Building Code (CBC).
Do not use this IR for any other structures. This IR is applicable only to projects submitted
to DSA for review under the 2007 CBC. For projects submitted under the 2001 CBC, see IR
16-5.
1.
Definitions: In addition to those in ICC/ANSI 300, Section 202, the following

terms are defined for this IR. Please note that ICC 300 defines bleachers, and grandstands
identically. The terms bleacher and grandstand will be used interchangeably in this IR.
All provisions pertaining to bleacher will also be applicable to grandstand and vice versa.
1.1
School Buildings: DSA reviews and approves the construction of school buildings.
Section 4-314, Part 1, Title 24, California Code of Regulation defines reviewing
stands, grandstands and bleachers more than five rows of seats above grade as
school buildings.
1.2
Portable Bleachers: Seating facilities located outside of a building and not attached
to permanent foundations. The maximum height of any portable bleachers may not
exceed eleven rows, or nine feet above grade to the top seating board.
1.3
Temporary Portable Bleachers: Portable bleachers that remain at a location for

less than 90 days. They are exempted from DSA review, but must be in compliance
with the requirements of ICC/ANSI 300.
1.4
Folding and Telescoping Seating Facilities: Structures used for tiered seating
whose overall size and shape may be reduced without being dismantled for purposes
of moving or storing.
All provisions in this IR pertaining to bleachers and
grandstands will also be applicable to this type of seating facilities.
1.5
Approved Bleacher Fabrication Shops: Fabrication shops shall be accredited or

certified by International Accreditation Service (IAS) or other independent
accreditation agencies to fabricate bleachers. The accreditation shall be based on
the review of the fabricators written procedural, quality control manuals and
unannounced annual visit and audit of fabrication practices by an auditor approved
by the accreditation agency.
DSA IR 16-10
(iss 08-06-09)

Grandstands, and Bleachers: 2007 CBC
Page 1 of 8
DSA IR 16-10
(iss 08-06-09)

Page 2 of 8
A bleacher fabrication shop accredited for steel fabrication and welding in a manner
similarly to the above paragraph is also considered an approved bleacher fabrication
shop, provided the fabrication shop has a minimum of five years of documented
continuous experience in the fabrication of bleachers. Proof of experience may
include past certification, and a history of projects completed. Upon request by DSA,
the fabrication shop shall provide proof with a cover letter on the fabrication shops
stationary, signed and stamped by the manufacturers (California registered) civil or
structural engineer per Section 4.3 below.
2.
Footings: Footings for portable bleachers are required to comply with CBC, Section
1805A. Temporary portable bleachers as defined in Section 1.2 above maybe supported by
wood sills or steel plates directly bearing on the ground surface, provided the soil pressure
does not exceed 1200 pounds per square foot (psf).
3.
Relocation: DSA approval is only for the specific location originally shown. Any
subsequent move to another location voids the approval and will require submittal of an
application for approval at the new site.
4.
Structural Design: The structural design shall be in accordance with ICC/ANSI

300, Section 303. Also see Table 1607A.1, CBC.
4.1
Sway Loads: The design of bleachers shall consider sway loads as live loads in
accordance with Footnote (d), Table 4-1, ASCE 7-05. See Appendix A for applicable
load combinations for bleacher design.
4.2
Seatboards and Footboards as Structural Elements: On the basis of previously

approved designs, and engineering data that were submitted, DSA has determined
that seatboards and footboards are acceptable alternate structural elements, per
Title 24, Part 1, Sections 4-304 and 4-305, for the following applications:
Bracing the compression flanges of stringers,

Torsional restraint of the stringers or girders, and
Diaphragm action for distribution of forces.
Note: The provisions of this section will be valid only for projects design under
the 2007 CBC. See Section 8.2 below.
4.3
Professional Stamps and Signatures: A California licensed architect or registered

structural engineer shall prepare and submit construction documents, which include
plans and specifications, along with any supporting documents such as calculations
to DSA for review and approval. All construction documents shall bear the stamp
and signature of the architect or structural engineer per IR A-19, Design
Professionals Signature and Seal (Stamp) on Construction Documents.
The architect or structural engineer who is in general responsible charge of a project
as defined by Title 24, Part 1, may exercise the option to use plans and specifications
prepared by the manufacturers (California registered) civil or structural engineer.
The requirements for using this option are provided in IR A-18, Use of Construction
Documents Prepared by Other Professionals.
4.4
Approval by Comparison With Previously Approved Similar Designs: Subject

to the limitations and exceptions shown this section, approval of the design drawings
and specifications for site-specific outdoor and indoor telescopic bleachers, which
have already been approved at a DSA Regional Office or through the Pre-Check (PC)
process, will be approved on the basis of a comparison review. Site-specific outdoor
and indoor telescopic bleachers that are smaller than a previously approved bleacher
will be approved with a limited review if it meets the conditions in the sub-sections
below.
DSA IR 16-10
(iss 08-06-09)

Page 3 of 8
Exception: site adopted ancillary attachments such as ramps and walkways may
require a full review.
4.4.1
Structural Element Limitation: Structural elements and connections, such as

welds, bolts, etc., must be the same or stronger than those used in the
previously DSA approved drawings and specifications. The length of structural
elements must be the same or shorter than previously approved.
4.4.2
Span Limitation: The spans of the structural system must be the same or less
than shown on the previously DSA approved drawings and specifications.
4.4.3
Additional Limitations:
4.4.4
There are no conceptual changes to the configuration of the structural

system.
There have been no subsequent structural code changes that would adversely
affect the bleacher design.
The design loads are no greater than those indicated in the previously DSA
approved design.
Material Specifications (sizes and grades) shall remain unchanged.
Soil Condition Limitation: The soil conditions must provide equal or greater
capacity to support the structure than indicated in the previously DSA approved
design. If the soil conditions provide less capacity, DSA will review the affected
portions of the design. Once DSA determines that the site specific foundation
system complies with the code requirements, the design will be approved.
5.
Testing and Inspection Requirements:
5.1
Approved Fabrication Shops: In accordance with CBC Section 1704A.2.2, special

inspections are not required where the bleachers are fabricated on the premises of
an approved bleacher fabricator as defined in Section 1.5 above.
Proof of
accreditation for the fabrication shop shall be included with the construction
documents that are submitted to DSA for review.
5.1.1
5.2
Documentation:
At the completion of the fabrication, manufacturer shall
submit a Certificate of Compliance, form DSA-130, per CBC Section 1704A.2.2 to
the owner, project inspector, the engineer or architect in general responsible
charge, and DSA.
The certificate of compliance shall meet the following
requirements. See sample certificate of compliance in Appendix A.
It must be signed and stamped by the manufacturers (California registered)

civil or structural engineer in accordance with Section 4.3 above.
The engineer shall state in the Certificate of Compliance that he/she has
personal knowledge of the fabrication, as defined in Title 24, Part 1, Section
4-336, and certify, under the penalty of perjury, that the materials used and
works performed are in accordance with DSA approved construction
documents.
Unapproved Fabrication Shops: Where bleachers or grandstands are fabricated

on the premises of an unapproved fabricators shop, special inspection shall be
required per CBC, Section 1704A.2. The special inspector shall inspect the
fabrication, verify the fabricators quality control procedure, and the fabricators
ability to conform to approved construction documents and referenced standards per
CBC Section 1704A.2.1.
The special inspector shall be employed by the school district (owner) and approved
by DSA in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(c).
DSA IR 16-10
(iss 08-06-09)

Page 4 of 8
5.2.1
Material Certification: The special inspector is responsible for ensuring all

bleacher material are identifiable or traceable to the certificates of compliance,
such as mill certificates for steel and fasteners, lumber inspection certificates,
etc. The DSA approved special inspector shall attach copies of these certificates,
or completed forms DSA-131, to his or her daily inspection reports (DSA-250).
5.2.2
Material Testing: If any material testing is required, such as for unidentifiable

steel, testing must be performed by a test laboratory employed by the school
district and acceptable to DSA. A list of acceptable test laboratories can be found
on DSA website.
Test reports shall be submitted by the laboratory within 14 days of the testing,
and a final verified report (DSA-292) shall be submitted at the conclusion of the
fabrication.
5.2.3
Special Inspection for Welding: If welding is required in the fabrication shop,

an AWS-certified welding inspector (CWI) approved by DSA shall inspect welding
in accordance with the CBC and IR 17-3, Structural Welding Inspection. The
welding inspector shall provide daily inspection reports (DSA 250). At the
completion of the work, he/she shall submit a verified report (DSA 292).
6.0 Inspection in the Field: When the bleacher or grandstand is delivered to the job
site, the project inspector (PI) shall be responsible for, but not limited to, the following:
Ensure all the required documents per Sections 5.1 or 5.2 are submitted by the
manufacturer.
Review the manufacturers submitted documents for compliance with DSA
approved construction documents.
Inspect the bleacher or grandstand for defects and compliance with DSA
Inspect the field installation, including site work.
6.1
Special Inspection of Field Welding: If welding is required in the field, an AWScertified welding inspector (CWI), approved by DSA, shall inspect welding in
accordance with the CBC and IR 17-3. The field welding inspector shall provide daily
inspection reports (DSA-250). At the completion of the work, the field welding
inspector shall submit a verified report (DSA-292).
7.
Yearly Inspection: After the installation, the owner shall conduct annual
inspections as required by ICC/ANSI 300, Section 105.2.
The owner will also maintain
copies of all annual inspection reports and make them available on site for DSA review upon
request.
8.
Load Tests: For the 2007 CBC, load tests when approved by DSA may be used to
check bleacher design or as a basis for approval in lieu of engineering analysis.
The load test procedure must by approved by DSA prior to testing. Test loads will be applied
in not less than four, approximately equal increments, without shock to the structure and in
a manner to avoid arching of the loading materials or stiffening of the structure. The
strength of the material in the test bleacher should not exceed the minimum specified
strength by more than 5 percent.
8.1
Test Load Factors: When load tests are made to check design or as a basis for
approval of bleachers, the test load should not be less than twice the design vertical
load combined with twice the design lateral load.
DSA IR 16-10
(iss 08-06-09)
8.2

Page 5 of 8
Testing Beyond 2007 CBC: When the 2010 CBC becomes effective, load tests for
verification of primary structure of fixed bleachers shall not be permitted. They shall
be designed in accordance with the requirements of CBC and ICC 300, Section
303.1. Seatboards and footboards may not be considered as providing torsional
restraint for stringers or girders, nor distributing lateral forces by diaphragm action.
8.2.1
Folding Bleachers: Load tests for the verification of primary structure of folding
bleachers may be permitted on a case by case basis. Testing protocols and
procedures must be submitted for review and approval prior to testing.
8.2.2
Accessories: Load tests for minor accessories such as hand rails may be verified
by tests on a case by case basis. Testing protocols and procedures must be
submitted for review and approval prior to testing.
Exception: Testing shall not be permitted for structural verification of press
boxes.
9.
Existing Bleachers, Seating and Grandstands:
Structures that were

installed prior to the adoption of ICC/ANSI 300 shall comply with Chapter 5 of
ICC/ANSI 300.
Attachments
Appendix A Load Combinations for Bleacher Design
Attachment 1 Form DSA-130 Certificate of Compliance Bandstand/Grandstand

Approved Fabricator
Attachment 2 Form DSA-131 Bleacher/Grandstand Material Certification

Unapproved Fabricator
DSA IR 16-10
(iss 08-06-09)

Page 6 of 8
Appendix A Load Combinations for Bleacher Design

CBC Section 1605A.2.1 (Strength or LRFD)1,2
Equations
1.4 (D + F)
1.2(D + F + T) + 1.6 (L + Lsway + H) + 0.5 (Lr or S or R)
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (f 1 (L + Lsway) or 0.8 W)
1.2D + 1.6 W + f 1L + 0.5(Lr or S or R )
1.2D + 1.0E + f 1L + f 2S
0.9D + 1.6W + 1.6 H
0.9D + 1.0E + 1.6H
Equation 16A-1
Equation 16A-2
Equation 16A-3
Equation 16 A-4
Equation 16A-5
Equation 16A-6
Equation 16A-7
CBC Section 1605A.3.1 ASD Basic1,2
Equations
D+F
D + H + F + L + Lsway + T
D + H + F + (Lr or S or R)
D + H + F+ 0.75 (L + Lsway + T) + 0.75 (Lr or S or R)
D + H + F + (W or 0.7 E)
D + H + F+ 0.75 (W or 0.7 E) + 0.75L + 0.75 (Lr or S or R)
0.6D + W + H
0.6D + 0.7 E + H
Equation 16A-8
Equation 16A-9
Equation 16A-10
Equation 16A-11
Equation 16A-12
Equation 16A-13
Equation 16A-14
Equation 16A-15
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Equation 16A-16
Equation 16A-17
Equation 16A-18
Equation 16A-19
Equation 16A-20
Equation 16A-21
Yes except
3
Yes except
3
Yes except
3
Yes except
3
Yes except
3
Yes except
Increase?
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CBC Section 1605A.3.2 ASD Alternate Basic1,2,3

D + L + Lsway + (Lr or S or R)
D + L + W
D + L + W + S/ 2
D + L + S + W/ 2
D + L + S + E/ 1.4
0.9D + E/ 1.4
Notes:
1.
Sway loads shall be considered as live loads per ASCE 7-05, Table 4-1, Footnote (d)
2.
For seismic analysis, bleachers shall be considered as all other self-supporting structures per
ASCE 7-05, Table 15.4-2 (the last non-building structural type in the table, R=1.25).
3.
ICC 300, Section 303.4 allows stresses permitted in the design standards of the various materials
to be increased by one-third due to sway or wind loads or by a combination of sway or wind loads
and vertical loads. The 2007 CBC allows stress increase only in Section 1605A.3.2 (ASD alternate
basic load combinations) and only where permitted by the material chapter or the referenced
standard. The steel chapter and the referenced standard AISC 360 does not permit stress
increase for steel design. Therefore, ICC 300, Section 303.4 is not adopted for materials such as
steel that does not permit stress increase.
FORM
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES
DSA-130
Issued 08-09
Certificate of Compliance Approved Bleacher / Grandstand Fabricator

Certification form to be completed by the manufacturer of the Bleacher or Grandstand at the completion of fabrication.
Completed form is to be submitted to the owner, project inspector, the engineer or architect in general responsible charge, and DSA
DSA File #
Application #
Bleacher/Grandstand ID:
I certify (or declare) under the penalty of perjury that the following statements are
true: All boxes must be checked for the submittal to be considered complete.)
I have personal knowledge, as defined in Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-336, of the
fabrication of the bleacher/grandstand identified above.
The materials and works performed for the fabrication of the bleacher/grandstand
identified above are in accordance with DSA approved construction documents.
Attachments:
Proof of accreditation of the fabrication shop where the
identified above was fabricated
bleacher/grandstand
Welding inspection reports for shop welds

Certificates for seatboards and footboards, i.e. mill certification.
Date:
Signed:
Engineer
Print Name:
LEA Lab. Engineer
CA Reg./
License No.:
Engineer Stamp:
Form DSA-130
(iss. 08-06-09)
Page 1 of 1
FORM
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES
DSA-131
Issued 08-09
Bleacher/Grandstand Material Certification - Unapproved Fabricator

Material Certification form to be completed by the DSA approved Special Inspector
and attached to his/her daily inspection reports (DSA-250)
DSA File #
Bleacher/Grandstand ID:
Part No.
Description
Application #
Material
ASTM Standard,
Grade, or Test
Report
Certified,
Stamped, or
Tested by
I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury that the materials listed above have been used in the
construction of the referenced bleacher or grandstand.
Date:
Signed:
DSA Approved Special Inspector
Print Name:
Form DSA-131
(iss. 08-06-09)
Page 1 of 1
SAMPLING AND TESTING

OF STRUCTURAL MATERIALS
IR 17-1
References: California Building Code, Title 24, Part 1 Section 4-335

Revised 10-15-07
Issued 10-20-05 as CR 17-1
This IR applies also to testing laboratories, technicians and special inspectors working on projects under DSA jurisdiction.
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify who is
responsible for the sampling, handling, and testing of structural materials as specifically
required by Title 24, Part 1 (California Building Standards Administrative Code), Section 4335 and 2001 CBC, Title 24, Part 2, Chapters 14A, 16A through 23A (Chapters 14, 16A
through 19A, 20, 21A, 22A and 23 respectively in the 2007 CBC) and 33. This IR is not
applicable to tests required by other portions of the Code.
Background: Title 24 requires sampling and testing of various structural materials.
Section 4-335 of Part 1 requires that a testing facility acceptable to Division of the State
Architect (DSA) perform all tests. Testing facilities are evaluated and accepted as part of the
Laboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) program. Accepted facilities are listed at
http://www.applications.dgs.ca.gov/dsa/etrackerweb/approvedlabs.asp
Section 4-335(d) of Part 1 requires that all test reports state that materials were sampled
and tested in accordance with the requirements of the DSA approved project construction
documents. Reports must also state that materials meet the requirements of the DSA
approved documents.
1.
REQUIREMENTS: Sampling and testing shall be performed as follows:
1.1
The project inspector, a representative of the architect, engineer, DSA or the testing
facility may select the locations for sampling. In no case shall the contractor,
supplier, or construction manager select locations for sampling.
1.2
Testing (including laboratory and field testing) may only be performed by qualified
representative of the LEA accepted testing facility identified on form DSA-102,
Contract Information Form.
1.3
Sampling, protection, handling, transporting and storing of samples may only be

performed by qualified representatives of the LEA accepted testing facility.
1.3.1
Exception: For a minor scope of work, the project inspector may, if qualified and
other duties permit, be authorized in writing by the DSA Field Engineer to
sample, protect, handle, transport, and/or store test specimens. Copies of this
approval will be sent to the laboratory, project inspector, design professional and
the school district.
If the project inspector performs these tasks he or she shall specifically identify
the tasks performed on a verified report (form DSA-6).
The engineering manager of the LEA accepted facility must note Exception in
Section D of the Laboratory Verified Report (form DSA-291) and attach a list of
each type of material specimen for which sampling and handling were performed
by others.
DSA (SS) IR 17-1

(rev. 10-15-07)
Sampling and Testing

of Structural Materials
Page 1 of 1
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
(N.D.T.) OF WELDS
IR 17-2
Reference: California Building Code, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-335

Revised 10-15-07
Issued 05-15-07 as CR 17-2
1. Purpose:

minimum requirements for the qualification and certification of facilities, and their
personnel, that perform nondestructive testing (NDT) of welds. It is applicable to the
performance of the following NDT test methods: liquid penetrant (PT), magnetic particle
(MT), ultrasonic (UT) and radiographic (RT) testing.
2. Background: This IR does not apply to visual inspection during the welding operation.
NDT is considered a test, not an inspection. Title 24, Part 1 Section 4-335 requires that all
tests are to be conducted by a testing facility acceptable to Division of the State Architect
(DSA). Testing facilities are evaluated and accepted by DSA through the Laboratory
Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) program. Nondestructive testing shall be performed only
by currently approved LEA facilities.
3. Requirements:
Facilities performing NDT for projects under DSA jurisdiction shall

meet the following requirements for facilities, NDT program, personnel and reporting:
3.1
NDT Facilities:
3.1.1
Only currently approved LEA facilities may perform NDT. LEA facilities are listed
on the DSA web site, on the Testing Laboratories web page
(http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/labs/default.htm).
3.1.2
The LEA facility may perform only those NDT test methods that are accepted
through the LEA program.
3.1.3
The California Registered civil engineer with engineering managerial responsibility

for the LEA facility (the laboratory engineer) shall be responsible for overall
implementation of the facilitys NDT program, including supervision of the Level
III administrator.
3.1.4
All NDT testing equipment must be kept calibrated and the use controlled by the
laboratory engineer.
3.2
3.2.1
Facilitys NDT Program:

The NDT program of an LEA facility must be administered by an individual with
valid certification as an NDT Level III by the American Society for Nondestructive
DSA (SS) IR 17-2

(rev 10-15-07)
Nondestructive Testing
(NDT) of Welds
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 17-2

(rev 10-15-07)
(NDT) of Welds
Page 2 of 3
Testing (ASNT). The NDT administrators Level III certification must be obtained
through the successful completion of an examination given by ASNT, or an ASNT
authorized examination center. The NDT administrators certification must be
current and verifiable on the ASNT website. The NDT administrator must be
certified in all NDT test methods for which the facility has been accepted, or is
seeking acceptance, through the LEA program. The NDT administrator may be
an employee of the facility or a contracted individual from an outside
organization. The NDT administrator is, at a minimum, responsible for:
a)
Developing, administering, and grading all general, specific, and practical

exams for Level I and II NDT personnel,
b)
Creating and maintaining qualification and certification records for all Level
I and II personnel, and
c)
Supervising and monitoring the NDT work of all Level I and II NDT
personnel.
3.2.2
The NDT program must meet the American Society of Testing and Materials
(ASTM) Standards E 54304 and E 121204.
3.2.3
The NDT program shall include a certification program which clearly outlines
qualifications and certification of nondestructive testing personnel.
The
certification program must meet the requirements of ANSI/ASNT CP-189-2001
and be approved by the NDT administrator (see Section 3.2.1 above) and the
laboratory engineer (see Section 3.1.3 above).
3.2.4
The NDT program shall include written method-specific procedures applicable to

all NDT methods for which the facility is LEA approved. The written procedures
must meet the requirements of applicable ASTM standards (as listed below) and
be approved by the NDT administrator and the laboratory engineer.
Test Method
Liquid Penetrant (PT)
Magnetic Particle (MT)
Ultrasonic (UT)
Radiographic (RT)
3.2.5
3.3
3.3.1
ASTM Standards
E-165-02, E1417-05
E-1444-05, E-709-01
E-164-03, E-587-00, E114-95, A-898-91
E-1032-01, E-94-04, E-1742-05
Written procedures that meet the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1-04 Structural

Welding Code Steel, shall be required for ultrasonic flaw detection of weldments.
Personnel Performing NDT:
NDT shall be performed by personnel with valid certification as NDT Level II.
Certification records must include the signature and printed name of both the
NDT administrator and the laboratory engineer. Evidence of certification shall be
presented to the project inspector and maintained on the project site. Evidence
of certification shall be available for review by the DSA field engineer.
DSA (SS) IR 17-2

(10-15-07)
3.3.2
3.4
(NDT) of Welds
Page 3 of 3
NDT shall be performed in accordance with the DSA approved documents,

California Code of Regulations Title 24, The American Welding Society (AWS)
D1.104, D1.8-05, applicable ASTM standards, and the facilitys written
procedures.
Reporting:
3.4.1
The NDT Level II technician is required to issue a daily report that includes
records of equipment calibration and a systematic record of all welds tested and
accepted.
3.4.2
Test reports must state that materials were tested in accordance with and met
the requirements of the DSA approved documents. Reports must be submitted
as required by C.C.R. Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-335 (d). A sample report
template (DSA 210) is available on the DSA web site.
3.4.3
Reports shall be sent to the school district and copied to the architect, structural
engineer, project inspector, and DSA within 14 days of the date of the test.
Reports shall also be presented to the project inspector on a daily basis. Reports
indicating non-compliant materials shall be submitted immediately.
3.4.4
The California Registered civil engineer with engineering managerial responsibility for the LEA facility (Section 3.1.3 above) is responsible for signing and
submitting a Laboratory Verified Report (Form DSA-291) at the conclusion of the
testing program. The Laboratory Verified Report shall include all NDT testing.
4.0
Failure to Perform: Failure to perform all required nondestructive testing in a
professional and competent manner, report defective work, file all required reports in
a truthful and timely manner, or fulfill any other duties defined by the code may
have serious consequences for the NDT technician and/or the LEA facility. These
consequences include but are not limited to withdrawal of DSA approval, and/or
denial of any future DSA approval to work as a NDT technician on projects under
DSA jurisdiction.
Structural Welding
Inspection
IR 17-3
Reference: California Building Standards Administrative Code,

Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(c)
2001 California Building Code (CBC),
Title 24, Part 2, Sections 1701A.5.5, 2203A and 2231A
Revised 04-07-08
Revised 01-02-08
Issued 05-15-07 as CR 17-3
1.
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify the
minimum requirements and responsibilities for personnel conducting structural welding
inspections for projects submitted to DSA under the 2001 California Building Code (CBC). It
is applicable to shop and field welding activities.
2.
Background:
The 2001 California Building Code requires constant special
inspection of all welding operations except that continuous inspection is permitted for
certain weld types in accordance with the 2001 CBC, Section 1701A.5.
2.1
For welding, constant means constant presence of the welding inspector at point of
welding, and that he or she inspects each pass as it is being done prior to
subsequent weld layers. Constant inspection is applicable to the following types of
welds: Multi-pass fillet welds, partial penetration groove welds and complete
penetration groove welds.
2.2
For welding, continuous means the welding inspector must be in the vicinity of the
welding during all phases, and shall inspect in a timely manner, before subsequent
operations are performed. Continuous inspection is applicable to single pass fillet
welds, deck welding, shear studs, hand rails, etc.
3.
Qualifications: Welding inspectors shall meet the following minimum requirements:
3.1
Have valid certification as an American Welding Society (AWS) certified welding

inspector (CWI) or senior certified welding inspector (SCWI) as defined in the
provisions of ANSI/AWS QC1,
3.2
Have taken the AWS Open Code Book examination on ANSI/AWS D1.1, Structural
Welding Code Steel.
3.3
Be not less than 25 years of age, and
3.4
Must possess knowledge of the administrative requirements of Title 24 Part 1 and

special welding inspection requirements of Title 24, Part 2.
DSA (SS) IR 17-3

(rev 04-07-08)

Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 17-3

(rev 04-07-08)

Page 2 of 3
4.
Approval: A welding inspector shall be approved for each specific project prior to
performing any work in accordance with Section 4-333 (c) of Title 24, Part 1 and 2231A of
the 2001 CBC. To be approved for a project the welding inspector may be required to
demonstrate the following to the satisfaction of DSA:
4.1
The minimum requirements defined in Section 3 above,
4.2
At least 3 years experience in construction or inspection work on projects similar to

the project for which the inspector is applying, and
4.3
That adequate time and attention will be devoted to the project.
5.
Inspection Duties:
5.1
Review and understand the applicable portions of the DSA approved plans,
specifications, field changes and other DSA approved documents. Approved shop
drawings, erection drawings, referenced codes and standards must also be reviewed
and understood. (Note that shop/erection drawings are NOT DSA approved documents and shall NOT be used as a basis for determining compliance).
5.2
Review manufacturers Material Test Report (MTR). Verify that all materials
properties (e.g. grade, type, size, thickness) are as specified by the DSA approved
documents, and that all materials are readily identifiable and traceable to an MTR.
Sample any unidentifiable material for testing. All testing of materials must be
performed by a laboratory accepted in the DSA Laboratory Evaluation and
Acceptance (LEA) Program.
5.3
For seam welds in hollow structural sections (HSS), conduct a thorough visual
examination of the seam weld area for visible discontinuities. Visual examination
should include, as a minimum, the exterior of the seam weld and the interior at each
end.
5.4
For structural plate, conduct a thorough visual examination of surfaces for visible
lamination discontinuities.
5.5
Verify that all applicable welder, welding operator, and tack welder qualifications are
available, current, and accurate.
5.6
Verify that a written Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) is available on site for
each type of weld, that the WPS is in compliance with all requirements, and that the
WPS has been approved as required by the construction documents.
5.7
Witness all Procedure Qualification Tests required for non-prequalified welds and
verify that Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) are compliant with all applicable
requirements.
5.8
Verify that all welding consumables comply with the DSA approved documents and
the approved WPS. Verify that all electrodes are properly stored.
5.9
Verify that the welding current and voltage are within the WPS parameters by using
a calibrated hand-held volt/amp meter. Readings should be taken as near the arc as
possible.
DSA (SS) IR 17-3

(rev 04-07-08)

Page 3 of 3
5.10
Verify that joint preparation, assembly practice, preheat temperatures, interpass

temperatures, welding techniques, welder performance, and post-weld heat
treatment meet the requirements of the DSA approved documents, WPS, and
applicable AWS code.
5.11
Conduct visual inspection of the work: Verify size, length, and location of all welds.
Verify that all welds conform to the requirements of the AWS code and the DSA
approved documents. Weld size and contour shall be measured with suitable
gauges.
5.12
Mark completed welds, parts, and joints that have been inspected and accepted with
a distinguishing mark, tag or dye stamp. The mark shall include: Testing laboratory
initials (if applicable), inspectors initials, inspection date and status.
5.13
Schedule or notify those responsible for nondestructive testing (NDT) technicians in a

timely manner, after visual inspection and acceptance is complete, and the assembly
has cooled. See DSA IR 17-2 for further information regarding NDT.
6.
Reporting:
6.1
Provide daily inspection reports that clearly describe the inspection process. The
report shall document all inspection duties listed in Section 5. above. Reports shall
include a systematic list of accepted and rejected welds, parts, or joints. Reports
shall clearly document weld locations by grid line, elevation or other acceptable
means.
6.2
Reports shall reference the details on the DSA approved documents used as a basis
for inspection.
6.3
Inspection reports must state that the work was inspected in accordance with, and
met the requirements of, the DSA approved documents. Reports must be submitted
as required by Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333 (c). A sample special inspection form
(DSA 250) is available on the DSA web site.
6.4
Reports shall be sent to the school district and copied to the architect, structural
engineer, project inspector and DSA within 14 days of the date of the inspection. For
field welding, reports shall also be presented to the project inspector on a daily
basis. Reports indicating non-compliance shall be submitted immediately.
6.5
At the conclusion of the work, the welding inspector is required to sign and submit a
verified report. The verified report shall be made on form (DSA 292) available on
the DSA website.
7.
Failure to Perform: Failure to inspect in a professional and competent manner,

report defective work, file all required reports in a truthful and timely manner, or fulfill any
other duties defined by the code may have serious consequences for the welding inspector.
These consequences include but are not limited to withdrawal of DSA approval, and/or
denial of any future DSA approval to work as a welding inspector on projects under DSA
jurisdiction.
BASICS OF STRUCTURAL TESTS

AND SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
IR 17-4
References: California Administrative Code (CAC), Section 4-333(c)

California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 17A
Issued 11-03-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify general

structural test and special inspection requirements for projects under DSA jurisdiction.
See IR 17-5 for more specific interpretations regarding structural testing.
See IR 17-6 for special inspections.
See IR 17-7 for testing requirements for soil.
Background: The California Building Code (CBC) requires special inspection and/or
testing of various construction work, materials, or completed components.
These
requirements were adopted from the model code applicable to construction nationwide
where a project inspector is generally not required. For this reason, some issues require
clarification in their application to projects under DSA jurisdiction. Issues that will be
addressed in this IR include:
Definition of the structural tests and special inspections required for a project and the
Statement of Structural Tests and Special Inspections (T&I List; Form DSA-103)
required by CBC Section 1704A.1.1.
The difference between a test and a special inspection.
Definitions:
LEA Approved Testing Laboratory A testing laboratory that has been accepted into the
DSA Laboratory Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) Program. LEA approved laboratories are
listed on the DSA website at: https://www.apps.dgs.ca.gov/tracker/ApprovedLabs.aspx.
Project Inspector An individual employed by the school district and approved by DSA to
provide continuous, personal inspection of all aspects of construction for a project in
accordance with Section 4-333(b) and 4-342 of Title 24, Part 1.
Special Inspection A careful and thorough examination of a specific construction procedure (e.g. welding, masonry placement, etc.) for a project. Note that material identification and other related responsibilities are also generally a part of the special inspector's
duties. See Appendix A for a list of common special inspections.
Special Inspector A specially qualified individual employed by an LEA approved testing
laboratory or hired directly by the school district to perform special inspection.
Technician A qualified employee of a testing facility properly trained and supervised to
sample, handle, transport, and conduct tests on materials or on completed assemblies.
Test A procedure performed on a material or on a completed element of the structure to
determine strength, ductility, or other properties of the material or element. Tests must be
DSA (SS) IR17-4
(iss 11-03-08)
Basics of Structural Tests

Special Inspection
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 17-4

(rev 11-03-08)

and Special Inspection
Page 2 of 3
conducted by an appropriately qualified technician employed by an LEA approved testing

laboratory. See Appendix A for a list of common tests.
1.
BASIC REQUIREMENTS: The architect or structural engineer in general

responsible charge of a project is responsible for defining the structural tests and special
inspections required for the project. All test and special inspection requirements shall be
thoroughly described in the project specifications or on the drawings. Also, the Statement
of Structural Tests and Special Inspections (T&I List; Form DSA-103) shall be completed by
the project architect or structural engineer and submitted to DSA for approval along with
project plans and specifications.
1.1
Statement of Structural Tests and Special Inspections (T&I List; Form DSA103): After it is completed, Form DSA-103 may be referred to as the T&I List. Common
structural tests and special inspection requirements are included on the form and are
accessible by expanding the menus for the various construction categories (Soil, Concrete,
Masonry, Steel, and Wood) and subcategories. Mandatory tests and special inspections
within each category are already checked for convenience. Depending on the structural
elements included in the project, items in applicable categories must be checked by the
architect or structural engineer.
1.2
Changes to testing or special inspection requirements during construction:
All changes to the testing and inspection program that are made after a construction
contract has been awarded shall be accomplished by change order, or field change
document, (see IR A-6) and approved by DSA.
2.
TESTS, SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, AND SOIL TESTING:

Procedures,
responsibilities and verified report requirements vary for tests, special inspections, and soil
testing. See IR 17-5 for tests, IR 17-6 for special inspections, and IR 17-7 for soil testing.
2.1
The following Table clarifies the differences in requirements for tests vs. special
inspections. The Statement of Structural Tests and Special Inspections (T&I List: Form DSA103) also indicates which tasks are considered tests and which are considered special
inspections. See Appendix A for a list of a number of common tests and special inspections.
Tests:
Special Inspections:
Performed on materials, or on completed

elements of the structure.
Performed during specific construction

processes as the process is occurring. (Note
that certain aspects of special inspection also
occur before, and after, the actual process.)
Performed by an appropriately qualified

and/or ceritifed technician under the
supervision of the laboratory civil engineer.
Performed by a qualified and/or certified

special inspector (or the project inspector)
employed either by the testing laboratory, or
directly by the school district.
Test reports are required within 14 days of

the date of the test.
Special inspection reports are required within

14 days of the date of the special inspection
(or semi-monthly when performed by the
project inspector).
Tests are included in the Laboratory Verified

Report (Form DSA-291) signed by the
laboratory engineer at the conclusion of the
testing program for the project.
Each individual special inspector must sign a

Special Inspection Verified Report (Form
DSA-292) for the work inspected.
DSA (SS) IR 17-4

(rev 11-03-08)

and Special Inspection
Page 3 of 3
Appendix A
Sample List of Tests and Special Inspections
(This list is not all inclusive)
Tests:
Soil:
Fill material acceptance tests
Fill compaction
Pile load tests
Concrete:
Rebar
Air content
Slump
Temperature
Compression
Prestressing tendons and anchorage
Testing of post-installed anchors (wedge, sleeve,
epoxy, shot-pins, etc.)
Masonry:
Rebar
Units, mortar and grout
Prisms
Core-drilled samples
Veneer bond
Testing of post-installed anchors (wedge, sleeve,
Steel:
Tensile, (yield, ultimate, elongation)
HS bolt tests, (hardness, tension, wedge, chemical,
etc.)
Non-destructive examination of welds
Fireproofing thickness*
Fireproofing bond test
Fireproofing density
* Thickness testing of spray applied fireproofing may be
performed as a test or as part of the application
inspection.
Wood:
Special Inspections:
Soil:
Fill placement (includes verification of site preparation,
excavation depth, etc.)
Pile driving (count blows, verify pile depth, also
includes verifying pile materials, size and length prior
to driving)
Pier drilling (depth, diameter, location)
Concrete:
Verify mix
Batch plant inspection
Formwork
Rebar and embedded item placement
Concrete placement
Curing
Form removal
Application of prestressing force and grouting of
bonded tendons, (includes measuring prestressing
force applied and elongation of tendons)
Precast concrete fabrication
Shotcrete placement
Installation of post-installed anchors (wedge, sleeve,
Masonry:
Verify proportions of mortar and grout
Preparation of prisms for testing
Verify size, location and condition of all construction
supporting masonry, dowels, etc.
Placement of units, mortar, rebar, embedded items
and grout
Curing and weather protection
Installation of post-installed anchors (wedge, sleeve,
Steel:
Verify material size, grade, mill certificates and
markings
HS bolt installation and tightening (including
Skidmore-Wilhelm bolt tension verification testing)
Welding
Joist and truss fabrication
Shop fabrication
Spray applied fireproofing (substrate condition
application, thickness*)
Wood:
Glued-laminated member fabrication
Open-web truss fabrication
STRUCTURAL TESTING LABORATORY

RESPONSIBILITIES
IR 17-5
References: California Administrative Code, Section 4-335

California Building Code, Chapter 17A
Issued 11-03-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify structural test
requirements for projects under DSA jurisdiction.
See IR 17-4 for general information on the test and special inspection program, and
definitions of tests vs. special inspections.
See IR 17-6 for further information on special inspection requirements.
See IR 17-7 for information regarding soil testing requirements.
Scope: This interpretation applies to structural tests that are required to be performed by
a DSA approved, independent testing laboratory in accordance with Code and/or project
specifications. See IR 17-4, Appendix A for a list of common tests required.
This interpretation does not apply to non-structural tests such as:
Plumbing leak tests,
Electrical grounding tests,
Fire alarm or fire sprinkler tests,
Also, this interpretation does not apply to testing of structural materials that is not
specifically required by the Code or the project plans or specifications such as:
Spot checking of moisture content of lumber by the project inspector,
Checking the tightness of bolts (except high strength bolts),
Compaction testing of soil that do not support buildings or structures (unless

required by project specifications),
Finally, this interpretation does not apply to testing of materials conducted by (or contracted
by) manufacturers, suppliers or contractors.
1.
GENERAL: Tests may only be conducted by qualified representatives of the testing

laboratory for the project. The testing laboratory must be accepted in the DSA Laboratory
Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) program and listed on the DSA website at
https://www.apps.dgs.ca.gov/tracker/ApprovedLabs.aspx.
1.1
Employment of the Testing Laboratory: The school district shall employ an LEA
approved laboratory to perform all tests indicated on the DSA approved documents
including the Statement of Structural Tests and Special Inspections (T&I List). The
testing laboratory must be employed directly by the school board and no other
agency or individual.
DSA (SS) IR17-5

(iss 11-03-08)
Structural Testing Laboratory

Responsibilities
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 17-5

(iss 11-03-08)

Responsibilities
Page 2 of 3
Soil related testing must be performed under the supervision of a registered

geotechnical engineer, see IR 17-7.
1.2
Sampling and testing: All sampling and testing shall be performed by technicians
employed by the testing laboratory except as specifically approved by DSA in
accordance with IR 17-1.
2.
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES: The civil engineer in charge of the
laboratory is responsible for supervising all testing activities and verifying that all of the
requirements of Section 2.1 through 2.3 of this IR are met. LEA laboratory must meet the
following requirements:
2.1
Equipment, resources, and personnel qualifications:
2.1.1
All technicians shall be appropriately qualified, and certified as required, to

perform the functions to which they are assigned.
2.1.2
All equipment used shall be properly calibrated, certified, labeled, and maintained
as required by ASTM E329 and other appropriate referenced standards.
2.1.3
A quality control manual as required by ASTM E329 for all testing and special
inspections procedures shall be maintained.
2.1.4
A library with up-to-date codes, standards and reference manuals necessary to

perform the tests and inspections shall be maintained at the laboratory and
available to appropriate staff.
2.1.5
DSA approved documents (including drawings, specifications, change orders,

etc.) shall be readily available to appropriate technicians.
2.2
Supervision and performance of tests:
2.2.1
Technicians shall be adequately supervised and shall perform all sampling,

handling, transporting, storing, testing, documenting and other tasks involved in
laboratory and field testing in strict accordance with the requirements of the DSA
approved documents, referenced Codes and Standards, and the laboratorys
quality control manual.
2.2.2
All procedures shall be carried out in accordance with the quality control manual.
2.2.3
Only DSA approved documents (and appropriate referenced standards) shall be

used for establishing acceptance criteria for tested materials.
2.3
Reporting and verification:
2.3.1
Test reports shall be submitted in accordance with Section 3. below.
2.3.2
All tests that are performed shall be reported to all parties without exception.
2.3.3
The laboratory engineer shall review the DSA approved documents (including
plans, specifications, addenda, change orders, etc.) and verify that all tests
required by the DSA approved documents are performed.
2.3.4
The laboratory engineer shall prepare a laboratory verified report on Form DSA291 per Section 4, below. The laboratory verified report shall be submitted
within 14 days of the completion of the testing program.
3.
TEST REPORTS: All tests reports shall be submitted to the school district within
14 days of the date of the test. Copies of each report shall be submitted to the architect,
the structural engineer, the project inspector, and DSA by the testing laboratory within 14
days of the date of the test. Reports indicating deficiencies shall be submitted immediately.
DSA (SS) IR 17-5

(iss 11-03-08)

Responsibilities
Page 3 of 3
Reports shall include all information required by Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-335(d). Test
report templates for common structural tests are provided on the DSA website at
http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Labs/report_temp_forms.htm.
4.
LABORATORY VERIFIED REPORT: At the conclusion of the testing program

the civil engineer in charge of the testing laboratory shall submit a Laboratory Verified
Report on Form DSA-291 in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-335(e). All testing
(except soil related testing, see IR 17-7) is covered by a single verified report. Special
inspections shall NOT be included on the laboratory verified report even when special
inspectors are employed by the testing laboratory, see IR 17-6 for special inspections.
The civil engineer in charge of the laboratory certifies under penalty of perjury whether or
not:
All tests required by DSA approved documents were performed,
All tests were carried out in accordance with DSA approved documents, referenced
Codes and Standards and the laboratory quality control manual,
All tests were reported to all entities as required,
Qualified personnel under the supervision of the laboratory engineer performed all
testing and related procedures, and
The results of all tests indicate that the materials tested met the requirements of the
DSA approved documents.
STRUCTURAL SPECIAL INSPECTOR

DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
References: California Administrative Code, Section 4-333(c)
California Building Code Chapter 17A
IR 17-6
Issued 11-03-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify special

inspection requirements for projects under DSA jurisdiction.
See IR 17-4 for definition of terms and general information on the test and special
inspection program and definitions of tests vs. special inspections.
See IR 17-5 for further information on test requirements.
See IR 17-7 for information regarding soil testing requirements.
General: A project inspector is required to perform continuous inspection of all aspects of

construction on projects under DSA jurisdiction. The project inspector may perform special
inspection of certain aspects of construction as required by the code. However, specially
qualified individuals will be required to perform special inspection on aspects of construction
that either:
are performed away from the construction site, or

require special knowledge or expertise to inspect.
When specifically approved by DSA in writing, special inspectors may also be used for some
aspects of construction that are typically performed by the project inspector at the project
site (such as placement of concrete or installation of post-installed anchors).
An individual special inspector may only perform the type of special inspection that he or
she has been approved to perform by DSA. An individual may perform special inspection on
more than one aspect of the project only when specifically approved to do so, in writing, by
DSA. Special inspectors may not be utilized as assistant inspectors unless specifically
approved in writing by DSA. See IR A-12 for more information on assistant inspectors.
The project inspector is still responsible for the construction inspected by a special
inspector. The project inspector is required to monitor the activities of all special inspectors
in accordance with IR A-8.
1.
EMPLOYMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTORS: The school district shall contract

with an LEA approved testing laboratory to provide special inspectors to perform the special
inspections indicated on the DSA approved documents including the T&I List (see Form
DSA-103).
Exceptions:
1. The school district may contract directly with individual special inspectors rather
utilizing employees of the testing laboratory.
DSA (SS) IR17-6

(iss 11-03-08)
Structural Special Inspector

Duties and Responsibilities
Page 1 of 5
DSA (SS) IR 17-6

(iss 11-03-08)
2.
Strucutral Special Inspector

Page 2 of 5
The project inspector shall perform certain special inspections as indicated on

the T&I List (Form DSA-103).
2.
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES:

The special inspector is personally
responsible for verifying whether or not every aspect of the work that he or she is
responsible to inspect is in compliance with DSA approved documents.
The special
inspector is subject to supervision/direction from the project inspector, architect, structural
engineer, and DSA. However, the special inspector shall base all conclusions exclusively on
the requirements of the DSA approved documents and applicable codes. In no case shall
direction of the architect or engineer be construed to cause work to be done that does not
conform with the DSA approved documents.
The special inspector, or project inspector performing special inspection, is always

responsible for the following duties whether periodic or continuous special inspection is
required:
2.1
Preparation for Inspection:
2.1.1
Review and understand DSA approved plans, specifications, addenda, change

orders and FCDs (see IR A-6) relevant to the tasks to be performed.
2.1.2
Review and understand all relevant Code requirements and referenced standards.
2.1.3
Review shop drawings, manufacturers instructions, or other related documents

which do not require the approval of DSA.
2.1.4
Review requirements with the contractor and resolve all questions and/or
differences of interpretation prior to start-up of each phase of the work.
2.1.5
Coordinate with the testing laboratory for any sampling and testing requirements.
2.1.6
Verify that all materials meet requirements of DSA approved documents.
2.1.7
Verify that existing conditions relevant to the work are in accordance with DSA
approved documents (e.g. for masonry work verify that surfaces of foundations
are level, clean and properly roughened, etc.).
2.1.8
Verify that tools, consumables, formwork, shoring and other items that may
affect working conditions or the quality of the work are in accordance with
relevant requirements.
2.1.9
Verify that construction workers are appropriately certified when required.
2.1.10
Coordinate with the project inspector on the interface of the work inspected with
other aspects of the work.
2.2
Inspection:
2.2.1
Verify that all materials sampling and testing are performed as required.
2.2.2
Inspect all aspects of the work including dimensions, connections, embeds,

finishes, etc.
2.2.3
Inspect the work at start-up until satisfied that all workers understand the
requirements and are adequately performing the work.
2.2.4
Inspect work when conditions change, a new phase of work starts, new workers,
equipment or procedures are implemented, or any other change to work or job
conditions takes place.
2.2.5
Inspect work during its progress from time to time (see Section 3 for frequency).
2.2.6
Inspect all work upon completion and/or prior to covering with other work.
DSA (SS) IR 17-6

(iss 11-03-08)

Page 3 of 5
2.2.7
Personally verify that all work is in accordance with DSA approved documents.
2.2.8
Mark, or tag, all inspected work when required.
2.3
Reporting:
2.3.1
Verbally report all deviations from DSA approved documents to the contractor
and the project inspector immediately.
2.3.2
Provide written daily reports (see Section 5 below for report requirements).
2.3.3
When deviations are not immediately corrected, report the deviations in writing
to the contractor, project inspector, DSA, project architect and structural
engineer.
2.3.4
If work that deviates from DSA approved documents is not reported in a timely
manner, it will be considered evidence of incompetence and/or negligence of the
inspector. When inspector incompetence or negligence is evident, DSA may
withdraw approval of the inspector for the project and/or withdraw certification of
the inspector to work on future projects under DSA jurisdiction.
2.3.5
Keep a log of deviations including status and resolution.
2.3.6
Report the resolution of deviations to all parties in writing when deviations are
corrected.
2.3.7
Submit a Special Inspection Verified Report (DSA-292). See Section 6 below for
verified report requirements.
Exception: Project inspectors performing special inspections may include some
special inspections on their form DSA-6 rather than submitting Form DSA-292; see
Sections 5 and 6 below.
3.
FREQUENCY OF PERIODIC AND CONTINUOUS SPECIAL INSPECTION:
The 2007 CBC, Title 24, Part 2, Section 1702A includes the following definitions:
Special Inspection, Periodic. The part-time or intermittent observation of

work requiring special inspection by an approved special inspector who is
present in the area where the work has been or is being performed and at the
completion of the work.
Special Inspection, Continuous.

The full-time observation of work
requiring special inspection by an approved special inspector who is present in
the area where the work is being performed.
Note: These definitions are only applicable to special inspectors. See Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-342 and IR A-8 for the definition of continuous inspection for the project
inspector.
The definitions of periodic and continuous special inspection are identical except for two
things:
Periodic inspection may be performed on a part-time or intermittent basis while

continuous inspection is done on a full-time basis,
Periodic inspection may be performed by an inspector who is in the area where the
work has been performed while continuous inspection must be performed where
the work is being performed.
DSA (SS) IR 17-6

(iss 11-03-08)

Page 4 of 5
Note: Work subject to periodic special inspection requires the presence of the special
inspector prior to start of work, from time to time during the work, and upon completion
of the work.
3.1
Periodic special Inspection: When periodic special inspection is required, part

time or intermittent means that inspection of the task needs to be performed from
time to time during the progress of the task. The period of time between inspections
varies greatly for different types of work depending on the type of inspection
performed. For example, the laying of masonry block must be inspected almost
constantly; the special inspector shall not leave while work is proceeding for more
than a few minutes; conversely the protection of masonry during cold weather
generally may only need to be inspected once at the end of the day and once at the
beginning.
The period of time between inspections also depends on the pace of the construction,
the number of workers, the quality of the workmanship, and other factors.
It is the responsibility of the special inspector to provide inspections at an
appropriate frequency and at appropriate times during construction. The inspector
must have adequate experience and exhibit good judgment in determining the
frequency and timing of inspections.
3.2
Continuous special inspection: When continuous inspection is required, the

special inspector must always be present where the work is being performed.
4.
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PERFORMED BY THE PROJECT INSPECTOR:
Tables 1704A.3, 1704A.4, 1704A.5.1, 1704.A.5.3, and 1704A.7 (Title 24, Part 2) list tasks
that require special inspection. On projects under DSA jurisdiction some of the tasks may
be, or must be, performed by the project inspector rather than the special inspector. The
T&I List (form DSA-103) defines whether certain special inspection tasks shall be
performed by a special inspector or the project inspector. Exceptions are permitted with the
written approval of DSA (for example, the project inspector could be approved to inspect
some minor masonry work if he or she were appropriately certified and had the time
available to perform the masonry inspections in addition to all other duties).
The project inspector is responsible for providing continuous inspection of all aspects of
construction for which a special inspector is not provided, including, but not limited to, items
identified in the Code as requiring special inspection such as high-load wood diaphragms
and non-structural components.
When the project inspector performs special inspection he or she shall provide continuous
inspection of all work in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-342(b)1 and IR A-8.
Note: The definition of continuous inspection for the project inspector is different from
the definition of continuous for special inspectors.
5.
SPECIAL INSPECTION REPORTS: Special inspectors working at the project

site are required to submit reports on a daily basis to the project inspector. Special
inspectors working at locations off-site are required to submit daily reports to the project
inspector within 14 days of the date of the inspection. All daily reports must be copied to
the project architect, structural engineer, school district, and DSA within 14 days of the date
of the inspection. Reports indicating deviations in the work shall be forwarded immediately.
A daily special inspection report template (DSA-250) is provided on the DSA website.
Daily special inspection reports shall include:
Project name, DSA file number and DSA application number,
the name of the employer of the special inspector,
DSA (SS) IR 17-6

(iss 11-03-08)

Page 5 of 5
the date of the inspections; inspection start and finish time,

a thorough and detailed description of the work inspected including reference to piece
numbers, column line locations, drawing details, etc. as appropriate,
a thorough and detailed description of the work completed in accordance with DSA
approved documents as well as work that remains incomplete,
a thorough and detailed description of all work that is not in conformance with DSA
approved documents,
a statement that the special inspections were (or were not) performed in accordance
with the requirements of the DSA approved documents,
a statement that the work complied (or did not comply) with the requirements of the
DSA approved documents,
the signature and printed name of the special inspector,
a list of persons to whom the report was sent.
Note: Project inspectors shall submit separate special inspection reports for masonry,
welding, high-strength bolting and shotcrete work if they perform these inspections.
Other types of special inspections may be included on the project inspectors semimonthly reports unless separate special inspection reports are specifically requested.
6.
SPECIAL INSPECTION VERIFIED REPORTS: All special inspectors shall

submit verified reports on Form DSA-292 in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-336.
When more than one special inspector shares responsibility for inspecting a specific facet of
construction each special inspector shall clearly describe the portions of the construction
they inspected in detail on Form DSA-292.
Exception: Project inspectors will submit separate verified reports on Form DSA-292
for masonry, welding, high-strength bolting, and shotcrete work if they perform these
special inspections. Project inspectors need not submit Form DSA-292 for most special
inspections that they personally perform; instead project inspectors shall specifically list
the special inspections which they performed on Form DSA-6.
SOIL AND FOUNDATION

TESTING
IR 17-7
References: California Administrative Code, Section 4-333(c)

California Building Code Chapter 17A
Issued 11-03-08
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify structural test
requirements for soil and foundation aspects of projects under DSA jurisdiction. This IR does
not apply to the initial soil investigation or project design phase.
See IR 17-4 for general information on the test and special inspection program and
definitions of tests vs. special inspections.
See IR 17-5 for further information on test requirements.
See IR 17-6 for information on special inspection requirements.
General:
All construction phase laboratory and field soil testing shall be performed by
qualified technicians from a testing laboratory currently accepted in the DSA Laboratory
Evaluation and Acceptance (LEA) program. The tests shall be performed under the
supervision of a California registered geotechnical engineer (GE) employed by, or
subcontracted by the testing laboratory.
1.
GE RESPONSIBILITIES: The GE is responsible for:
1.1
Supervision of all technicians performing tests.
1.2
Understanding and complying with Codes and reference standards relevant to the
tests performed including, but not limited to, Title 24 Code amendments applicable
to school construction.
1.3
Verifying that testing and reporting is performed in accordance with DSA approved
documents and all applicable requirements.
1.4
Submitting verified reports on Form DSA-293 (see Section 3 below).
2.
PROGRESS REPORTS: Daily reports are required for testing activities that occur
at the project site. Daily reports shall be handed to the project inspector each day. Copies
of daily reports and reports of tests performed in the laboratory shall be sent to the project
inspector, architect, structural engineer, school district, and DSA within 14 days of the date
of the test.
3.
VERIFIED REPORTS: At the conclusion of soils related testing activities, and at

other times as specified in Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-336(c), the GE shall submit Form DSA293 to the school district with copies to the architect, structural engineer, project inspector,
and DSA.
Note: For projects that started construction prior to January 1, 2009, Form DSA-293 will
be accepted from geotechnical engineers who were not associated with an LEA accepted
testing laboratory.
DSA (SS) IR17-7

(iss 11-03-08)
Soils and Foundations

Testing and Inspection
Page 1 of 1
POST- INSTALLED ANCHORS

IN CONCRETE
IR 19-1
Issued 9-1-99
References:
Revised (in its entirety) 03-06-06
2001 California Building Code, Sections 1912A.1 and 1923A.3.5
ICC ES Acceptance Criteria AC-01, AC-58, AC-193 including Annex 1, AC-106, AC-308, and AC-70
ACI 355.2 or ACI 318-02, Appendix D
IRs. Only IRs listed in the document at http://www.dsa.dgs.ca.gov/Publications/default.htm (click on DSA Interpretations of
Code Section: 1923A.3.5 Drilled-in expansion bolts or chemical-type anchors in

concrete. When drilled-in expansion-type anchors are used in lieu of cast-in place bolts, the
allowable shear and tension values and test loads shall be acceptable to the enforcement
agency.
When expansion-type anchors are listed for sill plate bolting applications, 10 percent of the
anchors shall be tension tested.
When expansion-type anchors are used for other structural applications, all such expansion
anchors shall be tension tested. Expansion-type anchors shall not be used as hold-down bolts.
When expansion-type anchors are used for nonstructural applications such as equipment
anchorage, 50 percent or alternate bolts in a group, including at least one-half the anchors in
each group, shall be tension tested.
The tension testing of the expansion anchors shall be done in the presence of the project
inspector and a report of the test results shall be submitted to the enforcement agency. If any
anchors fail the tension-testing requirements, the additional testing requirements shall be
acceptable to the enforcement agency. The above requirements shall also apply to bolts or
anchors set in concrete with chemical (adhesives) if the long-term durability and stability of the
chemical material and its resistance to loss of strength and chemical change at elevated
temperatures are established to the satisfaction of the enforcement agency.
Purpose: This interpretation establishes the allowable shear and tension values, testing
procedures and test values for post-installed anchors, including a new product line known as
screw anchors, in accordance with Section 1923A.3.5, 2001 CBC for projects under the
jurisdiction of the Division of the State Architect (DSA).
1.
LISTING REQUIREMENTS: Post-Installed anchors must be listed in a current
evaluation report issued by an evaluation agency recognized by DSA, which include the
following:
International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES)

City of Los Angeles Research Report (RR)
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
Post-Installed Anchors
in Concrete
Page 1 of 8
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
in Concrete
Page 2 of 8
Commentary: ICC-ES Evaluation Reports are generally considered to be current if they are listed and
available from the ICC website http://www.icc-es.org/reports/index.cfm?search=search
2.
BASIS FOR DESIGN CAPACITIES: Design capacities for expansion-type and
epoxy (adhesive)-type anchors should reflect the tested capacity of the anchors including
the degree of scatter in the recorded peak loads and the load-displacement response, the
type and mechanical properties of the concrete or masonry in which the anchor is installed,
anchor edge distance and spacing, and whether the anchors are installed through metal
decking into concrete fill. In addition, the potential for concrete cracking in the vicinity of
the anchor during its service life and the effect of such cracking on the capacity of the
anchor to resist loads shall be considered. The effects of temperature variations on epoxy
(adhesive) type anchors shall also be taken into account where applicable.
The age, composition and mechanical properties of the materials in which the anchor will be
installed shall be evaluated. The relevant mechanical properties include unit weight,
compressive strength, and aggregate size and type. Evaluation of compressive strength on
the basis of cores taken at or near the anchor locations shall be permitted.
Exception: The design capacities for anchors tested in lightweight
concrete may be used for anchors installed in normal-weight concrete provided
the compressive strength of the normal-weight concrete equals or exceeds the
compressive strength of the lightweight concrete in which the anchor was
tested. Furthermore, design capacities for anchors tested in all-lightweight
concrete (unit weight 90-115 pcf) may be used for anchors installed in sandlightweight concrete (unit weight 105-120 pcf) provided that the compressive
strength of the sand-lightweight concrete equals or exceeds that of the alllightweight concrete in which the tests were conducted.
The compressive strength of the material in which the anchor will be installed shall meet or
exceed the compressive strength of the material in which the anchor was tested.
2.1
2.1.1
Expansion-type anchors. Expansion-type anchors may be used, provided the

allowable shear and tension loads are determined by test in accordance with the
following:
The allowable values listed in an ICC-ES Evaluation Services Report, with special
inspection, may be used for allowable stress design, provided the report states
that the anchors were tested in accordance with AC01, latest revision, including
the seismic qualification tests of AC01 Section 5.6. Strength design values may
be used provided the anchors have been tested in accordance with AC193, latest
revision, including the seismic qualification tests of ACI 355.2 Sections 9.6 and
9.7 and Annex 1 of AC193.
Commentary: The ICC-ES Reports generally allow the use of the 33-1/3% stress increase
for duration of loading if the anchor(s) have satisfied the seismic qualification testing
criteria. Section 1632A.1, 2001 CBC, precludes the use of the stress increase in
determining capacities of some anchorages.
For anchors installed in the underside of a beam/slab, the allowable tension load
design values should be based on the tabulated value for the anchors installed
without special inspection (special inspection is still required), unless allowable
load values for anchors installed in cracked concrete are provided in the ICC-ES
Report, or the anchors have been tested in accordance with ACI 355.2, latest
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
in Concrete
Page 3 of 8
revision, Table 5.2 and Annex 1 of AC-193, or ACI-318-05 Appendix D. Shear

values are based on the tabulated values in the ICC-ES Report. Once an ICC-ES
Report complying with AC-193 has been issued, it shall take precedence over any
previous report.
Commentary: Once a report is issued that complies with the provisions of AC-193, the
values established by that report take precedence over previous reports. Provisions
of AC-193 will provide the most accurate evaluation of anchor capacities in various
installed conditions. The use of older reports, which may have provided for higher
capacities, is not appropriate once the AC-193 compliant report has been published.
2.1.2
If anchors have not been tested in accordance with the requirements for seismic
qualification tests of AC01, Section 5.6, the allowable load values listed in the
ICC-ES Report may be used with the following modifications.
2.1.2.1
Allowable shear and tension design loads shall be limited to 80% of the
tabulated allowable values for anchors installed with special inspection.
2.1.2.2
For anchors installed in the underside of a beam/slab, the allowable tension

load should be based on 80% of the tabulated allowable value for anchors
installed without special inspection (special inspection is still required).
Allowable shear values should be based on Section 2.1.2.1 above.
Exception: Anchors installed in conformance with requirements of
Section 4 of this IR.
Commentary: Previous Interpretations of Regulations have allowed the submittal of test data by
anchor manufacturers for review and acceptance by the DSA. Given the complexities of ICCES Acceptance Criteria, and the volume of data that can be submitted, it is no longer feasible
for the DSA to evaluate products without a current ICC-ES Report.
2.2
Epoxy-type anchors. Epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors include anchors that rely on

organic and inorganic compounds (including epoxies, polyurethanes, methacrylates
and vinyl esters) to develop the bond to the concrete.
The use of shallow epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors to resist direct tension loads
where concrete cracking may occur is not permitted. Shallow epoxy-type (adhesive)
anchors are those with an embedment to diameter ratio less than 8.
Commentary: Laboratory testing has shown that the tension performance of epoxy-type (adhesive)
anchors in cracked concrete can be significantly reduced. This is particularly true of small
diameter and shallow embedment anchors. In the absence of recognized testing criteria for
establishing the performance of epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors in cracked concrete, their use
shall be restricted.
Epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors should only be installed in conditioned, interior

spaces.
Commentary: This limitation is due to the absence of test results demonstrating long-term durability
of the adhesives when exposed to numerous cycles of either high or low temperatures and the
ability of the anchor to resist loads when either the adhesive or a bolt is exposed to weather to
transfer the heat/cold to the adhesive.
Exception: Where epoxy-type anchors are used as shear dowels at

the perimeter of an existing opening (slab or wall) to be filled with concrete, or
are being used to connect new concrete elements to existing concrete
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
in Concrete
Page 4 of 8
elements (e.g. gunite), they may be installed in exterior locations with prior
approval of the DSA.
Commentary:
DSA has ongoing concerns regarding long-term durability of the adhesives when
exposed to numerous cycles of either high or low temperatures and the ability of the anchor to
resist loads when either the adhesive or a bolt is exposed to weather to transfer the heat/cold
to the adhesive.
If epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors are exposed to fire, all anchors in the affected area
shall be inspected and evaluated by a qualified person to ensure their load carrying
capability has not been compromised.
The design shear and tension capacities for epoxy-type anchors must be determined
in accordance with the following:
2.2.1
The allowable loads may be based on the values listed in an ICC ES Report that
complies with the requirements of AC58 for a specific anchor in the same
configuration as tested. Supporting data shall include the Seismic Qualification
test performed in accordance with the procedures of Section 5.3.7 of AC58.
Commentary:
As strength level capacities are developed to meet ACI 355.2, or ACI 318 Appendix
D provisions, those capacities should be based on the capacities either listed or
determined in accordance with the ICC ES Report.
2.2.2
Where epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors are used for structural applications, such
as dowels between new and existing concrete, the anchors shall be installed in a
manner such that the ultimate tensile capacity is controlled by the ultimate
strength of the steel element.
Exception: Epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors which cannot develop
the tensile capacity of the steel element may be used to transfer shear forces
only, provided that the loads on the anchor are amplified by factor of 4.0.
Alternatively, allowable shear capacity may be based on bolt shear capacities
obtained from Table 19A-D, 2001 CBC.
When epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors are used to resist tensile forces in
structural applications, the minimum depth of embedment shall be greater than
or equal to the development length, ld, determined in Section 1912A.1 for a castin-place reinforcing bar of the same diameter and grade when considering a
tensile splitting failure mode. Where tensile splitting need not be considered, the
depth of embedment may be determined in accordance with Appendix D of ACI
318-02 as amended by Section 3.3 of AC 308.
2.3
2.3.1
Screw Anchors. Screw anchors are not directly addressed by Section 1923A.3.5,
2001 CBC. The fastener is produced from hardened steel with threads, similar in
appearance to a lag bolt. Screw anchors may be used, provided the allowable shear
and tension loads are determined in accordance with the following:
The allowable values listed in an ICC ES Report, with special inspection, may be
used for allowable stress design, provided the report states that the anchors were
tested in accordance with AC106, latest revision, including the seismic
qualification tests of AC106 Section 4.6.
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
in Concrete
Page 5 of 8
Commentary:
As strength level capacities are developed to meet ACI 355.2, or ACI 318 Appendix
D provisions, those capacities should be based on the capacities either listed or determined in
accordance with the ICC ES Report.
2.3.2
Welding to these anchors is not permitted.
2.3.3
Screw anchors may be used to attach components, such as equipment,

mechanical vibration isolators or snubbers, to structural (reinforced) concrete, or
for sill bolting applications. All screw anchors installed through a wood sill plate
requires a plate washer in conformance with Section 1806A.6.3, Item 2.
2.3.4
The use of screw anchors is not permitted in overhead applications or for discrete
hold down forces, such as shear walls.
Commentary: There is very little experience data on the performance of these anchors installed in
the tension zone of concrete members. Until cracked concrete testing methods are adopted
and incorporated into ICC Acceptance Criteria, similar to ACI 355.2, screw anchors cannot be
used overhead. In addition, the high Rockwell hardness of some screw anchors may make
them susceptible to hydrogen embrittlement.
Screw anchors may be very effective in sill bolting applications to reduce the possibility of
concrete splitting due to edge distance limitations, and a reduction or elimination of expansion
pressures associated with bolt installation.
2.4
2.4.1
Power-actuated fasteners. Power-actuated fasteners (shot pins) are not

addressed by Section 1923A.3.5, 2001 CBC. Power-actuated fasteners may be used
for limited applications provided the allowable shear and tension loads are
determined in accordance with the following:
The allowable values listed in an ICC ES Evaluation Services Report, with special
inspection, may be used for allowable stress design, provided the report states
that the anchors were tested in accordance with AC70, latest revision.
Power-actuated fasteners may be used for hanging metal suspension systems for
lay-in panel ceilings (see IR 25-2) and for the attachment of metal track in
conjunction with non-bearing partitions. The use of power-actuated fasteners for
other applications shall be subject to review and approval of DSA.
3.
EMBEDMENT, SPACING, AND EDGE DISTANCE. All anchors shall meet the
minimum embedment, spacing, edge distance, and slab thickness criteria established by the
relevant ICC-ES Report.
3.1
Unless otherwise noted in the Report, the edge distance should be a minimum of ten
(10) bolt diameters from the free edge of the slab and center-to-center spacing
should be a minimum of twelve (12) bolt diameters. If the edge distance is less than
ten (10) diameters, and the load is directed toward the free edge, the allowable
shear load should be reduced per Section 1923A.3.3.
4.
UNDERSIDE OF BEAM/SLAB INSTALLATIONS. Except as noted in Section
2.1, all expansion type anchors installed in the underside of a beam/slab should use the
reduced allowable design load values determined in Sections 2.1.1 and 2.1.2.2 of this IR.
4.1
The allowable design loads in Sections 2.1.1 or 2.1.2.1 may be used for expansiontype anchors installed in the underside of a beam/slab, provided the installation
meets one of the following criteria:
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
in Concrete
Page 6 of 8
4.1.1
The design engineer provides information that indicates the anchor installation
will occur in the negative moment (-M) region of the beam/slab, considering
unbalanced loading, or
4.1.2
Data is submitted to indicate that specific anchor is suitable for use in cracked
concrete (testing per ACI 355.2, Table 5.2, including Annex 1 of AC193), or
4.1.3
The anchor is installed in the high flute (rib) of the metal deck in a concrete on
metal deck assembly, or
4.1.4
The anchor is installed with sufficient embedment that the load transfer zone is
above the neutral axis of the beam/slab.
Exception: If the slab is intended to serve as a diaphragm for
transferring seismic forces to other lateral-load resisting elements, anchors to
be installed must be qualified per 4.1.2 above or the reduced allowable design
load values determined in Sections 2.1.1.1 and 2.1.2.1 must be used.
4.2
When installing expansion-type anchors through the low flutes of metal deck into
concrete, the anchors should be placed as close to the center of the flute width as
practicable. The deck shall be 20 ga. minimum thickness per CBC Section 2205A.4.1
and the flute width shall meet or exceed the value set forth in the ICC-ES Report for
the anchor. The minimum effective depth of embedment shall be as noted in the
ICC-ES Report for the anchor.
Commentary: Several deck manufacturers have a small rib that runs down the middle of the low
flute of deck. This rib is problematic as the drill bit will have a tendency to walk down the
rib. An offset in the hole is acceptable so long as the hole is as close as possible to the center
of the deck.
5.
TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. Post-installed anchors shall
be tested in accordance with the provisions of Section 1923A.3.5, by an LEA accepted
testing facility, unless approval of an alternative individual is obtained in advance from the
DSA Field Engineer for the project.
If any anchor fails testing, test all anchors of the same type, not previously tested until
twenty (20) consecutive anchors pass, then resume the initial test frequency. If the
anchors are used for the support and bracing of non-structural components (pipe, duct or
conduit), the twenty (20) shall be only those anchors installed by the same trade. Refer to
Note 8 on the Test Values Table (attached) for acceptance/failure criteria.
Regardless of which test method is chosen by the consultant, test values and all appropriate
criteria shall be shown on the contract documents.
5.1
Expansion-type Anchors
5.1.1
Setting verification:
5.1.1.1
Torque-controlled anchors: Following attainment of 10% of the required

torque, torque-controlled anchors shall not require more than six (6)
additional complete turns of the nut during installation to achieve the
manufacturers specified installation torque. The extent of bolt projection after
installation shall be measured to confirm that this requirement has been met.
5.1.1.2
Displacement-controlled anchors: The position of the plug in the anchor shell

shall be checked with the manufacturer-supplied installation tool or other
appropriate device. The position of the plug shall conform to the
manufacturers specifications.
DSA (SS) IR 19-1 (rev 03/06/06)
in Concrete
Page 7 of 8
Commentary: Torque-controlled anchors (wedge anchors, sleeve anchors) should be limited in the
number of turns required to develop the specified installation torque. An excessive number of
turns could indicate a failure to set and also reduces the effective embedment of the anchor.
Most anchors should not require more than 2-3 turns (after the parts are snug) to set
properly. The degree of bolt projection conforming to proper set should be established for the
specific anchor being inspected. The tension performance of displacement-controlled anchors
(drop-ins) depends in large part on the degree to which the plug is driven into the anchor shell
during installation (i.e., the plug displacement).
5.1.2
Testing: An acceptable testing procedure is attached to this IR. The test load
may be applied by any method that will effectively measure the tension in the
anchor, such as direct pull with a hydraulic jack, calibrated spring loaded devices,
or a calibrated torque wrench. Displacement-controlled anchors such as drop-ins
shall not be tested using a torque wrench.
Required test loads may be determined by either of the following methods:
5.1.2.1
Twice the allowable tension load as determined in Section 2, or;
5.1.2.2
Tension or torque test values from the table and procedures attached to this
IR.
Anchors tested with a hydraulic jack should exhibit no discernable movement
during the tension test, e.g., as evidenced by loosening of the washer under
the nut.
Anchors tested with a calibrated torque wrench must attain the specified
torque within 1/2 turn of the nut.
Exceptions: Undercut anchors that are so designed to allow visual
confirmation of full set, need not be tension or torque tested.
If the manufacturers installation torque is less than the specified test torque,
use the manufacturers specified installation torque for testing the anchor.
5.2
Epoxy-type (adhesive) Anchors

Epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors shall be tension tested per Section 1923A.3.5. The
tension test load shall equal twice the allowable load for the specific location of the
anchor to be tested (i.e., accounting for edge distance) or 80% of the yield strength
of the bolt (0.8AbFy), whichever is less. The test procedures for expansion-type
anchors in the attached table shall also be used for epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors.
Torque testing of epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors is not permitted.
Where epoxy-type (adhesive) anchors are used as shear dowels across cold joints in
slabs on grade and the slab is not part of the structural system, testing of those
dowels is not required.
Anchors shall exhibit no discernible movement during the tension test.
5.3
Screw-type Anchors: Screw-type anchors shall be torque tested in accordance with

the testing procedure attached to this IR.
Commentary: Screw-type anchors that are installed improperly (either over tightened or over-sized
holes) would typically exhibit excessive movement, or spinning in the hole at relatively low
torque values. Tension testing of these anchors is not necessary as the testing procedure
would require partial removal/withdrawal of the anchor to facilitate testing.
TEST VALUES
Hardrock or Lightweight Concrete
ANCHOR
Diameter
(in.)
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
WEDGE
Load
(lbs.)
800
1100
2000
2300
3700
5800
Torque
(Ft. lbs.)
10
25
50
80
150
250
SLEEVE
Load
(lbs.)
400
400
700
900
1100
1400
-
Torque
(Ft. lbs.)
4
5
10
20
45
90
-
SHELL
Load
(lbs.)
1000
1400
1800
2700
3700
5400
-
Torque
(Ft. lbs)
-
SCREW
Torque
(Ft. lbs.)
10
10
10
20
-
NOTES
1. Anchor diameter refers to the thread size for the WEDGE & SHELL categories, and to the anchor
outside diameter for the SLEEVE category.
2. Apply proof test loads to WEDGE & SLEEVE anchors without removing the nut if possible. If not,
remove nut and install a threaded coupler to the same tightness as the original nut using a torque
wrench to apply the test load.
3. For SLEEVE/SHELL internally threaded categories, verify that the anchor is not prevented from
withdrawing by a baseplate or other fixtures. If restraint is found, loosen and shim or remove
fixture(s) prior to testing.
4. Reaction loads from test fixtures may be applied close to the anchor being tested, provided the
anchor is not restrained from withdrawing by the fixture(s).
5. SHELL type anchors should be tested as follows:
a. Visually inspect 25% for full expansion as evidenced by the location of the expansion plug in
the anchor body. Plug location of a fully expanded anchor should be as recommended by
the manufacturer, or, in the absence of such recommendation, as determined on the job site
following the manufacturers installation instructions. At least 5% of the anchors shall be
proof loaded as indicated in the table above, but not less than three anchors per day for
each different person or crew installing anchors, or;
b. Test installed anchors per Section 1923A.3.5
6. Test equipment (including torque wrenches) is to be calibrated by an approved testing laboratory in
accordance with standard recognized procedures.
7. Alternate torque test procedures and test values for SHELL type anchors may be submitted to the
enforcement agency for review and approval on a case-by-case basis when test procedures are
submitted and approved by the enforcement agency.
8. The following criteria apply for the acceptance of installed anchors:
a. HYDRAULIC RAM METHOD: The anchor should have no observable movement at the
applicable test load. For wedge and sleeve type anchors, a practical way to determine
observable movement is that the washer under the nut becomes loose.
b. TORQUE WRENCH METHOD: The applicable test torque must be reached within the
following limits:
i. Wedge or Sleeve type: One-half (1/2) turn of the nut.
ii. One-quarter (1/4) turn of the nut for the 3/8 in. sleeve anchor only.
9. If the manufacturers recommended installation torque is less than the test torque noted in the table,
the manufacturers recommended installation torque should be used in lieu of the tabulated values.
REQUIREMENTS FOR GLASS FIBER REINFORCED

CONCRETE (GFRC) PANELS
IR 19-2
Issued 9-1-99
Purpose: This IR provides guidelines for the acceptance of glass fiber reinforced concrete
(GFRC) panels by the Division of the State Architect (DSA).
1. Definition. Glass fiber reinforced concrete is the term applied to products manufactured
using a cement/aggregate slurry reinforced throughout with alkali-resistant glass fibers. GFRC is
typically used in thin-walled architectural cladding panels with a minimum thickness of 1/2".
2. Product Description. Mix composition, degree of compaction, type of cement, and the
proportion, length and orientation of glass fibers may all be varied to produce a specific product.
Typically, a GFRC panel consists of 5% by weight (of total mix) alkali-resistant glass fiber
(absolute minimum of 4%) combined with a portland cement/sand slurry (cement/sand ratio not
less than 1:1 nor greater than 3:1). Panels are fabricated using a spray-up process. An alternate
method of fabrication uses a GFRC premix, which consists of 3% to 4% by weight (of total mix)
pre-chopped alkali-resistant glass fiber combined with a portland cement/sand slurry. Panels,
utilizing the GFRC premix, are fabricated by placing the slurry into molds in a manner similar to
precast concrete. Curing is provided with the use of a thermoplastic copolymer admixture, which
retains moisture in the mix until adequately cured, or by moist curing. Admixtures such as waterreducers, accelerators, retarders and air-entraining agents may be used.
GFRC manufactured in accordance with the recommendations of the PCI Recommended
Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels, 3rd Edition, has shown a history of good
performance in resistance to weather and water penetration. A weather-resistive coating,
however, is recommended over the GFRC panel, along with approved joint caulking
compounds, to create a complete weather-resistive barrier.
3. Plant Fabrication and Quality Control Requirements of Precast GFRC Panels. The
following requirements apply to all GFRC panels regardless of the fabrication process (spray-up
or premix).
3.1 A testing and inspection program shall be provided by the design professional in responsible
charge, shall be approved by DSA, and shall be referenced on the project Test and Inspection
List. The program for the specific project shall require the testing and inspection provisions of
the following sections.
3.2 GFRC panels shall be fabricated under the PCI Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber
Reinforced Concrete Panels, 3rd Edition. The manufacturer shall have an established quality
control program which meets the requirements of the PCI Manual for Quality Control for Plants
and Production of Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Products, including the testing and
inspection requirements of Part A, Division II, and utilizing the test procedures of Appendix F,
except as noted below. Verification shall be provided by 1) a DSA review of the manufacturers
quality control manual, or 2) certification under the PCI Plant Certification Program. (A copy of
the certificate shall be provided to DSA.)
IR 19-2 Page 2 of 3
3.2.1 The acceptance criteria for the Flex Anchor and Gravity Anchor Pull-off and Shear Tests,
Part A, Division II, Section 2.1.5, Production Testing - After Curing is that the minimum ultimate
strength at failure shall achieve three times the design load required by CBC,Section
1631A.2.4.2.5.
3.3 The manufacturing of the GFRC panels and the testing of the panels and connections shall
be continuously inspected by a DSA approved independent inspection agency. The approved
agency shall submit an affidavit at completion of fabrication stating that the panels and all
components have been fabricated in all material respects in accordance with the DSA approved
Exception: Continuous inspection is not required when plants are currently approved
under the PCI Plant Certification Program.
3.4 All panels shall be marked with the approved inspectors identification mark, and a list of
approved panels shall be provided to the project Inspector of Record (IOR) and DSA.
Exception: Panel identification by an approved inspector is not required when plants are
currently approved under the PCI Plant Certification Program.
3.5 The testing program of premix products may be modified as it applies to specific panels.
3.6 All test reports shall be sent to the architect, structural engineer, IOR and DSA within five (5)
working days of the completion of each test.
4. Specifications for GFRC Panels. Specifications should include the following:
1. GFRC panels shall be fabricated in accordance with the PCI Recommended Practice for
Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels, 3rd Edition, as modified below. The
manufacturer shall have an established quality control program that meets the
requirements of the PCI Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass
Fiber Reinforced Concrete Products.
2. Requirements to provide corrosion protection for the stiffening frames, anchors,
connectors and inserts.
3. Mix design requirements for the GFRC backing material. The cement/sand ratio shall not
be less than 1:1 nor greater than 3:1
4. Requirement for glass fiber material. Only alkali resistant fiber may be used.
5. Bonding material for panel connectors.
6. Strength, strain and shrinkage requirements.
7. Requirement that the designs for in-service conditions be based on fully aged strength
and strain properties.
8. Admixtures to be used. Admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used.
9. Description of the required testing procedures and apparatus.
10. Requirement for reporting test results to Architect, Structural Engineer, IOR and DSA.
11. Requirement for continuous fabrication inspection by an approved independent
inspector, unless the plant is currently certified under the PCI Certification Program.
5. Drawings for GFRC Panels. Drawings for the GFRC panels should include the following:
IR 19-2 Page 3 of 3
1. Details for panel connectors; dimensions and thickness of bonding material; embedment
dimension of panel anchors connectors in bonding material; dimension for weld length of
anchor to steel stud framing.
2. Detail of enlarged or slotted hole to allow for erection tolerances and for sliding of panel,
when floor to floor lateral drift is considered, without the yielding of rods. Drawings shall
indicate the acceptable clearance between the connector rod and the sides of the hole,
as determined by the design professional, to allow for movement without rod yielding.
3. For rectangular support tubes, indicate orientation.
4. Clearly identify the boundary and interface between GFRC Panel and supporting
structural members on the design drawings.
6. Design for GFRC Panels by the Manufacturers Engineer.
6.1 Check panel to structure connectors for buckling.
6.2 Check all structural members (tubes, angles, etc.) and connections to members that support
GFRC panels and tie them to the structure.
6.3 Provide calculations for the design of the sub-frame to support the panels.
6.4 Provide calculations for the design of the GFRC panels for dead load, live load, wind load,
earthquake load, the effects of creep, shrinkage and other moisture induced elements, and the
effects of temperature change as applicable. Consider differences in the thermal and moisture
induced strain properties of the facing and the backing.
7. Design Considerations for Project Design Engineer.
Check structural members and their connections for the torsional, vertical and lateral loads
imposed by the GFRC panels.
FLY ASH AND NATURAL POZZOLANS

USED IN CONCRETE
IR 19-3
References: 2007 California Building Code, Section 1903A.5

ACI 318-05, ASTM C 618, ASTM C 311, ASTM C 94
Issued 06-10-08
Purpose: This IR provides general requirements for acceptance and use of concrete mixes
containing a significant amount of fly ash or natural pozzolans as a substitute for Portland
cement, for projects under DSA jurisdiction. This IR describes the DSA requirements for the
use of fly ash, which also apply to the use of raw or calcined natural pozzolans.
Scope: This IR is applicable for all concrete mixes utilizing fly ash or natural pozzolans in
excess of 15% by weight, per 2007 California Building Code, Section 1903A.5.
This IR does not address issues related to constructability, curing, rate of strength gain,
admixture compatibility, or sampling and testing. The design professional in responsible
charge of the project shall clearly delineate all special requirements or procedures in the
construction documents. Individuals experienced in the use of concrete mix designs using
fly ash should be consulted, especially for mixes exposed to freeze / thaw or deicing
chemicals.
Background: Conventional or standard concrete mixes, as the term is used in this IR,
typically contain from 0 to 15% fly ash by weight. The percentage of fly ash is usually
expressed as the percent fly ash, by weight, of all the cementitious materials (cement and
fly ash) in the mix. Because Class F fly ash is a by-product of the combustion of coal, a
concrete mix containing significant amounts of fly ash is being recognized as a green
product. Compared to Portland cement, it offers these environmental benefits:
Diverts material from the waste stream

Reduces green house gas emissions from the processing of raw material
Conserves raw material
There are other benefits such as improved workability and durability, reduced permeability
and water demand, and lower heat of hydration. However, there are also some drawbacks
such as extended curing time, and slower early strength gain, which may impact testing and
handling of samples, and construction schedules (e.g: form and shoring removal). A special
strength testing specification may be necessary.
1.
Material:
1.1
Fly Ash: Fly ash and raw or calcined natural pozzolans shall meet the American
Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard specification C 618-05 for Class N
or F (Class C fly ash is not permitted). Per ASTM C 618, sampling and testing of fly
ash shall be in accordance with ASTM C 311.
DSA (SS) IR 19-3

(iss 06-10-08)
Fly Ash and Natural Pozzolans

Used in Concrete
Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 19-3

(iss 06-10-08)

Used in Concrete
Page 2 of 3
Additional requirements for fly ash are as follows:
Fly ash shall be supplied by an experienced producer that complies with all
applicable standards (e.g. ASTM C 618, ASTM C 311).
Fly ash shall be from one source for the duration of the project unless additional
physical testing of the changed mix is preformed, per Section 2 below.
1.2
Other Material Components: All other materials used in the concrete mix shall
meet the requirements of Chapter 3 of ACI 318.
2.
Concrete Mix Designs:
2.1
General: For all mix designs, concrete proportions shall be selected by a registered
civil engineer with experience in concrete mix design, and shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ACI 318, Section 5.2. All mix designs shall be
identified by a mix design identification number. The civil engineer shall prepare and
submit a mix design report to the DSA approved (LEA) testing laboratory for review.
Mix design reports shall include all the data as required to verify conformance with
ACI 318, Section 5.2 and 5.3, and the following:
The mix design identification number
Cement certification
Fly ash certification of compliance or test data
Admixture data
Aggregate test data
The report shall also bear the signature and seal of the registered engineer
responsible for proportioning in accordance with DSA Interpretation of Regulation IR
A-19, Section 1.1.
2.2
Mix Designs Utilizing 15% Or More Fly Ash: Proportioning shall be based on field
experience or trial mixtures, or both, per ACI 318, Section 5.3. Proportioning per ACI
318, Section 5.4 (without field experience or trial mixtures) is not permitted.
2.3
Mix Design Review and Approval Process: An engineer from a DSA approved
(LEA) testing laboratory shall review the mix design report and the design
professional in responsible charge of the project shall approve the mix design.
2.3.1
Review by LEA Engineer: A qualified civil engineer associated with a DSA

approved (LEA) testing laboratory shall review the report for conformance with
ACI 318, Sections 5.2 and 5.3. He shall issue an evaluation report of findings
and recommendation for either acceptance or rejection and forward his report to
the design professional in responsible charge of the project.
2.3.2
Approval by the Project Engineer in Responsible Charge: Based on the

findings and recommendation of the LEA engineers evaluation report, the project
design professional in responsible charge decides whether to accept or reject the
mix design. He will issue a letter stating his acceptance or rejection. The letter
shall be sent to DSA, and copied to the project inspector, the LEA laboratory, and
the mix design engineer.
2.3.3
Documentation by the Concrete Supplier: The concrete supplier shall submit

copies of the cement certification, fly ash certification of compliance or test data,
admixture data, aggregate test data, and mix design identification number to the
project inspector and the LEA engineer who reviewed the mix design report.
DSA (SS) IR 19-3

(iss 06-10-08)
2.4

Used in Concrete
Page 3 of 3
Record Keeping: The LEA engineer and project inspector shall maintain a copy of
the approved mix design report, the approval letter from the engineer in general
responsible charge, and the documents submitted by the concrete supplier and make
them available to DSA upon request.
MASONRY WALLS NON STRUCTURAL
IR 21-1
References: 2001 California Building Code, Sections 2112A and 2113A

2007 California Building Code, Sections 2114A and 2115A
Revised 09-18-07
Issued 09-01-1999
Purpose: This IR provides various requirements for non-structural masonry walls.

1. Garden Wall and Screen Wall Construction: A garden wall or screen wall is any
non-bearing wall, which is not part of the structural system of a building. In general,
construction is as required for non-bearing partitions except that minimum thickness
permitted is six inches. Wall reinforcement is as required for design loads with minimum of
#4 @ 24" o.c. vertical for running bond, or #4 @ 16" o.c. for stacked bond. Horizontal steel
is to be 0.001 times the nominal cross sectional area and may be spaced up to 4'-0" o.c.
maximum. Cells containing reinforcement shall be grouted. Though walls less than six
feet high are not required to be approved by the Division of the State Architect (DSA), if
shown on drawings, the design should consider the above requirements.
2. Grouting: If a 16" grout lift is called for, horizontal steel spacing should be 16" o.c. The
high lift grout method will be allowed for both brick and block walls when the design
indicates the use is feasible. Specifications should include the procedures outlined in DSA IR
21-2 and IR 21-3.
3. Thickness of Walls: In figuring stresses use the net dimensions of the block or brick
walls. It is not necessary to deduct for raked or tooled joints less than 1/2" in depth.
4. Wall Projection Beyond Foundation: The maximum allowable projection for a
brick wall is one-half brick for a block wall, the shell thickness minus 1/2". Design the wall
to be capable of carrying its load on the reduced area.
5. Concentrated Loads: Extra bars are necessary only when required by design. For
concentrated loads causing eccentric moments, use four times the wall thickness plus length
of bearing to compute bending stresses for interior supports. Use two times the wall
thickness plus length of bearing for support at ends of walls.
DSA (SS) IR 21-1 (rev 09-18-07)
Masonry Walls Non Structural
Page 1 of 1
IR 21-2
CONCRETE MASONRY
HIGH LIFT GROUTING METHOD
References:
2001 California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2,
Sections 2104A.6 and 2105A.7

Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide the
requirements and procedure for high lift concrete masonry grouting when the high lift
method is specified on the DSA approved plans and specifications.
1.
Description: The high lift grouting method as developed for use in reinforced
concrete block masonry is intended for use on wall construction where openings, block
pattern arrangements, reinforcing steel, or embedded structural steel details do not prevent
the free flow of grout or inhibit the use of mechanical vibration to properly consolidate, and
reconsolidate, the grout in all cells or horizontal grout spaces.
1.1
Procedure: The high lift method requires that all masonry units, reinforcing steel
and embedded items will be in place before grouting of the wall commences. The
work shall be so arranged that once grouting of a section of wall is started the
grouting shall proceed in lifts without stopping, except as noted below, until the full
height of the prepared section is poured. The waiting period between lifts shall be
limited to the time required to obtain an initial consolidation of grout. This also allows
for a reduction in hydrostatic pressure of the grout on the masonry unit and reduces
the possibility of "blow-outs."
1.2
Grout: The grout shall be a high-slump workable mix, preferably placed by pumping
to permit continuous pouring. The grout shall be worked into all voids. Mechanical
vibrators shall be used for consolidation and reconsolidation. Where job conditions
preclude such use, other methods may be employed if approved in advance by DSA.
Because of the high water/cement ratio used in this type of grout, it is essential that
the grout be reconsolidated after it has taken on a plastic consistency, but prior to
taking an initial set. The reconsolidation is intended to overcome settlement
shrinkage, separation from the reinforcing steel and to promote bonding to the
masonry unit shells.
1.3
Pour: For the purpose of this IR, a "pour" is considered as the entire height of grout
fill placed in one day and is composed of a number of successively placed grout lifts.
A "lift" is the layer of grout placed in a single continuous operation.
The maximum height of pour is limited by the practical considerations of segregation
of grout due to the height of free fall, the effect of dry grout deposits left on block
projections, congestion due to reinforcing steel and embedded items, and the ability
to effectively reconsolidate the grout. Unless specifically approved otherwise, the
maximum height of pour will be 12 feet for walls with a nominal thickness of less
DSA IR 21-2
(rev 12-17-09)
Concrete Masonry
High-Lift Grouting Method
Page 1 of 6
DSA IR 21-2
(rev 12-17-09)
Concrete Masonry
Page 2 of 6
than 12 inches, and 16 feet for walls with a nominal thickness of 12 inches or more.
For height of lift see Section 4.10.1 of this IR.
2.
Quality of Materials: All materials shall conform to 2007 CBC, Section 2103A
(Section 2102A in the 2001 CBC), with the following additional requirements:
2.1
Aggregate. Aggregate for grout shall conform to Section 2103A.12.3 of the 2007
CBC (Section 2103A.4.3 of the 2001 CBC) except when alternatives are specifically
approved by the architect or structural engineer and DSA.
2.2
Admixture. The grout shall contain an admixture of the type that reduces early
water loss to the masonry units and produces an expansive action in the plastic
grout sufficient to offset initial shrinkage and promote bonding of the grout to all
interior surfaces of the masonry units. Admixtures shall have an listing from ICC-ES
or other acceptable evaluation agency per IR A-5. The approval of the architect or
structural engineer and DSA is required for the use of any admixture.
3.
Mortar and Grout:
3.1
Mortar: Mortar shall comply with the requirements of 2007 CBC, Section 2103A.8
(Section 2103A.3 in the 2001 CBC), with the following additional requirements:
3.1.1
Place approximately half of the required water and sand into the mixer while it is
running.
3.1.2
Add cement, the remainder of the sand, and water in that order and mix for a
period of at least two minutes.
3.1.3
Add lime and continue mixing as long as needed to achieve a uniform mass.
3.1.4
The total mixing time shall be 3 to 10 minutes.
Exception:
3.2
When pre-blended mortar is specified mixing shall conform to manufacturers

instructions in lieu of the requirements of Section 3.1.
Grout: The grout mix shall comply with the requirements of 2007 CBC, Section
2103A.12 (Section 2103A.4 in the 2001 CBC).
Sufficient water may be added to make a workable mix that will flow into all voids of
the masonry without separation or segregation. The slump of the grout shall be 8 to
11 inches per ACI 530.1, Article 2.6 B.2 and ASTM C476, Section 4.2.2.
Grout mixes shall contain an approved admixture conforming to the requirements of
Section 2.2 above. Admixture shall be used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and appropriate listing from ICC-ES or other acceptable
evaluation agency per IR A-5 .
3.3
Mixing of Grout: The mixing of grout shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C476. The procedure used and timing for adding the admixture to the grout mix shall
conform with admixture manufacturers instructions.
3.4
Tests: Testing of mortar and grout shall conform to the requirements of 2007 CBC,
Section 2105A.5 (Section 2105A.3.4 in the 2001 CBC).
4.
Construction: The construction of high lift concrete block masonry work shall
conform to the requirements of CBC, Chapter 21A, with the following additional
requirements:
DSA IR 21-2
(rev 12-17-09)
Concrete Masonry
Page 3 of 6
4.1
Foundations: The contact surface of all foundations and floors that are to receive
masonry work shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened in accordance with 2007
CBC, Section 1906A.4.1 (Section 1906A.4 in the 2001 CBC) before start of block
placement. Protect the roughened surface during construction to assure a good bond
between the grout fill and the concrete surface.
4.2
Cleanouts: Provide cleanout openings for all walls at the bottom of every cell for
each pour in accordance with 2007 CBC, Section 2104A.6.1.2.3 (Section
2104A.6.1.2.3 in the 2001 CBC). However, if the course at the bottom of the pour is
constructed entirely of inverted open-end bond beam units, cleanout openings need
only be provided in the reinforced cells.
The openings shall be made prior to the laying of masonry units and be of sufficient
size and location to allow thorough removal of all mortar droppings and debris.
After the laying of masonry units is completed, the cells cleaned, the reinforcing stell
positioned, and the inspection completed, close the cleanouts by inserting face shells
of masonry units or covering the openings with forms. Face shell plugs shall be
adequately braced to resist the hydrostatic pressure exerted by the grout in its fluid
phase.
4.3
Reinforcement: All reinforcing steel shall be accurately placed in accordance with

the DSA approved construction documents. For 8 inch block walls, all horizontal bars
shall be placed in a single vertical plane in order to provide for continuous, and
unobstructed vertical cells as required by Section 4.9.1.2 of this IR. Both horizontal
and vertical bars are to be held in position by wire ties or spacing devices near bar
ends and at intervals not exceeding 192 diameters of the reinforcement. Place the
horizontal bars as the placement (or laying) of the masonry units progresses.
Vertical bars may be dropped into position after the completion of the laying if the
bars are held in place with positioning devices near the bottom of the wall and at
intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters.
4.4
Masonry Units: Use of open-end concrete masonry units is preferred, wherever

possible, and is required for stacked bond. Use open-end bond-beam units wherever
possible to facilitate the horizontal flow of grout. Bond-beam units are required at all
horizontal bars to provide a minimum three inch high by three inch wide vertical
opening at all cross webs.
4.5
Laying: Fill all head and bed joints solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face
of the unit not less than the thickness of the face shell. Take care in placing the
mortar to minimize its dropping into the block cells. Arrange open-end concrete
masonry units used in stacked bond so that closed ends are not abutting.
Consolidate mortar adequately by tooling to form a tight bond with the concrete
masonry unit, and to enhance the water resistance of the assemblage.
4.6
Wall Ties and Bracing: When stacked bond is used, or when adequate cross webs
between face shells are not provided, use ties of heavy gage wire embedded in the
horizontal mortar joints across continuous vertical joints or between face shells to
prevent "blow-outs" due to the hydrostatic pressure exerted by the grout in its fluid
phase. External ties or braces may also be used for this purpose.
During construction, adequately brace ungrouted walls to resist wind and other
forces.
4.7
Mortar Droppings and Overhangs: Mortar that projects into the grout space more
than shall be removed. Thoroughly remove mortar droppings
from the
foundation or bearing surface, cell walls and reinforcing steel. An acceptable method
DSA IR 21-2
(rev 12-17-09)
Concrete Masonry
Page 4 of 6
is to cover the exposed surface of the foundation with a minimum one inch thick
layer of dry sand, and then dislodge any hardened mortar from the cell walls and
reinforcement with a pole or rod. Remove the mortar debris and the sand cover
prior to clean up and grouting.
4.8
Construction Joints: In the high lift grouting method, intermediate horizontal

construction joints are not permitted. Grouting shall be completed in one continuous
pour to the top of the wall in maximum four-foot layers or lifts in the same working
day. An alternate procedure may be used with the approval of the architect or
structural engineer and DSA.
The section of wall to be grouted in any one pour is limited to a length in which
successive lifts can be placed within one hour of the preceding lifts. Vertical control
barriers shall be placed between pour sections in locations approved by the architect
or structural engineer and DSA.
4.9
Grouting:
4.9.1
Preparation: Adequate preparations shall be made prior to start of grouting

operations including but not limited to:
4.9.1.1
All cleanout closures, reinforcing steel, and embedded items shall be properly
secured in place.
4.9.1.2
All cells shall be clear and unobstructed. To be considered unobstructed all

of the following requirements must be met (also see Table 1.16.1 of ACI 53005):
For grout pours up to and including twelve feet in height the minimum
grout space dimensions of all cells shall be three inches by three inches,
For grout pours over twelve feet in height (only permitted for walls with a
nominal thickness of 12 inches or more) the minimum grout space
dimensions of all cells shall be three inches by four inches,
The minimum grout space dimensions of cells containing horizontal

reinforcing steel, electrical conduits or any other obstruction shall be
increased by the diameter or width of the obstruction, and
No cell shall contain vertical reinforcing steel exceeding six percent of the
cell area,
4.9.1.3
All equipment used for grouting shall be functional, appropriate and adequate
for the intended task.
4.9.1.4
An adequate number of vibrators (including at least one spare vibrator to be

available if a vibrator breaks down or gets stuck in the wall cavity) shall be
available. All vibrators shall be suitable for vibrating the masonry (e.g. small
diameter, with a shaft long enough to penetrate into the previous lift as
required).
4.9.2
To reduce the possibility of "blow-outs," do not pour grout until the mortar has
adequately cured. Grout the walls as soon as possible after mortar has cured to
reduce shrinkage and cracking of the vertical joints.
4.9.3
Blow Outs: If a blow-out occurs and the contractor immediately patches or

shores the wall while the grout is still in a fluid state, the contractor shall
reconsolidate the grout by mechanical vibration. If the grout achieves its initial
set prior to this reconsolidation see Section 4.11 of this IR; the zone of damage
shall be delineated for removal. The special inspector shall immediately report
the extent of the blow-out damage to the project inspector, architect, structural
DSA IR 21-2
(rev 12-17-09)
Concrete Masonry
Page 5 of 6
engineer, and DSA, and shall keep records of the blow-out damage and any
repair procedures for review by the DSA field engineer.
4.10
Grouting Procedure:
4.10.1
Transport grout from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout space as
rapidly as practical by means and methods which will prevent segregation of the
mix and minimize grout splatter on reinforcing steel and masonry unit surfaces
not being encased in the grout pour. Depending on weather conditions and
absorption rates of the masonry units, the lift heights and waiting periods may be
varied. For construction under weather conditions other than cold or hot
weather construction, as defined in 2007 CBC Sections 2104A.3 and 2104A.4
respectively, the individual lifts of grout shall be limited to four feet in height with
a waiting period between lifts of 30 to 60 minutes. No lift shall exceed four feet
in height without prior written DSA approval.
4.10.2
Place the first lift of grout to a uniform height within the pour section and
mechanically vibrate thoroughly to fill all voids. Vibration shall follow closely
behind grout placement and at the same pace as the grouting operation.
4.10.3
When the grout becomes plastic, but before initial set, pour the succeeding lift
and vibrate alternate cells twelve to eighteen inches into the preceding lift to
reconsolidate the preceding lift and close any plastic shrinkage cracks or
separations from the cell walls.
4.10.4
If, because of unavoidable job conditions, it is anticipated that the placement of

the succeeding lift is going to be delayed beyond the period of workability of the
preceding lift, reconsolidate each lift by reworking with the mechanical vibrator
as soon as the grout has achieved its settlement shrinkage.
4.10.5
The waiting, pouring and reconsolidation steps shall be repeated to the top of the
pour. The top lift shall be reconsolidated after the required waiting period to fill
any space left by settlement shrinkage.
4.10.6
Provisions, such as drypacking, shall be made to provide solid bedding for nailers
at the tops of walls.
4.11
Equipment Breakdown or Emergency: If equipment breaks down, or any other

unforeseen circumstance prevents the grouting operation from proceeding in
accordance with these requirements, stop the grout pour until repairs can be made.
If any grout does not receive consolidation, or reconsolidation, in a timely manner
the areas in question shall be clearly delineated and reported. If cold joints or
non-compliant construction joints result from an emergency interruption of the
placing sequence, clearly delineated and reported these areas. The architect or
engineer in general responsible charge of the project will either propose methods for
repair, replacement, additional testing or propose acceptance of the delineated
areas. The proposal shall be submitted to DSA for review and approval.
4.12
Curing: Attention shall be given to proper curing of the mortar and grout.
4.13
Cleaning Wall: Immediately after the wall has been fully grouted, water pressurized
through a jet nozzle shall be used to remove stains which have percolated through
the blocks and joints.
5.
Inspection and Core Tests:
5.1
Inspection: All masonry work is required to be continuously inspected during the

laying of masonry, placing of reinforcing steel and grouting by an inspector specially
DSA IR 21-2
(rev 12-17-09)
Concrete Masonry
Page 6 of 6
approved for that purpose by DSA. A qualified individual acceptable to the testing
laboratory shall make test samples and perform such field tests as are required.
The special masonry inspector shall check the materials, details of construction and
construction procedure. The inspector shall furnish a verified report on Form DSA292 certifying that of his or her own personal knowledge the work covered by the
report has, in every material respect, been performed in compliance with the DSA
5.2
Core Tests: Core samples of the completed masonry construction shall be taken in
accordance with 2007 CBC, Section 2105A.4 (Section 2105A.3.1 in the 2001 CBC).
All core samples shall be submitted to the testing laboratory for examination and
testing.
A representative of the testing laboratory shall inspect the coring of the masonry
walls and prepare a report of the coring operations. The report shall include the
following:
number, location and condition of all cores cut on the project
detailed description of the bond between the grout fill and the cell walls of the
masonry unit and
any difficulties encountered in the coring operation which might impair the
strength of the sample
CLAY BRICK MASONRY

HIGH LIFT GROUTING METHOD
Reference: California Building Code, Section 2104A.6
IR 21-3
Issued 9-1-99
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provide the requirements and procedure for high lift clay
brick masonry grouting when the use of this method is approved by the Division of the State
Architect (DSA).
1. Description. The high lift grouting method has been developed for use on wall construction
consisting of two wythes of brick masonry bonded to a grout core which contains the vertical
and horizontal reinforcing. The wythes are connected by wire ties laid in the mortar joints at a
spacing adequate to resist the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid grout during the pouring
operation.
Use of this method should be restricted to walls where openings, arrangement of piers, special
reinforcing details, or embedded items do not prevent the free flow of grout or inhibit the use of
mechanical vibration to properly consolidate the grout core. Horizontal reinforcing or embedded
items such as structural connections or electrical conduit should be positioned so as to allow
maximum accessibility to the grout space.
The procedure requires that all masonry units, reinforcing steel and embedded items are in
place before grouting of the wall commences. Arrange the work so that once the grouting of a
section of wall is started, the grouting proceeds in lifts without stopping except as noted below,
until the full height of the prepared section is poured. The waiting period between lifts is limited
to the time required to obtain an initial consolidation of grout due to settlement, shrinkage and
absorption of excess water by the masonry units. The waiting period reduces the hydrostatic
pressure of the grout on the masonry wythes and reduces the possibility of "blow-outs."
The grout is to be a workable mix, preferably placed by pumping, to permit continuous pouring
and is to be worked into all voids with mechanical vibrators. Because of the high water/cement
ratio used in this type of grout, it is essential that the grout be reconsolidated after it has taken
on a plastic consistency, but prior to taking an initial set. The reconsolidation is intended to
overcome settlement shrinkage, separations from the reinforcing steel and to promote bonding
to the masonry unit walls.
For the purpose of this IR, a "pour" is considered as the entire height of grout fill placed in one
day and is composed of a number of successively placed grout lifts. A "lift" is the layer of grout
placed in a single continuous operation.
The maximum height of pour is limited by the practical considerations of segregation of grout
due to the height of free fall, effect of dry grout deposits left on the bonding face of the masonry
units and reinforcing steel and the ability to effectively reconsolidate the grout. Unless
specifically approved otherwise, the maximum height of pour is sixteen feet for walls with a
single curtain of reinforcing steel (less than 12" thick) and twenty feet for walls with two curtains
of reinforcement (12" or more in thickness). The minimum grout space width is 3 " and the wall
shall be constructed so as to preserve an unobstructed vertical alignment of the grout space.
IR 21-3 Page 2 of 5
2. Quality of Materials. All materials are to conform to CBC, Section 2102A with the following
additional requirements:
1. Pea Gravel. Pea gravel for grout is to conform to ASTM C404 Aggregates for Grout,
except when other gradings are specifically approved by the architect or structural
engineer and DSA.
2. Coarse Aggregate. Coarse aggregate as for concrete, when permitted in grout fill, is to
conform to CBC, Section 1903A.3.
3. Admixture. The grout should contain an admixture of the type that reduces early water
loss to the masonry units and produces an expansive action in the plastic grout sufficient
to offset initial shrinkage and promote bonding of the grout to all interior surfaces of the
masonry units. Obtain the approval of the architect or structural engineer and DSA for
use of the admixture.
3. Mortar and Grout.
3.1 Mortar. Mortar is to comply with the requirements of CBC, Section 2103A with the following
additional requirements:
1. Place approximately half of the required water and sand into the mixer while running.
2. Add cement and the remainder of the sand and water into the mixer in that order and
mix for a period of at least two minutes.
3. Add lime and continue mixing as long as needed to secure a uniform mass.
4. The total mixing time may not be less than 10 minutes.
3.2 Grout. The grout mix is to comply with the requirements of CBC, Section 2103A.4.
Sufficient water may be added to make a workable mix that will flow into all voids in the masonry
tiers without separation or segregation. The slump of the grout should be varied depending on
the rate of absorption of the masonry units and temperature and humidity conditions. The range
should be from eight inches (8") for units with a low rate of absorption (30 to 40 grams per
minute) up to ten inches (10") for units with a high rate of absorption (80 to 90 grams per
minute).
Grout mixes are to contain an approved admixture conforming to the requirements of Item 2 (3.)
above. Use such admixture strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Where the width of the grout space exceeds five inches, grout using a coarser aggregate may
be used if the mix is designed in accordance with CBC, Section 1905A. The maximum size
aggregate is not to exceed one inch. The water per sack of cement may be greater than is
shown in CBC, Table 19A-A-8 to allow for absorption by the masonry units and sufficient
workability to meet the requirements given above.
3.3 Mixing of Grout. The mixing of grout is to conform to the requirements for mixing of
concrete, CBC, Section 1905A.8. Whenever possible, batch, mix and deliver grout in
accordance with the requirements for transit-mixed concrete.
Time the admixture addition in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The
procedure used for adding it to the grout mix should provide for good dispersion.
IR 21-3 Page 3 of 5
3.4 Tests. Testing of mortar and grout is to conform to the requirements of CBC, Sections
2105A.3, 2105A.4 and 2105A.5.
4. Construction. The construction of high lift clay brick masonry work is to conform the
requirements of CBC, Chapter 21, with the following additional requirements:
1. Wall Make-Up. Lay brick level in two wythes with a separation for grout space not less
than 3 ". The minimum wall thickness is governed otherwise by CBC, Table 21A-R.
2. Foundations. Clean thoroughly and roughen the contact surface of all foundations and
floors that are to receive masonry work in accordance with CBC, Section 2906A.4 before
start of laying. Protect the roughened surface during construction to assure a good bond
between the grout fill and the concrete surface.
3. Cleanouts. Provide cleanout openings for all walls at the bottom of each pour. These
openings are to be made by omitting alternate bricks on one wythe of the wall or by
forming openings of equivalent size and spacing in the foundation.
After the laying of the masonry units is completed, clean all foreign material from the
bottom of the grout space and position the reinforcing steel. Have all preparatory work
approved by the inspector, then close the cleanout holes. The holes may be plugged
with brick units set in mortar or covered with forms. The brick plugs are to have a twoday minimum curing time or are to be adequately braced to resist the pressure of the
fluid grout.
4. Control Barriers. Place vertical barriers or dams to control the extent of the pours
horizontally. Such barriers may be formed of brick across the grout space (in full vertical
and horizontal joints of mortar) full height of wall. Dams are to be located where
designated by the architect or structural engineer.
5. Reinforcement. Place all reinforcing steel accurately in strict accordance with the
approved plans and specifications. Both horizontal and vertical reinforcing are to be held
in position by wire tie or spacing devices near ends and at intervals not exceeding 192
diameters of the reinforcement. Place the horizontal reinforcing as the work progresses
and the vertical reinforcing may be dropped into position after the completion of the
laying if adequate positioning devices are provided to hold the threaded reinforcement.
6. Laying Brick. The brick is to be clean and all dust or dirt removed from the surfaces
before laying. At the time of laying, all brick is to be damp and have a residual absorption
between 5% and 10%. Take special care when using units with different absorption
characteristics in the same wall.
Lay the brick in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints. Take care in placing the
mortar to keep a minimum of droppings from falling into the grout space. As the work
progresses, both of the wythes should be kept approximately at the same height to
accommodate the wall ties. Place the ties in the mortar bed and vertically align all ties to
facilitate the vibrating of the grout pours.
7. Cleaning the Grout Space. Thoroughly clean all mortar droppings from the construction
joint at the foundation and from the reinforcing steel. Remove all mortar projections
which extend more than one-quarter inch (1/4") into the grout space.
Recommended methods to maintain a clean horizontal construction joint at the
foundation are to cover the exposed foundation surface with a one-to-two inch layer of
IR 21-3 Page 4 of 5
sand to receive the mortar debris and, (1) removing mortar from reinforcing steel and
mortar projecting into the grout space from the mortar joists by hosing out the grout
space at least twice a day (at mid-day and quitting time) with a high pressure stream of
water or, (2) dislodging the mortar droppings and projections with a pole or rod as the
work progresses. After the lay-up of the wall is completed, remove the sand cover and
mortar debris at the bottom of the grout space. The surface of the foundation should be
left with clean aggregate exposed in the concrete matrix.
8. Wall Bracing. After construction of the masonry walls and prior to grouting, the walls
should be adequately braced against lateral forces and other construction hazards until
permanent supports are in place.
9. Grout Pours. In the High Lift Grouting Method, intermediate horizontal construction joints
are not permitted. Plan the work for one continuous pour of grout to the top of the wall in
four foot layers or lifts in the same working day. Should a blow-out, a breakdown in
equipment, or any other emergency stop the grouting operation, an alternate procedure
may be used with the approval of the architect or structural engineer and DSA. The total
length of wall to be grouted in any one pour is limited to the number of sections between
vertical control barriers in which each lift can be placed within one hour of the preceding
lift. To prevent "blow-outs," no grout should be poured unless the mortar of the brick
work has been allowed to set a minimum of three days in hot weather or five days in
cold, damp weather. After all droppings and foreign material have been removed from
the grout space (see Item 4 (7.) above), close the cleanout holes (see Item 4 (3.) above).
All reinforcing, bolts and embedded connection items should be rigidly held in position
before grouting is started.
In order to control the rate of absorption of the brick units at the time of grouting, pre-wet
the interior surfaces of the brick wythes prior to the start of the grout pour. Soak the
bricks thoroughly with water the evening prior to the start of the grouting. In the case of
hot, dry weather conditions it may be necessary to provide additional moistening of the
grout contact surface of the brick the day of the pour.
10. Grouting Procedure. Handle the grout from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout
space as rapidly as practical by pumping and placing methods which will prevent
segregation of the mix and cause a minimum of grout splatter on reinforcing and
masonry unit surfaces not being immediately encased in the grout lift. Discard the grout
not in place within 1 hours after water is first added to the batch.
Depending upon weather conditions and absorption rates of the masonry units, the lift
heights and waiting periods may be varied. Under normal weather conditions with typical
masonry units, the individual lifts of grout are limited to four feet (4') in height with a
waiting period between lifts of 30 to 60 minutes.
Place the first lift of grout to a uniform height within the pour section and vibrate
thoroughly to fill all voids. This first vibration should follow immediately behind the
pouring of the grout by not more than ten feet (10'). For vibration or consolidation, use an
approved mechanical vibrator.
After a waiting period sufficient to permit the grout to become plastic, but before it has
taken any set, the succeeding lift should be poured and vibrated twelve to eighteen
IR 21-3 Page 5 of 5
inches (12"18") into the preceding lift. This reconsolidates the preceding lift and closes
any plastic shrinkage cracks or separations from the masonry units.
If the placing of the succeeding lift is going to be delayed beyond the period of
workability of the preceding lift, each lift is to be reconsolidated by reworking with a
second vibrator as soon as the grout has taken its settlement shrinkage. Repeat the
waiting, pouring and reconsolidation steps until the top of the pour is reached.
Reconsolidate the top lift after the required waiting period so that any space left by
settlement shrinkage is filled with grout.
11. Curing. Attention should be given to proper curing of the mortar joints as well as the
grout concrete pour. The brick masonry work and top of the grout pour should be kept
damp to prevent too rapid drying during hot or drying weather, and drying winds.
12. Cleaning Wall. Soon after the grout work is completed, all exposed brick faces showing
grout spotting should be washed down thoroughly with a pressure stream of water
through a jet nozzle. Subsequent cleaning may be necessary as the curing is taking
place and before final acceptance, and as directed by the architect.
5. Inspection and Core Tests.
5.1 Inspection. All masonry work is required to be continuously inspected during laying and
grouting by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by DSA. The inspector makes test
samples and performs such tests as are required by Item 4 (5.) above.
The special masonry inspector checks the materials, details of construction and construction
procedure. He will furnish a verified report stating that of his own personal knowledge, the work
covered by the report has been performed and materials used and installed in accordance with
and in conformity to, the duly approved plans and specifications.
5.2 Core Tests. Take core tests of the completed masonry construction in accordance with
CBC, Section 2105A.3.1.
MASONRY:
CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT STANDARDS
Reference: California Building Code Sections 2102A.5, U.B.C Std. 21-04
IR 21-4
Revised 11-01-07
Issued 08-18-04 as CR 21-1
1.
PURPOSE: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) indicates Division of the State

Architects (DSA) acceptance of current standards applicable to concrete masonry unit
materials, sampling and testing for projects under DSA jurisdiction, which includes public
schools (K-12 and Community Colleges) and state essential services facilities. These current
standards, published by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), include the
following:
ASTM C 90-02a, Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C 140-02a, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units
ASTM C 426-99, Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete
Masonry Units
2
BACKGROUND: Section 2102A.5.2 of the 2001 CBC, which was based on ASTM C
90-95, mandates the use of Grade N-1 concrete masonry units (Type I moisture controlled
units) for projects under DSA jurisdiction.
ASTM C 90 was revised in year 2000 to remove the Type I and Type II classifications. This
change has been continued in subsequent revisions of ASTM C 90, including the current
edition, ASTM C 90-02a.
3.
SUMMARY: When these current standards are applied on a project under DSA
jurisdiction, the design, sampling and testing of masonry units must comply with the
following requirements.
3.1
Design and Specifications
Plans and specifications shall reference the current standards, listed above, and the
project design shall conform to these standards and this DSA Circular.
Type I moisture-controlled units shall not be specified since they are no longer
recognized in the current edition, ASTM C 90-02a.
Control joints should be specified at a maximum of 25 feet spacing, in accordance

with the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) TEK 10-1A, Crack Control in
Concrete Masonry Walls. Alternatively, refer to Section 3.2.2, below.
DSA (SS) IR 21-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Masonry: Concrete Masonry

Unit Standards
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR 21-4

(rev 10-15-07)
3.2
Page 2 of 2
Sampling and Testing Of Concrete Masonry Units

The owners material testing laboratory must be currently accepted by DSAs
Laboratory Acceptance Program (LEA). The owners laboratory shall sample masonry
units in accordance with ASTM C 90 Section 4 and perform the following tests:
3.2.1
3.2.2
Masonry: Concrete Masonry

Unit Standards
Mandatory Tests
Measurements (Section 5, ASTM C 140)
Compressive strength (Section 6, ASTM C 140)
Absorption (Section 8, ASTM C 140)

Shrinkage Testing of Concrete Masonry Units
Per ASTM C 90, Sections 5.2 and 8.3, manufacturers are required to conduct
regular quality control testing to ensure that units delivered to projects will meet
the linear shrinkage requirement (0.065 percent maximum).
DSA will not require project-specific linear shrinkage testing if control joints are
specified at 25 feet maximum spacing, otherwise testing is required. Additionally,
the project design professional may require linear shrinkage testing for special
design or construction conditions.
When testing is required, the owners material testing laboratory shall conduct
linear shrinkage testing in accordance with ASTM C 426. Test data shall be
traceable to the units being supplied for the project, and shall comply with ASTM
C 90, Section 8.3.
3.2.3
Reporting
Test reports conforming to Section 10 of ASTM C 140 and Section 4-335 (d) of
Title 24, Part 1 shall be submitted to the project design professionals, the project
inspector, the owner, and DSA.
DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR STEEL DECK

DIAPHRAGMS WITH STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FILL
References:
2001 California Building Code (CBC), Section 2205A.4.1
IR 22-1
Revised 01-02-08
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide guidelines

and limitations, additional to the California Building Code (CBC), for the design of steel deck
composite diaphragms with structural concrete fill.
1. General. Designs of metal deck diaphragms with concrete weighing from 95 to 150
pounds per cubic foot, detailed in accordance with International Code Council Evaluation
Service (ICC ES) Evaluation Service Reports (ESR), will be accepted at 80% of the Report
values. For projects submitted to DSA under the 2007 CBC, 100% of the ESR value will be
accepted if the report values were based on test data, per ICC AC43 (2007 CBC, Section
2209A.2).
Where diaphragm shears exceed 80% of the ESR values, the structural concrete fill is to be
designed to resist the entire horizontal load, in accordance with 2007 CBC, Section 1901A
(Section 1911A in the 2001 CBC).
2. Shear Transfer. Transfer lateral loads to chords, reaction members and drags as
follows:
2.1
Diaphragms with Shears Not Greater than 80% of ESR Shear Value - Shear
may be transferred entirely by welding the metal deck to the steel framing in
accordance with the ESR, except use weld values given in Table J2.5 (AISC, 360-05).
The first sheet of steel decking adjacent and parallel to chords, reaction members
and drags (on one or both sides as applicable) is required to be a full width sheet.
This arrangement will reduce the shear in the concrete along the line of the first
seam and will provide maximum bond area of concrete to deck in the most highly
stressed regions.
2.2
Diaphragms Using Structural Concrete Fill to Resist the Entire Shear Transfer lateral loads directly from the concrete by means of dowels or welded shear
connectors to the building frame. Do not consider deck welding to be part of the
shear transfer connection.
Use allowable shear values for dowels equal to the values for bolts of the same
diameter as given in 2007 CBC, Section 1911A for Allowable Design Load (ASD) and
1912A for Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) (for projects submitted under the
2001 CBC, see Table 19A-D and Section 1923A). Note that allowable shear values for
welded connectors given in Section I1.3 of AISC 360-05 are for composite design
only, and allowable values for diaphragm shear transfer to drag members, reaction
DSA (SS) IR 22-1

(rev. 01-02-08)
Design Procedure For Steel Deck

Diaphragms with Structural Concrete Fill
Page 1of 2
DSA (SS) IR 22-1

(rev. 01-02-08)
Design Procedure For Steel Deck

Diaphragms With Structural Concrete Fill
Page 2 of 2
members and chords, etc., are not to exceed one-third of the available strength
(2007 CBC, Section 2204A.1.2).
3.
Reinforcing for Concrete Slabs on Metal Deck.
3.1
The minimum requirements for reinforcing steel in structural concrete fill on metal
deck may not be less than the minimum called for in CBC, Section 1907A.12.
3.2
Provide temperature and shrinkage reinforcement perpendicular to the direction of

the ribs with an area not less than that specified in CBC, Section 1907A.12,
considering the net area of the concrete above the ribs. Provide slab reinforcement
parallel to the ribs which is not less than that used in establishing diaphragm shear
values as shown in ESR AC43. Provide continuity and other special reinforcement as
required by calculations.
IR 22-2
ANCHOR BOLTS CONNECTING

STEEL TO CONCRETE
Reference: 2001 Title 24, California Building Code, Sections 1923A, 2205A.11 and 2205A.12
Revised 11-01-07
2007 Title 24, California Building Code, Section 2204A.2.2
Revised 03-19-07
and AISC 360, Section J9
Issued 01-30-07 as CR 22-1
Title 8, Industrial Relations, Sections 1710 (f) (1) (A) and 1710 (b)
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is applicable to cast-in-place anchor bolts

used to fasten structural steel to concrete. The purpose of this IR is to clarify the dimensional
requirements, and the acceptability of both full diameter body and reduced body diameter
style bolts. This IR is not applicable to anchor bolts used to attach wood elements to
concrete or to masonry (refer to IR 23-5), bolts used for steel to steel connections, or postinstalled bolts (refer to IR 19-1).
1.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: Cut-thread or rolled-thread bolts of full diameter
body style shall meet the requirements of American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) standard ASME B18.2.1 or ASME B18.2.6 (Section 3 below). Full body style bolts
may be designed per Sections 1.1 or 1.2 below.
Rolled-thread bolts of reduced diameter body style shall meet the requirements of ASME
B18.2.1 (Section 4 below). Reduced body style bolts shall be designed per Section 1.1
below.
1.1
The construction documents shall indicate that the anchor bolts must meet the
requirements of ASTM F-1554. The anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance
with ACI 318, Appendix D.
1.2
When the anchor bolts are designed in accordance with 2001 CBC, Section 1923A.1
(Section 1911A.2 in the 2007 CBC), the body or shank diameters (from Table 3-1
below) shall be specified on the construction documents and utilized for the design.
The body or shank diameters herein specified shall supersede ASTM F-1554.
In addition, the minimum number of anchor bolts required for a column base plate is four
(4), per Title 8, Industrial Relations, Section 1710 (f) (1) (A). Steel posts weighing 300 lbs.
or less, as defined by Title 8, Section 1710 (b), are not subject to this requirement.
Base plate holes for anchor bolts may be oversized per 2001 CBC Section 2205A.11 (for
projects submitted under the 2007 CBC, refer to AISC 360, Section J9 and AISC Manual of
Steel Construction, Table 14-2).
2.
BACKGROUND: Dimensional requirements for bolts are given in ASME B18.2.1,

Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, and ASME B18.2.6, Fasteners for Use in Structural
Applications.
Bolt threads are formed either by cutting or rolling.
Dimensional
requirements for threads are given in ASME B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Thread (UN and UNR
Thread Form), and ASME B1.3M, Screw Thread Gaging Systems for Dimensional
Acceptability Inch and Metric.
Anchor bolts are manufactured from bolt blanks, which is a headed smooth rod or bar
intended for subsequent threading. Blanks come in full body diameter and reduced body
diameter styles.
DSA (SS) IR 22-2
(rev 11-01-07)
Anchor Bolts Connecting

Steel to Concrete
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR 22-2

(rev 11-01-07)
Anchor Bolts Connecting

Steel to Concrete
Page 2 of 2
2.1
Cut-Thread Bolts. The original blank is full diameter body style, and equal to the
major thread (outside) diameter. Threads are formed by cutting and removing metal
from the blank.
2.2
Full Diameter Body Style Rolled-Thread Bolts. The original blank is full diameter
body style, and the threaded length portion is reduced to the thread pitch diameter
during extrusion. Threads are formed by rotating dies that displace the metal.
2.3
Reduced Diameter Body Style Rolled-Thread Bolts. Similar to full diameter body
style rolled-thread bolts, except the blank diameter is reduced for the entire bolt
length.
2.4
Commercially, the terms cut-thread and rolled-thread may not indicate the
method of forming threads. The term cut-thread bolt may refer to either a cutthread bolt or a full diameter body style rolled-thread bolt. The term rolled-thread
bolt may refer to a reduced diameter body style rolled-thread bolt.
3.
FULL DIAMETER BODY STYLE BOLTS: Dimensional requirements for cutthread or rolled-thread bolts with full diameter body style are given in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Diameters of Full Diameter Body Style Bolts 1, 2
Nominal
Size (inches)
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-3/4
2
Body or Shank Diameter (inches) 3

Max.
Min.
0.5000
0.6250
0.7500
0.8750
1.0000
1.2500
1.5000
1.7500
2.0000
0.515
0.642
0.768
0.895
1.022
1.277
1.531
1.785
2.039
0.482
0.605
0.729
0.852
0.976
1.223
1.470
1.716
1.964
Notes:
1) Adopted from ASME B18.2.1
and ASME B18.2.6.
2) For bolt diameters not indicated,
refer to ASME B18.2.1 and B18.2.6.
3) The body or shank of a bolt is
the smooth portion between the
head and the threads.
4.
REDUCED DIAMETER BODY STYLE BOLTS: Dimensional requirements for
rolled-thread bolts with reduced diameter body style are given in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Diameters of Reduced Diameter Body Style Bolts 1, 2
Body or Shank 3
Diameter (inches)
Nominal
Threads per
Inch
Size (inches)
(TPI) 4
Max.
Min.
13
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4-1/2
0.482
0.605
0.729
0.852
0.976
1.223
1.470
1.716
1.964
0.444
0.559
0.677
0.795
0.910
1.148
1.381
1.608
1.843
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-3/4
2
0.5000
0.6250
0.7500
0.8750
1.0000
1.2500
1.5000
1.7500
2.0000
Notes:
1) Body diameters are based on
ASME B18.2.1, Table 2, Notes
7 & 13, and ASTM B1.1, UNRC
or 8 UNR series, Class 2A threads.
2) For bolt diameters not indicated,
refer to ASME B18.2.1, B18.2.6
and ASTM B1.1.
3) The body or shank of a bolt is the
smooth portion between the head
and the threads.
4) TPI means threads per inch (ASTM
B1.1, UNRC or 8 UNR series,
Class 2A threads).
IR 22-3
OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS

AND JOIST GIRDERS
Issued 07-15-08
References: 2007 CBC Sections 2206A, and 1704A.3

DSA IR 17-2, 17-3
Steel Joist Institute Specifications SJI K-1.1, SJI LH/DLH-1.1 and SJI JG-1.1
nd
Steel Joist Institute 42 Edition Catalog
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies the process and criteria under
which the Division of the State Architect will evaluate, accept for use and inspect the use of
open web steel joists (OWSJ) on projects under DSA jurisdiction.
Note: Frequently used terms are defined in the glossary, Section 9, of this IR.
1.
Qualified Manufacturers: The OWSJ manufacturer must be a current member in

good standing with the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) and currently certified as an approved
fabricator by one of the following organizations:
International Accreditation Service, Inc.

City of Los Angeles
2.
Approval Process: The approval of OWSJ for use on a specific project is a fourphase process.
There are specific requirements and responsibilities for the joist
manufacturers, and architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge (project
design professional) in each phase. The four phases and the key players involved are as
follows:
Review and Approval
Professional, and DSA
of
Construction
Documents:
Project
Design
Review and Approval of Joist Documents: Project Design Professional,

Manufacturer, and DSA
Manufacturing of Joists: Manufacturer and Fabrication Special Inspector
Field Installation: Project Inspector and Field Welding Special Inspector
Review and Approval of Construction Documents. This phase occurs

before a project construction contract is awarded to a qualified joist manufacturer. The
steps and requirements for this phase are as follows:
3.
DSA (SS) IR 22-3

(iss 07/15/08)
Open Web Steel Joists

and Girder Joists
Page 1 of 6
DSA (SS) IR 22-3

(iss 07/15/08)
3.1

and Joist Girders
Page 2 of 6
Project design professional prepares construction documents (plans and

specifications) for the project. In addition to the requirements in CBC Section
2206A.2, the portion of the construction documents pertaining to OWSJ shall also
include the following:
Structural framing plan including layout of OWSJ and all supporting elements
Loading diagrams for all OWSJ in accordance with CBC Section 2206A.2.1 and
any deflection requirement.
Specify the SJI joist designation for each joist. The designation shall comply
with CBC Section 2206A.2.
Project specifications shall require that OWSJ manufacturer(s) comply with

Section 1 of this IR. The project design professional should closely coordinate
OWSJ design (including all connections, non-standard products, and details)
with a qualified OWSJ manufacturer prior to the submittal of contract
documents for DSA review.
Project specifications and Statement of Special Inspections (CBC Sections

1704A.1.1 and 1705A) shall include testing and inspection requirements for
OWSJ per Section 7 of this IR.
The following note shall be shown on the plans:

Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing units and elements shall be coordinated
with manufacturers joist document prior to field installation. Field modification
of OWSJ is prohibited without the prior approval of DSA.
As an option, joist documents as described in Section 4 below may be included

with the construction documents. Otherwise, they are submitted as deferred
approval per Section 4 below and Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317(g).
3.2
Project design professional submits application and construction documents to DSA

for review.
3.3
After the DSA plan review process is completed, the approved construction
documents will bear the DSA identification stamp with the initials of the plan
reviewer.
4.
Review and Approval of Joist documents. This phase occurs after the
project has been bid and the contract for the fabrication of the OWSJ has been awarded to a
qualified manufacturer as defined in Section 1 of this IR. The steps and requirements for
this phase are as follows:
4.1
4.1.1
Submittal Preparation: Manufacturer prepares joist documents for DSA approval,

in accordance to the requirements of DSA approved project construction documents
and working in a fully coordinated effort with the project design professional.
If the requirements in the approved construction documents (see Section 3
above) were altered by the manufacturer during the preparation of the joist
document, the project design professional must prepare and submit Field Change
Documents to DSA for review in accordance with IR A-6. These changes may
include joist designation, joist depths, layout, framing plans, loads, joist
anchorage, etc.
DSA (SS) IR 22-3

(iss 07/15/08)
4.2

and Joist Girders
Page 3 of 6
Submittal Documents: The manufacturers joist documents shall include:
Placement drawings per CBC Section 2206A.4
Calculations per CBC Section 2206A.3, signed and stamped by the

manufacturers California registered professional engineer per CBC Section
2206A.4.
Joist profiles with member sizes and connection details, signed and stamped by
the manufacturers California registered professional engineer per CBC Section
2206.A.4, Design Approval.
This information may be included with the
calculation package.
When alternate design substitutions (ADS) are anticipated during the

manufacturing process, the manufacturer may specify alternate member
thickness or weld sizes that may be substituted during manufacturing.
If the joist documents with ADS are approved by DSA, the manufacturer will
not be subject to the provisions of Section 8 of this IR if ADS were used during
the manufacturing.
4.3
4.4
Design Professional Review of Submittal Documents: The manufacturer

submits the joist documents to the project design professional for review and
approval. This step may take multiple exchanges between the project design
professional and the OWSJ manufacturer to finalize the joist documents for submittal
to DSA. The project design professional and the OWSJ manufacturer, working
together, shall coordinate the joist documents with the following:
Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) plans that include locations and
sizes of roof top or floor units, ducts, pipes, conduits, etc.
Roof pitch or slopes
Top elevations of support elements to insure proper seating of OWSJ, i.e. top of
steel girders, concrete or CMU pilasters or walls,
Submittal to DSA: When the project design professional approves the joist
documents, he/she shall provide a signed and stamped statement of general
conformance and submit it to DSA for approval in accordance with Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-317(g). For additional information on the Statement of General
Conformance, see DSA IR A-18.
The project design professional shall submit two sets of joist documents to DSA.
One set will be used for marking up DSA review comments if there are any. The
other set will be used for DSA stamping.
4.5
DSA Review This step may involve a back-check review if the documents were not
approved. The project design professional shall coordinate with the manufacturer to
resolve DSA plan check comments (as noted on the mark-up set of joist documents)
and schedule a back-check appointment with DSA. Bring two sets of revised joist
documents to the back-check appointment.
DSA review of the calculations typically includes verification of input and output.
Each of the following conditions must be met:
The manufacturer is licensed by SJI to manufacture the joist series (which

includes SJI certification of joist design software).
DSA (SS) IR 22-3

(iss 07/15/08)

and Joist Girders
Page 4 of 6
The joist designation K, LH, DLH, or Joist Girder (JG) listed in the SJI 42nd
Edition Catalog containing the Standard Specifications and the design loads are
not greater than those listed in the load tables of the SJI 42nd Edition Catalog.
Effects of eccentricity on LH/DLH series joists and joist girders is permitted to

be neglected if the eccentricity is within the allowable tolerance specified in
Section 103.4(d) and 1003.4(d) respectively of the SJI Standard Specifications.
4.6
DSA Approval: After DSA reviews the submitted joist documents and determines
that they are in conformance, DSA stamps the joist documents as approved. The
stamped set of joist plans will be scanned into the DSA database and then returned
to the project design professional who shall forward a copy to the manufacturer and
the fabrication special inspector. Additional copies of DSA stamped joist documents
may be made available to the project design professional by arrangement with the
DSA regional office.
5.
Manufacturing of Joists: The manufacturing of OWSJ occurs in this phase.
5.1
Manufacturer prepares shop orders or shop drawings from DSA approved

construction documents and joist documents. Other than the approved alternate
design substitutions described in Section 4.2 above, changes to the approved joist
documents must be reviewed and approved prior to manufacturing in accordance
with Section 8 of this IR.
5.2
Manufacturer notifies the project design professional, project inspector, and

fabrication special inspector of the fabrication schedule. Manufacturing may not start
without the presence of fabrication special inspector.
5.3
A fabrication special inspector must be approved by DSA for each project prior to
manufacturing. The fabrication special inspector provides inspection during OWSJ
manufacturing in accordance with Section 7 of this IR.
5.4
At the end of fabrication, the manufacturer shall submit a certificate of compliance

per CBC Section 2206A.5 to DSA, the owner, and the project design professional.
6.
Field Installation: During this phase, the OWSJ arrive at the construction site
and are ready to be installed. The steps and requirements for this phase are as follows:
6.1
Working from the DSA approved construction documents and DSA approved joist
documents (and joist revision documents as may be needed per Section 8 of this IR),
the project inspector shall verify joist size, fabrication special inspectors ID tag or
mark, and placement in the field.
6.2
Working from the DSA approved documents listed above the field welding special
inspector provides continuous inspection for field welding of attachments of the
OWSJ.
7.
Testing and Inspection: Testing and inspection shall comply with CBC Section
1704A.3 and shall be performed in accordance with Sections 4-333(c) and 4-335, Title 24,
Part 1, and DSA IR 17-3.
DSA (SS) IR 22-3

(iss 07/15/08)

and Joist Girders
Page 5 of 6
7.1
Unidentified Steel. All steel shall be identified by the fabrication special inspector
per 2007 CBC Section 1704A.3.2.2. Unidentified steel shall be tested per 2007 CBC
Section 2212A.1.
7.2
Shop Fabrication. Inspection of shop fabrication shall comply with 2007 CBC
Section 1704A.3.2.2.
7.2.1
7.3
Marking: The special inspector shall place a distinguishing mark, and/or tag with
this distinguishing mark, on each inspected joist or joist girder. This mark or tag
shall remain on the joist or joist girder throughout the job site receiving and
erection process. At a minimum the distinguishing mark shall include the
special inspectors initials and date.
Welding: Inspection of shop and field welding shall comply with 2007 CBC Section
1704A.3.2.2 and DSA IRs 17-2 and 17-3. Additional requirements for welding
inspections are listed below:
7.3.1
The cost of inspection shall be paid by the owner (which is usually the school
district.)
7.3.2
Fabrication special inspectors and field welding special inspectors shall hold
current certification as an AWS CWI, in accordance with AWS QC1.
7.3.3
Welding procedure specification shall be pre-qualified or qualified by test per AWS

D1.1/D1.1 M 2006 Sections 3 and 4 respectively and SJI Specifications.
8.
Revisions During Manufacturing: This section is not applicable to the
approved alternate design substitutions described in Section 4.2 above. If revisions to the
approved joist document are necessary, the manufacturer shall obtain DSA approval of the
revisions prior to the manufacturing of the affected joists. The steps and requirements for
making revisions are as follows:
8.1
Manufacturer notifies the fabrication special inspector of changes being proposed.
8.2
Manufacturer submits the joist revision documents to the project design professional
for approval. The joist revision documents shall include all the items listed in Section
4.1 of this IR for the affected joists.
8.3
When the project design professional approves joist revision documents, he/she shall
provide a signed and stamped statement of general conformance on these
documents and submit to DSA for approval.
8.4
DSA reviews the joist revision documents and the statement of general conformance.
DSA approves and stamps the joist revision documents.
8.5
The manufacturer starts the manufacturing of the joists with the approved joist
revision documents following the procedures in Section 5 of this IR.
9.
Glossary:
defined below:
For clarity and reference, some frequently used terms in this IR are
DSA (SS) IR 22-3

(iss 07/15/08)
9.1

and Joist Girders
Page 6 of 6
Alternate Design Substitutions (ADS)

DSA approved alternate member(s) or components that may be substituted during
manufacturing. The ADS are shown in the joist documents, and they are equal or
greater in load carrying capacity than the components(s) being substituted, and they
can be readily verified by the fabrication special inspector.
9.2
Construction Documents
Project documents pertaining to the construction of the project and submitted to DSA
for review prior to construction. These documents may include drawings and specifications for site, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical and energy features.
9.3
Fabrication Special Inspector

An AWS certified welding inspector who provides continuous inspection during the
manufacturing of OWSJ. He/she is employed by the school district and approved by
DSA for the project, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(c)
9.4
Field Welding Special Inspector

A welding inspector who provides continuous inspection of field welding. He/she is
employed by the school district, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(c), and approved by
DSA for the project.
9.5
Joist Documents (CBC 2206A.4 - Design Approval)

The joist placement drawings, calculations, joist profiles with member sizes and
connection details prepared by the manufacturer. The joist documents usually are
submitted to DSA for deferred approval, CBC Sections 2206A.3 and 2206A.4
9.6
Joist Manufacturer
An OWSJ manufacturer who manufactures the members and components of OWSJ
and uses those members and components to fabricate on a continuing basis joists of
the K-, LH-, DLH-Series, and/or Joist Girders conforming to the Steel Joist Institutes
Standard Specifications and Load Tables of latest adoption.
9.7
Joist Revision Documents

The revised joist documents for joists that are affected by changes to the DSA
approved joist documents during fabrication.
9.8
Project Design Professional

The architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge of a project, Title
24, Part 1, Section 4-316(a)
9.9
Project Inspector
A DSA certified inspector who is in general responsible charge of inspection for the
project. He/she is employed by the school district and approved by DSA for the
project, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(b)
9.10
Shop Order/Drawings
Fabrication plans and details develop by manufacturer to facilitate the fabrication of
OWSJ.
IR 23-1
PRE-FABRICATED WOOD
CONSTRUCTION CONNECTORS
References:
2001 Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code (CBC),
Sections 2304A.3, 2304A.4.2, 2316A.2, and 2318A.4
2007 CBC, Sections 2304.9.3, 2306, 2307, 1715A.1
DSA Interpretation of Regulations (IR) A-5
ICC ES AC-13
Revised 11-01-07
Revised (in its entirety) 08-18-04
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies acceptable load capacities, design
and installation requirements for pre-fabricated wood construction connectors used on
projects under Division of the State Architect (DSA) jurisdiction, which includes State of
California public elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges, and
state-owned or state-leased essential services buildings.
Scope: Pre-fabricated metal connectors are used to attach wood structural members to
other wood structural members, or to structural steel, masonry, or concrete members
(including foundations).
The application of Sections 1 through 6 of this IR is permitted for pre-fabricated concrete
anchorage devices, including cast-in-place bolts and post-installed expansion or epoxy
anchors used in conjunction with wood construction connectors. Post-installed anchor design
and testing must also comply with 2001 California Building Code (CBC), Section 1923A
(Section 1912A.1 in the 2007 CBC) and DSA IR 19-1.
Requirements for metal plate connectors for wood trusses are addressed in 2001 CBC
Section 2318A.7 (Section 2303.4.2 in the 2007 CBC) and DSA IR 23-4. Manufactured
lateral-load resisting systems as defined in 2001 CBC, Table 16A-N (for projects submitted
under the 2007 CBC, refer to ASCE-7, Table 12.2.-1) (e.g. shear walls, moment frames) are
not included within the scope of this IR. Specific DSA approval must be granted for these
systems in accordance with DSA Product Acceptance Program requirements.
1. LISTING REQUIREMENTS: Pre-fabricated connectors must be listed in a current and
valid evaluation report issued by an evaluation agency recognized by DSA, which include the
following:
International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES)
City of Los Angeles Research Report (RR)
DSA Product Acceptance Report (for projects submitted under the 2001 CBC only)
1.1
Effective January 1, 2004, Product Acceptance (PA) Reports will not be issued or
renewed by DSA for pre-fabricated wood construction connectors. Any Product Acceptance
reports previously issued by DSA for pre-fabricated wood connectors will expire upon
expiration of the 2001 edition CBC.
2. ACCEPTABLE LOAD CAPACITIES: In accordance with IR A-5, DSA allows 100% of
listed gravity load capacities and 80% of listed wind and seismic load capacities for
manufactured wood construction connectors. One hundred percent (100%) of the listed
wind and seismic load capacities will be allowed if listed load capacities are based upon
DSA IR 23-1 (rev 11-01-07)
Pre-Fabricated Wood
Construction Connectors
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR 23-1 (rev 11-01-07)

Pre-Fabricated Wood
Construction Connectors
Page 2 of 2
DSA-approved cyclic testing. Listed load capacities based on load duration factors allowed
by 2001 CBC Section 2316A may be used. For projects submitted under the 2007 CBC,
listed load capacities based on values listed in NDS-05, Section 2.3, Adjustment of
Reference Design Values, may be used.
3. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
3.1
Load duration factors, or adjustment of reference design value, (e.g. 33% increase
for short-term loading) shall be determined in accordance with Amendment 6 in
2001 CBC, Section 2316A.2, (for 2007 CBC projects, NDS-05, Section 2.3) and the
evaluation report.
3.2
Wood member properties such as minimum specific gravity and maximum moisture
content, must comply with applicable provisions of the CBC and also all requirements
of the connector manufacturer and the evaluation report.
4.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
4.1
All connectors, including holdowns shall be installed in accordance with the applicable
evaluation report and/or manufacturer's published information. Holdown connectors
specified to be installed with clearance between the connector and the sill plate (e.g.
one inch stand-off) may result in increased deflection of the holdown connection,
which shall be considered in the design.
4.2
Fasteners must comply with all requirements (e.g. nail gauge and length, corrosionresistant coatings) of the manufacturer and of the evaluation report. Fastener
protective coatings or corrosion-resistant materials shall be compatible with
preservative treatment chemicals in the wood, when in contact with them, and
comply with manufacturers recommendations.
4.3
Connectors shall not be field bent, except as specifically permitted by the evaluation
report and/or the manufacturer's instructions.
4.4
Connection details shall be designed to minimize the potential for splitting of wood
members. In the event of splitting, a DSA-approved repair procedure will be
required.
5. CONNECTOR FABRICATION: Connector fabrication must meet the quality control

requirements of ICC ES AC-13, Acceptance Criteria for Joist Hangers and Similar
Devices, Section 6. Connectors must meet the following requirements:
5.1
Connector steel shall be corrosion-resistant material (e.g. stainless steel) or shall

have a protective coating (e.g. G90 minimum, G185, or post-fabrication hot-dipped
galvanized coating). Paint may be used as a protective coating in lieu of
galvanization when the connector is not exposed to weather or to corrosive
elements, such as pressure treated wood. Connectors shall show no fracturing in
either the protective coating or the base metal. Connector protective coatings or
corrosion-resistant materials shall be compatible with preservative treatment
chemicals in the wood, when in contact with them, and comply with manufacturers
recommendations.
5.2
Each pre-fabricated connector must bear a stamp or adhered label showing the name
of the manufacturer, model number, and evaluation report number.
5.3
Minimum thickness of steel shall comply with Section 5.0 of ICC ES AC-13.
6.
Testing Requirements: For projects submitted under the 2007 CBC, testing shall
comply with 2007 CBC Section 1715A.1 and ICC ES AC 13.
WOOD DIAPHRAGMS
IR 23-2
References:
2001 California Building Code, Sections 2315A
Revised 11-01-07
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The provisions of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) provide additional
requirements related to the design and construction of wood diaphragms for projects
submitted to DSA under the 2001 CBC.
1.
PARTIAL BLOCKING OF HORIZONTAL DIAPHRAGMS: Blocking edges of

plywood only in the higher stressed areas of a roof diaphragm is allowed under the following
conditions:
1.
The blocking portion at each end is extended to 1/10 of the diaphragm length
(span) past where it is not required, or at least to one-half the diaphragm depth.
2.
The maximum span/depth ratio is the same as required for an unblocked

diaphragm.
DSA (SS) IR 23-2

(rev. 11-01-07)
Wood Diaphragms
Page 1 of 1
CONCRETE CURBS IN
WOOD FRAMED BUILDINGS
IR 23-3

2007 California Building Code, Section 2304.11.2.4.1
Revised 10-03-07
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide alternatives
to a six-inch high concrete curb at the exterior of buildings or at shower and toilet room
partitions.
1.
Curb At Exterior Walls: The curb may be omitted if the exterior ground surface
is paved for 18 and sloped away from the building, and the roof overhang length is equal
to, or greater than, the height of the exterior wall.
2.
Shower and Toilet Room Curbs: In lieu of the six-inch high curbs required at
shower rooms, or toilet rooms with more than two fixtures, the following stud wall and
partition protection, extending a minimum of six-inches up from the finish floor level, may
be submitted for approval:
1. Continuation of hot-mopped floor membrane.
2. Continuation of epoxy resin floor surfacing.
3. Copper Floor pan.
4. Other equivalent products which will prevent water seepage under the wall or
partition.
The requirements for exterior wall curbs remains as per the referenced requirements.
EXCEPTION: For toilet rooms of relocatable buildings, continuous vinyl flooring, with fully
sealed joints, is acceptable.
DSA (SS) IR 23-3

(rev 10-03-07)
Concrete Curbs in
Wood Frame Buildings
Page 1 of 1
LIGHT METAL PLATE

CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
IR 23-4
References: 2001 California Building Code (CBC), Section 2318A.7

Revised 11-01-07
Issued 09-01-99
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide detailed

design and construction requirements for projects submitted to DSA under the 2001 CBC.
1. General: Design, fabrication and inspection of trusses are to comply with 2001
California Building Code (CBC), Section 2318A.7.
Plate material is to be ASTM A653, Grade SQ (Fy=33 ksi) or better.

Plates are to be installed in pairs, one plate each face of truss, by means of a press. In
addition, one 8d short ring-shank nail is to be applied to each member, at each plate. Each
plate shall be identified by grade, type, gage and manufacturer's name.
Wood under plates must be free of knots, knot holes and greatly distorted grains.
Maximum truss span is 35'-0", unless the approval of the Division of the State Architect
(DSA) is obtained for longer spans prior to submittal of project plans and specifications for
approval.
2. Drawings: The following items must be shown on truss drawings:

1. Steel plate grade, type, gage and dimensions.
2. Wood species and grades.
3. Fully dimensioned truss elevations showing geometry, member sizes and centerline,
intersections, plate sizes and readily interpretable plate locations, truss member end
cuts and location and width of supports.
4. Truss design loads.
5. Any other pertinent information.
3. Analysis of Trusses: Axial forces in truss members are determined by assuming

member ends to be pinned at joints.
The uniformly distributed loads on top and bottom chord are to be concentrated at panel
points, but their effects are to be taken into consideration in top and bottom chord design.
4. Analysis of Metal Plate Connectors: The allowable lateral load per tooth or per
square inch of plate is to be determined from Section 2318A.7.2.
In lieu of this requirement, the allowable load per tooth or per square inch may be assumed
to be equal to 80% of the value recommended by ICBO research report for "loads at 46
degrees to 90 degrees with respect to the length of the plate."
DSA (SS) 23-4
(rev 11-01-07)
Light Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses
Page 1 of 6
DSA (SS) IR 23-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Light Metal Plate

Page 2 of 6
EXCEPTION: 80% of the "0 degrees to 45 degrees" value may be used when
orientation of the plates is shown on the drawings and calculations show that
resultant loads are at 0 to 45 degrees with respect to the length of the plate.
No increase for load duration or metal side plates is permitted. Effective area of plate
is determined as per Section 2318A.7.1.
Member ends at all joints are to be shaped for full bearing, but because of possible
shrinkage, all forces, including compression, are assumed to be transferred through steel
plates (end bearing of compression members is neglected).
Forces in members are assumed to act along member center lines.
The plates are assumed to be rigid.
Effect of uniformly distributed loads on top and bottom chords may be neglected in plate
analysis.
Evaluation of stresses in plate prongs in all joints shall consider both direct load, and
moment due to eccentric loading of the plate. (For illustration see Figure 1 on page 6 of this
IR).
Stresses in steel at critical net sections of the plate are to be checked.
5. Analysis by Computer Program: If the analysis of trusses and/or metal plate

connectors is done by a computer program, the documentation as well as complete
explanation of input, output, and of the assumptions used in the program is to be submitted
along with the printout. A hand calculation shall be provided which shows in detail the
procedure used by the program, starting with the given input and leading directly to the
given output.
6. Load Testing: In lieu of the truss design and connection analysis, the trusses may be
load tested as follows:
1. One load test is to be made for every 50 trusses (or fractional part thereof) of every
type of truss. The method of making load tests is subject to the approval of DSA.
Load tests are to be made either by application of a symmetrically distributed load
upon two identical trusses braced as required by the approved plans, or by use of
concentrated loads supplied by means of calibrated testing apparatus upon the two
trusses braced or laterally supported as required by the approved plans. The loads
are to be arranged so that they do not cause arching, composite action or load
redistribution. The test trusses are to be supported as called for on the approved
building plans. Truss test results are to be submitted to, and accepted by, DSA
before trusses are erected.
2. Each tested truss should be clearly and permanently marked for identification.
3. At the option of the manufacturer, a preload not exceeding 50% of the design total
load (D.L. & L.L), may be applied and removed before testing begins.
4. All loads are to be applied simultaneously to both trusses.
5. Deflections are to be measured at bottom edge of bottom chord at mid span and at
1/4 points.
6. All tests are to be performed by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to
DSA. A copy of each test result is to be submitted to DSA.
DSA (SS) IR 23-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Light Metal Plate

Page 3 of 6
7. Load Testing procedure should be as follows:
1. 0 record zero load deflection reading

2. D apply design DEAD LOAD, measure deflection
3. T apply design LIVE LOAD, measure deflection
4. 1 apply additional design LIVE LOAD, measure deflection
5. 2 leave loads on for minimum of 24 hours, measure deflection
6. 3 remove all loads, measure deflection
8. Deflection criteria:
must be < L/240
T - D must be < L/360

3
must be < L/1200
9. Creep criteria:
2 - 1 must be < 0.4 1

10. Should a truss exhibit signs of distress such as cracking, lateral buckling, noticeable
deformation of connector plates, etc. or fail to meet the deflection criteria it is to be
noted on the test report. The architect or structural engineer should submit a change
order to correct all deficiencies in the truss design, or a letter stating that, in his
opinion, the trusses are adequate and an explanation of his determination.
NOTE: Load testing of trusses does not relieve the designer of the
responsibility for checking bearing perpendicular to grain at truss supports
nor L/d requirements in truss members.
7. Truss Lumber Grading Provisions for MSR F'b = 2400 psi:

1. The lumber grading must equal or exceed the standards as set forth for the grade
and species in the CBC.
2. Machine Stress Rated lumber must be graded by an American Lumber Standard's
Committee (ALSC) approved machine under the certification and quality control
supervision of a lumber inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
3. 2'-0" long portions at each end of each MSR rated piece of lumber shall be visually
graded and must be rated DENSE SELECT STRUCTURAL D.F.L.
4. All pieces shall have a stress rating machine symbol, indicating the E value, and a
supervisory agency stamp to verify the visual grade.
5. Knots.
A. Holes and Knots are Interchangeable.
B. Measurement of Knots.
a) The size of a knot is determined by measuring on the face of the piece in a
line across the width of the piece perpendicular to its length.
b) Seriously distorted grain associated with knots shall be included in determining
knot size.
DSA (SS) IR 23-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Light Metal Plate

Page 4 of 6
C. Wide Face Knots.

a) A wide face knot is defined as a knot having an average of 1/4" or more of
wood between the knot and the edge of the piece. When a knot is half or less
the size of the maximum allowable edge knot, then a wide face knot is
defined as a knot having an average of 1/8" or more of wood between the
knot and the edge of the piece.
b) The size of a wide face knot is the largest single measurement made on either
wide face of the piece.
D. Edge Knots.
a) An edge knot is defined as a knot having less than an average of 1/4" of wood
between the knot and the edge of the piece. When a knot is half or less the
size of the maximum allowable edge knot then an edge knot is defined as
having less than an average of 1/8" of wood between the knot and the edge
of the piece.
b) Knots appearing wholly or in part on the narrow faces of the piece.
c) The size of an edge knot is the average of the two measurements made on the
wide faces of the piece. Knots appearing on the narrow faces are limited to
the same displacement as knots specified at edges of wide faces.
E. Distorted grain or burls are permitted, if judged to have not more detrimental
effect than knots allowed.
8. Compression-wood: Compression-wood is prohibited in all grades if present in

readily identifiable and damaging form, based on an ordinary visual inspection.
9. Splits: Splits at ends are limited in length to 1 times the width of the piece.
10. Warp: Warp is limited to 1/2 medium
11. Combinations: Skips, wane or other combinations of characteristics in the same
cross section of the piece are permitted, if the combination is judged to be no more than
equivalent in effect to the maximum size knot permitted.
12. Computation of Shear Stress in Light Metal Plates: The forces in the top
chord, vertical, and diagonal member are H, V, and R, respectively. All forces are assumed
to act at their member neutral axes.
The stresses in the plates are calculated on the basis of an equivalent shear stress per
square inch of plate. The active areas of plate are those portions of the plate at a minimum
of inch away from the edge of plate, or end of a member (See Figure 1 on page 6).
12.1 Analysis Procedure: The procedure given below will use the horizontal force in the
top chord active area as an example. The procedure will be the same for the other active
areas.
1. Determine stress component at point 1 due to direct translation forces:
f hd1 =
H
2 Ah
This stress will be a vector parallel with the force H
2. Determine stress component at point 1 due to rotational forces:
DSA (SS) IR 23-4

(rev 11-01-07)
Light Metal Plate

Page 5 of 6
Mh = eh x H, The moment of the member force about the centroid of the considered
active area, OR:
Mh = (eh x H) + (ev x V) + (er x R): The sum of the moments of all the member forces
about the centroid of the considered active area
Use the maximum of these moments for analysis
f hr1 =
Mhxr1
2 Jh This stress will be a vector perpendicular to the position vector r1
3. Compute the maximum magnitude and the angle of the resultant stress:
f h1 = f hd1
+ f hr1
SYMBOLS: (See Figure 1 on page 6)

H = Horizontal axial force to top chord.
V = Vertical axial force in vertical web member.
R = Axial force in diagonal web member resolving H and V.
Ah = Area of the active plate area over top chord
Av = Area of the active plate area over the vertical web member
Ar = Area of the active plate area over the diagonal web member.
eh= Eccentricity between the centroid of the considered active area and the axial force
in the top chord neutral axis.
ev = Eccentricity between the centroid of the considered active area and the axial force
in the vertical web member.
er = Eccentricity between the centroid of the considered active area and the axial force
in the diagonal web member.
1 = The furthest point from the active area centroid.
r1 = The distance from point 1 to the active area centroid.
Mh = The design moment about the centroid of the considered active area.
Jh = The Polar Moment of Inertia of the considered active area about its centroid
IR 23-4 - Page 6 of 6
Figure 1
ev
H
1
Ah
1/2" CLR
Typical
r1
Ar
er
Av
Represents centroid of an individual active area

Shaded area represents the active area of the plate over a member
eh
BOLTS USED IN
WOOD CONSTRUCTION
IR 23-5
References:
2001 California Building Code, Section 2318A.2
2007 California Building Code, Sections 2306, 2307 and NDS-05, Chapter 11
Revised 10-15-07
Issued 10-01-2002 as CR 23-1
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify dimensional

requirements for bolts used in wood frame construction.
1. General: Cut-thread or rolled-thread bolts with full diameter bodies meeting the
requirements of ASME B18.2.1 or ASME B18.2.6 are permitted for use on projects approved
by DSA. See Table 1 below for dimensional requirements of cut-thread or rolled-thread
bolts with full diameter bodies. Rolled-thread bolts with reduced diameter bodies per ASME
B18.2.1 are not permitted.
2. Background: Dimensional requirements for bolts are given in ASME B18.2.1, Square
and Hex Bolts and Screws, and ASME B18.2.6, Fasteners for Use in Structural
Applications. Bolt threads are formed either by cutting or rolling.
2.1
Cut-Thread Bolts. The original blank must be full size, and equal to the major
thread (outside) diameter. Threads are formed by cutting and removing metal from
the blank. A bolt blank is a headed rod or bar intended for a subsequent threading
operation.
2.2
Full Diameter Body Rolled-Thread Bolts. The blank diameter is full size and the
threaded length portion is reduced to the thread pitch diameter during extrusion.
Threads are formed by rotating dies that displace the metal.
2.3
Reduced Diameter Body Rolled-Thread Bolts. Similar to full diameter body

rolled-thread bolts, except that the blank diameter is reduced along the entire length
of the bolt.
2.4
Commercially, the terms cut-thread and rolled-thread may not indicate the
method of forming threads. The term cut-thread bolt may refer to either a cutthread bolt or a full diameter body rolled-thread bolt. The term rolled-thread bolt
may refer to a reduced diameter body rolled- thread bolt.
3. Application: Cut-thread or rolled-thread bolts with full diameter bodies are permitted.
For each nominal bolt size utilized on a project, the minimum shank or body diameter shall
be specified and ASME B18.2.1 or ASME B18.2.6 shall be referenced on the drawings or
specifications.
DSA (SS) IR 23-5

(rev 10-15-07)
Bolts Used in
Wood Construction
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR 23-5

(rev 10-15-07)
Bolts Used in
Wood Construction
Page 2 of 2
Table 1 Diameter of Full Diameter Body Bolts

Nominal
Size (inches)
1/2
0.5000
5/8
0.6250
3/4
0.7500
7/8
0.8750
1
1.0000
Body or Shank
Diameter (inches)
Max.
Min.
0.515
0.482
0.642
0.605
0.768
0.729
0.895
0.852
1.022
0.976
Notes:
1) Adopted from ASME B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.6.
2) For bolt diameters not indicated, refer to ASME B18.2.1 and B18.2.6.
3) The body or shank of a bolt is the smooth portion between the head and the threads.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS - MARKING FOR

PLYWOOD AND ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB)
References:
2001California Building Code, Sections 2302A.1, 2304A.1,
2312A.1, 2312A.2, 2315A.3.3, and 2315A.5. UBC Standard 23-2
2007 California Building Code, Sections 2302.1, 2303.1.4, 2304.6, and 2304.7.
Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-95, and PS 2-92
IR 23-6
Revised 08-25-09
Revised 11-01-07
Revised 12-15-04
Issued 11-05-2004 as CR 23-2
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) provides clarification on the panel marking
requirements for plywood and oriented strand board (OSB) panels used on DSA projects,
which includes State of California public elementary and secondary schools (Grades K-12),
community colleges, and state-owned or state-leased essential services buildings.
Policy: Plywood and OSB panels meeting the requirements of this IR shall be considered
to have met the marking requirements of the 2007 CBC, Section 2303.1.4.
Note: For projects submitted under the provisions of 2001 CBC, see AC 23-2 for additional
requirements on OSB.
1. MATERIALS: Certification and panel marking shall comply with Department of

Commerce Voluntary Product Standard (PS) 1-95, Section 7 for plywood, or PS 2-92,
Section 7 for OSB. Each panel shall bear markings identifying the qualified testing and
inspection agencies per Section 2 below, grade, nominal thickness, span rating, exposure
durability classification and the standard to which it is certified.
Note: Current versions of PS 1 and PS 2 are acceptable.
2. QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY: Appendix A, on page 2, is a

list (furnished by International Accreditation Service, Inc.) of qualified testing and inspection
agencies. Testing and inspection agencies may be placed on this list if they meet all of the
following conditions:
2.1
Conform to PS 1-95, Section 7.2 (plywood), or PS 2-92, Section 7.1.1 (OSB).
2.2
Accredited by International Accreditation Service, Inc. in accordance with ISO/IEC

17020 and 17025 standards, and
2.3
The scope of accreditation shall include the inspection of plywood panels for
compliance with PS 1 (plywood) or PS 2 (OSB) requirements.
Next Page
Appendix A: List of Qualified Testing and Inspection Agencies
DSA IR 23-6
(rev 08-25-09)
Wood Structural Panels Markings

for Plywood and Oriented Strand Board (OSB)
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR 23-6
(rev 08-25-09)
Wood Structural Panels - Markings

for Plywood and Oriented Strand Board (OSB)
Page 2 of 2

Accredited by International Accreditation Service (IAS) to Certify and Mark/Stamp Plywood Panels
under Product Standard PS 1-95 or PS 2-92 (Listed alphabetically by Agency)
Inspection Agency
IAS Accreditation
Contact Information
Number
Scope1
APA The Engineered Wood Assoc.

7011 South 19th Street
Tacoma, WA 98466
AA-649
Plywood
Intertek Testing Services NA Ltd.

1500 Brigantine Drive
Coquitlam, British Columbia
V3K 7C1 Canada
AA-688
Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.

16015 Shady Falls Road
Elmendorf, TX 78112
AA-657
Plywood
Contact: Mike Luna

Telephone: 210-635-8100
Fax: 210-635-8101
e-mail:
mike.luna@intertek.com
NAHB Research Center

400 Prince Georges Blvd.
Upper Marlboro, MD 20774
AA-663
OSB
Contact: Mr. Robert L. Hill

Telephone: 301-430-6244
e-mail: rhill@nahbrc.org
Professional Services Industries, Inc.

Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory
2710 W 5th Avenue
Eugene, OR 97402
AA-660
Plywood
Contact: Mr. Randy Webb

Telephone: 541-484-9212
e-mail:
randy.webb@psiusa.com
TECO
2902 Terra Court
Sun Prairie, WI 53590
AA-654
VTT Technical Research Centre of

Finland
P.O. Box 1000
FIN-02044 VTT
Finland
AA-607
OSB
Plywood
OSB
OSB
Plywood
OSB
Plywood
Contact: Mr. Borjen Yeh

Telephone: 253-565-6600
e-mail:
borjen.yeh@apawood.org
Contact: Greg Sabo
Telephone: 604-520-3321
Fax: 604-524-9189
e-mail:
greg.sabo@intertek.com
Contact: Mr. Steven Verhey

Telephone: 608-837-2790
e-mail:
steve.verhey@tecotested.com
Contact: Liisa Rautiainen
Telephone: +358-20 722 4920
Fax: +358-20 722 7003
e-mail: Liisa.Rautiainen@vtt.fi
Plywood - PS 1-95 (or current version); OSB - PS 2-92 (or current version).
MINIMUM FASTENER PENETRATION

IN FRAMING-WOOD DIAPHRAGMS
IR 23-7
References:
Revised 11-01-07
2001 California Building Code (CBC), Section 2315A, Tables 23A-II-H & 23A-II-I-1.
Issued 03-14-2005 as CR 23-3
2003 International Building Code (IBC), Section 2305, Tables 2306.3.1 & 2306.4.1.
American Forest & Paper Association 2001 Edition National Design Specification (NDS),
Supplement - Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic.
American Plywood Association (APA) Report T98-22; APA Form No. TT-045.
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies DSA acceptance of current

standards, including the 2003 edition International Building Code (IBC) and 2001 edition
National Design Specification (NDS), pertaining to minimum nail penetration requirements
for wood structural panel (plywood or OSB) diaphragm construction for projects submitted
to DSA under the 2001 CBC.
1.
Background: The California Building Code (Tables 23A-II-H & 23A-II-I-1 in the
2001 CBC) prescribes minimum penetration of 1-1/2 inch for 8d nails and 1-5/8 inch for 10d
nails into framing and blocking members for nails that attach wood structural panels.
Current standards (Tables 2306.3.1 & 2306.4.1 in the 2003 IBC) indicate minor revision of
these penetration requirements, and prescribe minimum penetration of 1-3/8 inch for 8d
nails and 1-1/2 inch for 10d nails. Recommended shear values and other requirements for
wood structural panel diaphragm design and construction contained in these current
standards remain unchanged from those contained in the 2001 edition CBC.
The 2001 CBC requirement of 1-5/8 inch minimum penetration for 10d nails precludes the
use of 1-1/2 inch net thickness framing members for wood structural panel diaphragm
attachment. DSA acceptance of 2003 IBC provisions permits the use of 1-1/2 inch net
thickness framing members for wood structural panel diaphragm attachment.
2.
Application: The minimum nail penetration of 1-3/8 inch for 8d nails and
1-1/2 inch for 10d nails prescribed in Tables 2306.3.1 & 2306.4.1 of the 2003 IBC may be
used in lieu of the minimum nail penetration specified in Tables 23A-II-H and 23A-II-I-1 of
the 2001 CBC.
This is applicable only to 8d or 10d nails that attach wood structural panel diaphragms to
framing and blocking members. 8d or 10d nails used in any other connections (e.g.
interconnection of framing members, timber connectors) shall comply with the requirements
of 2001 CBC, Section 2318A.
DSA (SS) IR 23-7

(rev. 11-01-07)
Minimum Fastener Penetration

In Framing-Wood Diaphragms
Page 1 of 1
MANUFACTURED WOOD-CHORDMETAL-WEB TRUSSES
IR 23-8
References:
2007 California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2,
Sections 2303.4 and 1704A.3,
ICC ES AC306
Issued 12-17-09
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies the criteria and process under
which the Division of the State Architect (DSA) will evaluate, accept for use, and establish
requirements for inspection of manufactured wood trusses on projects under DSA
jurisdiction.
Note: Frequently used terms are defined in the glossary, Section 8, of this IR.
Scope: This IR is applicable only to wood-chord-metal-web (WCMW) trusses.

1.
2.
Acceptance Criteria: Wood-Chord-Metal-Web trusses shall meet the requirements of ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Acceptance Criteria AC306.
Trusses must be designed and manufactured in accordance with a valid evaluation

report issued by ICC-ES or other qualified evaluation organizations per DSA IR A-5.
The evaluation report must indicate conformance with AC306.
Truss manufacturers shall maintain a quality control and assurance program with
periodic audits by an approved inspection agency as required by AC306 and the
evaluation report.
For design purposes, trusses that utilize bearing clips that result in eccentricity
between the truss support point and the panel point (i.e. a no-notch clip) to transfer
loads to the supporting structure may only use 80% of the listed values on the
evaluation report.
The manufacturing of trusses must be inspected per Section 5 below.
Approval Process: The approval of manufactured wood trusses for use on a
specific project is a four-phase process. There are specific requirements and responsibilities
for the truss manufacturer, and architect or structural engineer in general responsible
charge (project design professional) in each phase. The four phases and the key players
involved are as follows:
DSA IR 23-8
(iss 12-17-09)
Manufactured Wood-ChordMetal-Web Trusses
Page 1 of 5
DSA IR 23-8
(iss 12-17-09)
Page 2 of 5
Review and Approval of Construction Documents (Section 3 below): Project

Design Professional, and DSA
Review and Approval of Truss Submittal Package (Section 4 below): Project
Design Professional, Manufacturer, and DSA
Manufacturing and Special Inspection of Wood Trusses (Section 5 below):
Manufacturer and Fabrication Special Inspector
Field Installation (Section 6 below): Project Inspector
The process outlined in this IR is a deferred approval process in compliance with Title 24,
Part 1, Section 4-317(g). As an option, the truss submittal package as described in Section
4 below may be included with the construction documents in the first phase. In this case,
the review and approval of construction documents and truss submittal package, will be
combined.
3.
Review and Approval of Construction Documents.
This phase occurs

before a project construction contract is awarded to a qualified wood truss manufacturer.
The steps and requirements for this phase are as follows:
3.1
Project design professional prepares construction documents (plans and

specifications) for the project. In addition to the requirements in CBC Section
2303.4.3, Item 1, the portion of the construction documents pertaining to wood
trusses shall also include the following:
Structural framing plan including layout of wood trusses, depths, and all
supporting elements
Loading diagrams for all wood trusses in accordance with CBC Section
2303.4.3 Item 1-1.2.
Detailed requirements for the transfer of loads and anchorage of each

truss to the supporting structure per CBC Section 2303.4.1.6.
Detailed requirements for truss top chord dimensions, orientation, and

ability to receive plywood diaphragm nailing.
Project specifications shall require that wood truss fabricator(s) comply

with Section 1 of this IR. The project design professional should closely
coordinate wood truss design (including all connections, non-standard
products, and details) with a qualified fabricator prior to the submittal of
contract documents for DSA review.
Project specifications and the Statement of Tests and Special Inspections

(CBC Sections 1704A.1.1 and 1705A) shall include inspection
requirements for wood trusses per Section 5.3 of this IR.
3.2
Project design professional submits an application and construction documents to

DSA for review.
3.3
After the DSA plan review process is completed, the approved construction
documents will bear the DSA identification stamp with the initials of the plan
reviewers.
4.
Review and Approval of Truss Submittal Package. This phase may occur
after the project has been bid and the contract for the fabrication of the wood trusses has
been awarded to a qualified manufacturer as defined in Section 1 of this IR. The steps and
requirements for this phase are as follows:
DSA IR 23-8
(iss 12-17-09)
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
Page 3 of 5
Manufacturer, working in a fully coordinated effort with the project design

professional, prepares the truss submittal package for DSA approval, in accordance
with the requirements of CBC Section 2303.4.1.4 and DSA approved project
construction documents.
If the requirements in the approved construction documents (see Section 3
above) were altered during the preparation of the truss submittal package, the
project design professional must prepare and submit a change order or Field
Change Document to DSA for review in accordance with IR A-6. These changes
may include, but are not limited to, truss depths, layout, framing plans, loads,
truss anchorage, etc.
The manufacturers truss submittal package shall include truss design drawings,
calculations, and truss placement diagrams per CBC Sections 2303.4.1.4,
2303.4.1.2, and 2303.4.1.3.
The truss design drawings in the truss submittal package shall be prepared,
signed and stamped by the fabricators California registered professional engineer
per CBC Section 2303.4.3, Item 2.
4.3
The manufacturer submits the truss submittal package to the project design
professional for review and approval. This step may take multiple exchanges
between the project design professional and the manufacturer to finalize the
submittal package for submittal to DSA.
4.4
When the project design professional approves the submittal package, he/she shall
provide a signed and stamped Statement of General Conformance and submit a set
to DSA for approval in accordance with Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-317(g). For
additional information on the Statement of General Conformance, see DSA IR A-18.
4.5
If DSA reviews the submittal package and determines that they are in conformance,
DSA stamps the truss design drawings as approved. The stamped set of the truss
design drawings and the remainder of the submittal package will be scanned into the
DSA database and then returned to the project design professional who shall forward
a copy to the manufacturer. Additional copies of DSA stamped truss design drawings
may be available to the project design professional by arrangement with the DSA
regional office.
This step may involve a back-check review if the submittal package was not
approved. The project design professional shall coordinate with the manufacturer to
resolve DSA plan check comments (as noted on the mark-up set of submittal
package) and schedule a back-check appointment with DSA. Bring a set of corrected
submittal package and the original DSA marked-up set to the back-check
appointment.
5.
Manufacture and Special Inspection of Wood Trusses: The manufacture
of wood trusses shall not occur prior to DSA approval of the truss submittal package
(Section 4 above).
5.1
Manufacturer prepares shop drawings

documents and truss design drawings.
from
the
DSA
approved
construction
Changes to the approved construction documents and truss design drawings must be
reviewed and approved prior to truss fabrication in accordance with Section 7 of this
IR.
DSA IR 23-8
(iss 12-17-09)
Page 4 of 5
5.2
Manufacturer notifies the project design professional, who will notify the project
inspector, and fabrication special inspector of the fabrication schedule. Fabrication
may not start without the presence of fabrication special inspector.
5.3
Fabrication Special Inspection: A fabrication special inspector must provide

continuous inspection during wood truss fabrication in accordance with CBC Section
1704A.6 and Section 4-333(c), Title 24, Part 1. This inspection is in addition to and
independent of the quality control procedures and inspections by the manufacturer.
5.3.1
Qualifications: The fabrication special inspector must be approved by DSA for

each project prior to fabrication. Qualifications include compliance with all the
following:
He/she must be employed by the school district or by an LEA laboratory and

approved by DSA for the project, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(c).
He/she must have a minimum of 3 years inspection experience in wood

construction or wood truss fabrication.
Must be at least 25 years of age.
5.3.2
Responsibilities:
Inspection: Each truss shall be continuously inspected by the fabrication special

inspector during all stages of fabrication. Material grades, dimensions, joint
details and all other aspects of truss fabrication shall be thoroughly inspected.
Marking: Each inspected truss shall be stamped with an identification mark by

the special inspector. At a minimum the identification mark shall include the
special inspectors initials and date.
Verified Report: The fabrication special inspector shall furnish a verified report
to the project design professional, and DSA in accordance with CBC Section
1704A.6.2.
6.
Field Installation: During this phase, the wood trusses are installed at the
construction site. The steps and requirements for this phase are as follows:
6.1
Working from the DSA approved construction documents and DSA approved truss
submittal package and any DSA approved field change documents, the project
inspector shall verify truss size, fabrication special inspectors stamp, placement in
the field and all truss installation details including bridging, bracing, connections,
etc..
7.
Revisions: If changes to the DSA approved construction document, and/or the
8.
Glossary:
8.1
Construction Documents
DSA truss submittal package are necessary, the fabricator and the project design
professional, working together, shall prepared and submit a change order or Field Change
Document to DSA for review in accordance with DSA IR A-6. DSA approval of all changes is
required prior to the implementation of the changes.
For clarity and reference, some frequently used terms in this IR are
defined below:
Project documents pertaining to the construction of the project and submitted to DSA
for review prior to construction. These documents may include drawings and
DSA IR 23-8
(iss 12-17-09)
Page 5 of 5
specifications for site, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, fire and life
safety, accessibility and energy features.
8.2
Fabrication Special Inspector

Special inspector who provides continuous inspection during the fabrication of wood
trusses. He/she is employed by the school district or by an LEA laboratory and
approved by DSA for the project, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-333(b)
8.3
Field Change Documents

Any changes to the DSA approved construction documents, and/or DSA approved
truss submittal package. See IR A-6.
8.4
Project Design Professional

The architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge of a project, Title
24, Part 1, Section 4-316(a)
8.5
Project Inspector
A DSA certified inspector responsible for inspection for the project. He/she is
employed by the school district and approved by DSA for the project, Title 24, Part 1,
Section 4-333(b)
8.6
Truss Design Drawings

Truss design drawings are prepared under the responsible charge of the
manufacturers California registered engineer, who shall stamped, and signed the
drawings. The truss design drawings shall include as a minimum all the items listed
in CBC Section 2303.4.1.2. The truss design drawings are part of the Truss Submittal
Package.
8.7
Truss Submittal Package

A package prepared by the truss manufacturer and submitted to DSA for review
through the Project Design Professional. The package shall include all the items
prescribed in CBC Section 2303.4.1.4.
IR 23-9
PREFABRICATED
WOOD I-JOIST
References:
2007 California Building Code, Section 2303.1.2
ICC ES AC-014
National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS-2005)
Revised 08-25-09
Revised 07-15-08
Issued 03-14-05 as AC 23-1
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulation (IR) clarifies qualification and quality
control/assurance requirements for acceptance of prefabricated wood I-joists for use in

projects submitted to DSA under the 2007 California Building Code (CBC). This IR does not
apply to open web trusses. This IR supersedes DSA AC 23-1 and is applicable to projects
submitted under the 2001 CBC and the 2007 CBC.
Background:
A prefabricated wood I-joist is a structural member manufactured with

sawn or structural composite lumber flanges and structural panel webs composed of either
plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) bonded together with exterior-type adhesives,
forming an I cross sectional shape.
1.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: I-joists may be accepted on DSA projects based on
1.1
I-joists must have a valid evaluation report issued by a qualified independent

evaluation agency prescribed in DSA IR A-5.
1.2
The evaluation report shall indicate compliance with all the following building codes
and standards:
2006 IBC
ASTM D5055-04
ICC-ES AC-14
1.3
The evaluation report shall also require a quality control/assurance program

complying with the requirements of ICC AC-14 and ASTM D5055-04. See Section 4,
below.
2.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
2.1
Joists shall only be used for dry conditions of use and must be protected from
weather exposure during construction.
2.2
Joists shall be designed in accordance with AF&PA NDS-2005, Chapter 7 and the
appropriate evaluation report.
2.3
Lateral and rotational supports shall be provided at all bearing locations per AF&F
NDS 2005 Section 7.3.5. Lateral and rotational support may be provided by joist
hangers complying with ICC AC13, Section 3.3.
the following criteria:
DSA IR 23-9
(rev 08-25-09)
Prefabricated
Wood I-Joist
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR 23-9
(rev 08-25-09)
Prefabricated
Wood I-Joist
Page 2 of 2
2.4
Bridging shall be provided in accordance with manufacturers requirements and the

products evaluation report. Additional bridging may be required to provide lateral
support for the bottom chord when it is in compression (i.e. wind uplift, large
cantilevers, etc.).
2.5
Design flexure, shear and bearing shall be determined through ASTM D5055-04
procedures, and as listed in the evaluation report.
2.6
Deflection shall be computed per the

defined in CBC Table 1604A.3.,
recommendation, whichever is more
Specification for Wood Construction
deflection limit of L/480 for floor joists
2.6.1
2.7
evaluation report and shall not exceed limits

evaluation report, or the manufacturers
restrictive. As a reference, National Design
(NDS-2005) Section C7.4.5 recommends a
live load.
NDS-2005 Section C7.4.5 also recommends the consideration of creep deflection

for unique applications, such as heavy dead loads, may be in accordance with
NDS Section 3.5.2.
I-Joist blocking panels may be used for shear transfer if allowed by the evaluation
report. Shear transfer capacity is limited to the allowable shear capacity specified in
the evaluation report. Shear transfer nailing (size and spacing) shall be determined
by calculations and must conform to manufacturers requirements.
3.
DETAILING CONSIDERATIONS: Follow the manufacturers detailing and

construction requirements. Connection details shall be designed to minimize the potential
for splitting of wood members and I-Joists. In the event of splitting, a repair procedure
shall be submitted to DSA for review and approval on a project specific basis. The following
are typical conditions where splitting may occur:
3.1
Solid sawn lumber flange connections at bearing locations (e.g. wall top plates).
3.2
Tie strap or other connector hardware (end distance and spacing of nails).
3.3
Web stiffeners material and size (comply with the manufacturers requirements).
3.4
I-joist chord, or web filler, that is a part of a wall anchorage system (attachment
must meet the requirements of ASCE 7-05 Section 12.11.2).
3.5
I-Joist flange receiving diaphragm sheathing nails (the minimum thickness and width
of the flange shall meet applicable CBC code requirements, i.e. edge distance,
minimum nail penetration per CBC Tables 2306.3.1, 2306.3.2, and 2306.4.1).
3.6
Shear transfer nailing at I-Joist blocking panels.
4.
I-JOIST QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE: Continuous independent

inspection of wood I-joist fabrication is not required. Only mills that qualify under an
approved QA/QC program shall provide I-joists. The quality assurance program shall meet
the following requirements:
4.1
ASTM D5055, Sections 8,9, and 10
4.2
ICC-ES AC14, Appendix A, Quality Assurance Guidelines for Prefabricated Wood Ijoists, promulgated by the Wood I-joists Manufacturers Association, or ICC-ES
approved equivalent such as APA QA Policy for Performance Rated I-Joists.
4.3
ICC-ES AC 14 Appendix B.
4.4
Unannounced audits by a third party auditor of a qualified inspection agency shall be

performed, per ICC-ES AC14. All quality control reports resulting from such audits
must be maintained by the manufacturers and made available to DSA upon request.
STRUCTURAL (CERTIFIED)
GLUED LUMBER
IR 23-10
References:
2007 California Building Code, Section 2303.1.1
Dept. of Commerce PS 20-99
ALSC Glue Lumber Policy
Issued 08-15-08
PURPOSE: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies qualification and quality

control/assurance requirements for acceptance of structural Certified Glued Lumber (CGL)
for use in projects submitted to the Division of the State Architect (DSA) under the 2007
California Building Code (CBC).
This IR does not apply to Certified End Joint or Stud Use Only lumbers per Section 1.70,
Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) Western Lumber Grading Rules, or Section
210.b and 210.c of West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) Standard Grading Rules
No. 17 for Certified End Joint or Stud Use Only lumber.
BACKGROUND: Structural glued lumber does not qualify as structural glued-laminated

timber (glulam) per Title 24, Part 2, CBC Section 2303.1.3. CGL is typically manufactured
in the same facilities as glulam, and from laminations that are E-rated and/or visually
graded which may not meet the requirements of ANSI/AITC A 190.1 for glulam. The
strength design values for CGL are the same as those assigned to the lumber or timber
grades but are typically lower than those of glulam. CGL is visually graded to the standard
lumber grading rules while glulam is rated for the layup combination.
Structural CGL is intended as an alternative to solid sawn lumber or timber, 3 inch nominal
or larger. CGL is considered as a solid piece of lumber or timber and is sized, grade
stamped, and assigned the same values as solid sawn lumber or timber of the same species
and visual grade in conformance with the Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-99 or current
edition, American Softwood Lumber Standard and the American Lumber Standard
Committee (ALSC) Glued Lumber Policy.
CGL is manufactured by face gluing laminations to produce a new piece of structural lumber
or timber and is grade stamped as Light Framing, Structural Light Framing, Structural Joists
and Planks, Beams and Stringers or Posts and Timbers, as described in the WCLIB Standard
Grading Rules No. 17 or WWPA Western Lumber Grading Rules.
1.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: Structural glued lumber shall be designated Certified
Glued Lumber (CGL) and grade stamped by an inspection agency accredited by the
American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) to supervise glued lumber manufacturing.
DSA (SS) IR 23-10
(iss 08-15-08)
Structural (Certified)
Glued Lumber
Page 1 of 2
DSA (SS) IR 23-10

(iss 08-15-08)
Structural (Certified)
Glued Lumber
Page 2 of 2
1.1
Grading: CGL shall be graded in conformance to ALSC Glued Lumber Policy (GLP)
and Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-99 or current edition.
1.2
Qualification and Quality Control: CGL shall be qualified by the inspection

agency in accordance to ALSC GLP. The inspection agency may follow its own
control or quality control procedure when the procedure is in general conformance
with ALSC GLP and approved by ALSC.
Quality Assurance: Inspection agency shall provide a minimum of twelve periodic
inspections per year, at regular intervals or in accordance with ALSC GLP. Copies of
the inspection reports shall be maintained and made available to DSA upon request.
Special Inspection: Continuous independent inspection during fabrication is not
required provided the manufacturers QA program is in compliance with ALSC GLP.
1.3
1.4
2.
CONDITIONS OF USE:
2.1
CGL shall only be used for dry conditions of use and must be protected from weather
exposure during construction.
2.2
CGL shall be assigned the same design values as solid sawn lumber or timber of the
same species and visual grade.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS ORIENTED STRAND BOARD (OSB)

References:
2001California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2,
Sections 2302A.1, 2304A.1, 2312A.1, 2312A.2, 2315A.3.3, and 2315A.5
UBC Standard 23-3 (same a Voluntary Product Standard PS 2-92)
APA Panel Design Specification D510
IR 23-11
Revised 12-17-09
Revised 4-17-06
Issued10-06-04 as AC 23-2
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify the criteria
under which the Division of the State Architect (DSA) will accept the use of oriented strand
board (OSB) as wood structural panels on projects under DSA jurisdiction.
Background: OSB panels have demonstrated a history of acceptable performance. The

1997 UBC model building code includes OSB in the definition of wood structural panels.
However, in adopting the 1997 UBC as the basis for the 2001 CBC, the definition adopted by
DSA of wood structural panels was amended to include only "all-veneer plywood."
Scope: This IR applies to OSB panel grades (structural floor, roof and wall sheathing)
contained in UBC Standard 23-3, and is not applicable to OSB exterior siding.
This IR is applicable only to projects submitted to DSA for review under the 2001 CBC. For
projects submitted under the 2007 CBC, see IR 23-6.
1.
CONDITIONS OF USE: Wood structural panels may include OSB panels. The
use and installation of OSB panels shall comply with the requirements for wood structural
panels in the 2001 CBC, and this document.
2.
MATERIALS: OSB panels shall comply with UBC Standard 23-3. Certification and
panel marking shall comply with PS 2-92, Section 7. Each panel shall bear markings
identifying the qualified testing and inspection agency (as defined in Section 3), grade,
nominal thickness, span rating, exposure durability classification and the standard to which
it is certified.
3.
QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY: Appendix A is a list

(furnished by International Accreditation Service, Inc.) of qualified testing and inspection
agencies. Testing and inspection agencies may be placed on this list if they meet all of the
following conditions:
3.1
Conform to PS 2-92 Section 7.1.1.
3.2
Accredited by International Accreditation Service, Inc. in accordance with ISO/IEC

17020 and 17025 standards, and
3.3
The scope of accreditation shall include testing and inspection of wood-based

structural-use panels for compliance with PS 2-92 requirements.
DSA IR 23-11
(rev 12-17-09)
Wood Structural Panels Oriented Strand Board (OSB)
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR 23-11
(rev 12-17-09)
Page 2 of 3
4.
DESIGN:
4.1
Sheathing. OSB structural floor sheathing and roof sheathing shall meet the design
requirements of CBC Section 2312A.1 and 2312A.2 respectively.
4.2
Diaphragms. OSB diaphragms shall be designed in accordance with CBC Sections

2315A.3.3, and 2315A.5. A reduction factor of 0.8 shall apply to Tables 23A-II-H
and 23A-II-I-1. Maximum diaphragm dimension ratios shall comply with CBC Table
16A-V for plywood.
4.3
Deflection. When calculating shear wall and diaphragm deflections, the equations
for plywood may be used. The modulus of elasticity (E) may be determined from
APA Panel Design Specification D510 or may be provided directly by the
manufacturer. The nail slip coefficients may be considered the same as for plywood.
For OSB panels under constant load equal to or greater than 50% of their allowable
design strength, creep must be considered. Use a creep adjustment factor of 1/6 on
panel stiffness (EI) to calculate deflection for panels used in moist conditions (such
as raised floors) that produce panel moisture content (MC) of 16% or higher. For
dry service conditions that produce panel moisture content of less than 16%, use a
creep adjustment factor of 1/2, which is the same for plywood. See APA Panel
Design Specification D510, Section 4.5.1, Creep.
5.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: The installation of OSB panels shall comply
with the following requirements:
5.1
When panels are used in areas subject to high relative humidity or where
condensation can develop (such as roofs with attic space, mansards, raised floor
crawl space, etc.), ventilation shall be provided in conformance with Section
1505.3, Part 2, Title 24, CCR, with ample vents located to eliminate dead-air
pockets.
5.2
Panels shall be protected from moisture during transit and storage. Wetted OSB
panels shall be dried to 16% moisture content or less prior to being installed.
5.3
If installed panels are wetted, they shall be dried to 16% moisture content or less
prior to being covered. Alternatively, provide adequate ventilation on the back side
to allow drying. All nails pushed up due to material swelling shall be re-driven.
Additional nails shall be installed if material swelling causes the nail heads to
penetrate into the surface by more than 1/16 inch after drying. If the additional
nails result in nail spacing closer than the allowable, then framing or blocking must
be added to receive the new nails and provide appropriate shear transfer.
5.4
Installed panels shall be protected from moisture by approved finish materials.
5.5
Edge checks are defined as wood flakes that have become separated from the panel
leaving voids in the panel edges. Panels with edge checks greater than 1/4 inch in
depth or 2 inches in length at any one location shall render the panel unacceptable
for use. The maximum cumulative length of edge checks in a standard 4-ft. by 8-ft.
panel shall not exceed 8 inches. Panel edge nailing shall be adjusted to avoid nailing
into edge checks.
5.6
Field cut edges of panels shall be protected from the weather, or sealed using an
exterior acrylic latex paint.
DSA IR 23-11
(rev 12-17-09)
Page 3 of 3

Accredited by International Accreditation Service (IAS) to Certify and Mark/Stamp Structural Wood
Panels under Product Standard PS 2-92
IAS
Accreditation
Number
Inspection Agency
Contact Information
AA-649
APA The Engineered Wood

Association
7011 South 19th Street
Tacoma, WA 98466
Contact: Mr. Borjen Yeh

Telephone: 253-565-6600
e-mail:
borjen.yeh@apawood.org
AA-654
TECO
5650 Terra Court
Sun Prairie, WI 53590
Contact: Mr. Jim Vogt

Telephone: 608-837-2790
e-mail: jim.vogt@tecotested.com
AA-660
Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory

2710 W 5th Avenue
Eugene, OR 97402
Contact: Mr. Randy Webb

Telephone: 541-484-9212
e-mail: randy.webb@psiusa.com
AA-663
NAHB Research Center

400 Prince Georges Blvd.
Upper Marlboro, MD 20774
Contact: Mr. Robert L. Hill

Telephone: 301-430-6244
e-mail: rhill@nahbrc.org
AA-688
Intertek Testing Services NA Ltd.

1500 Brigantine Drive
Coquitlam, British Columbia
V3K 7C1 Canada
Contact: Lawrence Gibson

Telephone: 604-520-3321
Fax : 604-524-9189
e-mail:
lawrence.gibson@intertek.com
IR 24-1
GLASS PANEL RAILINGS

References:
2001 California Building Code (CBC), Section 2406.6, Table 16A-B
2007 CBC, Sections 2407, 2403.2, 1607A.7, and 2406.1.1
Revised 03-17-10
Revised 11-01-07
Revised 04-21-05
Issued 09-01-99 as IR M-1
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies DSA requirements for glass panel
railings to be accepted for use in the construction of projects under Division of the State
Architect (DSA) jurisdiction. DSA will require the use of either a design or a test option, as
explained in this IR.
1.
General: Glass panel railing refers to a railing assembly, consisting of glass panels
cantilevered from a base and capped with a continuous rail at the top. The system shall be
designed so that the top rail remains in place in the event of failure of an individual glass
panel. Glazing in railing panels shall be an approved safety glazing material that conforms
to 2007 California Building Code (CBC) Sections 2406.1.1 and 2407.1 (Section 2406.6 in the
2001 CBC). Minimum nominal thickness shall be 1/4. Fully tempered glass and laminated
glass shall comply with Category II of Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC)
standard 16 CFR Part 1201.
Glass panel railings shall not be used in locations where they may be subject to vehicle
impact, in accordance with 2007 CBC Section 2407.1.3 (Section 2406.4 in the 2001 CBC).
2.
Design Option: The components and assembly of the glass panel railings are to
be designed for a factor of safety of four (4) times the design load.
2.1
Projects submitted to DSA under the 2001 CBC: The required vertical design
load for glass panel railings is 100 lbs. per lineal foot. Horizontal load is as tabulated
in Table 16A-B of the 2001 CBC and are applied horizontally at right angles to the
top rail.
2.2
Projects submitted to DSA under the 2007 CBC: The required vertical and
horizontal design loads for glass panel railings are prescribed in 2007 CBC, Section
1607A.7.1 for uniform load and Section 1607A.7.1.1 for concentrated load.
3.
Test Option: In lieu of the Design Option in Section 2 above, glass panel railings
may be accepted by test. Tests may be conducted in the field or in the laboratory on exact
duplicate mock ups as evidence of acceptability of each railing configuration or design.
All tests are to be performed by a DSA approved testing laboratory. Tests are to be
observed and results recorded in a report signed by a California registered civil or structural
engineer (per 2007 CBC, Section 2403.2).
DSA IR 24-1
(rev 03-17-10)
Glass Panel Railings

Page 1 of 2
DSA IR 24-01
(rev 03-17-10)
3.1
Glass Panel Railings

Page 2 of 2
Test Protocol: An acceptable test for the entire completed glass railing assembly
shall meet the following minimum criteria:
3.1.1
Test for two (2) times the horizontal design load(s) in Section 2 above, applied at
right angles to the top rail.
3.1.2
Test the deflection of the top rail at one (1) times horizontal design load applied
at right angles to the top rail for maximum allowable of h/120, where h is the
distance from the floor level to the top of the rail.
3.1.3
Top rail shall recover to the original position upon release of the test loadings.
3.1.4
At least one test shall be performed for each railing configuration or design.
3.1.5
Testing procedures for glass panel railings are to be indicated in specifications

and on drawings and noted on the Test and Inspection list.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOAD FOR

10 GAGE AND 12 GAGE WIRES
IR 25-1

2007 California Building Code Sections 803.9.1 and 1614A.1.12
Revised 09-18-07
Revised 04-21-05
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provides allowable loads for mild steel wire.
1. Description. "Galvanized soft annealed mild steel wire," as defined in ASTM A641
(Class 1 Coating) is the wire referred to in this IR.
2. Basis of Design Strength. Based on tests which the Division of the State Architect
(DSA) has received to-date for this type of wire, an ultimate stress of 60,000 psi will be
used for #10 gage and #12 gage wire.
3. Design Value. Basic stress will be the ultimate stress divided by 2.5, or 24,000 psi.
Testing is not required when these values are used.
4. Diameter of Wire. #10 wire is 0.135 inches in diameter and a #12 wire is 0.106
inches in diameter as shown by the U.S. Steel Wire Gage.
5. Allowable Load.
Wire Size
#10 wire
#12 wire
Basic Load
343 lbs.
209 lbs.
6. Fabrication. When using twists on wire to develop the maximum allowable load, use a
minimum of 4 twists within 1". Three twists may be used to develop not more than one
half the above values.
7. Limitations.
7.1
These values are for tension only. Tearing of thin metal by wire must be considered.
If the specification requires a special wire, a higher allowable base load may be used,
subject to DSA approval.
DSA (SS) IR 25-1 (rev 09-18-07)
Maximum Allowable Load for

10 Gage and 12 Gage Wire
Page 1 of 1
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

FOR LAY-IN PANEL CEILINGS
References:
California Building Code, Section 2501A.5
IR 25-2
Issued 9-1-99
Revised 04-21-05
Revised 07-21-05
Supercedes IR M-3
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provide guidelines for the installation of metal
suspension systems for lay-in ceilings.
1.
CEILING NOTES: The following notes will be acceptable in plans and specifications
1.1
#12 gage (min.) hanger wires may be used for up to and including 4 ft. by 4 ft. grid
spacing and shall be attached to main runners.
1.2
Provide #12 gage hanger wires at the ends of all main and cross runners within eight
(8) inches of the support or within one-fourth (1/4) of the length of the end tee,
whichever is least, for the perimeter of the ceiling area. End connections for runners
which are designed and detailed to resist the applied vertical and horizontal forces
may be used in lieu of the #12 gage hanger wires, subject to Division of the State
Architect (DSA) review and approval.
1.3
Provide trapeze or other supplementary support members at obstructions to typical

hanger spacing. Provide additional hangers, struts or braces as required at all ceiling
breaks, soffits or discontinuous areas. Hanger wires that are more than 1 in 6 out of
plumb are to have counter-sloping wires.
1.4
Ceiling grid members may be attached to not more than two (2) adjacent walls.
Ceiling grid members shall be at least 1/2 inch clear of other walls. If walls run
diagonally to ceiling grid system runners, one end of main and cross runners should
be free, and a minimum of 1/2 inch clear of wall.
1.5
At the perimeter of the ceiling area where main or cross runners are not connected
to the adjacent wall, provide interconnection between the runners at the free end to
prevent lateral spreading. A metal strut or a #16 gage wire with a positive
mechanical connection to the runner may be used. Where the perpendicular distance
from the wall to the first parallel runner is 12 inches or less, this interlock is not
required.
for ceiling systems whose total weight, including air conditioning/heating grills and light
fixtures, does not exceed two (2) psf. Heavier systems, and those supporting lateral loads
from partitions, will require special design details. Also, see IR 25-3 for heavier systems.
DSA (SS) IR 25-2 (rev 07-21-05)
Metal Suspension Systems

For Lay In Panel Ceilings
Page 1 of 12
DSA (SS) IR 25-2 (rev 07-21-05)
1.6

Page 2 of 12
Provide bracing assemblies consisting of a compression strut and four (4) #12 gage
splayed bracing wires oriented 90 degrees from each other (see Figure 1) at the
following spacing:
1. For school buildings, place bracing assemblies at a spacing not more than 12 ft. by
12 ft. on center.
2. For Essential Services Buildings, place bracing assemblies not more than 8 ft. by 12
ft. on center.
3. Provide bracing assemblies at locations not more than one half (1/2) the spacings
given above, from each perimeter wall and at the edge of vertical ceiling offsets.
The slope of these wires shall not exceed 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling
and shall be taut. Splices in bracing wires are not to be permitted without special
DSA approval.
4. Suspended acoustical ceiling systems with a ceiling area of 144 square feet or less,
and fire rated suspended acoustical ceiling systems with a ceiling area of 96 square
feet or less, surrounded by walls which connect directly to the structure above, do
not require bracing assemblies when attached to two adjacent walls.
1.7
Fasten hanger wires with not less than three (3) tight turns. Fasten bracing wires
with four (4) tight turns. Make all tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches.
Hanger or bracing wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a manner
that the direction of the anchor aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the
wire.
Note: Wire turns made by machine where both strands have been deformed
or bent in wrapping can waive the 1-1/2 inch requirement, but the number of
turns should be maintained, and be as tight as possible.
1.8
Separate all ceiling hanger and bracing wires at least six (6) inches from all unbraced
ducts, pipes, conduit, etc.
1.9
When drilled-in concrete anchors or shot-in anchors are used in reinforced concrete
for hanger wires, 1 out of 10 must be field tested for 200 lbs. in tension. When
drilled-in concrete anchors are used for bracing wires, 1 out of 2 must be field tested
for 440 lbs. in tension. Shot-in anchors in concrete are not permitted for bracing
wires. If any shot-in or drilled-in anchor fails, see CBC, Section 1923A.3.5.
Note: Drilled-in or shot-in anchors require special DSA approval prior to use in
prestressed concrete.
1.10
Attach all light fixtures and ceiling mounted air terminals, to the ceiling grid runners
to resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the fixtures. Screws or approved
fasteners are required.
1.11
Flush or recessed light fixtures and air terminals, weighing less than 56 lbs., may be
supported directly on the runners of a heavy duty grid system but, in addition, they
must have a minimum of two (2) #12 gage slack safety wires attached to the fixture
at diagonal corners and anchored to the structure above. All 4 ft. x 4 ft. light fixtures
must have slack safety wires at each corner.
All flush or recessed light fixtures and air terminals weighing 56 lbs. or more must be
independently supported by not less than four (4) taut #12 gage wires, each
attached to the fixture and to the structure above regardless of the type of ceiling
grid system used.
DSA (SS) IR 25-2 (rev 07-21-05)

Page 3 of 12
The four (4) taut #12 gage wires, including their attachment to the structure above,
must be capable of supporting four (4) times the weight of the unit.
1.12
All fixtures and air terminals supported on intermediate duty grid systems must be
independently supported by not less than four (4) taut #12 gage wires each attached
to the fixture or terminal, and to the structure above.
1.13
Support surface mounted light fixtures by at least two positive devices which
surround the ceiling runner and which are each supported from the structure above
by a #12 gage wire. Spring clips or clamps that connect only to the runner are not
acceptable.
Provide additional supports when light fixtures are 8 ft. or longer.
1.14
Support pendant mounted light fixtures directly from the structure above with
hanger wires or cables passing through each pendant hanger and capable of
supporting four (4) times the weight of the fixture. A bracing assembly, per Figure 1,
is required where the pendant hanger penetrates the ceiling. Special details are
required to attach the pendant hanger to the bracing assembly to transmit horizontal
forces.
1.15
Required notes on construction documents:

Classification of ceiling grid (fill in blanks).
Classification of ceiling grid is
(1)
duty.
Manufacturer's catalog number - main runner
(2) (3)
Manufacturer's catalog number - cross runner (2) (3)
Manufacturer's catalog number of detail for runner splice
(3)
(1) Fill in either "intermediate" or "heavy".

(2) Runners must be rated for duty listed.
(3) Show manufacturer, duty classification and catalog numbers. Show light
fixture and air terminal or grille support details for grid duty classification
selected. See Items 1.11 and 1.12 above.
2.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE RATED CEILINGS:
2.1
Provide Underwriter Laboratory (U.L.) design number or State Fire Marshal (SFM)
listing number. The components and installation details must conform in every
respect with the U.L. or SFM approval for the design number specified. Custom
designs which combine components from different approved designs but have not
been tested as a complete assembly are not acceptable.
2.2
For schools and Essential Services Buildings, bracing assemblies are required for
each 96 square feet. The first bracing assembly is required not more than four (4)
feet from each wall. A minimum of one bracing assembly is required between any
two adjacent expansion cut-outs on runners being braced.
2.3
Pop rivets, screws, or other attachments are not acceptable unless specifically
detailed on the drawings and approved by U.L. and SFM.
DSA (SS) IR 25-2 (rev 07-21-05)

Page 4 of 12
3.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL PANELS: Metal panels and
panels weighing more than 1/2 psf, other than acoustical tile, are to be positively attached
to the ceiling suspension runners.
4.
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS BELOW GYPSUM BOARD

CEILINGS: Where gypsum board or other ceiling finishes are attached to the
framing, special details will be required for the vertical hanger wire and lateral bracing wire
support connections to the framing.
5.
REUSE OF EXISTING CEILING HANGER WIRES AND SPLAY WIRES:
5.1
The gage and spacing of the wires must comply with the current applicable codes.
5.2
All existing ceiling hanger wires must be tested to 200 lbs. in tension.
5.3
All existing splayed bracing wires must be field tested to 440 lbs. in tension.
5.4
If a new wire is to be spliced to an existing wire, the following is required:

1. The architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge must submit to
DSA a detail and specification describing how the splice is to be made.
2. All new wires, after being spliced to the existing wires, must be field tested per Items
5.2 and 5.3 above.
3. All field tests must be performed in the presence of the project inspector.
6.
LIST OF DSA PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE FOR SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL

CEILING SYSTEMS
DSA
Product Acceptance (PA)
Report #_
PA-008
Tectum I and Tectum II - Form Board, Acoustical Board and Suspended

Ceiling Tile
PA-022
Armstrong Cassettes 800 Series Metal Ceiling System
PA-026
Chicago Metallic Suspended Ceiling System
PA-030
USG Interior Donn Suspended Ceiling Grid Systems
PA-041
Armstrong World Industries Suspended Ceiling System
PA-078
Metaline, Plantostile and Magna T-Cell Suspended Ceiling Systems
Note: Alternate manufacturers and systems may be submitted for review and
acceptance by the Division of the State Architect.
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Metal Suspension Systems for Lay-In Panel Ceilings - Page 5 of 12
Figure 1
SUSPENDED CEILING BRACING ASSEMBLY
Bracing assemblies are required at spacing indicated in section 1.6 on page 2 of IR 25-2
Compression struts:
Steel section with l/r ratio of 200 maximum. Attach to main runners within 2" of cross runner
with 2-#12 self-drilling self-tapping (SDST) screws and to structure with 2-#12 x 2" screws at
wood or 3/16" diameter anchor at concrete/steel. Compression strut shall not replace hanger
wire.
Note:
See figures 3,4,5,6 for
connections of bracing
& hanger wire to the
structure above
Compression strut
12 ga. bracing wire

w/min. 4 tight turns
in 11/2" both ends
of wire - connect to
main runner
12 ga. bracing wire

w/min. 4 tight turns
in 11/2" both ends
of wire - connect to
main runner
45 degrees
max typ.
Main runner
Cross runner
2" (max) from bracing

wires to compression
strut and cross runner
45 degrees
max typ.
12 ga. vertical hanger

wire at 4'-0" each way
(4' oc at main runner)
minimum 3 tight turns
in 11/2" both ends
(typical)
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 2
ACCEPTABLE HANGER WIRE CONNECTION TO GRID
Spacers may be slotted angles

or channels with diamond points
of spring steel which snap tight
to prevent movement of strut.
Channel
Alternate location w/o nail.

Notching permitted only at
runner
12 ga. hanger wire

8" max.
or note (1)
below
Min 3 tight turns

on 11/2"
1/2"
Hanger
wire
8" max.
or note (1)
below
Main or cross
runner
Acoustic panel
Pop rivet-see
section 1.4, IR 25-2
Wall angle
Wall connection-anchor
to structural element
Slotted angle spacer

w/horiz. 6d ringshank nail
(see note (2) )
Detail (A) Horizontal strut - typical (see section 1.5, IR 25-2)

Notes: (1) 1/4 of the length of the end runner whichever is less.
(2) Nails at the end of horizontal struts are to be placed with nail head toward centerline
of span of strut
Main runner
12 ga. hanger wire

3 tight turns in 11/2"
Cross runner
Detail (B)
Acoustic panel
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 3A
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTIONS TO WOOD FRAMING
Three 11/2" x 9 ga. staples or 3-stronghold J nails
at each wire loop
3" max.
1" min.
Bracing wire
Hanger wire
Bracing
wire
Joist or rafter
(A) Wood joist or rafter
Three 11/2 " x 9 ga. staples or

three stronghold J nails at each
wire loop
1/4" dia. screw eye

with full thread
embedment (11/4"
min.) Install in
direction of wire
(B) Wood joist or rafter
For bracing wires fully embed screw eye threads

in direction of wire
1/4" dia.
drilled hole
2 X blkg. w/2-16d
common nails at
ea. end
Bracing wire
(C) Wood joist or block
2"
min.
Hanger wire
Saddle tie, per detail (F)
Hanger
wire
(D) At bottom of joist

Saddle tie required
for all widths
greater than 1/2
Web member (typical)

Bottom chord
Hanger wire
saddle tie per detail (F)
Brace wire saddle tie per detail (F)
(E) Bracing wire parallel to wood truss
Note:
Saddle tie has
double loop at
support
Hanger wires-3 tight
turns and bracing
wires 4 tight turns
(F) Typical saddle tie
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 3B
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTION AT WOOD FRAMING
Plywood floor/roof
sheathing
Wood I-joist
Ceiling splay wire attached

to joist bottom flange per (H)
Add 21/2" x 20 ga. stud*
w/(1) #10 x 1" wood screw
to each of 3 joists.
Place stud flat and within 6" of splay wire.
*Alternate:
2 x 4 flat with 1-10d or 1-#10 x 3"

screw to each of 3 truss bottom flanges
(G) Wood I-joist
Note: Do not insert screw

eyes parallel to laminations
1/4" dia. screw eye with

11/4" min. penetration
align with brace wire
1/4" dia. screw eye with
11/4" min. penetration
at bottom flange
Brace wire with 4

tight turns
1"
minimum
(H) Wood I-joist bottom flange
Hanger wire with

3 tight turns
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 4
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTION TO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Shot-in anchor
3/4" (minimum)
penetration - test
Structural concrete
5/16 inch (minimum) drill-in
expansion anchor - test
Structural concrete
Ceiling clip 13 ga.

x 3/4" wide
5/8" max
(minimum)
Vertical hanger wire
(A) Vertical hanger wire clip attachment
5/8" max
Steel strap
1" wide x 12 ga.
(minimum)
45
max
Splayed brace
wire see sections
1.6, 1.7 of IR 25-2
(B) Splayed bracing wire clip attachment
Structural concrete
Structural concrete
45
max

embedded in concrete
with pigtail - 2" dia. loop & 4" tail
embedded in concrete
with pigtail - 2" dia. loop & 4" tail
(C) Hanger wire at C.I.P. concrete
(D) Brace wire at C.I.P. concrete
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 5
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTIONS TO STEEL FRAMING
Web member
Steel strap see

Fig. 4 detail (B)
Bottom
chord
Structural steel member

Ceiling clip see
Fig. 4 detail (A)
with shot - in
anchor attachment
Splayed
brace wire
with
shot-in anchor
attachment
(test for 440 lbs)

(test for 200 lbs)
Splay wires parallel to joist.

Splay wires can not be
perpendicular to joist
(B) At open-web steel joist
Insulation over
steel deck
Bracing
wire
Splayed
bracing wire
Saddle tie per

Fig. 3 A detail (F)
(A) At steel beams
20 ga. min.
deck
Vertical hanger
wire
Insulation over
steel deck
2-#8 x 1/2"
self-tapping
screws
Steel strap 3" wide
x 4" long x 12 ga.
(minimum)
(C) At steel roof deck

Note: If self-tapping screws are used with
concrete fill, set screws before placing concrete
20 ga. min.
deck
#3 x 12"
rebar
Hanger wire-tie
to #3 rebar with
three wraps around
rebar and one wrap
around wire
(D) At steel roof deck
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 6
#3 rebar x length required
to cover min. of 4 high
corrugations
Non-structural
concrete fill
Wire pigtail
see figure 4
detail (C)
Structural
concrete fill
Steel
deck
Steel deck
See Fig 5 (D)
for alternative
support detail
Shot-in or expansion anchor with

eye-bolt (test)
Hanger wire
(A) At steel deck with insulation fill
Structural
concrete fill
(B) At steel deck with concrete fill
Structural
concrete fill
Steel deck
See Fig. 4
detail (B)
Bracing
wire
(C) At steel deck with concrete fill

Note: If self tapping screws are used with
concrete fill, set screws before placing concrete.
Steel deck
See Fig. 4
detail (A)
Hanger wire
(D) At steel deck with concrete fill
DSA IR 25-2 - Rev 07-21-05
Figure 7
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION OF SLIP JOINTS IN ESB EXITWAYS
Typical hanger wire, see
sections 1.1, 1.2 and 1.7 of IR 25-2
4'-0" o.c.
8" max
see Fig. 2
8" max
see Fig. 2
4'-0"
or less
4' o.c.
4'-0" o.c.
Typical splice
Pop rivet
Pop rivet
Continuous runners
(splice all joints)
1/2" clear slip joint at adjacent
(A) Acceptable slip joint at exitways intersection

Typical hanger wire
see sections 1.2 & 1.7
of IR 25-2
8" max
see Fig. 2
Pop rivet
Typical hanger wire at 4'-0"

w/one pair of bracing
wires parallel to wall
at 12'-0" o.c. - see sections
1.6 & 1.7 of IR 25-2
Splice must be
thru conn. - snap
conn. unacceptable
Typical hanger
Standard ledger angle-specify screw or bolt

size (must connect to structure, not finish)
Connected wall
1/2" CLR
Pop rivet
Ledger angle
Runner splice
Wall slip
(B) Acceptable exitways details at essential sevices buildings (ESB)

Slip joint
B
Refer to T-24
Part 2, Sec.
2501A.5
Connected wall
Connected wall
Plan view
Continuous slip joint
DRYWALL CEILING SUSPENSION

CONVENTIONAL CONSTRUCTION ONE LAYER
References: California Building Code, Section 2504A, 2511A
IR 25-3
Issued 9-1-99
Revised 6-11-03
Revised 4-21-05
Revised 7-21-05
Supercedes IR M-4(9/99)
jurisdiction of DSA which include State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges,
Purpose: The purpose of this IR is to provide additional guidelines for the design and
construction of gypsum wall board suspended ceiling systems.
1.
MATERIALS: Materials are to comply with applicable UBC standards. Gypsum

board is either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch in thickness.
2.
DESIGN: For lateral load, refer to CBC, Section 1632A. The weight of the
3.
DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION.
3.1
General: Gypboard ceilings should not support building components other than air
conditioning/heating grills or light fixtures. All such components shall be supported
either directly from main runners, or by supplemental framing which is supported by
main runners. No vertical loads other than gypsum board dead load shall be applied
to cross-furring.
3.2
Vertical Support System.
suspended ceiling shall not be less than four (4) pounds per square foot for design
purposes.
3.2.1
There are many possible variations of hanger and main runner sizes and spacings
listed in CBC, Table No. 25A-A, and all of the combinations are acceptable.
However, the main runners that are most frequently used are 1-1/2 inch cold
rolled channels, 0.475 lbs/ft. This is acceptable provided the following
requirements are met:
1. Vertical hanger wires are #9 gage and galvanized soft-annealed steel.

2. Cross-furring may be 7/8 inch, 25 gage galvanized hat sections at 24 inches o.c.
maximum.
3. If main runners are spaced at 4'-0" o.c., hanger wires shall be spaced at 3'-0" o.c.
maximum.
If main runners are spaced at 3'-6" o.c., hanger wires shall be spaced at 3'-6" o.c.
maximum.
If main runners are spaced at 3'-0" o.c., hanger wires shall be spaced at 4'-0" o.c.
maximum.
DSA (SS) IR 25-3 (rev 07-21-05)
Drywall Ceiling Suspension

One Layer
Page 1 of Page 1 of 3
DSA (SS) IR 25-3 (rev 07-21-05)

One Layer
To use a main runner spacing of 4'-0" o.c. with a hanger spacing of 4'-0" o.c., main
runners must be 1-1/2 inch hot rolled channels weighing 1.12 lbs/ft. Also, #8 gage
galvanized hanger wires would be required.
3.2.2
The following requirements apply to all wire hanger/runner combinations:
1. Hangers should be saddle-tied around main runners to develop the full strength of
the hangers.
2. Cross-furring should be saddle-tied to the main runners with one strand of #16
gage, or two strands of #18 gage tie wire.
3. Main runners should be spliced by lapping and interlocking flanges 12 inches
minimum and tying near each end with double loops of #16 gage wire.
4. Cross-furring should be spliced by lapping and interlocking the pieces eight (8)
inches minimum and tying near each end with double loops of #16 gage wire
3.2.3
Fasten hanger wires with not less than three (3) tight turns. Fasten bracing wires
with four (4) tight turns. Make all tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches.
Hanger or bracing wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a
manner that the direction of the anchor aligns as closely as possible with the
direction of the wire.
Note: Wire turns made by machine where both strands have been deformed or bent
in wrapping can waive the 1-1/2 inch requirement, but the number of turns should
be maintained, and be as tight as possible.
Separate all ceiling hanger and bracing wires at least six (6) inches from all
unbraced ducts, pipes, conduit, etc.
When drilled-in concrete anchors or shot-in anchors are used in reinforced
concrete for hanger wires, 1 out of 10 must be field tested for 200 lbs. in tension.
When drilled-in concrete anchors are used for bracing wires, 1 out of 2 must be
field tested for 440 lbs in tension. Shot-in anchors in concrete are not permitted
for bracing wires. If any shot-in or drilled-in anchor fails, see Section 1923A.3.5,
Title 24.
Note: Drilled-in or shot-in anchors require special DSA approval when used in
Provide trapeze or other supplementary support members at obstructions to
typical hanger spacing. Provide additional hangers, struts or braces as required at
all ceiling breaks, soffits or discontinuous areas. Hanger wires that are more than
1 in 6 out of plumb are to have counter-sloping wires.
4.
SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE OF LIGHT FIXTURES AND MECHANICAL

SERVICES.
4.1
All recessed or drop-in light fixtures, as well as ceiling mounted mechanical air
terminals and services, shall be supported directly by main runners or by
supplemental framing which is supported by main runners and positively attached
with screws or other approved connectors.
4.2
Surface mounted fixtures shall be attached to a main runner with a positive clamping
device made of material with a minimum of 14 gage. Rotational spring clamps do not
comply.
DSA (SS) IR 25-3 (rev 07-21-05)
5.

One Layer
LATERAL SYSTEM:
5.1
Wire Brace System. Provide bracing assemblies, per Figure 1 of IR 25-2, as
determined by calculations, with the following limitations:
1. For school buildings, place bracing assemblies at a spacing not more than 12 ft. by
12 ft. on center.
2. For Essential Services Buildings, place bracing assemblies not more than 8 ft. by 12
ft. on center.
3. Provide bracing assemblies at not more than six (6) feet from each perimeter wall
and at the edge of vertical ceiling offsets.
The slope of bracing wires shall not exceed 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling
and shall be taut. Splices in bracing wires are not to be permitted without special
DSA approval.
4. Ceiling grid members may be attached to not more than two (2) adjacent walls.
Ceiling grid members shall be at least 1/2 inch free of other walls. If walls run
diagonally to ceiling grid system runners, one end of main and cross runners should
be free, and a minimum of 1/2 inch clear of wall.
5. Suspended ceiling systems with an area of 144 square feet or less, and fire rated
ceiling systems with an area of 96 square feet or less, surrounded by walls which
connect directly to the structure above, do not require bracing assemblies when
attached to at least two adjacent walls.
5.2
5.2.1
Alternate System: Design as a diaphragm, similar to plywood diaphragm concept,

subject to acceptance by the DSA Regional Office.
Diaphragm Ratios:
Horizontal 2:1 maximum
Vertical
1:1 maximum
5.2.2
A maximum diaphragm shear equal to 50 lbs./ft. is allowed with 1 inch or 1-1/4

inch Hi-Lo Type S, or S-12, bugle head screws at 12 inches o.c. at all gypsum
board edges (3/8 inch screw edge distance) and at all intermediate supports. A
wall constructed similarly can resist the same shear force provided the gypsum
board is on the same side of the studs as the ceiling is, and a positive connection
between the ceiling and the wall is detailed. The gypsum board diaphragms are
to resist lateral loads due to their own weight and/or the ceiling diaphragm(s)
only.
5.2.3
Details are required providing for lateral load transfer from the gypsum board to
shear walls, or other lateral load resisting elements, on all four sides of the
diaphragm.
SELF-FURRING
LATH
IR 25-4
References: 2001 California Building Code (CBC), Table 25A-B

2007 CBC, Section 2510
Revised 01-02-08
Issued 09-30-05 as CR 25-1
Purpose:
The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to clarify DSA

acceptance of self-furring wire lath used as reinforcement for cement plaster.
1.
General: Lath for plaster shall be furred out a minimum of 1/4 inch when installed
over a solid surface such as plywood. The use of self-furring lath is subject to a satisfactory
jobsite demonstration of the lath installation for each project, with approval by the project
architect and enforcement agency.
2.
Background: Many types of self-furring lath have depressions in the lath that
successfully offset the lath 1/4 inch from plywood or other rigid backing, and therefore meet
the 1/4 inch offset requirement of ASTM C933-04 Section 5.1.2 (or Table 25A-B of the 2001
CBC). Furring nails are not required. The lath is not offset from the backing at the location
where nails or staples hold the lath to the backing/stud.
3.
Application: Satisfactory job-site installation is required. The lath should not be

pulled so tight that the depressions are straightened resulting in the lath being pressed tight
to the backing. Lath must be furred out 1/4 inch over the majority of the wall area; lath
within three inches of attachment points may be exempt from minimum furring requirement
in order to accommodate fastening to framing. Also, the nails/staples shall not be
overdriven so as to damage the weather-resistant barrier.
DSA (SS) IR 25-4

(rev 01-02-08)
Self-Furring Lath
Page 1 of 1
IR 25-5
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

FOR LAY-IN PANEL CEILINGS
References:
Title 24, Part 2 - California Building Code, 2007
Sections 803.9.1.1, 1614A.1.12 and 2506.2.1
Issued 06-22-09
Purpose:
The purpose of this IR is to provide guidelines for the installation of metal

suspension systems for lay-in ceilings for projects approved under the 2007 CBC. For
projects submitted under the 2001 CBC, see IR 25-2.
1.
General Requirements: The following requirements apply to ceiling systems
whose total weight, including ceiling mounted air terminals, services and light fixtures, does
not exceed four (4) psf. Heavier systems, and those supporting lateral loads from partitions,
will require special design details.
1.1
#12 gage wire shall be 0.106 inches in diameter conforming to ASTM A641.
gage wire shall be soft annealed, galvanized steel wire with a class 1 coating.
#12
1.2
#12 gage hanger wires may be used for up to and including 4 ft. by 4 ft. grid
spacing and shall be attached to main runners.
1.3
Provide #12 gage hanger wires at the ends of all main and cross runners within eight
(8) inches of the support or within one-fourth (1/4) of the length of the end tee,
whichever is least, for the perimeter of the ceiling area. See Figure 2. Perimeter
wires are not required when the length of the end tee is eight (8) inches or less.
1.4
Provide trapeze or other supplementary support members at obstructions to typical

hanger spacing. See Figure 3A, Detail F. Provide additional hangers, struts or braces
as required at all ceiling breaks, soffits, or discontinuous areas. Hanger wires that
are more than 1 (horizontal) in 6 (vertical) out of plumb are to have counter-sloping
wires.
1.5
Ceiling grid members shall be attached to two (2) adjacent walls per ASCE 7-05,
Section 13.5.6.2(b). Ceiling grid members shall be at least 3/4 inch clear of other
walls. If walls run diagonally to ceiling grid system runners, one end of main and
cross runners should be free, and a minimum of 3/4 inch clear of wall.
1.6
The width of the perimeter supporting closure angle shall be not less than 2 inches.
1.7
At the perimeter of the ceiling area where main or cross runners are not connected
to the adjacent wall, provide interconnection between the runners at the free end to
prevent lateral spreading. A metal strut or a #16 gage wire with a positive
mechanical connection to the runner may be used. Where the perpendicular distance
from the wall to the first parallel runner is 12 inches or less, this interlock is not
required.
1.8
Expansion joints shall be provided in the ceiling at intersections of corridors and at

junctions of corridors with lobbies or other similar areas. See Figure 7 Detail A.
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

For Lay-In Panel Ceilings
Page 1 of 13
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 2 of 13
1.9
Provide lateral-force bracing assemblies consisting of a compression strut and four

(4) #12 gage splayed bracing wires oriented 90 degrees from each other (see Figure
1).
1.10
The spacing of the bracing assemblies must be shown on the construction

documents. Provide bracing assemblies at locations not more than one half (1/2)
the calculated spacing in each direction from each perimeter wall and at the edges of
any change in elevation of the ceiling.
Substantiating calculations or test reports for the bracing assemblies are waived if
the following requirements are met:
Bracing assemblies spaced at a maximum of 12 feet by 12 feet on centers for

school buildings and 8 feet by 12 feet on centers for essential services buildings,
and
The maximum slenderness ratio (kL/R) of the compression strut is 200 or less.
1.11
The slope of bracing wires shall not exceed 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling
and wires shall be taut. Splices in wires are not permitted without special DSA
approval.
1.12
Compression struts shall not be more than 1 (horizontal) in 6 (vertical) out of plumb.
1.13
Suspended acoustical ceiling systems with a ceiling area of 144 square feet or less,
and fire rated suspended acoustical ceiling systems with a ceiling area of 96 square
feet or less, surrounded by walls which connect directly to the structure above or
walls independently braced above ceiling to structure above, do not require bracing
assemblies when attached to two adjacent walls.
1.14
For ceiling areas exceeding 2500 square feet a seismic separation joint shall be
provided in accordance with Figure 7 Detail A to divide the ceiling into areas not
exceeding 2500 square feet. Alternatively, structural analysis shall be performed to
demonstrate compliance with ASCE 7-05, Section 13.5.6.2.2(d).
1.15
Penetrations through the ceiling for sprinkler heads and other similar devices that
are not integrally tied to the ceiling system in the lateral direction shall have a two
(2) inch oversized ring, sleeve or adapter through the ceiling tile to allow free
movement of one (1) inch in all horizontal directions. Alternatively, swing joints may
be provided per ASCE 7-05, Section 13.5.6.2.2(e).
1.16
Fasten #12 hanger wires with not less than three (3) tight turns. Fasten #10 or #12
bracing wires with four (4) tight turns. Make all tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2
inches. Hanger or bracing wire anchors to the structure should be installed in such a
manner that the direction of the anchor aligns as closely as possible with the
direction of the wire.
Note: Wire turns made by machine where both strands have been deformed or bent
in wrapping can waive the 1-1/2 inch requirement, but the number of turns should
be maintained, and be as tight as possible.
1.17
Separate all ceiling hanger and bracing wires at least six (6) inches from all unbraced
ducts, pipes, conduit, etc.
1.18
When drilled-in concrete anchors or shot-in anchors are used in reinforced concrete
for hanger wires, 1 out of 10 wire/anchor assemblies must be field tested for 200
lbs. in tension. When drilled-in concrete anchors are used for bracing wires, 1 out of
2 wire/anchor assemblies must be field tested for 440 lbs. in tension in the direction
of the wire. Shot-in anchors in concrete are not permitted for bracing wires.
Note: Drilled-in or shot-in anchors require special DSA approval prior to use in
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 3 of 13
1.19
Attach all light fixtures and ceiling mounted air terminals, to the ceiling grid runners
to resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the fixtures. Screws or approved
fasteners are required.
1.20
Flush or recessed light fixtures, weighing less than 56 lbs. and mechanical terminals
and services, weighing less than 20 lbs., may be supported directly on the runners of
a heavy duty grid system but, in addition, they must have a minimum of two (2)
#12 gage slack safety wires attached to the fixture at diagonal corners and anchored
to the structure above. All 4 ft. x 4 ft. light fixtures must have slack safety wires at
each corner.
All flush or recessed light fixtures weighing 56 lbs. or more and mechanical terminals
and services, weighing 20 lbs. or more, must be independently supported by not less
than four (4) taut #12 gage wires, each attached to the fixture and to the structure
above.
The four (4) taut #12 gage wires, including their attachment to the structure above,
must be capable of supporting four (4) times the weight of the unit.
1.21
Support surface mounted light fixtures by at least two positive devices which
surround the ceiling runner and which are each supported from the structure above
by a #12 gage wire. Spring clips or clamps that connect only to the runner are not
acceptable.
Provide additional supports when light fixtures are 8 ft. or longer. Maximum spacing
between supports shall not exceed 8 feet.
1.22
Support pendant mounted light fixtures directly from the structure above with
hanger wires or cables passing through each pendant hanger and capable of
supporting two (2) times the weight of the fixture. A bracing assembly, per Figure 1,
is required where the pendant hanger penetrates the ceiling. Special details are
required to attach the pendant hanger to the bracing assembly to transmit horizontal
force. If the pendant mounted light fixture is directly and independently braced
below the ceiling, i.e. aircraft cables to walls, then brace assembly is not required
above the ceiling. See IR 16-9 for additional requirement for pendent mounted
fixtures.
1.23
The ceiling grid system must be rated as heavy duty as defined by ASTM C635. A
list of acceptable grid systems must be shown on the drawings. The grid systems
specified must be acceptable in accordance with IR A-5. The following information
must be included on the drawings for each acceptable grid system specified:
Classification of ceiling grid is heavy duty.
(1) (2)
Manufacturer's catalog number - cross runner (1) (2)
Manufacturer's catalog number - main runner
Manufacturer's catalog number of detail for runner splice
(2)
(1) Runners must be rated as heavy duty.

(2) Show manufacturer, duty classification and catalog numbers.
2.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
2.1
For Fire Rated Ceilings:

Provide a detail and design number for rated ceiling assemblies from an authorized
testing agency listed by the State Fire Marshal (SFM) or from Chapter 7 of the 2007
CBC. A list of the SMF authorized testing agencies is available on the following
website: http://osfm.fire.ca.gov/strucfireengineer/pdf/lab/approvedtestinglabs.pdf
The components and installation details must conform in every respect with the
listed detail and number or with the components listed in the 2007 CBC, Chapter 7
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 4 of 13
for the design number specified. Details shall clearly depict all components, including
insulation materials, of the design so that the assembly can be constructed and
inspected accordingly. Custom designs which combine components from different
approved designs but have not been tested as a complete assembly are not
acceptable.
Pop rivets, screws, or other attachments are not acceptable unless specifically
detailed on the drawings and approved by U.L. and SFM recognized laboratories.
2.2
For Metal and Other Panels:

Metal panels and panels weighing more than 1/2 psf, other than mineral fiber
acoustical tile, are to be positively attached to the ceiling suspension runners.
2.3
For Essential Services Buildings:

In exitways a main or cross runner shall be installed on all sides of each piece of tile,
board or panel and each light fixture or grill (see Figure 7 Detail B). Splices or
intersection of such runners shall be attached with through connectors such as pop
rivets, screws, pins, plates with end tabs or other approved connectors.
2.4
For Suspended Acoustical Ceilings Below Gypsum Board Ceilings:

Where gypsum board or other ceiling finishes are attached to the framing, specific
details will be required for the vertical hanger wire and lateral bracing wire support
connections to the framing.
3.
RE-USE OF EXISTING CEILING HANGER WIRES AND BRACING WIRES:
3.1
The gage and spacing of the wires must comply with the current applicable codes.
3.2
All existing ceiling hanger wire/anchor assemblies must be tested to 200 lbs.
3.3
All existing bracing wire/anchor assemblies must be field tested to 440 lbs.
3.4
If a new wire is to be spliced to an existing wire, the following is required:

1.
The architect or structural engineer in general responsible charge must submit

to DSA a detail and specification describing how the splice is to be made.
2.
All new wires, after being spliced to the existing wires, must be field tested per
Items 3.2 and 3.3 above.
3.
All field tests must be performed in the presence of the project inspector.
4.
MODERNIZATION AND ALTERATION: The entire ceiling shall be upgraded to

meet the current requirements of the CBC and this IR if any portion of the grid system is cut
or altered.
Exception: The replacement of existing ceiling panels with panels of the same
materials and light fixtures of the same size, locations, and weights does not require
an upgrade to the ceiling grid and suspension system.
5.
DSA ACCEPTANCE: DSA no longer issues Acceptance Reports for products.
Ceiling grid systems or components, with valid evaluation reports issued by
qualified evaluation agencies in accordance with DSA IR A-5, are accepted by DSA,
provided the system or component meets the requirements of CBC Section
1614A.1.12 and ASCE 7-05, Section 13.5.6. Where qualified evaluation report is
utilized, the installation shall comply with all the requirements specified in the
evaluation report, i.e. connections, member sizes, perimeter details, special clips to
wall angles, etc.
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 5 of 13
Figure 1
SUSPENDED CEILING BRACING ASSEMBLY

Compression struts:
Compression struts shall not replace hanger wires. Maximum KL/R ratio of 200 or less. The
sizes of compression struts must be shown on construction documents by the engineer or
architect. Attach compression struts to main runners within 2" of cross runner. Details of
attachment at both ends must be designed and shown on construction documents by
the engineer or architect. The attachment at the top shall be capable of supporting four
times the weight of the strut.
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 6 of 13
Figure 2
CEILING HANGER DETAILS
(B) Horizontal strut - typical (see Section 1.7)

Notes: (1) 1/4 of the length of the end runner whichever is less.
(2) Nails at the end of horizontal struts are to be placed with nail head toward centerline
of span of strut.
(3) Hanger wire not required for cross runners less than 8 long between main runner
and wall.
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 7 of 13
Figure 3A
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTIONS TO WOOD FRAMING
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 8 of 13
Figure 3B
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 9 of 13
Figure 3C
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 10 of 13
Figure 4
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTION TO CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Shot-in anchors not allowed for bracing wires
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 11 of 13
Figure 5
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Page 12 of 13
Figure 6
ACCEPTABLE DETAILS - WIRE CONNECTIONS TO STEEL DECK
DSA IR 25-5
(iss 06-22-09)

Figure 7
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION OF SLIP JOINTS IN EXITWAYS
Page 13 of 13
TITLE 24 ELEVATORS:
BUILDING MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
References:
2001California Building Code (CBC): Table 6-A and Section 3003.5
2004 California Electrical Code (CEC): Section 800.51
2007 CBC: Sections 707.14 and 3002
2007 CEC: Section 179
IR 30-1
Corrected 09-10-09
Issued 08-25-09
Purpose:

requirements for the construction materials and the fire protection systems required for
elevator hoist ways.
Scope: All elevators reviewed by DSA for applicable code compliance.

1.
PROJECT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1.1
Materials: Elevator hoist ways shall either be constructed of non combustible

materials or the sides of the hoistway facing the elevator cab shall have a maximum
flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developing rating of 50.
1.2
Electrical Wiring: Electrical wiring shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements
of the applicable 2007 California Electrical Code for fire resistive construction, with
penetration protection per 2007 California Building Code Section 712.4.2.1.
1.3
Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems: Buildings with required automatic fire sprinkler
systems will have a side-wall type of sprinkler installed a maximum of two feet
above the bottom of the hoist way, but in no case shall the sprinkler be installed so
as to be an obstruction to the elevator car at its lowest point of travel.
An automatic fire sprinkler is not required at the top of an elevator hoist way
constructed of non-combustible materials.
1.4
Fire Alarm Requirements: Smoke or Heat Detection is not required at the top of
the elevator hoistway if there is no automatic fire sprinkler located at the top of the
hoistway.
1.5
Elevator/Stairway Configuration: Elevators with cabs sized to accommodate
ambulance gurneys are not required for two story buildings if the configuration of the
stairways is such that the use of an ambulance gurney is feasible and approved by the Local
Fire Authority and DSA.
(See DSA Policy 09-05 for Elevator Cab Size deviation
procedures).
DSA IR 30-1
(iss 08-25-09)
Title 24 Elevators:
Building Materials and Systems
Page 1 of 1
GROUNDING OF
RELOCATABLE BUILDINGS
IR E-1
References: California Electrical Code
Revised 10-03-07
Revised 04-21-05
Purpose: The purpose of this Interpretation of Regulations (IR) is to provide guidelines

for the proper grounding/bonding of modular buildings.
1.
Metal Modular Buildings: When metal buildings are made of components, each
building component, including steel ramps, must be electrically bonded together in a
manner acceptable to the Division of the State Architect (DSA). Paint on the surface of steel
will inhibit passage of electrical current; therefore, bolted connections of component parts
are not an acceptable electrical bond.
2.
Wood Modular Buildings: In wood frame modular buildings, the electrical

system must be grounded as required in the California Electrical Code (CEC).
3.
Grounding: The electrical circuits are usually properly grounded. However, it is

also necessary to independently ground the steel frames. This is particularly important when
the building is supported on a foundation made of wood. An acceptable detail is shown on
the attached drawing.
All metal building components must be electrically bonded together, and each building must
be independently grounded. Multiple buildings are not to be grounded through the electrical
system. All grounding systems are to be tested with a Megger unit, or in an otherwise
acceptable manner. Refer to the 2004 or the 2007 CEC, Section 250.52 for specific
grounding requirements.
Grounding tests are to be observed and reported by the Inspector of Record.
Attachment
Figure 1
DSA IR E-1
(rev 10-03-07)
Grounding of
Relocatable Buildings
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR E-1
(rev 10-03-07)
Grounding of
Relocatable Buildings
Page 2 of 2
Figure 1
1. Size of conductors shall comply with CEC Table 250.66

2. Bond separate conductors from ground rod to electrical panel and to metal building
frame (CEC 250.52). In addition to the detail shown above, bond the electrical ground to
metal underground water pipe in direct contact with the earth for 10 ft. or more, if
available (CEC 250.52).
3. All modules of metal frame buildings shall be electrically bonded together. (Bolting only
is not acceptable bonding.)
4. Check resistance to ground. If resistance exceeds 25 ohms, install an additional ground
rod (CEC 250.56).
GROUND FAULT
CIRCUIT-INTERRUPTER
IR E-2
References:
2004 California Electrical Code (CEC), Sections, 210.8(B), 406.3 (G), 406.4 (E), and 406.8
2007 CEC Sections 210.8 (B), 406.4 (E) and 406.8.
2007California Building Code (CBC) Section 1117B.6.5.2
Revised 10-03-07
Issued 02-20-2007

Purpose: Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies code requirements

based on Recognized Standards for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for School
Campuses.
General: The California Electrical Code (CEC) Section 210.8 Ground-Fault CircuitInterrupter Protection (GFCI) for Personnel requires that personnel be protected from
electrical shock via the Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter device. In keeping with the intent
of this section, GFCI protection shall be required in all Public School construction (K-12 and
Community Colleges) in locations as required by recognized standards, regardless of type of
occupancy and as noted below.
1.
Interpretation:
1.1
Locations: All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles, installed in

the locations specified in (1), (2), (3) and (4) below, shall have ground-fault circuitinterrupter protection for the protection of personnel:
(1) Bathrooms
(2) Rooftops
Exception: Receptacles that are not readily accessible and are supplied from a
dedicated branch circuit for electric snow-melting or deicing equipment shall be
permitted to be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of CEC Article
426.
(3) Kitchens
(4) Regardless of the occupancy, within 6 feet of sinks or any other water sources, and
other locations with proximity or exposure to water intrusion or weather conditions.
These areas include but are not limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Classrooms
Teacher Work Rooms
Auto, Metal or Print Shops
Science Labs
Teacher Lounges
Janitors Closets
DSA (FLS) IR E-2

(rev 10-03-07)
Ground-Fault
Interrupter-Circuit
Page 1 of 2
DSA (FLS) IR E-2

(rev 10-03-07)
Ground Fault
Interrupter-Circuit
Page 2 of 2
g. Art and Pottery Shops/Classes

h.
i.
j.
k.
1.2
1.2.1
Laundry areas
Home Economics classrooms
Infant care areas/classrooms
Any area where similar hazards exist
Mounting:
Receptacle mounting height requirements shall be similar to that stated in CEC
Section 210.52 (C) 5 for all countertops in California public schools. Receptacles
shall be located above, but not more than 20 inches (500 mm) above, the
countertop.
Exception: Receptacle outlets rendered not readily accessible by
appliances fastened in place,
appliance garages, or
appliances occupying dedicated space
See 2004 CEC, Section 406.3 (G) (Section 1117B.6.5.2 in the 2007 CBC) for
determining the general requirements for electrical receptacles in the above
locations.
1.2.2
Receptacles shall never be mounted in a face up position in counter tops or other

areas where exposure to water or weather is likely [see CEC 406.4 (E)].
1.2.3
For exterior locations see CEC Section 406.8.
2.
2.1
Modifications:
Receptacles and receptacle face plates shall not be altered in any manner that
would void the UL Listing. Use of broken, altered or modified receptacles, face
plates or other materials associated with the receptacles is strictly prohibited.
RELIABLE POWER SUPPLY FOR

ELECTRIC FIRE PUMPS
References:
2007 California Electrical Code, Articles 230 and 695
2003 Edition of NFPA 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for
Fire Protection Section 5.20
Discipline: Fire and Life Safty
IR E-3
Issued 04-27-10
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies code requirements, based on the
2007 California Electric Code and 2003 NFPA 20 Section 5.20 as to what will be acceptable
as a reliable power supply to an electric fire pump.
General: The 2007 California Electric Code, Article 695, Section 695.3, states, Power
Source(s) for Electric Motor-Driven Fire Pumps shall have a reliable source of power.
Interpretation:
1. Reliable Power Supply:
Various public utilities commissions oversee

electric companies. Municipal boards are authorized to acquire, construct,
operate and maintain, and to take all necessary action, in order to provide an
adequate, dependable, supply of bulk electric power and energy within its
jurisdiction. A fire pump may be permitted to be supplied by a separate service
from a reliable municipal provider or a combination of power supply and backup supply produced on-site or as described in California Electrical Code Article
695.
2. Power Supply will include: Power source from a reliable municipal

electric supply company which has been connected per Article 230 of the
California Electrical Code or on-site produced electricity with a back-up power
supply installed and connected in accordance with the provisions of Section
695.
3. Connection to Power Supply: The connection shall be located and

arranged so as to minimize the possibility of damage by fire from within the
premises and from exterior hazards. An electrical tap shall be ahead of the
means to disconnect service, and shall comply with Section 230.82(5) of the
California Electrical Code. The service equipment shall comply with the labeling
requirements in Section 230.2 and the location requirements in 230.72(B) and
NFPA 20:9.2.2.
DSA IR E-3
(iss 04-27-10)
Reliable Power Supply for Electric Fire Pumps

Page 1 of 1
NONWATER- SUPPLIED
URINAL FIXTURES
IR P-1
References:
2001 California Plumbing Code (Title 24, Part 5), Sections 301.2, 401.1, 406.2
Issued 01-05-04 as AC M-1
2007 California Plumbing Code (Title 24, Part 5), Sections 301.2, 401.1, 405.2
California Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1), Section 4-304
Health & Safety Code Section 17921.4
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A112.19.19-2006 Vitreous China Nonwater Urinals
Discipline: Plumbing
design professionals, to promote more uniform statewide criteria for plan review and construction inspection of projects, including
State of California public elementary and secondary schools (grades K-12), community colleges, and state-owned buildings. This IR
indicates an acceptable method for achieving compliance with applicable codes and regulations, although other methods proposed
by design professionals may be considered by DSA.
Scope: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) document establishes requirements for

nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures specified in project construction plans and specifications
for installation in California public schools and state-owned buildings under Department of
General Services (DGS) jurisdiction.
1.
Application:
1.1
Public Schools: The design professional in general responsible charge (i.e. project
architect) of the design of the school construction project shall consult with the
school district regarding installation and maintenance requirements for the proposed
nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures. The nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures, installation,
and maintenance must comply with the requirements noted in Sections 2, 3, and 4
below.
1.2
State-Owned Buildings: The design professional in general responsible charge (i.e.

project architect) of the state building project design shall consult with the
Department of General Services regarding installation and maintenance requirements
for the proposed nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures. The nonwater-supplied urinal
fixtures, installation, and maintenance must comply with the requirements noted in
Sections 2, 3, and 4 below.
2.
Fixture Requirements:
2.1
Performance: Nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures must meet the performance,

testing, and labeling requirements of ASME A112.19.19-2006.
Fixtures must comply with applicable accessibility provisions of the California
Plumbing Code and California Building Code.
2.2
Listing: Fixtures, including all components, shall be listed by an American National

Standards Institute (ANSI) accredited third-party certification agency to ASME
112.19.19-2006. Evidence of this listing shall be included with the construction
documents submitted to DSA with each project application. A recognized agency
listing [e.g. International Code Council-Evaluation Service (ICC-ES), International
Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) Research and Testing, Inc.]
DSA IR P-1
(rev 06-02-08)
Nonwater-Supplied
Urinal Fixtures
Page 1 of 2
DSA IR P-1
(rev 06-02-08)
Nonwater-Supplied
Urinal Fixtures
Page 2 of 2
may be referenced in the project construction plans and/or specifications to fulfill this
requirement.
2.3
Identification: Nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures and each visible component shall

be permanently marked as required in Section 4 of ASME A112.19.19.
2.4
Trap Seal: Nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures must provide a trap seal that complies
with the California Plumbing Code. This trap must permit the uninhibited flow of
waste through the urinal to the sanitary drainage system. This trap must be installed
and maintained in accordance with the urinal fixture manufacturers instructions.
Fixture Installation : A water supply rough-in to the urinal fixture location shall
be provided. Water distribution and fixture supply piping sized to accommodate a water-fed
urinal shall be installed to an in-wall location immediately adjacent to the urinal fixture.
4
Fixture Maintenance: Nonwater-supplied urinal fixtures shall be cleaned and
maintained in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
PRE-CHECK (PC) DESIGNS

ENERGY COMPLIANCE REVIEW
References:
Title 24, Part 6: 2007 California Energy Code
2005 Building Energy Efficiency Standards
Discipline: Energy Compliance
IR N-1
Revised 04-15-08
Issued 09-15-03 as a DSA Bulletin
Purpose: This Interpretation of Regulations (IR) clarifies requirements for the energy
compliance review of Pre-Check (PC) designs submitted to the Division of the State
Architect (DSA) for approval. This IR completely supersedes and replaces previously issued
DSA Bulletin "PRE-CHECK (PC) DESIGNS - ENERGY COMPLIANCE REVIEW," revised
September 15, 2003.
BACKGROUND: All public school facility construction within the State of California,
including relocatable classrooms, must comply with all Parts of Title 24 (California Building
Standards Code), including the energy efficiency standards contained in Part 6, Title 24,
California Energy Code. The provisions of Part 6, Title 24 apply to the building envelope,
space-conditioning systems, water-heating systems, and lighting systems of buildings.
1.
PC Designs Subject to Energy Compliance Review:
Any PC Design application submitted to DSA for approval of compliance with Title 24,
current edition, and containing buildings with space-conditioning systems, water-heating
systems, and/or lighting systems is subject to energy compliance review.
Any project application that utilizes a PC design will be reviewed at the time of submittal to
DSA to determine whether or not the PC design is approved for the climate zone in which
the project is located.
If the PC design is not approved for the project's climate zone, the project applicant and the
PC owner will be notified by DSA that approval of the PC design for the climate zone in
which the project is located is required prior to approval of the project application.
Review and approval of the PC design for the project's climate zone will be processed as a
revision. The approved revision to the PC design must be incorporated into the project
application.
2.
Energy Compliance Documentation Requirements:
2.1
For any PC design subject to energy compliance review, the PC application submitted
to DSA must include documentation identified in Section 3.2 below.
2.2
Energy compliance documentation must be approved for each climate zone in which
a project utilizing the PC is anticipated to be located, as determined by the PC owner.
The climate zones for which the PC has been designed shall be noted on the PC plan
cover sheet (see Section 2.3).
DSA IR N-1
(iss 04-15-08)
Pre-Check (PC) Designs

Energy Compliance Review
Page 1 of 3
DSA IR N-1
(iss 04-15-08)

Page 2 of 3
Any building design that complies with the worst-case orientation (see Section 2.3)
in climate zones 14, 15 and 16 may be approved, from an energy standpoint, for
placement in any climate zone. Climate zones 14, 15 and 16 represent the most
severe types of weather (both heating and cooling) in California. Complying with
code in climate zones 14, 15 and 16 does not require or prevent modeling the PC in
other climate zones. Modeling and complying with code in other climate zones may
allow for flexibility in the choice of insulation, fenestration and heating and cooling
system equipment. Information regarding the design variations for all climate zones
or groups of climate zones for which the PC complies must be provided in a table on
the PC plan cover page/sheet as applicable. When modeling for particular climate
zones use the reference cities listed in the 2005 Building Energy Efficiency
Standards, Joint Appendix II on page II-3.
2.3
For each climate zone considered, energy efficiency analysis must demonstrate
compliance for the highest energy use (i.e. worst-case) orientation for each building
within the PC Design. This worst-case orientation may be determined by performing
rotations about the compass in 30 degree increments starting at 0 degrees for each
building.
2.4
When a PC design contains multiple building configurations or variations of the

building envelope, space-conditioning systems, lighting systems, or occupancy, the
documentation author must define, in writing, the worst-case assumptions used for
the energy analysis, including which orientation(s) were modeled and the worst-case
orientation using the compliance method submitted, and which occupancy or
occupancies are to be approved.
2.5
When a unique PC design contains multiple sizes, the smallest and the largest
potential size should be modeled at 30 compass intervals in each Climate Zone for
which the PC seeks approval (per 2.3 above). The electronically-generated computer
file(s) that produced the worst case energy use results for each climate zone for each
unique PC design configuration that is modeled should be provided to DSA. In
addition, a spreadsheet or table showing the data (standard and proposed design
kBTU/ft2/yr) results from all the 30 degree simulations per climate zone in which
each unique PC design configuration was modeled must be provided to DSA.
3. Process for Review of Energy Compliance of PC Designs:

For any PC design application designed to conform to Title 24, Part 6, current edition, and
for any revision affecting the energy efficiency compliance of a previously approved PC
design, the following steps must be completed:
3.1
Upon receipt of a submittal of a PC design application or revision of an approved PC

Design, DSA will issue the DSA Pre-Check (PC) Energy Review Notification" within
10 working days to the PC owner or Design Professional in General Responsible
Charge of the PC design.
This notification provides contact information for Division of the State Architect
Energy Plan Review (DSAENPR) team reviewer that will review and verify the PC's
energy efficiency compliance.
3.2
The PC owner or Design Professional must submit directly to DSAENPR all

documentation that is specifically identified and referred to in Part 6 of Form DSA-3.
The PC owner shall summarize which climate zone(s) are to be approved, which
DSA IR N-1
(iss 04-15-08)

Page 3 of 3
orientation(s) were modeled and the worst-case orientation using the compliance
method submitted, and which occupancy or occupancies are to be approved.
3.3
Mixed occupancies within designs should be modeled for lighting as designed, except
where the PC Owner wants approval of other occupancies with differing lighting
power densities. In the latter case, one computer model could be used for approval
but the base case model must contain the lowest proposed lighting power density
and the proposed case model must contain the highest lighting power density.
3.4
Mixed occupancies within designs should be modeled for minimum ventilation as

designed, except where the PC owner wants approval of other occupancies which
have higher minimum ventilation rates. In the latter case, the highest minimum
ventilation rates for the worst-case occupancy desired by the PC owner will be used
for determining compliance.
3.5
During the review phase, the DSAENPR may contact the Design Professional to
request additional information or to address questions regarding the PC's energy
compliance.
3.6
Upon approval of the energy compliance documentation by the DSAENPR, the PC

owner or Design Professional will receive an approved Energy Compliance Review
form (ECR-2). The approved DSA ECR-2 form will indicate the climate zone(s) in
which the PC Design complies with efficiency standards, and any other restrictions
required to ensure that the PC Design meets energy efficiency standards.
3.7
A plan sheet entitled Title 24 Part 6 should be included in the plans. This sheet
should contain copies of the approved and signed PERF forms (parts 1 and 2) and
also the Mandatory Measures sheets for lighting, mechanical and envelope that
reflect the computer-generated or hand-written output from the approved energy
Title 24 compliance documentation for each unique design.
3.8
Fees: Costs incurred by DSA to review and approve energy compliance shall be
recovered from the PC Owner or Manufacturer. Energy review costs will be included
in the DSA plan review invoice issued upon completion of the PC design back-check.
Any questions regarding this Bulletin may be directed to the DSAENPR lead person at 916327-0535.

IR Manual 05-20-10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IR Manual 05-20-10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S T AT E O F C AL I F O R N I A AR N O L D S C H W AR Z E N E G G E R , G O V E R N O R

DSA Interpretation of Regulations (IR) Manual

The DSA Regional Offices can be contacted as follows:

Los Angeles Basin Regional Office

San Diego Regional Office

Oakland Regional Office

Sacramento Regional Office

DSA Interpretation of Regulations Manual

Organization of the IR Manual

Change of California Building Code

DSA Interpretation of Regulations Manual

(PL 97-10) 09-06-07 (r)

Certificate of Compliance without Receipt of All Documents

Construction Management Procedures for Public School Projects

Geological Hazard Report Requirements

Acceptance of Products, Materials, and Evaluation Reports

Change Order and Field Change Approval Process

Project Inspector Certification and Approval

School Site Improvements for School Building Projects

A-10 Reconstruction and Alteration Projects

A-11 Incremental Submittals

A-12 Assistant Inspector Approval

A-13 Stop Work and Order to Comply

A-14 Walk-In Freezers and Cold Storage Boxes

A-17 Voidance of Applications and Project Re-Submittal

A-18 Use of Construction Documents Prepared by Other Professionals

A-19 Design Professionals Signature and Seal (Stamp)

A-20 New Projects Associated with Existing Uncertified Projects

A-22 Small Projects Exempt from DSA Review

A-23 Construction Cost Reporting and DSA Fees

A-24 Construction Phase Duties of School District, Contractor,

A-25 Design, Installation and Maintenance of Automatic Fire

A-15 Testing and Inspection of Remotely Fabricated

A-26 Occupancy Classifications and Occupant Load Factors

Removed 8-25-09 pending review and revision

A-27 Cargo Containers Used as Storage

A-28 Fire Alarm System Changes in Existing Buildings

Part 2, Chapter 3 - USE OR OCCUPANCY

Part 2, Chapter 9 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

DSA Interpretation of Regulations Manual

Part 2, Chapter 10 MEANS OF EGRESS

Part 2, Chapter 11B - ACCESS

11B-2 Beveled Lip at Curb Ramps

11B-3 Detectable Warnings at Curb Ramps

11B-4 Detectable Warnings

11B-5 Effort to Operate Exterior Doors

Formally Deleted 04-01-10

11B-6 Mechanical Only Projects Exempt From Accessibility Review

11B-7 Requirements for Accessible Parking Spaces

11B-8 Use of Predetermined Construction Tolerance

Part 2, Chapter 15 - ROOFING AND ROOF STRUCTURES

15-2 Clay and Concrete Roof Tile Materials and Application

Part 2, Chapter 16 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN

Computer or Office Access Floors

Earth Retaining Systems

Wind Load Design for One Story Relocatable School

Design and Construction of Reviewing Stands, Grandstands,

Composite Base for HVAC Units

Wind Load Determination - Alternate Method

Solar Photovoltaic and Thermal Systems

Pendant Mounted Light Fixtures

16-10 Design and Construction of Reviewing Stands, Grandstands,

Part 2, Chapter 17 STRUCTURAL TESTS AND SPECIAL INSPECTIONS